Service Manual: Digital Full Color Multifunctional System

TopPage
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX3500NS2E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-3500N/4500N
MODEL MX-3501N/4501N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [C] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION [D] MANUAL PAPER FEED
* For how to unpacking and installation, SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
refer to the installation manual [E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . .E-1
(00ZMX3500/I1E).
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . .F-1
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL
[G] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[H] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[i] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . i-1
[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . J-1
[8] SELF DIAG AND
TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 [K] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . .K-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 [L] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 [M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR,
REGISTRATION SENSOR
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[12] OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 [N] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION . . . . . R-1
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION . . . . .S-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . E-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 [F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
2. Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . F-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
1. Basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
2. Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 [G] DUPLEX SECTION
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
3. Production number identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE [H] LSU SECTION
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . .5-1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-5
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
3. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 [i] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
[7] SIMULATION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-3
2. List of simulation codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-6
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE [J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . J-1
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
[9] MAINTENANCE [K] DEVELOPING SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . K-1
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-5
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
[L] TRANSFER SECTION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . L-1
2. Version-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-10
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
[M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
SENSOR SECTION
[12] OTHERS 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . M-1
1. System settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT [N] FUSING SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . N-1
[B] OPERATION PANEL 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B-1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-9
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 [O] PAPER EXIT SECTION
[C] SCANNER SECTION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . O-1
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . C-1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-2
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-5
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 [P] DRIVE SECTION
[D] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . D-1 2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 [Q] PWB SECTION
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-3
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
NOTE FOR SERVICING
MX3500N Gas tube
Service Manual
Lightning conductor
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation. A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation. grounding object by the authorities.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
Grounding wire for telephone line
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
danger to life or a serious injury could result. forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
a damage to properties could result. 6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, may drop inside the machine.
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
except when performing the communication test, etc.
8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
It may cause an injury or an electric shock. insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an do not perform servicing.
extreme care when servicing. It may cause an electric shock.
It may cause a burn.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may 3. Note for installing site
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
Do not install the machine at the following sites.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
perature and humidity.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
ing paper jam or copy dirt.
driving sections.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
described later.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing. 2) Place of much vibrations
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, It may cause a breakdown.
toner may pop and burn you.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2. Warning for servicing

3) Poorly ventilated place
1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
shock. as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
MX3500N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
30 cm
30 cm 45 cm
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX3500N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX3500N (2) Environmental
Service Manual features
Energy saving design by pre-heat mode/auto power shut-off
mode.
1. Product features Conforms to the International EnergyStar program.
A. Features Conforms to the standards of Law on Promoting Green Purchas-
ing.
(1) Features
Conforms to the Europe RoHS regulations.
1) The employment of newly developed toner reduces the toner
(The contents of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium,
consumption remarkably, realizing high fidelity pictures of
PBB [polybrominated biphenyl], PBDE [polybrominated diphenyl
human skin, half tone, and hair. In addition, the employment of
"Auto Color" function, Sharp's unique auto recognition func- ether] are limited to the regulated level or less.)
tion, reproduces documents of difficult reproduction.
2) The power consumption for FAX standby with the power OFF
is 1W or less, reducing energy expenses of nighttime and load
to the environment.
3) Extension of the lifetime of the OPC drums together with the
frequency of maintenance realizes resource saving.
4) The unique security system inhibits unauthorized use of the
machine, preventing against leak of information.
The electronic data are encrypted and saved in the hard
disk. When copying or printing or when sending FAX or
scanning, data are automatically erased to protect against
leak of important information (When option installed.).
The user authentication system by a login name, a pass-
word, and an e-mail address is employed to prevent against
unauthorized use of a third party and to limit the use quantity
and usable functions for each user group. In addition, the
user authentication by the optional IC card read/writer may
be used.
5) The open systems architecture (Sharp OSA) is supported

which provides application development environment accord-
ing to user's needs.
6) Compact area for installation even to a space for a mono-
chrome machine
The machine can be installed to a space for a monochrome
machine, the smallest space in the class of 645mm (W) x
670mm (D), helping backup of color documentations in an
office. The installation of the optional finisher (MX-FNX1)
which is stored in the center paper exit section of the machine
allows stapling and finishing such as punch holes automati-
cally, improving the work efficiency.
MX3500N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

4 : May 15 2006
2. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)
4 10. Staple cartridge

(Approx. 5000 x 3) 7. Finisher
(MX-SCX1) (MX-FNX1)
PCL5c/PCL6 Network PCL5c/PCL6 Network
driver scanner driver scanner
(Sharpdesk 1 license) (Sharpdesk 1 license)
RSPF DSPF
8. Punch module
2-hole (MX-PNX1A)
3-hole (MX-PNX1B)
4-hole (MX-PNX1C)
4-hole (broad space)

HDD
*&&
(MX-PNX1D)
4. Exit tray unit
5. Paper pass unit
(MX-TRX2)
(MX-RBX1)
Copier/Printer Copier/Printer
/Scanner model /Scanner model
11. Staple cartridge
(Approx. 5000 x 3) (MX-3500N) (MX-3501N)
(AR-SC2) (MX-4500N) (MX-4501N)
9. Punch module
2-hole (AR-PN1A)
6. Saddle stitch finisher 1. Stand/1x500 sheet 2. Stand/2x500 sheet 3. Large capacity tray
3-hole (AR-PN1B)
(MX-FNX2) paper drawer paper drawer (MX-LCX1)
4-hole (AR-PN1C)
(MX-DEX3) (MX-DEX4)
4-hole (broad space)
(AR-PN1D)
12. Barcode font kit Data security kit 15. PS3 16. Internet Fax 17. Sharpdesk
(Including document control) expansion expansion kit 1 license kit
13. Commercial 14. CC authentication kit 18. Sharpdesk
version version 5 license kit
CD ROM
CD
(AR-PF1) CD CD
Security Security
ROM ROM (MX-USX1/
(MX-PKX1) (MX-FWX1) USX5)
19. Sharpdesk 21. Sharpdesk 22. Application

For document For document
10 license kit 100 license kit integration
control PWB control PWB 20. Sharpdesk module
50 license kit
(MX-FRX2U) (MX-FRX2)
CD CD CD
(MX-US10/
US50) (MX-USA0) (MX-AMX1)
23. Facsimile expansion kit

(MX-FXX1)
FAX memory (8MB)

(packed together)

4 : May 15 2006
B. Machine configuration
MX-3500N/MX-4500N MX-3501N/MX-4501N
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB) 768
Printer memory (System memory) (MB) 640
Copier STD
GDI printer STD
PCL printer STD
PS printer OP*1
EFI printer OP
Main body LCD MONOCHROME HVGA 8.9"
FAX OP*2
Scanner STD
Filing STD
HDD STD
RSPF STD
DSPF STD
Automatic duplex STD
Security OP*1
Internet Fax OP*1
STD: Standard provision, OP: Option

OP*1: Product key target.
OP*2: No support for some areas.
C. Combination of options list

MX-3500N/3501N
Section Name Model name Remarks
MX-4500N/4501N
Paper feed system 1. Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer MX-DEX3 OPT
2. Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer MX-DEX4 OPT
3. Large capacity tray MX-LCX1 OPT (A4)
Paper exit system 4. Exit tray unit MX-TRX2 OPT
5. Paper pass unit MX-RBX1 OPT
6. Saddle stitch finisher MX-FNX2 OPT
7. Finisher MX-FNX1 OPT (Inner finisher)
8. Punch module (For inner finisher) MX-PNX1 A/B/C/D OPT
9. Punch module (For saddle stitch finisher) AR-PN1 A/B/C/D OPT (Common in current models)
10. Staple cartridge (For inner finisher) MX-SCX1 OPT (Approx. 5000 x 3)
11. Staple cartridge (For saddle stitch finisher) AR-SC2 OPT (Approx. 5000 x 3)
Electrical system (ROM) 12. Barcode font kit AR-PF1 OPT (Conventional model)
13. Data security kit MX-FRX2U OPT (Commercial version)
14. Data security kit MX-FRX2 OPT (Authentication version)
Electrical system (Software) 15. PS3 expansion kit MX-PKX1 OPT
16. Internet Fax expansion kit MX-FWX1 OPT (Internet Fax)
17. Sharpdesk 1 license kit MX-USX1 OPT
18. Sharpdesk 5 license kit MX-USX5 OPT
19. Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-US10 OPT
20. Sharpdesk 50 license kit MX-US50 OPT
21. Sharpdesk 100 license kit MX-USA0 OPT
22. Application integration module MX-AMX1 OPT
Electrical system (FAX) 23. Facsimile expansion kit MX-FXX1 OPT*1
4
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Installable option.
*1: No support for some areas.

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX3500N (4) ShifterManual
Service
Type Shifter
1. Basic specifications Paper weight 55 209g/m2 (17 56 lbs)
Paper size Non offset A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
A. Base engine mode 16K, 16KR,11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
(Normal 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
(1) Type output) 5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope, Extra
Offset A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
Type Desk-top mode 16K, 16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
Color support Full color 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x
(2) Engine speed 8.5R (Not Envelope, Extra)
Productivity Non-offset MX-3500N B/W 35cpm
a. Tray1 4 (Main unit), LCC (A4, 8.5x11) (Normal Color 35cpm
output) MX-4500N B/W 45cpm
MX-4500N MX-3500N
Color 35cpm
Paper size MX-4501N MX-3501N
Offset MX-3500N B/W 35cpm
B/W Color B/W Color
mode Color 35cpm
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 20 17 17 17
MX-4500N B/W 45cpm
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 22 20 20 20
Color 35cpm
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R 32 25 25 25
Offset range 30mm
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K 45 35 35 35
Range of error Horizontal Vertical Between
A4R, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 11R, 30 25 25 25
(In using the direction direction Jobs
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR
recommended Non-offset Not drop from - -
Extra 19 16 16 16
paper, A4/8.5 the tray.
b. Manual (Main unit) x 11) Offset Within 50mm Within Min.10mm
mode 10mm
MX-4500N MX-3500N
Paper size MX-4501N MX-3501N (5) Engine resolution
B/W Color B/W Color
Resolution Writing:
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 19 15 16 15
600 x 600dpi
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 20 16 17 16
1200 x 600dpi (Monochome printing only.)
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K 22 18 18 18 * Rotation output not allowed at 1200dpi x 600dpi. PS
B5 41 29 31 29 expansion kit needed.
A4R, 16KR 41 31 31 31 Smoothing None
8.5 x 11R 30 20 25 20 function
B5R, 7.25 x 10.5R 30 21 25 21 Gradation Writing:
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R 30 22 25 22 Monochrome: 2 levels (1bit) * 256 levels equivalent
12 x 18 32 25 25 25 Color: Each color 2 levels (1bit) / Each color 16 levels
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11) 15 14 15 14 (4bits) * 256 levels equivalent
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 12 10 12 10 (6) Warmup
Extra 19 15 16 15
Envelope 16 15 16 15 Warmup time 240 sec or less
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11, 15 14 15 14 * The value may be increased if process-control
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K) processing is being executed.
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH)*1 15 14 15 14 Pre-heat Yes
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW)*1 8 8 8 8 (7) Jam recovery time
Heavy paper (Other sizes) 8 8 8 8
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting With the door Approx. Condition: After the door is kept open for 60
open 60 sec seconds, standard setting, the polygon
(3) Engine composition motor halt
Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: Black; 30mm, Color; (8) Printable area
30mm x 3)
A3 293 x 413mm 12 x 18 * 279 x 432mm
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
B4 253 x 357mm 11 x 17 275 x 425mm
Developing system Dry-type dual-component magnetic brush
development A4 206 x 290mm 8.5 x 14 212 x 349mm
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method B5 178 x 250mm 8.5 x 13 212 x 323mm
Transfer system Intermediate transfer belt A5 144 x 203mm 8.5 x 11 212 x 272mm
Cleaning system Counter blade 7.25 x 10.5 180 x 260mm 5.5 x 8.5 136 x 209mm
Fusing system Heat roller Postcard 96 x 141mm 8K 266 x 383mm
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system 16K 191 x 263mm
* The printable area for 12 x 18 must be as large as the A3/11 x 17
page dimension by PCL / PS driver.
(9) Void area
Void area Top: 4 mm or less

Image loss Bottom: 3 mm or less
FR Total: 4 mm or less
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
(10) Power source Detection of Level detection (4 levels: 100%, 67%, 33%, and
Remaining Paper none)
100V type 200V type
(3) Manual feed tray (Bypass tray)
Voltage / Current 100 127V 12A 220 240V 8A
Frequency 50/60Hz Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Power source Fixed type (direct) Inlet type 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
code 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Power switch 2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover; Envelope (Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
Seconday switch: the operation panel) Western 2 / Western 4)
(11) Power consumption Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
100V type 200V type Changing of Guide adjustment by users
paper size
Maximum rated power 1.44kW 1.84kW
consumption Paper type setting Yes
Feedable paper Thin paper: 55 59g/m2 (15 16 lbs)
*1: Heater is OFF when power source ON. type/weight Plain paper: 60 105g/m2 (16 28 lbs)
(12) Noise Heavy Paper: 106 209g/m2 (28 56 lbs)
Envelope: 75 90g/m2 (20 24 lbs)
In action B/W : 63dB or less OHP
Label paper
Color : 63dB or less
Tab paper
Standby B/W : 55dB or less
Gloss Paper
(13) Dimensions Paper capacity Standard paper: 100 sheets
Envelope: 20 sheets
MX-3500N/MX-4500N MX-3501N/MX-4501N OHP: 20 sheets
Outer dimensions 645 x 670 x 950mm 645 x 670 x 960mm Heavy paper: 40 sheets
(W x D x H) (25 25/64 x 26 3/8 x 25 25/64 x 26 3/8 x Tab paper: 20 sheets
37 26/64 inch) 37 51/64 inch) Gloss paper: 20 sheets *
Footprint (W x D) 645 x 670mm 645 x 670mm Other special paper: 1 sheet
(25 25/64 x 26 3/8 inch) (25 25/64 x 26 3/8 inch) * The gloss paper is sucked under a high
temperature environment to cause double feed or
(14) Weight misfeed. In such a case, manually supply paper
sheet by sheet (Select heavy paper).
MX-3500N/MX-4500N MX-3501N/MX-4501N Paper Type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (Excluding back print
Main unit Approx. 114kg (251lbs) Approx.123kg (271lbs) paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched
Main unit + Approx. 119kg (262lbs) Approx.128kg (282lbs) paper, colored paper, heavy paper, thin paper, label
Developer + paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope.
Toner cartridge * Users can set up all of these paper types.
(15) Dimensions occupied by Machine (with Multi Paper size Auto Detect A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x
detection Auto-AB 13, Postcard, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17
Manual/Exit tray extended)
Auto Detect 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
Auto-Inch 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
MX-3500N/MX-4500N MX-3501N/MX-4501N
A3, B4, A4, B5
W1075 x D 670mm (W42 21/64 x D26 3/8 inch)
For China A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x
B. Paper feed unit/Transport/Paper exit secton 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8K, 16K
Detection of yes or no only
(1) Machine paper feed tray remaining paper
Form Standard: Double feeder tray + multi manual (4) Double-sided

Maximum: Fourfold feeder tray + multi manual +
large capacity feeder cassette Method Non-Stack
Feeding method Feeding from the upper section with front loading Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
Heater (Engine part) Service parts 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
8.5 x 5.5R
(2) Paper feed tray 1/tray 2 Paper type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-
Feeding method Feeding from the upper section with front loading punched paper, colored paper
Heater (Engine part) Service parts Paper weight Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR (for duplex operation) Heavy paper: 106-209g/m2 (28-56 lbs)
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, Logo paper support For paper such as letterhead paper with front-
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R back attributes, the engine control must be cared
Changing of paper Guide adjustment by users for printing side.
size
(5) Paper exit tray (Center tray)
Paper type setting Yes
Default paper size Shipped with max. width of paper guide
Exit location/method Face down in the main unit
setting
Exit capacity 500 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
Feedable paper Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
paper))
type/weight
Exit paper size/type All feedable paper except 12x18.
Paper capacity Standard paper: 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Exit paper detection No
Paper Type Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
Exit tray full Yes
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-
detection
punched paper, colored paper
* Users can set up all of these paper types. Shifting function Yes
Paper size detection A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 13 Rotation sort No
* About A5R, 5.5 x 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R
8.5R, 8K, 16K,
16KR, manual
setting.
(6) Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) Document 1-side Thin paper 35 49g/m2 (9 13 lbs)
* Option (MX-TRX2) weights Plain paper 50 128g/m2 (13 34 lbs)
2-side 50 128 g/m2 (13 34 lbs)
Form Exit tray unit Document carrying Maximum: 100 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs), or
Transport standard Center standard capacity Maximum: 13 mm, 1/2 inch or less
Ejecting location/ External ejection from the right face of the main unit Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed:
method / face-down ejection that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper,
Tray capacity 100 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended transported carbon paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken /
paper)) torn document, document with cuts and pastes,
Ejected paper size/ Any feedable paper except envelope and tab paper. documents printed by an ink ribbon, and
type perforated document except 2-punched / 3-
Full tray detection Yes punched (Perforated document by punch unit is
allowed.)
Shifter No
Paper detection Yes
Dimensions W314 x D405 x H52mm
(W12 23/64 x D15 61/64 x H2 3/64 inch) Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection
With tray extended: W444 x D405 x H52mm (W17 unit through system setting)
31/64 x D15 61/64 x H2 3/64 inch) Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
Weight Approx. 0.93kg (2 lbs) 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3
Installation/ Installation by service personnel. Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
maintenance 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3
Optional detection Setting by simulation (Sim. 26-1) AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5
x 11, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17
Packaged items Exit tray, full actuator
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5
(7) Reversing single pass feeder x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
AB-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
Form RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder) 16KR, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
Scan speed Monochrome Color Paper feeding Right hand feeding
(A4/8.5 x 11) (A4/8.5 x 11) direction
Copy 1-sided: 45 sheets/minute 1-sided: 35 sheets/ Document inversion Yes
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit) minute (600 x Simultaneous double- Not allowed
2-sided: 15 pages/minute 600dpi, 4bit) sided scanning
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit) 2-sided: 13 pages/
minute (600 x (8) Duplex single pass feeder
600dpi, 4bit)
Fax 1-sided: 48 sheets/minute N/A Form DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Scan speed Monochrome Color
2-sided: 15 pages/minute (A4/8.5 x 11) (A4/8.5 x 11)
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) Copy 1-sided: 45 sheets/minute 1-sided: 35 sheets/
Scanner 1-sided: 48 sheets/minute 1-sided: 35 sheets/ (600 x 300dpi, 1bit) minute (600 x
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) minute (200 x 2-sided: 45 pages/minute 600dpi, 4bit)
2-sided: 15 pages/minute 200dpi, 8bit) (when (600 x 300dpi, 1bit) 2-sided: 35 pages/
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) in full color) minute (600 x
2-sided: 15 pages/ 600dpi, 4bit)
minute (200 x Fax 1-sided: 60 sheets/minute N/A
200dpi, 8bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Internet 1-sided: 48 sheets/minute N/A 2-sided: 60 pages/minute
Fax (200 x 200 dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
2-sided: 15 pages/minute Scanner 1-sided: 60 sheets/minute 1-sided: 35 sheets/
(200 x 200 dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) minute (200 x
Document setup Upward standard (1toN feeding standard) 2-sided: 60 pages/minute 200dpi, 8bit) (when
direction (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) in full color)
Document standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for 2-sided: 35 pages/
location random feeding) minute (200 x
200dpi, 8bit)
Document transport Sheet-through method
method Internet 1-sided: 60 sheets/minute N/A
Fax (200 x 200 dpi, 1bit)
Document sizes Inch type-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
2-sided: 15 pages/minute
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
(200 x 200 dpi, 1bit)
Inch type-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
Document standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
location random feeding)
AB type-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
Document sizes Inch type-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
Inch type-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
AB type-3 A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17
Long paper 800mm (Monochrome 2 levels
only)
8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
Mixed feeding (same type / same width) possible
AB type-3 8K, A4, A4R, B4, 16K, 16KR,
Random feeding (feeding of different types /
A5, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types Long paper 800mm (Monochrome 2 levels
are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; only)
B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. Mixed feeding (same type / same width) possible
2-sided scanning is disabled during random Random feeding (feeding of different types /
feeding. different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types
are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5;
B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch.
Document 1-side Thin paper 35 49g/m2 (9 13 lbs) (2) Original cover
weights Plain paper 50 128g/m2 (13 34 lbs)
2-side 50 128 g/m2 (13 34 lbs) Scan Range 297 x 432mm
Document carrying Maximum: 150 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs), or Original Cover Left back as standard
capacity Maximum: 19.5 mm, 3/4 inch or less Standard
Location
Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed:
that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper, Detection Yes
transported carbon paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken / Detection Size Auto Detect (One type of detection unit to be switched
torn document, document with cuts and pastes, for software destination)
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and Inch <INCH-1>
perforated document except 2-punched / 3- 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
punched (Perforated document by punch unit is <INCH-2>
allowed.) 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Paper detection Yes AB <AB-1>
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
unit through system setting) <AB-2>
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 x 330
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3 <AB-3>
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8K, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 16K, 16KR
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3 Heater Service parts
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 (Scanner part)
x 11, 8.5 x 14, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
D. Fuser section
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5
x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17 (1) Type
AB-3 8K, B4, A4, A4R, 16K, 16KR, A5,
8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, A3 System Heat roller attachment system
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
direction
Document inversion Yes
Simultaneous double- Allowed
sided scanning
C. Scanner section
(1) Resolution/Gradation (or Levels)
Scan Copy mode

resolution (dpi) Monochrome Color
Original 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
Cover 600 x 300dpi (Default)
(Default)
RSPF/ 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
DSPF 600 x 300dpi (Default)
(Default)
Transmission Image (Scanner)
resolution (dpi) process 100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Internet Fax)
200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(FAX)
Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6 dpi) /
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391 dpi)
PC-FAX/ 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
PC-Internet / 400 x 400dpi
Fax
Network 75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
TWAIN 400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Exposure lamp Xenon
Scan Levels 10bits
Output levels FAX mode: 1bit
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
Scanner mode:
Black & White: 1bit
Gray Scale: 8bit
Full Color: Each color RGB 8bit
2. Functional specifications
A. Specifications of copy functions
(1) Copy speed (Continuous copy speed)
a. Tray 1 4, LCC
Model name MX-4500N/MX-4501N MX-3500N/MX-3501N

Color / B/W Color B/W Color B/W
Print / Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy
Paper size Magnification Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%)
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 17 17 20 20 17 17 17 17
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 20 20 22 22 20 20 20 20
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K 35 35 45 45 35 35 35 35
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R 25 25 32 32 25 25 25 25
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 16KR, 25 25 30 30 25 25 25 25
7.25 x 10.5R
Extra 16 16 19 19 16 16 16 16
b. Manual feed
Model name MX-4500N/MX-4501N MX-3500N/MX-3501N

Color / B/W Color B/W Color B/W
Print / Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy Print Copy
Paper size Magnification Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%) Normal Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%) Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%) Enlargement (400%)
A3W, 12 x 18 15 15 19 19 15 15 16 16
A3, 11 x 17, 8K 16 16 20 20 16 16 17 17
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 18 18 22 22 18 18 20 20
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K 29 29 41 41 29 29 31 31
B5 31 31 41 41 31 31 31 31
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R 25 25 32 32 25 25 25 25
B5R 22 22 30 30 22 22 25 25
8.5 x 11R 21 21 30 30 21 21 25 25
A4R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR 20 20 30 30 20 20 25 25
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11) 14 14 15 15 14 14 15 15
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R) 10 10 12 12 10 10 12 12
Extra 15 15 19 19 15 15 16 16
Envelope 15 15 16 16 15 15 16 16
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 14 14 15 15 14 14 15 15
11, 8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH) *1 14 14 15 15 14 14 15 15
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW) *1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Heavy paper (Other sizes) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(2) First copy time (3) Job speed
a. Document changing speed (in copy mode)
MX-4500N (RSPF), MX-3500N (RSPF),
Platen/RSPF/DSPF MX-4501N (DSPF) MX-3501N (DSPF)
MX-4500N/MX-4501N MX-3500N/MX-3501N
B/W Color B/W Color
B/W Color B/W Color
Platen 4.1 sec 6.9 sec 4.7 sec 6.9 sec
S to S 45cpm 35cpm 35cpm 35cpm
RSPF 9.3 sec 14.2 sec 10.1 sec 14.2 sec
(100%) (100%) (100%) (100%)
DSPF 8.8 sec 15.2 sec 9.5 sec 15.2 sec
* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
[Measuring Conditions] document feed user is defined.
* Feeding A4/8.5x11paper from the main unit tray 1 * S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including
* Polygon in rotation the first copy)
* Auto Color Selection OFF/Auto Color for color OFF Monochrome: 600 x 300dpi and color: 600 x 600dpi (default)
(4) Continuous copy
Multi max. number 999 sheets

(5) Resolution
Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi

Writing resolution 600 x 600dpi
(6) Copy document
Document Max. A3 (11 x 17)

Document type Sheet/Book original
(7) Copy magnification ratio (11) Copy functions
Copy Normal: 1:10.8% Function Automatic paper Yes (Mixed/random size feeding
magnification ratio AB series: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, selection supported)
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400% Automatic Yes
Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, magnification selection
129% , 200%, 400% Paper type select Yes
Zoom 25 400% (25 200% for RSPF) Type setting allowed
Preset 4 Auto tray switching Yes
magnification ratio Rotated copy Yes
XY zoom Yes Large rotated copy exceeding A4
supported
(8) Density, copy image quality processing
Electronic sort Yes
Rotated sort No
Exposure mode Automatic (Color: Auto Color, Black-white: Character
Unavailable
AE)
Text,Text/Printed Photo, Print photo, Text/Photo, Job reservation Yes
Photo, Map, Pale-color document. Program call/ Yes (Program name registration to
Copy document Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo registration. be examined)
mode mode. Preheat function Yes
Color emphasis Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo, Conditions set up by system setting
Text/Photo, Photo, Map mode. Auto power shutoff Yes
Manual steps 9 steps Conditions set up by system setting
Toner save mode Monochrome: Yes User authentication 1000
Color: Yes Process control Yes
Off on printed photo, photo or pale-color document Document paper size Yes (Determinate/indeterminate
input size)
(9) Color copy mode
Indeterminate paper Yes
size input
Auto Color Copy mode automatically discerning color/
2-sided copy direction Yes
Selection copy monochrome.
switch
Full color mode Enforced full color mode
Special Margin shift Yes
2-color mode Red-black mode (Change red point in document into
function Edge/center erase Yes
other color)
Mode to select black and another color from R/G/B/ Dual page copy Yes
C/M/Y Cover/insertion Yes
Single color mode Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y Tandem copy Yes
Monochrome copy Enforced monochrome copy mode Tab paper insertion Yes (Insertion only. Tab copy not
mode allowed. Staple/Punch not allowed.)
OHP insertion Yes
(10) Color Adjustment
Tab copy Yes
Centering Yes
RGB adjustment Yes
2in1/4in1 Yes
Color balance Yes
Pamphlet Yes
Saturation Yes
adjustment Card shot Yes
Brightness Yes Book copy Yes
adjustment Large capacity Yes
Contrast No document mode
adjustment Black-white Inversion Yes (Only black-white copy allowed/
Sharpness Yes color copy not allowed upon setup
adjustment Not ready)
Background Yes Multi-Page Yes
removal Enlargement
Auto color Allowed by system setting Mirror image Yes
calibration Photo repeat Yes
Registration Allowed by system setting (automatic-manual) Date print Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
adjustment Character print Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Stamp Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Page printing Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Shading No
Proof copy Yes
Mixed document Yes (Random + MIX)
feeder
Document Control Yes (with Data Security Kit
equipped)
B. Image send function Mode Scanner Internet Fax
Density adjustment Auto + 5 steps Auto + 5 steps
(1) Mode
(The image quaity of
"Auto" is the same as that
Scanner Scan to e-mail
of "Manual = 3" when
Scan to Desktop
selecting full color/
Scan to FTP
grayscale.)
Scan to Folder(SMB)
Black-white enabled ---
Scan to USB memory
Auto
Scan to e-mail with Meta
Manual
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Scan to FTP with Meta
Color button enabled
Scan to SMB with Meta
When selecting "Auto":
Internet Fax to Fax (manual)
Text/printed photo
Fax Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
Text/photo
Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
Text
Full mode supported (including Simple mode)
IP-FAX No When selecting "Manual":
(2) Image send function (Push send from the main Text/printed photo
unit) Text/Photo
Text
a. Support system Photo
Printed photo
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Map
Corresponding SMTP POP server Selection of image --- Half tone (Black-white
server FTP(TCP/IP) SMTP server quality only) ON/OFF
/protocol SMB ESMTP server
b. Support image Resolution 100 x 100 dpi 200 x 100dpi
(depends on file (Half tone not allowed)
Mode Scanner Internet Fax format/transmission 200 x 200 dpi 200 x 200dpi
method) 300 x 300 dpi 200 x 400dpi
File format Monochrome: TIFF, PDF, Monochrome TIFF-FX
Encrypted PDF (TIFF-F, TIFF-S) 400 x 400 dpi 400 x 400dpi
Color: Gray scale, color 600 x 600 dpi 600 x 600dpi
TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
Moire reduction Yes (Color/grayscale) ---
Compression [Monochrome] MH, MMR
mode
method Non-compression
G3 (1-dimensional) Notes' security Yes
= MH (Modified feature
Huffman) d. Specification of Addresses
G4
= MMR (Modified MR) Mode Scanner Internet Fax
[Color/Gray scale] Address Specification by one-touch/group/direct address
JPEG (High, middle, specification entry.
low) Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
Specified pages per Yes --- Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
size (number of Selection from LDAP server
page(s) Input from the externally connected keyboard
specification Setting of default Yes ---
allowed) address *1
c. Image processing Number of One- Total (number of key): Maximum 999
touch address key
Mode Scanner Internet Fax registration
Original scanning Full color, grayscale, B/W B/W Number of Group (1 Number of Group (1 key) address registration :
color key) address maximum 500
Auto color selection [When Color start key --- registtation Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total
pressed.] address number included in /999 key)
Auto (When judged as Program 48
Color : Full color, When Direct entry of Input from the soft keyboard and the externally
judged as B/W : B/W (2 addresses connected keyboard
value)/Gray scale) Chain dial ---
[When B/W start key] Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses. *3
B/W (2 value) Shortcut for address Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
Gray scale selection (quick addresses.
Halftone Equivalent of 256 steps key)
reproduction CC/BCC sending Yes ---
Subjet Selective/direct entry from the list
File name Selective/direct entry from the list
Return mail address Selective/direct entry ---
from the list/selection (1 default address fixed
from LDAP server as sender name)
Transmission Selective/direct entry from the list.
message (message (Number of characters: Maximum of 1800 half-size
body) characters (900 full size characters))
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Scanner Internet Fax
Other functions Mail footer preset (*2), inhibition of address Automatic reduction --- Yes
registration from the main unit, inhibition of address setting upon receiving
registration from a Web screen, inhibition of A3
registration from the network scanner tool, Automatic reduction --- Yes
inhibition of "Resend" in the FAX/image send setting upon receiving
mode, inhibition of selection from an address book, letter
inhibition of direct input, inhibition of send from the Address/Domain- --- Yes (50 domains)
PC internet FAX, and inhibition of send of PC-Fax. specified reception
*1: The scanner mode allows setting the default address. To allowed
transmit data, users only have to set the original and press the Address/Domain- --- Yes (50 domains)
start key. specified reception not
allowed. (To be rejected)
*2: Function to set up a text message that will be added
Received data bypass --- Yes
automatically to the message body upon mail transmission.
output
Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
Reception confirmation --- Setting by 0-8 hours/
*3: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast. cycle setting each minute
POP3 communications --- Setting by 30-300/every
timeout setting 30 seconds
e. Specification of Multiple Addresses
Index printing --- No
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Body text print select --- Yes
Broadcast Yes (500 destinations) Yes (500 destinations) setting
(e-mail/FTP/Desktop Transfer function upon --- Yes (1 receiver (of
allowed) disabling of output. transfer) registration)
Rooting function --- Yes
* Broadcast transmission by scanner, Internet Fax and Fax is
Internet Fax/Fax to e- --- Yes
allowed. (B/W (2 value))
mail (Transfer of Internet
Fax/Fax reception data
f. Transmission function to e-mail, inbound
routing)
Scanner Internet Fax Exit tray setting --- Yes
Memory transmission 94 destinations in all Insertion of job --- No
Rotated transmission --- Yes separator sheet
Scaled transmission Yes Setting of number of --- Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a copies of receive data
fixed size to another. Reduction may be done Staple function of --- Yes
on the receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax received data
sending. Auto wake up print --- Yes
Recall mode Error --- Yes Received data print hold --- Yes
Busy --- --- function
--- Number/time to be Fax response lamp --- Yes
set up through h. Report/list function
system setup
Long original Yes Scanner Internet Fax
transmission Maximum of 800mm (single side only/black- Image sending activity Yes
white 2 values only) report Time-specified output
Change of the number Yes --- Output with memory full
of pages for each file * Maximum of 200 times including both
Job partition through No --- transmission and reception
recognition of white Transaction report Yes
paper. Address/phone number Yes
Restriction on Yes --- table
transmission size Group table Yes
Large capacity original Yes Program table Yes
mode Communication original --- Always print/Upon
Scanning of thin paper Yes contents print error/no print
Mixed originals feeder Yes (Random + MIX) List of addresses --- Yes
Default date sender --- Yes (ON only) allowed or not allowed
transmission for reception
g. Reception function i. Other Functions
Scanner Internet Fax Scanner Internet Fax

Automatic reception --- Yes Time specification Yes
Manual reception --- Yes Sender print --- Yes
Memory reception --- Yes Page number print --- Yes
Fixed size reduced --- Yes Date print --- Yes (Date can be
reception expressed
Specified size scaled --- No alternatively)
reception Page partition Yes
Rotated reception --- Yes transmission
Setting of received data --- No Page connection No
print condition Edge erase Yes
2-sided reception --- Condition setting Center erase Yes
through system setting
2-in-1 reception --- No
Scanner Internet Fax m. Others
2 in 1 No Yes
(Allowed for Fax / Mode Scanner Internet FAX
Internet Fax PC-Internet Fax --- Yes
broadcast) Trial mode Yes No
Background removal Yes --- Scanner: No (Standard)
(Only color and gray Meta data: Yes
scale)
C. PC-Fax functions
Card scan Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper
width. The maximum enlargement is not (1) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax operating environment
allowed to exceed 400%)
Confirm transmission --- Yes OS Windows 98
Timeout time Setting Windows Me
for 1 minute 240 Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5)
hours/each minute IE4.0 or more
Forward data Yes Windows 2000
transmission/reception Data transmission by PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax Windows XP Home Edition
(Document Admin) is allowed, too. Windows XP Professional
Windows Server 2003
* This function means that e-mail address setteing on F code relay
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine
broadcast allowed.
CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
j. Record size Monitor 640x480 Pixels or more of screen resolution
256 or more of colors
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Memory 64MB or more
Maximum record width --- 293mm / 11-17/32 HDD Free space of 50MB or more
Record size --- A3 A5/11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5 Interface USB2.0
k. Registration-related settings 10/100BASE-TX
Communications LPR/lp
Mode Scanner Internet Fax protocol Port9100(RAW)
One-touch/group *1 999 destinations IPP
E-mail Use of LDAP allowed USB2.0
FTP Up to 500 registered addresses for each group (2) PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax functions
Desktop dial.
SMB Registered name in 18 full-size character (36
PC-Fax Send Yes (with Fax equipped)
Internet Fax half-size characters)
Maximim of 64 digits for Fax number (including
Desktop registration Yes --- sub-address and passcode)
Registration by using
PC-Internet Fax Send Yes (Necessary options: 256MB expansion
Web or NST (network
memory (G model), Internet Fax expansion kit)
scanner tool)
Maximum of 64 digits for Internet Fax address
Program Registration of addresses (groups), settings
Resolution 200 x 100dpi/200 x 200dpi
(density, image quality) and special functions in
/200 x 400dpi/400 x 400dpi
one set is allowed. (48 of them)
Transmission original A3/B4/A4/A5/B5/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/8.5 x 11/5.5 x
Return mail address 200 (user registration ---
sizes 8.5/8.5 x 13/8K/16K
from Web) *2
Compression method MH/MMR
Number of sender --- 1 (20 characters)
Braodcast transmission Yes (Fax, Internet Fax mixture possible.
registration
Maximum of 500)
Quick key (short cut Yes (001 999)
F code transmission Yes Sub- Yes Maximum of
registration) *3
address 20 digits
Retrieving/scanning of Yes (By address book conversion utility)
Passcode Yes Maximum of
registered data to other
20 digits
model
Phone book Yes
Import/export of address Yes (By storage backup)
registration/
book
transmission function
*1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book, Use of MFP phone book No
the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum Attach a cover sheet Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
total of all modes. Create cover sheets Yes
*2: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is function
selected. Sender print Yes (Editable by PC-Fax driver for only Japan.
Always printed for abroad.)
*3: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
Preview function Yes
registered number of each address within the book for address
Transmission Yes
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
confirmation (Notice to
l. Sound settings PC by NJR)
Document filing function Filing Yes
Mode Item Scanner Internet Fax Quick File Yes
Reception sound Sound volume setting --- Yes *1 PC-Fax Transmission Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
Communication Sound volume setting --- Yes *2 log
error sound User authentication Yes
Sound setting for Sound volume setting Yes *1 Timer No
end of original R-KEY (Germany/ Yes
reading (image France only)
send)
*1: Large/middle/small. Setup by system setting.
*2: Large/middle/small/no sound. Setup by system setting.
D. Remote PC Functions (Network TWAIN) Adobe PS3 Windows 98 / Me
Pull scan (TWAIN) specification Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Interfaces LAN Yes Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
USB No
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3, 10.3.9,
OS's Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server
x 10.4
WHQL validated OS's Windows 2000/XP
Hardware environment System: Must satisfy the operational conditions (3) Command system
for each OS.
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more Command system MX-3500/4500 series
recommended. SPLC-c No
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of PCL5c compatible Standard
colors must be available. PCL6 compatible
Other: Network port BMLinkS No
2-sided scan Yes PS3 compatible Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
Color modes Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Grayscale/Full EFI controller Option (EFI printer kit: MX-PEX1)
Color
(4) Installed fonts
Resolutions 75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
For PCL5c/ Roman outline fonts = 80 types Standard
Scanning ranges A3/A4/A4-R/A5/A5-R/B4/B5/B5-R/11 x 17/
PCL6 Line printer font (Bitmap) = 1 type
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11-R/7.25 x 10.5/7.25 x 10.5-R/
compatible Bar code fonts = 28 types (Can be Option
8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5-R/8.5 x 14/Postcard/
provided by the flash ROM kit as well)
8K/16K/16K-R/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix). "Auto For PS3 Roman outline fonts = 136 types Option
(Mixed size)" means random. (5) Support print channel
Preview function Yes
Zoom preview function Yes USB USB 1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/XP only
Rotated scan Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree) USB 2.0 (High speed): Windows 2000/XP only
Brightness/contrast Auto/ manual (-100 +100) PSERVER/ Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be used
adjustment RPRINT for in netware environment
Gamma adjustment Yes NetWare
Color matching None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM environment
Edge emphasis None/Normal/Sharp/Blur LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel
Black-white inversion Yes IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
Selection of illuminant Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White) PAP: Print channel to be used for Machintosh environment
color EtherTalk
(AppleTalk)
Selection of threshold Auto/ manual (1 254)
value FTP Equipped with the function to print data received via
built-in FTP server
Addition of void area Allowed (4 sides; 2.5mm for each)
NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
Save of setup contents Yes
Port9100 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
Save of preview image Yes
HTTP Web Submit Print supported
Display unit of Pixel/mm/inch
scanning range POP3 E-Mail To Print supported
Notes's security Yes (6) Command Compatibility
function
Image acquision Non-compression PCL5c PCL5c must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
method from the main compatibility 4600.
unit PCL XL PCL XL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
compatibility 4600.
E. Printer function
PostScript3 Must be compatible with Adobe PS3.
(1) Platform compatibility
(7) Environmental settings
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Macintosh Setting item Overview
(2) Support OS Initial setting Basic settings for printer use such as number of
copies or printing direction.
Custom PS Windows 98/Me PCL seting Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later PS setting Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
Windows 2000 be set up.
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Custom Windows 98/Me
PCL5c/6 Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
PPD Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 10.3.9,
x 10.4
(8) Print functions
Function Content PCL6/5c PS (Option)

Multiple Pamphlet Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single booklet. Yes Yes
Bar code font JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation Yes No
Network tandem print Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout. Yes Yes (Windows
only)
Windows Cluster Print When a Windows server breaks down, a mirror server takes over and executes the suspended Yes Yes (Windows
print job. only)
* There may be color differences between machine types
Encryption PDF/PDF/ PDF/TIFF/JPEG file can be printed without printer driver. Yes (No for Yes
TIFF/JPEG direct print 1) Printing of e-mail attachment file encrypted
2) Printing from FTP server PDF/PDF)
3) Printing from setup file on Web page
4) USB memory
E-Mail To Print Direct printing of an attached file upon receipt of the e-mail. Yes Yes
Pull print from front panel Browsing of FTP server from front panel and pull-printing of a specified file (direct printing). Yes Yes
FTP PUSH print Performs direct print by data transfer from the client PC to the MFP server. Yes Yes
Print by file setup on Web Setting and direct printing of a file on network through Web page. Yes Yes
page [Web Submit Print]
Continuous print function The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job even if the Yes Yes
unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the application assuming
printout on continuous pages.
ROPM The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP processing. Yes Yes
Multi-access RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed during scanning. Yes Yes
Paper direction setting for Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed correctly in Yes Yes
2-sided printing of front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
letterhead paper and pre-
punched paper.
Enable selected paper For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not match with those Yes Yes
type in bypass tray on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of the driver regardless of the setup
values on the main unit side.
Setting environmental Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print create Yes Yes
control under terminal environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
server control
Driver delivery function PAU4.0 allows the administrator to deliver a driver to clients. Yes Yes
Form overlay The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends the contained data only, and Yes No
inserts the data into the form in the main unit for printout. (5c only)
Planet Press Object Lune Corporation's Planet Press (Software to execute the mapping of forms (DL Yes Yes
beforehand) and variable data in the printer interior)
Improvement of This expands the function to prevent the deletion and overwriting of the editing functional Yes Yes
downloading method of enhancement font/form on Web page. A unified UI for the lineup is necessary. (5c only)
font form Currently, registration is done by Web page and deleted by PJL. This function is supported by
HDD.
Management of password The purpose is to prevent the access even if the hidden Web page address becomes known. Yes Yes
by hidden Web page
Expansion font list In self-print of a font list, ESC command information is needed for BITMAP font. Yes No
(5c only)
Bonjour for Macintosh This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network automatically. No Yes
environment The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and software) is possible
without user setting.
Document control When printing, the unique pattern for prevention against unauthorized copy Yes (OPT) Yes (OPT)
is embedded in printing.
Object judgement (screen In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph/graphic text) is PCL6: Yes Yes
change/color change) judged. Print screen (resolution) and profile (color) are changed automatically. PCL5: No
CMYK Simulation Choice of CMYK simulation is as follows. No Yes
1) Default
2) Custom
Default is defined depending on the destination of service simulation.
1. Japan = Japan Color
2. North America / China / Other abroad inch type = SWOP
3. Europe / Other abroad AB type = Euroscale
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. Notation of driver is Custom.
Example: Use SWOP profile in Japan.
ICC Profile <Source Profile> Yes Yes
Choice of source profile is as follows.
sRGB
AppleRGB
Custom
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. (The attached ICC profile on devices is available.)
<Output Profile>
There is no user selection for output profile. Sharp provides Custom profile. Upload of profile
supports by service. The tool is set on the Web (service setting). The concrete method of profile
making is to be considered separately.
Pantone color For Pantone color support, the profile upload can be made by Web setting. No Yes
(9) Windows driver function b. Paper feed system
PCL5-c/6: Standard
Function PCL5-c/6 PS PPD
PS: Option (Installation of the PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) are Paper Size A2 (Fit To Page) N/A N/A
required.) (PCL6 only)
a. Frequently used functions 12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14,
7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, DL, C5,
Function PCL5-c/6 PS PPD COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Copies (Copy 1-999 Paper Selection Paper Source Auto Selection/
processing by Paper Type Paper Source /
MFP/Printer Paper Type
firmware) Different Paper Cover Page N/A
Orientation Portrait/Landscape Last Page N/A
Duplex 2-Sided (Book) Other Page N/A
2-Sided (Tablet) Transparency Blank/Printed
Pamphlet 2-Up Pamphlet N/A Inserts
(Pamphlet Tiled Pamphlet Tab Printing Image Shift N/A
processing by Multiple 2-Up Pamphlet Tab Paper N/A
MFP/Printer Multiple Tiled Pamphlet Printing
firmware) (PCL6 only)
Binding Edge Top/Left/Right N/A Set Tray Status Set Paper Size N/A
N-Up Printing 1-Up, 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, (Windows NT: N/A) Set Paper Type
8-Up, 9-Up, 16-Up (Windows 9x: Paper Type Display Name N/A
1-Up/2-Up/4-up) Name (USER
Black N-Up Yes/No N/A TYPE 1-7)
Border Input Tray Two Trays/Three Trays/Four N/A
N-Up Order [2-Up] Options Trays
Left to Right
c. Paper exit method
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down
Output Tray Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Down, and Right
Stitch Tray
Left, and Down
Down, and Left Staple None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Punch Yes/No
No Offset Yes/No
Large Capacity Tray None/MX-LCX1
Output Tray Options None/Finisher/Saddle Stitch Finisher
Punch Module None/2 Holes/3 Holes/4 Holes/4 Holes (Wide)
Right Tray Yes/No
d. Exposure

Resolution 600 x 600dpi 1200 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
300 x 300dpi (monochrome only)
600 x 600dpi
Color Mode Auto/Color(CMYK)/Monochrome (K only)
ICM Method (Cannot be specified N/A OFF OFF
with the monochrome mode) System (Windows ICM). Effective only when Color Options is Custom.
Windows NT: N/A
Printer Printer
N/A N/A
Rendering Intent (Cannot be When ICM Method is anything other than Custom: Default Perceptual matching
specified with the monochrome When ICM Method is Custom: Relative colorimetric
mode) Perceptual matching Saturation matching
Relative colorimetric Absolute colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
ICC Profile Selection (Cannot be Source Profile (Monitor Profile) Source Profile (Monitor Profile)
specified with the monochrome When Windows ICM is off: sRGB
mode) None Apple RGB
sRGB Custom
Apple RGB
Custom
When Windows ICM is on:
Monitor Profile installed in PC
Print Priority (Cannot be specified 1 bit or 2 bit 1 bit or 2 bit
with the monochrome mode) 2 bit or 4 bit 2 bit or 4 bit
Contrast 0-100 N/A
* Some OS may not allow one-
number-to-next specification for
setup values.
Brightness 0-100 N/A
setup values.
Saturation (Cannot be specified 0-100 N/A
with the monochrome mode)
setup values.
Color Balance (RGB) 0-100 N/A
(Cannot be specified with the
monochrome mode)
setup values.
Text To Black (Can be specified only Yes/No N/A
with the monochrome mode)
Vector To Black (Can be specified Yes/No N/A
only with the monochrome mode)
Toner Save (1bit only) Yes/No Yes/No
Screen Setting (Cannot be specified Default
with the monochrome mode) Photo
Text & Graphic
Pure Black Print (Cannot be N/A Yes/No Yes/No
specified with the monochrome
mode)
Black Overprint (Cannot be N/A Yes/No Yes/No
specified with the monochrome
mode)
CMYK Simulation (Cannot be N/A Yes/No Off/
specified with the monochrome In case of Yes: Default/Custom
mode) Default /Custom
Bitmap Compression None None N/A
(PCL6 only)
Image Type Standard/Graphics/Photo/Custom
CAD CAD
Neutral Grays (Cannot be specified Black Only Black Only
with the monochrome mode) 4-Color 4-Color
e. Font Function PCL5-c/6 PS PPD
Margin Shift (Margin None/10mm (0.4 inch)/20mm (0.8 inch)/30mm
Function PCL5-c/6 PS PPD Shift processing by (1.2 inch)
Font Source Resident Font N/A MFP/Printer
Download Font firmware
Font Substitution N/A Zoom 25% 400%
Download Font Type TrueType (Type 42) Yes N/A X-Y Zoom
Bitmap (Type 3) Mirror Image N/A No Mirror Image None
N/A Adobe (Type1) Vertical Vertical
As Graphics N/A Horizontal Horizontal
f. Other functions Graphics Mode Vector / N/A
Raster
Function PCL5-c/6 PS PPD PS Pass Through N/A Yes/No
Watermark Transparent Text PS Error Printing N/A Yes/No Yes/No
Overwrite Text Job Compression N/A None/Fastest/
Outline Text Fast/Medium/
Best
Yes Image Stamp N/A
Compression
(PCL6 only)
Retention Hold Only N/A
Overlay Create Overlay
Hold After Printd
Load Overlay
Sample Print
Delete
Password
Query Page Overlay
Document Filing Quick File N/A
Rotate 180 degrees Yes/No Yes/No
Main Folder
Collate Yes/No
Custom Folder
Carbon Copy Top Copy
User Authentication Login Name N/A
Carbon Copy
Password
Fit To Page A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x N/A
Job ID User Name N/A
11,
Job Name
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5/8.5 x 13/5.5
Notify Job End Yes/No N/A
x 8.5, 8K, 16K, DL, C5, COM10,
Monarch Auto Job Control Yes/No N/A
Review
Poster 2 x 2/3 x 3/ 2 x 2/3 x 3/4 x 4 N/A
4x4 Tandem Print Yes/No
(PCL6 only) Set Tandem Print IP Address (Slave Machine)
Poster Dash Border Yes/No Yes/No N/A
(PCL6 only) Auto Configuration Yes N/A
Poster Overlap Yes/No Yes/No N/A
(PCL6 only)
(10) Macintosh driver functions Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4
a. Frequently used functions Rendering Intent Perceptual matching
* Specification Relative colorimetric
Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4 depending on OS Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
Copies 1-999
ICC Profile Selection Source N/A Source
Orientation Portrait/Landscape
(Cannot be specified Profile Profile
Duplex 2-Sided (Long)
with the monochrome (Monitor (Monitor
2-Sided (Short)
mode) Profile) Profile)
Pamphlet (Pamphlet Tiled Pamphlet * Specification sRGB sRGB
processing by MFP/ Multiple Tiled Pamphlet depending on OS Apple RGB Apple RGB
Printer firmware) (Only more than 10.2) Custom Custom
Binding Edge Top/Left/Right N/A Top/Left/Right (10.3 only)
N-Up Printing 1-Up/2-Up/4-Up/6-Up/9-Up/16-Up Print Priority 1 bit or 2 bit
N-Up Border Yes/No (Cannot be specified 2 bit or 4 bit
N-Up Order [2-Up] with the monochrome
Left to Right mode)
Right to Left Contrast N/A
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up] * Some OS may not
Right, and Down allow one-number-to-
Down, and Right next specification for
Left, and Down setup values
Down, and Left Brightnesst N/A 0-100
b. Paper feed method * Some OS may not
allow one-number-to-
Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4 next specification for
setup values
Paper Size Setting 12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K, Saturationt N/A 0-100
16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
Paper Selection Auto Select
mode)
Paper Source
* Some OS may not
Paper Type
allow one-number-to-
Different Paper Cover Page
next specification for
Transparency Inserts Blank/Printed setup values
Tab Printing N/A Color Balance (RGB) N/A
Set Tray Status N/A (Cannot be specified
Paper Type Name Yes with the monochrome
(USER TYPE 1-7) mode)
Input Tray Options Two Trays/ N/A Two Trays/ * Some OS may not
Three Trays/ Three Trays/ allow one-number-to-
Four Trays Four Trays next specification for
setup values
c. Paper exit method
Text To Black N/A
Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4 Vector To Black N/A
Output Tray Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle Toner Save (1bit only) Yes/No
Stitch Tray Screen Setting Default
Staple None/1-Staple/2-Staples (Cannot be specified Photo
Punch Yes/No with the monochrome Test & Graphic
mode)
No Offset Yes/No
Pure Black Print Yes/No
Large Capacity Tray None/MX- N/A None/MX-
(Cannot be specified
LCX1 LCX1
with the monochrome
Output Tray Options None/ N/A None /
mode)
Finisher/ Finisher/
Black Overprint Yes/No
Saddle Stitch Saddle Stitch
(Cannot be specified
Finisher Finisher
with the monochrome
Punch Module None / N/A None /
mode)
2 Holes / 2 Holes /
CMYK Simulation Off
3 Holes / 3 Holes /
(Cannot be specified Default
4 Holes / 4 Holes /
with the monochrome Custom
4 Holes 4 Holes
mode)
(Wide) (Wide)
Bitmap Compression N/A
Right Tray Yes/No N/A Yes/No
Image Type Standard/Graphic/Photo/CAD/Custom
d. Exposure Neutral Grays Black Only
(Cannot be specified 4-Color
Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4 with the monochrome
Resolution 600 x 600dpi mode)
Color Mode Auto/Color (CMYK) /Monochrome (K only)
e. Font
ICM Method ColorSync OFF N/A OFF
(Cannot be specified System N/A System Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4
with the monochrome (10.3 only) Font Source (Resident N/A
mode) Printer Font/Download Font)
* Specification
Font Substitution N/A
depending on OS
Download Font Type Yes N/A
f. Other functions (2) Data saving for each function
Function OS9 PPD OSX 10.1 OSX 10.2/3/4 Quick File Folder Main/Custom Folder
Watermark Transparent Text/Overwrite Text/Outline Text Job Shared Confidential Shared Confidential
Overlay N/A storage storage storage storage
Rotate 180 degrees Yes/No N/A Yes/No Copy Yes No Yes Yes
Collate Yes/No Printer Yes Yes Yes
Carbon Copy N/A Direct print (FTP) Yes No No
Fit To Page N/A Direct print (e-mail) Yes Yes No
Poster N/A Direct print (Web) Yes No No
Black Poster Border N/A Scan to e-mail/FTP Yes Yes No
Poster Overlap N/A Scan to SMB --- --- ---
Margin Shift None/10mm/20mm/30mm (1.2inch) Scan to USB --- --- ---
(Margin Shift memory
processing by MFP/ Fax reception No No No
Printer firmware Fax transmission Yes Yes No
Zoom 25% 400% Internet Fax No No No
Mirror None N/A reception
Vertical Internet Fax Yes Yes No
Horizontal transmission
Graphics Mode N/A PC-Fax/PC-Internet Yes Yes Yes
PS Pass through N/A Fax transmisson
PS Error Printing Yes/No Remote PC Scan --- --- ---
Job Compression N/A Scan to HDD No Yes Yes
Retention Hold Only, N/A Hold Only,
Hold After Hold After G. Safety and environmental protection
Print, Sample Print, Sample standards
Print, Pass Print, Pass
Code Code (1) Safety standards
Document Filing N/A Quick File
Main Folder 100V type 200V type
Custom Safety standard Electrical safety law: EN60950
Folder J60950(compliant) IEC60825 (Laser)
User Authentication Login Name N/A Login Name UL60950, 21CFR GB4943 (China)
Password Password (Laser)
CSA C22.2 No.60950
Job ID N/A User Name
CNS14336 (Taiwan)
Job Name
EMC VCCI Class A EN55022 Class A
Notify Job End N/A
FCC Part 15 Class A CISPR22 Class A
Auto Job Control N/A
Guideline for EN61000-3-2
Review
suppression of higher EN61000-3-3
Tandem Print N/A Yes/No harmonic wave currents GB9254, GB17625.1,
Set Tandem Print N/A IP Address ICES Class B (Canada) GB/T17618 (China)
(Slave CNS 13438 (Taiwan)
Machine) Line standard (for Validation of Technology TS 103 021, EG 201
Auto Configuration Yes N/A Yes Fax expansion) Standard Conformance 120, EG 201 121
(10.3 only) (Electrical (Europe)
Communications Project AS/ACIF S0002
F. Document filing function
Law) (Australia)
(1) Basic function FCC part 68 GB/T 3382.1-2003, GB/T
ICCS-03 3382.2-2003, YD/T 514-
Capacity for document Main folder RSPF 10GB PSTN01 (Taiwan) 1998, YD/T 589-1996,
filing Custom model YD/T 703-1993, YD/T
folder DSPF 30GB 965-1998, YD/T 993-
model 1998 (China)
Quick file 10GB (2) Environmental Readiness
folder
International Energy Star Program MFP (EPA)
Pages or files for Main folder 10GB: 1,400 pages or 1,000 files
allowed for filing Custom 30GB: 4,200 pages or 3,000 files The Eco Mark Program
folder (SHARP standard document) Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
Quick file 1,400 pages or 1,000 files New Blue Angel
folder (SHARP standard document)
Nordic Swan
Maximum number of Maximum of 500 folders
user folder European ROHS regulations
Number of users Depends on the number of user registrations. Chinese ROHS
allowed for registration (Maximum of 200 users) WEEE (Following to SHARP super green product declaration.)
3. Ambient conditions
A. Operating environmental conditions (Main
unit)
Temperature: 10C 35C, Humidity: 20 85%RH
Air pressure: 590 1013hPa (height: 0 2000m)
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
B. Ambient conditions for transporting (Main

unit)
20C to 45C (No condensation)
Humidity (RH)
90%
60%
20%
C. Operating environmental conditions (Supply)

Temperature: 10C 35C, Humidity: 20 85%RH
Air pressure: 590 1013hPa (height: 0 2000m)
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
D. Ambient conditions for transporting

E. Ambient storage conditions (Supply) (packed

conditions)
F. Effective use period (Supply) (packed

conditions)
Environmental conditions: 10C to 40C
1) Photoconductor drum
36 months from the production month (production lot)
2) Developer
3) Toner (K)/Color toner (C/M/Y)
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-45NTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Black toner : Net 880g) at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 30K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27NTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Cyan toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27NTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Magenta toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27NTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
(Yellow toner : Net 352g) at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-27NVBA
(Black developer : Net 270g)
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-27NVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 270g)
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-27NRSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 150K (Black) MX-27NUSA
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 100K (Color)
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. European Subsidiary/Australia/New Zealand

1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-45GTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27GTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27GTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27GTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-27GVBA
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-27GVSA
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-27GRSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 150K (Black) MX-27GUSA
C. Asia-Subsidiary/Hong Kong
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-45ATBA * Life: A4/Letter size
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27ATCA * Life: A4/Letter size
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27ATMA * Life: A4/Letter size
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27ATYA * Life: A4/Letter size
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-27AVBA
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-27AVSA
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-27ARSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 150K (Black) MX-27AUSA
MX3500N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

1 : Jan. 15 2006, 5 : Jul. 15 2006, 7 : Feb. 15 2007
D. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines/Taiwan
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 36K *1 MX-45FTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27FTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27FTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-27FTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 150K MX-27FVBA
6 Developer Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) x1 100K MX-27FVSA
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K (Black) MX-27FRSA
100K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 150K (Black) MX-27FUSA
2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Middle East/Agencies
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 300K MX-450HK
Fuser gear x1
Upper separation pawl x4
5 Upper separation pawl SP-N x4
Upper thermistor sub x1
Upper thermistor side x1
Upper thermistor CJ x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Lower heat roller x1
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower separation pawl/spring x4
Lower thermistor x1
2 Primary transfer kit Intermediate transfer belt x1 150K MX-450Y1
Primary transfer blade x1
Primary transfer conductive collar x4
7
PS paper dust removal cleaner x1
Bearing x4
7
3 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-450Y2
Secondary transfer roller x1
Secondary transfer idle gear x1
Primary transfer roller x4
Belt drive gear x1
4 Filter kit Ozone filter x1 150K MX-450FL For North America/South
Paper exit filter x2 and Central America
Ozone filter x1 150K MX-270FLN For Asia/Agencies
5 Web cleaning kit Web unit x1 150K MX-450WC
Sub roller x1
Sub roller bearing x2
6 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 40K MX-270HB Each color 5% coverage,
color ratios 43%
7 DV seal kit DV seal x3 Black: 150K, MX-270DS
DV side seal F/R x3 Color: 100K
Toner filter x3
1 8 Main charger kit Main charger unit x1 Black: 150K, MX-270MK
Drum cleaning blade x1 Color: 100K
9 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 For saddle finisher
(MX-FNX2)
10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 MX-SCX1 For inner finisher
(MX-FNX1)
11 Primary transfer belt unit Primary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x1 MX-450U1
12 Secondary transfer belt unit Secondary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x1 MX-450U2
13 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-450FU1
Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-450FU

1 : Jan. 15 2006, 5 : Jul. 15 2006, 7 : Feb. 15 2007
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand/Taiwan
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 300K MX-450UH
Fuser gear x1
Upper separation pawl x4
5 Upper separation pawl SP-N x4
Upper thermistor sub x1
Upper thermistor side x1
Upper thermistor CJ x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 300K MX-450LH
Lower heat roller bearing x2
Lower separation pawl/spring x4
Lower thermistor x1
3 Primary transfer belt kit Intermediate transfer belt x1 150K MX-450B1
Primary transfer blade x1
Primary transfer conductive collar x4
7
PS paper dust removal cleaner x1
Bearing x4
7
4 Primary transfer roller kit Primary transfer roller x4 300K MX-450X1
Belt drive gear x1
5 Secondary transfer belt kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-270B2
6 Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller x1 300K MX-450X2
Secondary transfer idle gear x1
7 Filter kit Ozone filter x1 150K MX-450FL For Europe/Oceania
Paper exit filter x2
Ozone filter x1 150K MX-270FLN For Taiwan
8 Web cleaning kit Web unit x1 150K MX-450WC
Sub roller x1
Sub roller bearing x2
9 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 40K MX-270HB Each color 5% coverage,
color ratios 43%
10 DV seal kit DV seal x3 Black: 150K, MX-270DS
DV side seal F/R x3 Color: 100K
Toner filter x3
1 11 Main charger kit Main charger unit x1 Black: 150K, MX-270MK
Drum cleaning blade x1 Color: 100K
12 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 AR-SC2 For saddle finisher
(MX-FNX2)
13 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 MX-SCX1 For inner finisher
(MX-FNX1)
14 Primary transfer belt unit Primary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x1 MX-450U1
15 Secondary transfer belt unit Secondary transfer belt unit (For service rotation) x1 MX-450U2
16 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-450FU
Fusing unit (For service rotation) (Heater lamp 100V) x1 MX-450FU2

3. Production number identification C. Toner cartridge
A. Drum cartridge The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
Part name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as Destination
follows. Toner color Incompatibility
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. The laser Production
print shows the production year and month. place
Production
year/month/day
1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2. Version
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. H for this model. Serial No. in production day
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year. Example: 134th of production on August 24, 2005
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number or X, Y, Z
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the day of packing.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. "C" for China.
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
When using the MX-3501N/4501N When a finisher, paper pass unit and
saddle stitch finisher (peripheral
devices) are not installed.
When a finisher (peripheral

device) is installed.
9 10 11 12 13 14
No. Name Function/ Operation Note
1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided Installed standard on the
(Duplex single pass feeder) originals can be automatically scanned. MX-3501N/4501N.
2 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided Installed standard on the
(Reversing single pass feeder) originals can be automatically scanned. MX-3500N/4500N.
3 Front cover Open this cover when turning ON/OFF the main power switch or replacing the
toner cartridge.
4 Interface unit *1 Feeds the output paper to the saddle finisher.
5 Operation panel Used to set the functions and enter the copy quantity.
6 Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) *1 Receives discharged paper if installed and set.
7 Paper exit tray (Center tray) Copied or printed paper is discharged to this tray.
8 Finisher *1 Staples paper, and makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
9 Saddle stitch finisher *1 Staples and outputs paper. It is also provided with the center-stapling function.
Makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
10 Tray 1 Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
11 Tray 2 Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
12 Tray 3 (When the stand/1 x 500 sheet Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
paper drawer or the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
13 Tray 4 (When the stand/2 x 500 sheet Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
paper drawer is installed) *1
14 Tray 5 (When the large capacity paper Stores paper. Max. 3500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
feed tray is installed) *1
*1: Peripheral devices
MX3500N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1

B. Internal structure
1 2 3 4 5 6
When using the MX-3500/4500 Series
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 Toner cartridge When the toner in a cartridge runs out, the cartridge must be replaced
with a new cartridge of the same color.
The shape of the toner cartridge varies slightly by model.
2 Fusing section Fuses images transferred on paper by heat. Note: The fusing section is heated to a
high temperature. Be careful not to burn
when paper jam.
3 Transfer belt In full color copy, the transfer belt overlaps 4-color toner images on the Do not touch or scratch. It may cause
transfer belt. In black copy, black toner images are shifted to the degraded images.
transfer belt.
4 Right side cover This cover is opened to operate the fusing section pressure
adjustment lever or to remove a paper jam.
5 Paper reverse section cover Used to reverse paper in duplex print or to remove a paper jam.
6 Manual feed tray In manual paper feed, paper is inserted from this tray. When paper
greater than A4R or 8-1/2 x 11 R, be sure to pull out the auxiliary tray.
7 Main power switch Turns on the power of the machine. When FAX or internet is used, The main power lamp may remain ON
keep it ON. for about 1 minute after turning OFF the
main power switch. (When the main
power is turned OFF in the nighttime
FAX mode and OFF mode or when the
power outlet is disconnected. (This is
because the amount of electric charges
is great when only the resident power is
supplied.))
8 Waste toner box Receives waste toner when copying or printing. The waste toner box is collected by the
servicemen.
9 Waste toner box release button Press this button to release lock of the waste toner box when replacing
the waste toner box or cleaning the wiring unit.
10 Handle Used to lift the machine for transit.
11 2-stage paper feed desk right side Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 3 or 4.
cover (When the 2-stage paper feed
desk is installed)
12 Paper feed tray right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 1 or 2.
13 Right side cover open lever Lift this lever and open the right side cover to remove a paper jam.

C. Automatic document feeder
MX-3500N/4500N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
MX-3501N/4501N
2 3 4 5

1 Document feed roller Transports a document automatically.
2 Document feed section cover This cover is opened when removing a paper jam or cleaning the
document feed roller.
3 Document guide Guides to scan a document properly. Set to the set document size.
4 Document set table A document is set on this table. In the case of a single-surface
document, set it face up.
5 Document exit section The scanned document is discharged to this section.
6 Document scan section The document set on the document set table is scanned in this
section.
7 Document size detection plate Detects the size of a document set on the document table (glass
surface).
8 Document reverse tray When scanning a document, it is temporarily discharged to this
section to be reversed for scanning the back surface.
9 Document table (Glass surface) Used for thick documents or book documents which cannot be
entered to the auto document feeder.
NOTE: For the MX-3501N/4501N automatic document feeder (DSPF), refer to "00ZMX3501NS1E."

D. Connectors
1
2
3
Service-only connector

1 USB connector (Type A) Used to connect a USB hub or USB memory.
2 USB connector (Type B) Used to connect a computer to use this machine as a printer.
3 LAN connector Used to connect a LAN cable to use this machine in a network.

E. Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5
PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 Touch panel A message or a key is displayed on the LCD screen. Touch the
displayed key with your finger to perform various operations. When the
displayed key is touched, a sound is generated and the selected item is
highlighted to confirm.
2 Mode select key/Lamp Used to switch the display mode of the touch panel. The lamp of the
selected key is lighted.
[Document Filing] key
Press this key to switch to the document filing mode in order to store
a document to the hard disk in the form of a image or to print or send
the image stored in the hard disk.
[FAX/Image send] key ([Image send] key for the models without the
FAX function)
Press this key to switch to the FAX mode/network scanner in order to
use the FAX function or the scanner function.
Communicating lamp
This lamp is lighted during sending or receiving in the FAX mode, and
lighted during sending in the scanner mode.
Data lamp
This lamp flashes when FAX data cannot be outputted due to paper
empty, etc. If there is data which has not been sent, the lamp is
lighted.
[COPY] key
Press this key to switch to the copy mode in order to use the copy
function. When this key is pressed continuously, the total copy
quantity and the toner remaining quantity can be checked.
3 Printer lamp (Ready lamp/Data lamp) Ready lamp
When this lamp is lighted, print data can be received.
Data lamp
This lamp flashes during reception of print data, and lights up during
printing.
4 Numeric key (10-key) Used to enter the copy quantity or the FAX number, etc.
5 [C] key Used to clear the set value of copy quantity, etc. to 0.
6 [Job status] key Press this key to display the job status. On the job status screen, the
details of the job can be checked and the job can be terminated.
7 [System setting] key When this key is pressed, the system setting menu screen is displayed
to allow the paper feed tray setting, destination registration, and other
setting for easy operations of this machine.
8 [Logout/Tone] key ([Logout] key for the Used to logout after user authentication. Used to deliver the tone signal
models without the FAX function) in the dial line when the FAX function is used.
9 [Program] key Used to use the job program when the copy function is used, and to dial
when the FAX function is used.
10 [CA] key Press this key to reset the operation, cancel setting, and start from the
initial state.
11 [STOP] key Used to stop copying and scanning a document.
12 [BLACK START] key Used to scan a document in black.
13 [COLOR START] key Used to make a color copy in the copy mode and to scan a document in
colors. When the FAX or the internet FAX is used, this key cannot be
used.
14 [Power save] key/Lamp Used to set the machine to the auto power shut off mode of power
saving. [Power save] key flashes in the auto power shut off mode.
15 [Power] key Turns ON/OFF the power of the machine.
Used in the FAX nighttime mode when the FAX is installed.
16 Main power lamp This lamp lights up when the main power switch of the machine is ON.

F. Print and send status (Job status)
1 2 3 Complete job
status screen
JOB QUEUE SETS / PROGRESS STATUS SPOOL SPOOL
COPY 020 / 001 COPYING JOB QUEUE JOB QUEUE

COMPLETE COMPLETE
COPY 020 / 000 PAPER EMPTY
DETAIL DETAIL
BBB BBB 020 / 000 WAITING PRIORITY
0312345678 002 / 000 WAITING STOP/DELETE CALL

PRINT JOB SCANNER FAX JOB INTERNET-FAX INTERNET-FAX
4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Paper empty display Supply paper. If the status display indicates Paper empty, the specified size paper is
empty. In this case, if paper is not supplied, the output is reserved and the job data in
standby state which can be outputted are outputted in priority. (When, however, paper is
exhausted during outputting, the priority output of another job data is not made.)
To select another paper size for outputting because the specified size paper cannot be
supplied immediately, touch the key of the job in the job list and touch 8. [DETAIL] key,
and the paper size specification can be changed.
2 Job list The list of jobs reserved, during execution, or completed is displayed. When [PRINT] key
is touched with the mode select key, the display of the job status screen select key is
changed over to display the list of SPOOL. The list indicates the jog outline and the
status.
When a print job during spooling or an encrypted PDF is directly printed, the job is
displayed on the SPOOL screen. If there is a list of encrypted PDF files, touch the job
key and enter the password, and the selected job is shifted to the list of [Reserve/
Executing], and the job enters the standby state.
3 Job status screen select key The job list display is switched to one of SPOOL job, JOB QUEUE job, or COMPLETE
job.
SPOOL: When an encrypted PDF is printed directly, the print job list is displayed. Can be
displayed when the print job is displayed.
JOB QUEUE: The job list which is reserved or executing is displayed.
COMPLETE: The job list which completed is displayed.
4 Mode select key Used to select the print mode, the scanner mode, the Fax mode, or the internet FAX mode.
[PRINT JOB] key displays the list of copy, printer, Fax receive, internet Fax receive, and
the self print.
[SCANNER] key displays the send list of the scanner function.
[FAX JOB] key displays the send list of the Fax and the PC-Fax functions.
[INTERNET FAX] key displays the send list of the internet Fax and the PC-Internet Fax
function.
5 [] [] keys Selects the page of the displayed job list.
6 [STOP/DELETE] key Used to stop or delete the job which is executing or to delete a selected or reserved job.
However, the FAX receive print jog and the internet Fax receive print job cannot be stopped
or deleted.
7 [PRIORITY] key When a job is selected in the reserved jobs displayed in the job list of JOB QUEUE screen
and the key is touched, the job reservation priority is changed to the top priority.
For a print job, select a priority job and touch this key, and the previous copying or printing
is interrupted and the selected job copy or print is started. After completion of the selected
job, the interrupted job is resumed from the interrupted point.
8 [DETAIL] key Used to display the details of the selected job. When the automatic temporal save of the
document filing function or filing is executed, or when sequential broadcasting send is
executed with the FAX/image send function, the key display is made in the complete job
status screen. When this key is touched, the details of the completed jobs are displayed
and reprint or resend of the job can be executed by touching [CALL] key.
9 [CALL] key When the displayed key is touched on the complete job status screen and [CALL] key is
touched, the operation (reprint or resend) of the touched job is executed. Same as when
[DETAIL] key is touched and [CALL] key is touched.

G. Sensors
OCSW
MHPS
TFD3
TFD2 HPOS
POD3
POD2
POD1 APPD1
DSW_ADU
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
REGS_F/R
DHPD_CL DHPD_K PCS_CL/K
APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K MPED
PPD2 MTOP2
MTOP1
MPFD MPLD
MPWD
PPD1 TH_M/HUD_M
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS1
CSS11 DSW_C
CSS12
CSS13 CSPD1
CSS14
CLUD2 CPFD2
CSS2 CPED2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24 CSPD2
Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE

1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Detects the transfer belt separation CL. Transmission type
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK detection Detects the transfer belt separation BK. Transmission type
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Transmission type
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP Detects tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
detection)
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP Detects tray 2 upper limit. Transmission type
detection)
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects tray 2 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry Detects tray 1 paper pass. Transmission type
detection)
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry Detects tray 2 paper pass. Transmission type
detection)
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects tray 1 paper remaining quantity. Transmission type
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Detects tray 2 paper remaining quantity. Transmission type
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close. Transmission type
detection
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position. Transmission type
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. Transmission type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length. Transmission type Manual paper
feed unit

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
detector
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out Transmission type Manual paper
detector 1 position (storing position). feed unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out Transmission type Manual paper
detector 1 position (pull-out position). feed unit
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection trigger. Transmission type
PCS_CL/K Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density. Reflection type
POD1 Fusing after-detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray. Transmission type
PPD1 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Transmission type
PPD2 Registration detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
REGS_F/R Resist sensor Detects the resist shift. Reflection type
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). Magnetic sensor
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). Magnetic sensor
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full. Transmission type
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects the temperature/humidity.
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects installation of the tray 1.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of Duct switch
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 tray 1 rear edge detection 1 4. Duct switch
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected. Duct switch
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects installation of the tray 2.
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of Duct switch
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 tray 2 rear edge detection 1 4. Duct switch
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected. Duct switch
CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch

H. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
DHSW
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Mechanical switch Detects the waste toner full.
DHSW Dehumidifier heater switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the dehumidifier heaters
(Japan only) provided in the scanner (reading) section and the paper
feed section.
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main SW Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

I. Clutches and solenoids
ADUGS
1TURC
LSUSS1
MPGS PCSS
MPFS MPUC
CPUC1
CPFC
CPUC2

1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the primary transfer separation
mode.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport
roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 2 section.
LSUSS1 LSU shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed) feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper
feed gate.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process
control and the registration sensor.
AUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.

J. Drive motors
WEBM
PGM
MIM
OSM TNM_Y
POM
ADUHM TNM_M
FUM TNM_C
WTNM DVM_CL
TNM_K DM_CL
DVM_K DM_K
BTM
ADULM
RRM
PFM
CPFM
CLUM1
CLUM2

ADULM ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper DC brush-less motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
feed tray 1)
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper DC brush-less motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
feed tray 2)
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_CL Drum motor (CL) Stepping motor Drives the color OPC drum unit.
DM_K Drum motor (K) Stepping motor Drives the black OPC drum unit.
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Brush-less motor Drives the developing section (CL).
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Brush-less motor Drives the developing section (K) and the primary transfer belt
separation operation.
FUM Fusing drive motor Stepping motor Drives the fusing unit.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) section.
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM PS front motor Stepping motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section,
transport between the resist roller and the right door section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Scans the laser beam
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Registration motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
TNM_C Toner motor C Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Synchronous motor Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Synchronous motor Stirs waste toner.
ADUHM ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the transport roller 13.
BTM Belt motor Drives the transfer belt.

K. Lamps
CLI
CCFT
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
HL_US DL_K
HL_UM
HL_LM

CCFT LCD backlight CCFT cool cathode ray tube Backlight for the CCD
CLI Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan
document images.
DL_C Discharge lamp C LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Halogen lamp Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Halogen lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)

4 : May 15 2006
L. Fans and filters
POFM_R
POFM_F
LSUFAN
2
PCSFM
HDDFM
CPUFM
PSFM
OZFM
Signal name Name Function/Operation Note

CPUFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the controller PWB.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
4 PCSFM Toner hopper fan Cools the toner.
LSUFAN LSU cooling fan motor Cools the polygon motor.
No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
3 Paper exit filter

M. PWB
DV
32
16 31
15
12
17
14
LSU
18
13 39 33
10 37 30
19
21 9
20 29
38
28
7
control box
1 6
27
8
23 26
22
34
4 25
11 24
2 35
5 36
3

1 RD I/F PWB Detects the sensors in the right door unit.
2 Tray 1 detection PWB Detects the tray 1.
3 Tray 2 detection PWB Detects the tray 2.
4 DC power PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
5 Driver main PWB Drives the transport motor and related sections.
6 MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
7 Primary transfer PWB Generates the primary transfer voltage.
8 AC power PWB Controls the primary side power source.
9 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.
10 CCD PWB Scans the document images.
11 Phase detection PWB Adjusts the BL/CL drum phase.
12 CL inverter PWB Drives the xenon lamp.
13 Document detection light receiving PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
14 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
15 LCD INV PWB Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
16 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
17 MFP OPE-P PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
18 Power SW PWB Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
19 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
20 Driver sub PWB Drives the process motor and related sections.
21 Secondary transfer PWB Generates the secondary transfer voltage and the transfer belt cleaning voltage.
22 Temperature/humidity sensor PWB Detects the ambient temperature and humidity.
23 Manual paper feed width detection PWB Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
24 MFPcnt PWB Controls images and the whole machine.
25 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
26 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
27 PCU Flash ROM PWB Controls the PCU PWB.
28 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
29 LSU CNT PWB Controls the LSU.
30 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in the LSU.
31 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
32 DV initial PWB Detects the DV model.
33 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.

34 SCAN IN PWB Rectifies the waveform of scanner image data.
DOCC PWB Recognizes the document control pattern. Option
35 BOOT ROM PWB Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
36 PROGRAM ROM PWB Stores the program.
37 SCN Flash ROM PWB Stores the scanner control program.
38 HVR PWB Divides the primary transfer electrode for each color to improve the transfer capability.
39 DSPF memory PWB
N. Fuses/Thermostats
18
1
2
13
14
15
16
17
4
5 9
6
10
7
8 11
12
No. Signal name Name Specifications Section

1 HLOUT_US Upper thermostat sub Prevents against overheating of the sub roller. Fusing unit
2 HLOUT_UM Upper thermostat main Prevents against overheating of the upper heat roller. Fusing unit
3 HLOUT_LM Lower thermostat Prevents against overheating of the lower heat roller. Fusing unit
4 F201 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB
9 F1 Fuse 20A 125V AC power PWB
10 F2 Fuse 20A 125V AC power PWB
11 F3 Fuse T2AH250V AC power PWB
12 F4 Fuse T2AH250V AC power PWB
13 F1 Fuse 200mA 250V LCD INV PWB
14 F102 Fuse 125V 15A DC power PWB
15 F301 Fuse T5AH 250V DC power PWB
18 F1 Fuse 1.25A250V CL invertor PWB

O. Gate

1 ADU gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section or to discharge paper to the right door.

P. Rollers
35 34 32 33
36
37
24
25
26
27
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
22 20
21
23 31
30
5 19
17
4 18
6
15
16
8 14
7
12
13
9

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separate paper to prevent against double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
5 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
9 Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
10 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport
timing to adjust relative relations between images and paper.
11 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
12 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
13 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the
transport roller 4.
14 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
15 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No.
2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.

21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
transport roller 8.
23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper to the resist roller.
25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the upper/lower heat roller to the paper exit
roller 1.
27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
31 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports the paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport
roller 8.
32 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the transport roller 2. /
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
34 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
35 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray.
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
36 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
37 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
38 Upper heat roller Heats toner on paper, and fuses it onto paper.
39 Lower heat roller Applies a pressure to the upper heat roller.

[6] ADJUSTMENTS
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation

ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap adjustment
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole position adjustment
ADJ 3 Toner density reference control level setting
ADJ 4 High voltage adjustments ADJ 4A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
ADJ 4B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
ADJ 4C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 5 Image density sensor, image registration sensor ADJ 5A Color image density sensor calibration 44-13
adjustment ADJ 5B Color image density sensor, black image density sensor, image 44-2
registration sensor adjustment
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 64-1/61-4
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment ADJ 7A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
ADJ 7B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment) 44-31
ADJ 8 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment ADJ 8A Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main 50-10
(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment (Print engine section) ADJ 10A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub 50-22
scanning direction) (Auto adjustment)
ADJ 10B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual 50-20
adjustment)
ADJ 10C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual 50-21
adjustment)
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion adjustment ADJ 11A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
ADJ 11B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 11C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 11D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner)
ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment)
ADJ 13 Scan image skew adjustment (RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment ADJ 14A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning 48-1
(Document table mode) direction) (Document table mode)
ADJ 14B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(Document table mode)
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (RADF ADJ 15A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning 48-1
mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.) direction) (RADF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 15B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction) 48-1
(RADF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment ADJ 16A Scan image off-center (Document table mode) 50-12
ADJ 16B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.) 50-12
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10/50-1
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment ADJ 18A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table 50-1 (50-2)
mode)
ADJ 18B Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer to 50-6 (50-7)
the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section) 50-5
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density adjustment ADJ 20A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy 63-3 (63-5)
mode)
ADJ 20B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 46-24
ADJ 20C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21
ADJ 20D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole 46-1
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
ADJ 20E Copy density adjustment (each monochrome copy mode) (Whole 46-2
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
ADJ 20F Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each 46-10
density level in each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
ADJ 20G Monochrome copy density adjustment (Density adjustment at each 46-16
density level in each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not
required)
ADJ 20H Gamma/density adjustment in the text image edge section 46-27
(Normally not required)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density adjustment ADJ 20I Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) (Normally 46-25
not required)
ADJ 20J Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto 26-53
adjustment enable setting and adjustment)
ADJ 20K Background process condition setting in the color auto copy mode 46-33
ADJ 20L Color document identification level (ACS operation) setting 46-33
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density adjustment ADJ 21A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 67-24
ADJ 21B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
ADJ 21C Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto 26-54
adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
ADJ 22 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 23 Document size sensor adjustment ADJ 23A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-2
ADJ 23B Document size sensor sensitivity adjustment 41-2
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 25 RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.) 53-7
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image off-center, image ADJ 27A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio 50-28
magnification ratio auto adjustment with SIM50-28 automatic adjustment
ADJ 27B Image off-center automatic adjustment 50-28
ADJ 27C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off- 50-28
center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment
ADJ 27D SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub 50-28
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
3. Details of adjustment
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap
adjustment
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.400.05mm between 40mm

1 70mm from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm
70mm 40mm
40mm
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten 3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a cor-
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.) rect position.)
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
23mm
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm 70mm

from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.40 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
70mm 40mm 5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi-
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8
0.5mm.
40mm
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel-
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
A
Note for use of a clearance gauge
Use a non-polarity gauge. 37.8 + 0.5mm 37.8 + 0.5mm
Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
The gauge must pass with its own weight. (It will free-fall if you
release your hand from it.)
The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
* Marked point (A) on the follower side (right side) of the MG roller.
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole

position adjustment Repeat procedures 3) 6) until the developing roller main pole
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: position comes to the specified range.
* When the developing unit is disassembled. 7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
* When the print image density is low. main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
* When there is a blur on the print image. ment plate with the fixing screw.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a thread to a needle or a pin.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
ADJ 3 Toner density reference control tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
play.
level setting
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the ref-
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
* When developer is replaced.
Error
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is Error name Detail of error
display
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level, 1.5V or below; control
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2. voltage, 8.0V or above
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level, 3.45V or above;
0 control voltage, 2.0V or below
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level, other than 2.5V 0.2V
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_K : xxx

5) Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_C : xxx
6) Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_M : xxx NOTE:
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
K C M
xxx AT DEVE VO_L_Y : xxx
EXECUTE
1) When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors
Y
1/2
of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
K If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely
EXECUTE
M affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
EXECUTE or process interrupt 2) After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure
to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
0 If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE may not be performed correctly.
TCD_K : xx TCV_K : xx
TCD_C
TCD_M
:
:
xx
xx
TCV_C
TCV_M
:
:
xx
xx
ADJ 4 High voltage adjustments
TCD_Y : xx TCV_Y : xx
K C M Y EXECUTE
1/1 4-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment
Adjustment completed
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
0
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE
AUTOMATIC DEVELOPER ADJUSTMENT * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.

AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_K : xxx 1) Enter SIM8-2 mode.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_C : xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_M : xxx 0

AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : xxx AT DEVE VO_L_Y : xxx SIMULATION NO.08-02 CLOSE
TEST
K C M Y EXECUTE
1/2
MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT
A : xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
0 A: xxx B: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
TEST SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE C: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

Abnormal 230 850 D: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
end
TCD_K : EE-EL TCV_K :
TCD_C : xx TCV_C : MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK
TCD_M : EE-EL TCV_M :
TCD_Y : xx TCV_Y :
K C M Y EXECUTE
1/1
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
2) Close the front cabinet.
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
0
4) When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The devel- SIMULATION NO.08-02 CLOSE
TEST
oping roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
and the output value is displayed. MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT
A : xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver- A: xxx B: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set C: xxx ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
230 850 ; MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
(saved) as the reference toner density control value. D: xxx
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK
is completed, [EXECUTE] key display return, to normal from
highlight. This makes you know whether the adjustment opera-
tion is completed or not. 2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed the scroll key.
mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
density control value is set for each of them. speed mode and press [OK] key.
NOTE: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
adjustment result is not reflected (enabled).
Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)
Actual
Item Mode Adjustment Default Monitor voltage Pin
Connector voltage
range value (Specified value) No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage 230 850 645 53.6 1.61V CNMON 8 615V
(Middle speed mode)
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage 230 850 645 53.6 1.61V CNMON 6 615V
(Middle speed mode)
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage 230 850 645 53.6 1.61V CNMON 4 615V
(Middle speed mode)
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage 230 850 645 53.6 1.61V CNMON 2 615V
(Middle speed mode)
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage 230 850 620 52.7 1.58V CNMON 8 605V
(Low speed mode)
B LOW SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage 230 850 620 52.7 1.58V CNMON 6 605V
(Low speed mode)
C LOW SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage 230 850 620 52.7 1.58V CNMON 4 605V
(Low speed mode)
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage 230 850 620 52.7 1.58V CNMON 2 605V
(Low speed mode)
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is 2) Open the PWB holder.
normally outputted. 3) Enter SIM8-2 mode.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label 4) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. the scroll key.
5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust-
ment mode.
6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary devel-
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX oping unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed 8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
tain relationship.
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
mode, and then adjust the other mode. may be defective.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the MC/DV high voltage PWB
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
PCU PWB
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Developing unit
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
age, there is no need to check the output value. OPC drum unit
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an High voltage circuit electrode
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below. 4-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
1) Remove the main unit rear cover. This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
2
1) Enter SIM8-1 mode.
0
DV SETTING AND OUTPUT

Axxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
A: xxx Bxxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
Cxxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M

0 700 Dxxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
MIDDLE LOW EXECUTE OK
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
0

Axxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
A: xxx Bxxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
Cxxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M

0 700 Dxxx MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and

the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Adjustment value Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)

Actual
Item Mode Adjustment Default Monitor voltage Pin
Connector voltage
range value (Specified value) No.
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage 0 700 450 12.1 0.36V CNMON 7 450V
(Middle speed mode)
B MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage 0 700 450 12.1 0.36V CNMON 5 450V
(Middle speed mode)
C MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage 0 700 450 12.1 0.36V CNMON 3 450V
(Middle speed mode)
D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage 0 700 450 12.1 0.36V CNMON 1 450V
(Middle speed mode)
LOW A LOW SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage 0 700 430 11.4 0.34V CNMON 7 430V
(Low speed mode)
B LOW SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage 0 700 430 11.4 0.34V CNMON 5 430V
(Low speed mode)
C LOW SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage 0 700 430 11.4 0.34V CNMON 3 430V
(Low speed mode)
D LOW SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage 0 700 430 11.4 0.34V CNMON 1 430V
(Low speed mode)
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
normally outputted. mode, then adjust the other mode.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value. modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt-
age, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
1) Remove the main unit rear cover. 8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
2
MC/DV high voltage PWB
1 PCU PWB
Developing unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
4-C Transfer voltage adjustment

* When the TC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
2) Open the PWB frame. * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
3) Enter SIM8-1 mode. * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
4) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and 1) Enter SIM8-6 mode.
the scroll key.
5) Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector 0
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjust- TEST SIMULATION NO.08-06 CLOSE
ment mode.
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
Axxx TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
A: xxx Bxxx TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
Cxxx TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY

0 255
Dxxx TC1 MIDDLE SPEED_CL CMY
CNMON
1 EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE or after 30 sec.
0
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT

6) Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the Axxx TC1 LOW SPEEDCL K
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted A: xxx Bxxx TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
mode. 0 255
Cxxx TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY
Dxxx TC1 MIDDLE SPEED_CL CMY

The developing bias voltage is outputted for 30sec. EXECUTE OK
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
key.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified
voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is out-
putted.
Default
Setting Default Actual output value
Item Display Content
range value setting range Actual
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer COLOR K Low speed 0 to 255 232 500V to 5000V 4500V
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference Middle speed 0 to 255 232 500V to 5000V 4500V
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY value CMY Low speed 0 to 255 139 500V to 5000V 2500V
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY Middle speed 0 to 255 139 500V to 5000V 2500V
E TC1 LOW SPEED BW K BLACK K Low speed 0 to 255 232 500V to 5000V 4500V
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 0 to 255 232 500V to 5000V 4500V
G TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer COLOR Normal Front surface 51 to 255 100 2A to 45A 12.5A
H TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias reference paper Back surface 51 to 255 100 2A to 45A 12.5A
I TC2 PLAIN BW SPX value BLACK Front surface 51 to 255 90 2A to 45A 10A
J TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 to 255 90 2A to 45A 10A
K TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX COLOR Heavy paper 51 to 255 69 2A to 45A 6A
L TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX BLACK 51 to 255 69 2A to 45A 6A
M TC2 OHP CL COLOR OHP 51 to 255 60 2A to 45A 4A
N TC2 OHP BW BLACK 51 to 255 60 2A to 45A 4A
O TC2 ENVELOPE CL COLOR Envelope 51 to 255 184 2A to 45A 30A
P TC2 ENVELOPE BW BLACK 51 to 255 184 2A to 45A 30A
Q TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 to 255 79 2A to 45A 8A
R TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer Low speed print 51 to 255 72 50V to 1500 200V
S TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning bias Middle speed print 51 to 255 72 50V to 1500V 200V
T TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning 51 to 255 156 50V to 1500V 800V
ADJ 5 Image density sensor, image 5-A Color image density sensor calibration
1) Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste
registration sensor adjustment toner box.
There are some assembly variations in the image density sensor 2) Remove the primary transfer unit fixing screw.
section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed.
* When the image density sensor is replaced.
* When the image resist sensor is replaced.
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor,
the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor.
There are following adjustment methods.
* Color image density sensor adjustment (Calibration with the 3) Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
adjustment jig) SIM44-13 primary transfer belt tension.
* Black image density sensor and the image registration sensor
adjustment SIM44-2
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the fol-
lowing items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor, the black
image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are
clean.
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate UN LOCK
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer

unit is released manually, turn on the power again after com-
pletion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
2 : Feb. 15 2006
4) Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).

Adjustment Default
5) Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer Display/Item Content
value range value
belt unit. A PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 255 108
CARB OUT LED current adjustment
target value
B PCS_CL Color image density sensor 0 255 0
DARK dark-voltage level
C PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 255 21
LED ADJ LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* PCU PWB
2 6) Install the image density sensor calibration jig (UKOG-
0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing section. * Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
Engage the pawl (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide it scratch, discoloration)
to the rear frame side. NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera-
ture, low humidity and dark place.
5-B Color image density sensor, black image

A
A density sensor, image registration sensor
A
adjustment
0
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
PCS_CL LED ADJ : xx PCS_ GRND : xx
PCS_ LED ADJ : xx PCS_K BELT MAX : xx
PCS_CL DARK : xx PCS_KBELTMIN : xx
7) Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode. PCS_K DARK : xx PCS_KBELTDIF : xx
EXECUTE
1/4
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-13 CLOSE 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT The color image density sensor, the black image density sen-
PCS CL CARB OUT : xxx sor, and the image registration sensor are automatically
PCS CL DARK : xxx
adjusted.
PCS CL LED ADJ : xxx
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
EXECUTE
1/1
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or when the color sensor
adjustment is completed
0
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
PCS CL CARB OUT : xxx
PCS CL DARK : xxx
PCS CL LED ADJ : xxx
EXECUTE
1/1
8) Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).

9) Install the waste toner bottle to the main unit.
10) Close the front cabinet.
Color image sensor calibration is automatically executed.
When the operation is completed, the adjustment result is dis-
played and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Display/Item Content Adjustment value range Default value
PRO CON A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 255 21
B PCS _K LED ADJ Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 255 21
C PCS_CL DARK Color image sensor dark voltage 0 255 0
D PCS_K DARK Black image density sensor dark voltage 0 255 0
E PCS_K GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment 0 255 0
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) 0 255 0
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) 0 255 0
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item F Item G) 0 255 0
REGIST I REG_F LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F 1 255 56
J REG_R LED ADJ Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R 1 255 56
K REG_F DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage F 0 255 0
L REG_R DARK Image registration sensor dark voltage R 0 255 0
M REG_F GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment 0 255 0
N REG_R GRND Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment 0 256 0
O REG_F BELTMAX Belt base detection level (Max.) F 0 255 0
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) F 0 255 0
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item O Item P) 0 255 0
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt base detection level (Max.) R 0 255 0
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt base detection level (Min.) R 0 255 0
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt base detection level difference (Item R Item S) 0 255 0
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch detection level F (K) 0 255 0
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch detection level F (C) 0 255 0
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch detection level F (M) 0 255 0
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch detection level F (Y) 0 255 0
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch detection level R (K) 0 255 0
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch detection level R (C) 0 255 0
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch detection level R (M) 0 255 0
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch detection level R (Y) 0 255 0
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis- 1) Enter SIM61-4 mode.
played.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. 0
CLOSE
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again. TEST SIMULATION NO.61-04
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.

LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
Axxx MULTICOUNT
* Color image density sensor A: xxx B x PAPERCS1
* Black image density sensor 1 999
* Image registration sensor

EXECUTE OK
* PCU PWB
* Transfer belt (dirt, scratch) 10-key
EXECUTE
* Transfer belt cleaner EXECUTE
or end of print
0
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU TEST SIMULATION NO.61-04 CLOSE
unit) LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Axxx
(SELF

PRINT)
MULTICOUNT
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: A: 2 B x PAPERCS1
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. 1 999
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
EXECUTE OK
* When a color image registration mistake occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed. 2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
(Required depending on the cases.) changing the value of set item B.
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth). The check pattern is printed out.
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
Comparison line R
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced. 0.5 mm or less
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
adjustment. Direction A Direction B
Reference line
F
4) Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle). b) Measure the shortest distance between the cross pattern
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns on the extended line of the vertical line and the paper side.
printed in black. If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
There are following two methods of checking the black image adjust.
for any skew (right angle). If not, execute the following procedures.
Method 1: Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the 5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
cross point of the cross pattern. Check the difference in the
6) Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift
length of the diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the
Method 2: Use the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for LSU (writing) unit skew.
judgment of good or no good. (When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
NOTE: skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
IN the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
be used in advance.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
(Method 1) adjustment screw in the direction of X.
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the cross (When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
point of the outside cross pattern. skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
R
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
Diagonal line D
Y X
Diagonal line C
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C 7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
and D of the diagonal lines. 8) Execute procedures 3) 4).
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in (Repeat procedures 5) 8) until a satisfactory result is
the following range. obtained.)
C D = 0.8mm 9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, the adjustment screw.
there is no need to adjust. (The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
(Method 2) above.)
a) Fit the three cross points of the cross patterns in a row with 10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
the side of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for checking for any skew image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust-
(right angle). ment.
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper R
Comparison line R *B
0.5 mm or less
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
Direction A Direction B *A
Direction A Direction B
*B
*A: Rough adjustment pattern

Reference line *B: Fine adjustment pattern
F In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front

frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
The cross patterns in a row print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within 1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the same-
color print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all 7-A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare adjustment)
only the same-color patterns.) 1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below. 0
SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to TEST
adjust. AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATIONDLUM POSITION
,MAIN F MAIN R SUB PHASE
C xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx)
M xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx)
Y M C Y xxx (xx) xxx (xx) xxx (xx)

REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE 1/1
EXECUTE
Normal end
0
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION

NOW EXECUTING
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by
5 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is EXECUTE
skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller character)
from the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counter-
clockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of Abnormal end
B (to the larger character), turn the adjustment screw clock-
wise.
12) Print the check pattern. 0
13) Check the color image skew pattern. TEST
Repeat procedures 11) 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained. PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing ERRORTONNER EMPTY
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment

EXECUTE
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases: 2) Press [ALL] key.
* When the OPC drum is replaced. (The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/
image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
* When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button
* When U2 trouble occurs. and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registra-
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced. tion adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced. adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
adjustment simultaneously.
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
adjustment are executed automatically.
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjust-
ment result is displayed.
MAIN, SUB: Image regist adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 105.0, previous time 103.0: 105.0 (+2)
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 90, previous time 45: 3 (2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
7-B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
0
DRUM POSITION SETTING

A x PRINT MODESET VALUE
A: x B x COLOR
C x PAPERSELECT
1 3
EXECUTE OK
8
10-key
OK
Each identification number ("1" "8") is printed on each printed

0 page of 8 adjustment patterns.
5) Check the deflection in 94mm pitch cycle of each C/M/Y print
pattern. Select a print pattern of the smallest deflection for
A: x B x COLOR each color of C/M/Y, and use the pattern identification number
1 3
C x PAPERSELECT
as the adjustment value, and enter it to set item B. Press [OK]
key.
EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE EXECUTE
or end of print
0

A: x B x COLOR
C x PAPERSELECT
1 3
EXECUTE OK
10-key
OK
94mm 94mm 94mm 94mm
0 NOTE: If there is a peculiar deflection other than the drum cycle

(94mm pitch), check the following conditions.
A x PRINT MODE45 * OPC drum drive section
A: x B x COLOR
* Transfer belt drive section
C x PAPERSELECT
1 3
* Paper feed drive section
EXECUTE
* Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)
OK
EXECUTE EXECUTE
ADJ 8 Print engine image
or end of print magnification ratio adjustment
0 (BK) (Main scanning direction)
TEST
DRUM
SIMULATION NO.44-31
POSITION SETTING
CLOSE
(Print engine section)
A 1 PRINT MODE45
A: 1 B 2
C 2

COLOR
8-A Print engine image magnification ratio
1 3
adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction)
EXECUTE OK
(Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
2) Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
press [OK] key.
3) Select the paper feed stage with A3 (or 11 x 17) in it with
PAPER SELECT of set item C, and press [OK] key. * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
The adjustment patterns (8 pages) are printed.
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-10
0
CLOSE
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
Axxx BK-MAG
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
A: xxx B xx MTF
C xx CS1
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
64 140
D xx CS2
scanning direction) is performed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
EXECUTE OK
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
EXECUTE * When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
EXECUTE * When the duplex section is disassembled.
end of print * When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
0
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.
TEST
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP

Axxx BK-MAG * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
A: xxx Bxx MTF
Cxx CS1
64 140
Dxx CS2
(Caution)
* Before execution of this adjustment, check the following item.
EXECUTE OK
* Check to insure that the print engine image magnification ratio
adjustment (BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray. adjusted.
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll 1) Enter SIM50-10 mode.
key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 0
The check pattern is printed. TEST
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SET UP

5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240 A : xxx ; BK- MAG
0.5mm. A: xxx B : xx ; MTF
C : xx ; CS1
[ 60~140 ]
D : xx ; CS2
EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
0
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SET UP

A : xxx ; BK- MAG
A: xxx B : xx ; MTF
C : xx ; CS1
[ 60~140 ]
D : xx ; CS2
EXECUTE OK
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures

below. 2) Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corre-
6) Change the set value of set item A. sponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed Set Default
by 0.1mm. Display/Item Content
range value
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 140 100
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set magnification ratio BK
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the B MFT Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
main scanning direction is decreased. value (Manual feed tray)
Repeat procedures 2) 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained. C CS1 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
value (Paper feed tray 1)
D CS2 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
E CS3 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
F CS4 Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
G LCC Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50
value (LCC)
Set Default When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
Display/Item Content changed by about 0.1mm.
range value
H ADU Print off-center adjustment 1 99 50 Repeat procedures 3) 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
value (ADU) are satisfied.
Note: Before execution of
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
this adjustment, check to
insure that the adjustment the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
items A G have been 8) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
properly adjusted. If not, pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
this adjustment cannot be and change the gear unit position in the front/back frame direc-
made properly. tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 999 1
J PAPER MFT Paper feed Manual paper 16 1 2 (CS 1)
tray select feed tray
CS 1 Paper feed 2
tray 1
CS 2 Paper feed 3
tray 2
CS 3 Paper feed 4
tray 3
CS 4 Paper feed 5
tray 4
LCC LCC 6
K DUPLEX YES Duplex Selected 01 0 1 (NO)
print select
3) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check the adjustment pattern image position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment

* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
direction occurs.
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning
direction occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
* When maintenance is executed. (Replacement of the OPC drum,
the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.)
RV: REAR VOID AREA
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
FV: FRONT VOID AREA scanning direction) is performed.
RV + FV 4.0mm * When U2 trouble occurs.
RV = 2.0 2.0mm * When the PCU PWB is replaced.
FV = 2.0 2.0mm * When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the proce- Note before adjustment
dures below.
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments
6) Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B H) to be must have been completed.)
adjusted with the scroll key.
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
7) Change the adjustment value.
* Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key. scanning direction) (Print engine section)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
Adjustment Default
10-A Image registration adjustment (Main Display/Item Content
value range value
scanning direction, sub scanning direction) REGIST MAIN C Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
(Auto adjustment) R adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
(Cyan) (R side)
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
M Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
cuted simultaneously and automatically.
adjustment value (Main
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode. scanning direction)
(Magenta) (R side)
0 Y Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE adjustment value (Main
DLUM POSITION
scanning direction)
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION &
(Yellow) (R side)
,MAIN F MAIN R SUB PHASE
SUB C Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
C xxx (x) xxx (x) xxx (x) xxx (x) adjustment value (Sub
M xxx (x) xxx (x) xxx (x) scanning direction)
Y xxx(x) xxx (x) xxx (x) (Cyan)
REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE M Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
1/1
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
EXECUTE
Normal end Y Image registration 1.0 199.0 100
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
0 (Yellow)
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.
NOW EXECUTING ( ): Difference from the previous value.
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image
EXECUTE registration adjustment mode below.
* Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
Abnormal end adjustment) (SIM50-20)
* Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-21)
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE 10-B Image registration adjustment (Main
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
ERRORTONNER EMPTY
0
EXECUTE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION

Axxx CYAN(FRONT)
2) Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjust- A: xxx Bxxx CYAN(REAR)
ment auto adjustment mode. 1 199

Cxxx MAGENTA(FRONT)
Dxxx MAGENTA(REAR)
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto EXECUTE OK
adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,

[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjust- 10-key EXECUTE
ment result is displayed.
It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment. EXECUTE
End of print
Adjustment Default
Display/Item Content
value range value
REGIST MAIN C Image registration 1.0 199.0 100 0
F adjustment value (Main TEST SIMULATION NO.50-20 CLOSE
scanning direction) REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION

(Cyan) (F side) Axxx CYAN(FRONT)
M Image registration 1.0 199.0 100 A: xxx Bxxx CYAN(REAR)
adjustment value (Main Cxxx MAGENTA(FRONT)

1 199
scanning direction) Dxxx MAGENTA(REAR)
(Magenta) (F side)
Y Image registration 1.0 199.0 100 EXECUTE OK
adjustment value (Main

scanning direction)
(Yellow) (F side)
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item H.
The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scan-
ning direction is printed.

A A
C C
A A
C C
A A
C C
B B
A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 1)
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat-
Adjustment Default
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear Display/Item Content
value range value
frame sides.
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
Use the visually highest color density section as the center, (FRONT) value (Main scanning
and measure the shift amount. direction) (Cyan) (F side)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
adjusted independently. (REAR) value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
Rough adjustment Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
print pattern check: the center for the rough adjustment reference
(REAR) value (Main scanning
pattern.
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
Fine adjustment Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
print pattern check: center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0 direction) (Yellow) (F side)
1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
adjustment is not required.) (REAR) value (Main scanning
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode direction) (Yellow) (R side)
adjustment item A F to be adjusted with the scroll key and Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is
change the adjustment value to adjust. obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
the adjustment value)
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as
the center, and used as the measurement value. -20
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern

Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc-

tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark

as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as
60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20.

(Example)

In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjust-
ment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment

shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the The shift amount from the adjustment reference position
minus polarity. is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
(Example) F.
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 27. b) Adjustment value calculation
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7) Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is

used as the new adjustment value.

Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift

amount (correction value)

20 (When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)

Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)

Yellow
E F

Magenta
C D

Cyan
A B

(Example)
10-C Image registration adjustment (Sub
Previous value before adjustment New adjustment value scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
A: 100 A: 93 (= 100 7) 1) Enter SIM50-21 mode.
B: 112 B: 100 (= 112 12)
C: 95 C: 96 (= 95 + 1) 0
D: 98 D: 109 (= 98 + 11) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-21 CLOSE
E: 102 E: 109 (= 102 + 7)
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION
F: 96 F: 118 (= 96 + 22) Axxx CYAN
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the A: xxx Bxxx MAGENTA
other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be

Cxxx YELLOW
1 199
Dxxx MULTIOUNT
careful of that.
EXECUTE OK
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
0
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION

Axx CYAN
A: xxx Bxx MAGENTA
Cxxx YELLOW
1 199
Dxxx MULTIOUNT
EXECUTE OK
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pat-
tern is printed.
C B

C: Adjustment range
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
tern positions of each color.
A
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
-20
Rough adjustment Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
print pattern check: the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
B

Fine adjustment Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
print pattern check: center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is positioned in the range of
0 1 for the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode

adjustment item A C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust.

Adjustment Default
value range value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
value (Sub scanning

direction) (Cyan)
B MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 199 100 C
value (Sub scanning

direction) (Magenta)
C YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 199 100
value (Sub scanning

direction) (Yellow)
Repeat procedures 3) 4) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.

(Measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value)
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
the center, and used as the measurement value of the
A
shift amount.
(Example) 20

The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc- B

tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line mark is scaled as 0, the first line
mark as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line

mark as 60. The interval between the rough adjustment
marks corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the

plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."

C: Adjustment range
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment ref-
C
erence position for each of the three adjustment items A
C.

b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new
adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
A B C

Previous adjustment value New adjustment value

A: 100 A: 73 (= 100 27)
B: 112 B: 119 (= 112 + 7)
C: 95 C: 110 (= 95 + 15)
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion

adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
11-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass. (For details, refer to Chapter [C]-3.)
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scan- edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
ner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.
If not, perform the following procedures.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures.
11-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact. distortion adjustment
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner 1) Make a test chart with A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
L
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L L
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference 11-C Scan image (main scanning direction)
position as shown below.) With the document cover open, distortion adjustment
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper. (Draw a rectangular
with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
If La = Lb, there is no distortion. ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
La Lb
If the four angles of the copy image are right angles, there is
no distortion. (Completion of the adjustment)
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.) If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between the image
distortions on the right and the left.
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, there is no difference between the right and the left
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the image distortions.
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan- If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
If not, perform the following procedures.
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) 6) until the condition of the procedure
3) is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit)."
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side. ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment
(CCD unit position adjustment)
* When the CCD unit is removed from the machine.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
1) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
0
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
Axx CCD(MAIN)
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
A: xx Bxx CCD(SUB)
right and the left heights of the scanner rail. Cxx SPF(MAIN)
1 99
Repeat the procedures 2) 5) until the difference between the Dxx SPF(SUB)
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.

OK
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) and make a 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
main scanning direction is within the specified range. adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main 3) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
scanning direction is in the specified range. below.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (Whole scanner)." 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
11-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole

scanner)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 11A, ADJ 11B, and ADJ 11C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
Example: Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm
on the copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
A A A
A
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
100mm scale CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
10 20 90 100 110 than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(Original)
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
1.0mm * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
Copy image
(1mm (1%) B
shorter than
10 20 90 100 110
the original)
A
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the

following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
ADJ 13 Scan image skew adjustment

(RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Document table
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
replaced.
mode)
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the copy image magnification ration in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
* Never loosen the screws marked with .

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Document table 0
mode) TEST SIMULATION NO.48-01 CLOSE
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
below. Axx CCD(MAIN)
A: xx Bxx CCD(SUB)
Cxx SPF(MAIN)
1 99
Dxx SPF(SUB)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
OK
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
Copy magnification ratio

(Original dimension Copy dimension)
= x 100 [%]
Original dimension
(Example 1)
Copy A
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. (Shorter than 10 20 90 100 110
the original)
0
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
Axx CCD(MAIN)
A: xx Bxx CCD(SUB)
Cxx SPF(MAIN) Scale

1 99
Dxx SPF(SUB) (Original) 10 20 90 100 110
OK
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
(Example 2)
copy mode and make a copy. Copy B
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified (Longer than 10 20 90 100 110
range (100 1.0%). the original)
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
procedure. range (100 1.0%).
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%. 5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
ratio is within the specified range (100 1.0%). tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table Repeat the procedures 3) 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 1.0%).
mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio
adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
15-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
(Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
15-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
(Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
adjustment The entered value is set.
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. copy mode and make a copy.
* When the RSPF section is disassembled. Repeat the procedures of 2) 6) until the above condition is
* When the RSPF unit is installed. satisfied.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. 16-B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode)
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
16-A Scan image off-center (Document table ADJ 17 Print area (Void area)
mode) adjustment (Print engine
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the section)
adjustment mode (document table or RSPF).
* When the paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray is replace.
* When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replace.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.

* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
2) Check the copy image center position. Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 8 Print
If A B = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required. image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direc-
tion) (Print engine section) in advance.
0

Axxx BK-MAG
A: xxx B xx MTF
C xx CS1
60 140
D xx CS2

EXECUTE OK

EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
0

0
A xxx BK-MAG
A: xxx B xx MTF
ORGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP C xx CS1

A xx
60 140
OC
D xx CS2
A: xx Bxx SPF(SIDE1)
Cxx SPF(SIDE2)
EXECUTE OK
1 99
OK
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item 6) Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
adjustment target paper feed tray.
Standard
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Display/ Adjustment Default
Content adjustment
The adjustment pattern is printed. Item range value
value
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below DENA Void are Lead edge 1 99 30 3.0
are in the range of the standard values. amount void area 1.0mm
adjustment adjustment
Content Standard adjustment value DENB Rear edge 1 99 20 2.0
X Lead edge void area 3.0 1.0mm void area 1.0mm
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 1.0mm adjustment
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 2.0mm FRONT/ FRONT/ 1 99 20 2.0
REAR REAR void 2.0mm
Z1 area
2.02.0mm adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by
1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
(Note)
X The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
3.01.0mm Y follows:
2.01.0mm Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.
Display Adjustment Default

Content
item range value
Z2
RRCB- Image lead Resist Standard 1 99 50
2.02.0mm
CS12 edge motor ON cassette
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. RRCB- position timing Desk 1 99 50
CS34 adjustment adjustment
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
RRCB- value LCC 1 99 50
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
LCC
RRCB- Manual 1 99 50
MFT feed
0 RRCB- ADU 1 99 50
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-01 CLOSE ADU
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
A xx RRCA
obtained.
A: xx B xx RRCB-CS12
C xx RRCB-CS34
0 99
D xx
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image

RRCB-LCC
OK
loss adjustment
10-key
18-A Copy image position, image loss
OK
adjustment (Document table mode)
0
SIMULATION NO.5001 CLOSE * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
TEST
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE

A xx RRCA * When the resist roller section is disassembled.
C xx RRCB-CS34
0 99
D xx RRCB-LCC
OK * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
the ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
section) has been completed normally.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure 2) Enter the simulation 50-1 mode.
below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction 0
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide TEST SIMULATION NO.50-01 CLOSE
plate. LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead A xx RRCA
edge can be seen. C xx RRCB-CS34
0 99
D xx RRCB-LCC
OK
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
10-key
OK
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.5001 CLOSE

A xx RRCA
C xx RRCB-CS34
0 99
D xx RRCB-LCC
OK
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
Item Display item Content Adjustment range Default value

A RRCA Image lead edge position Document lead edge reference position (OC) 0 99 50
B RRCB-CS12 adjustment value Resist motor ON timing Standard cassette 1 99 50
C RRCB-CS34 adjustment Desk 1 99 50
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 99 50
E RRCB-MFT Manual feed 1 99 50
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 99 50
G LEAD Image loss adjustment Lead edge image loss adjustment 0 99 30
H SIDE Side image loss adjustment 0 99 20
I DENA Void area amount adjustment Lead edge void area adjustment 1 99 30
J DENB Rear edge void area adjustment 1 99 20
K FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 99 20
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment. 5) Image loss adjustment
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200% default value, it is adjusted to the standard state.
mode. If it is not in the above standard state, or when it is set to a
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge desired value, change these adjustment items.
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
Paper lead edge
copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
Copy area Maginification ratio: 400%
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
1 2 3 4
Scale image 3.0mm position 5mm 10mm
Paper lead
edge
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm

Standard
Display/ Adjustment Default
Content adjustment
100% Item range value
value
5mm 10mm
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 99 30 3.0
adjustment image loss 1.0mm
value adjustment
200% SIDE Side image 0 99 20 2.0
5mm 10mm loss 1.0mm
adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image loss is
changed by 0.1mm.
18-B Copy image position, image loss
adjustment (RSPF mode) 0
(Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-05 CLOSE
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)

Axxx DEN-C
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position A: xxx Bxxx
Cxxx
DEN-B
FRONT/REAR
adjustment (Printer mode) 1 99

Dxxx MULTI COUNT
(Print engine section) EXECUTE OK

* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. EXECUTE
End of print
(Caution) 0
This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge TEST SIMULATION NO.50-05 CLOSE
void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)
mode. Axxx DEN-C
A: xxx Bxxx DEN-B
Cxxx FRONT/REAR
1 99
Dxxx MULTI COUNT
EXECUTE OK
2) Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
Display/Item Content Adjustment range Default value Standard adjustment value
A DEN-C Printer print image lead edge adjustment 1 99 30 3.0 2.0mm
D MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 999 1
E PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 16 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Select 01 0 1 (NO)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
The adjustment pattern is printed. ment item DENC with the scroll key.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment 6) Change the adjustment value.
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
in the standard adjustment value range. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 2.0mm printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is
decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
3.02.0mm
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density

adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density
adjustment
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/
density adjustment must be executed.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following * Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/
procedures. density adjustment
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment,
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density Default
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execu- Display Content Set range
value
tion of the image quality adjustments.) TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Normal Allow
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly. YES/NO setting (Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
Job Simulation TN_COV Toner density print rate (Allow: 0: YES) Allow
Adjustment item
No to be used correction YES/NO setting
ADJ Image density ADJ Color image sensor calibration 44-13
5 sensor, image 5A TN_PROCON Toner density process control Allow
registration ADJColor image density sensor, 44-2 correction YES/NO setting
sensor 5B black image density sensor,
adjustment image registration sensor TN_ENV Toner density environment Allow
adjustment correction YES/NO setting
ADJ Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit) 64-1/61-4
6 TN_DRIP Toner density correction, Allow
ADJ OPC drum ADJ OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22 unconditional supply YES/
7 phase 7A (Auto adjustment) NO setting
adjustment ADJ OPC drum phase adjustment 44-31 TN_SPEND Toner compulsory Allow
7B (Manual adjustment) consumption mode YES/NO
ADJ Image ADJ Image registration adjustment 50-22 setting
10 registration 10A (Main scanning direction, sub PHT 1Pixel half-tone process Inhibit
adjustment scanning direction) (Auto control correction YES/NO
(Print engine adjustment) setting
section) ADJ Image registration adjustment 50-20 AR_AUTO Auto resist adjustment YES/ Allow
10B (Main scanning direction) NO setting
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ Image registration adjustment 50-21 AR_ERROR Error check YES/NO setting Allow
10C (Sub scanning direction) during auto resist adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment YES/ Allow
2) The set values of the following simulations must be set to the
NO setting
default values.
SENSITIVITY Toner density correction Inhibit
SIM No Adjustment/setting item Default value
YES/NO setting
46-1 AU 50
46-2 AL 50 PRT_HT Half tone process control Allow
46-10 AO 500 printer correction feedback
46-16 AO 500 Enable/Disable setting
3) The following items (correction functions) of SIM 44-1 must be (The following items affect the copy color balance/density
set to ENABLE (default). adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
Default
Display Content Set range 1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
value
HV Normal operation high- Normal Allow Simulation
density process control YES/ (Inhibit: 1: NO) Job No Adjustment item
to be used
NO setting Highlighted
ADJ 1 Developing doctor gap adjustment
HT Normal operation half-tone (Allow: 0: YES) Allow
ADJ 2 Developing roller main pole position adjustment
process control YES/NO
ADJ 4 High voltage ADJ Main charger grid voltage 8-2
setting
adjustment 4A adjustment
TC Transfer output correction Allow
ADJ Developing bias voltage 8-1
YES/NO setting
4B adjustment
ADJ Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
MD VG Membrane decrease grid Allow
4C
voltage correction YES/NO
setting ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position
adjustment)
MD LD Membrane decrease laser Inhibit
power voltage correction (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
YES/NO setting color balance/density adjustment)
MD EV Membrane decrease Allow Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
environment grid voltage
balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
correction YES/NO setting
servicing conditions.
MD DL Membrane decrease Allow
discharge light quantity Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
correction YES/NO setting procedures depending on the actual conditions.
MD DL EV Membrane decrease Inhibit There are following four, major cases.
environment discharge light
1) When installing the machine.
quantity correction YES/NO
setting 2) When the periodic maintenance is performed.
TN_HUM Toner density humidity Allow 3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
correction YES/NO setting (When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
TN_AREA Toner density area correction Allow
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
YES/NO setting
(2) Flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment procedures
START
When in repair, check/maintenance (with replacing consumable parts)

When in
After After After cleaning
After After install/repair/check
JOB No Work item Simulation replacing replacement scanner
replacing replacing (without replacing
developer of the image (reading)
OPC drum transfer belt consumable parts)
drum density sensor section
OPC drum counter clear 24-7

Developer counter clear 24-5
ADJ 5A Color image density sensor
calibration
44-13

ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22 (44-31)
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment
(LSU (writing) unit)
64-1/61-4

ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment
50-22 (50-20/
50-21)

The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ."
Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)
Check the copy color balance/density.

(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ/
UKOG-0283FCZZ is used.)
Perform ADJ 20A

Are the copy No Yes CCD gamma adjustment.
color balance and density Is the CCD replaced? SIM 63-3 (Normal document mode)
at satisfactory
levels? Set the ST chart
(UKOG-0280FCZZ) on
the original table.
Yes No
Enter the SIM 63-03

mode and press the
Check the copy color balance/density. EXECUTE key.
(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ/
UKOG-0283FCZZ is used.)
(to Next page) (to Next page) : Standard adjustment flow
(from Previous page) (from Previous page)
Perform ADJ 20B copy color balance/
3 density auto adjustment. (SIM 46-24)
Can the Enter the SIM 46-24 mode and select
copy color balance and No A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
No Use SIM 46-21 to
Press the EXECUTE key. (The
Yes Are the
print the color
adjustment pattern 1 is printed.)
color balance
and density at the balance check
4 satisfactory
levels?
sheet, and check Set the adjustment pattern 1
the patch color on the original table, select
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 20C balance of process the FACTORY mode, and
copy color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 46-21) Yes black. press the EXECUTE key.
/Check the copy (Auto adjustment step 1) *1
color balance and
Perform the initial setup of half tone density.
image correction. (SIM 44-21) Check in the Press the OK key. (The initial
(Manual operation) setup of half tone image correction
Text/Printed photo is automatically performed.)
Execute the half tone image correction. mode. (Use the
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26) test chart
UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
1 Cancel SIM 46-24.
Check the copy color balance and the density.
(Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.)
*2 (Use the test chart UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
The number of times
is limited to 3 times Were all
the three kinds of
Are the copy color balance/density adjustment 4
No color balance and density
targets changed?
Yes
(SIM 63-11)
at satisfactory
levels? Change the color balance/density
No adjustment factory targets. 3
Yes (SIM 63-11)
Were the
No copy color balance and Yes Make the factory color balance target
density Were (when adjusting the copy color
customized? the three kinds of
balance/density with SIM 46-24) same
color balance/density adjustment
as the service color balance target and
targets changed?
Yes (SIM 63-11) the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM63-8)
Auto color balance adjustment No
service target is set.
Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
Perform the initial setup of half tone

Press the SETUP key. image correction. (SIM 44-21)
1
Set the color patch image (adjustment Execute the half tone image correction.
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/ (Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.
Check the copy color balance and density.
Check in the (Manual operation)
Press the REPEAT key. Text/Printed photo mode.
(Use the test chart UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
Press the EXECUTE key.

Are the
No copy color
balance and the density
Press the OK key.
*2 in the specified
The number of level ?
times is limited to
Cancel SIM 63-7.
3 times
Yes
Is the color balance/ Perform ADJ 20F copy color

density adjustment performed
Yes balance/density adjustment
for each copy mode ? for each copy mode separately.
(Does the user request (SIM 46-10)
that ?)
No
The copy color *1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the
balance and SERVICE mode.
density adjustment *2: If a satisfactory result in the copy color balance or the density
completed. cannot be obtained by repetition of this loop of procedures
3 times or more, there may be a problem in the machine conditions.
Perform the printer color balance Check the cause, repair the trouble section, and execute all the
adjustment. adjustment from the beginning again.
: Standard adjustment flow
(3) Copy color balance and density check
20-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(Note)
(Normal document copy mode)
Before checking the coy color balance and density, be sure to exe-
cute the following jobs. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) * When the CCD unit is replaced.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) * When a U2 trouble occurs.
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(Method) * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy (1) Note before adjustment
of the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ), and check that
1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
they are proper.
surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.
color copy mode
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart (UK0G- free from dirt and scratches.
0283FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "3" in the Text/Printed
If they are dirty, clean them.
Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
ment mode must be set to the default (center). (2) Adjustment procedures
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color. 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
To check the density, use the gray chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). Set ment table.
the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
(Manual). the left side.
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment
mode must be set to the default (center).
Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0283FCZZ) to check.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Patch 2 is copied.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
(Black-and-white copy) ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart method using the SIT chart.
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART NOTE:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
Patch 3 is copied. 2) Enter the SIM 63-03 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
Patch 1 is not copied.
The automatic adjustment is started. During the adjustment,
Check with the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. After completion of the adjust-
ment, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.
0
(Color copy) TEST SIMULATION NO.63-03 CLOSE
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
Serviceman chart (Color patch section) OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
#7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
#13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16:15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
#19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
B G R OC 1/4
NOTE:
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by
The densities of patches 1 6 of Patch 7 is slightly
each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied. sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and tempera-
ture, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark
place of low temperature and low humidity.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
20-B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto selected.)
adjustment) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
This adjustment is required in the following cases: 3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is procedure 2) on the document table.
replaced. Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
* When the CCD unit is replaced. so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
* When a U2 trouble occurs. sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust-
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. ment pattern) paper.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 46-
24 or the user program automatically.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.) 4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to [EXECUTE] key.
reduce the number of service calls. When the color balance is customized with the manual color
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance. request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does balance, select the service target.
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
0
SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
the normal color balance.
,
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
understood.
FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE
b. Note for executing the color balance adjustment (Auto The copy color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
adjustment) executed to print the color balance check patch image. Wait
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop- Remark:
erly. (Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color. balance auto adjustment menu.)
4) Before execution of the image quality check and the image There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc- auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
state. above two.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correc- Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
tion) forcibly. (SIM44-6) selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26) 63-11.)
c. Adjustment procedure (Auto color balance adjustment by Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
the serviceman) tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
0 color balance when shipping.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT can be registered with SIM 63-7.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 1117 SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the High density Low density
half tone image correction is performed.
Y
M
0
SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE C
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT Bk
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA CMY
mixed
,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE. color
Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
REPEAT OK 1) The max. density

section is not blurred. 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
Remark: 4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. 2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image The patch density is changed gradually. C, and BK are not copied.
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-

(Method 3)
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes. Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal-
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
ance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance
displayed.
and density check.)
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
displayed.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
0
CLOSE
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24

If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE. dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
6) Check the color balance and density. 7) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
(Method 1) (Forcible execution)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
image is within the following specifications. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
Fig. 1 PG image 0
High density Low density SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
TEST
Y
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
M TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
Bk
EXECUTE
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-

1) The max. density
section is not blurred. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK Patch A of each of Y, M, (Normal end (Auto transition))

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. C, and BK are not copied.
The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter 0

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
not be reversed. HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
The density level of each color must be almost at the same [S_VALUE]
level. #1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
Patch B may not be copied. #6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
Patch A must not be copied. #11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
(Method 2) K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1

By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
0 2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
erly.
3) Set the color patch image adjustment patter on the document
[S_VALUE]
table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it.
#1: ERR, #2: ERR, #3: ERR, #4: ERR, #5: ERR
4) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
5) Before execution of the image quality check and adjustment,
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR be sure to execute the following corrections to set the image
K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
forming section to the optimum state.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correc-
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the * Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density
check.) c. Adjustment procedure
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per- 1) Enter the SIM 46-21 mode.
form the following procedures.
0
9) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
10) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution) A : xxx POINT1
(SIM44-26) A: xxx B : xxx POINT2
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the C : xxx POINT3
245 755
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color bal- D : xxx POINT4
ance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/den-

K C M Y
sity check.) EXECUTE OK
Repeat the procedures 9) 11) until a satisfactory result is

obtained. C EXECUTE
However, the number of times of repeat is limited to 3 times. If the
copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the specified 10-key
level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may be another
cause. or self print end
EXECUTE
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
0
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ M19C) (Man-
ual adjustment). ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx POINT1
A: xxx B : xxx POINT2
20-C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual C : xxx POINT3

245 755
adjustment) D : xxx POINT4
This adjustment is required in the following cases: K C M Y EXECUTE OK

* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
* When the CCD is replaced. selected.)
* When a U2 trouble occurs. The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. balance is satisfactory.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. If not, execute the following procedures.
High density Low density
a. General Y
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to M
adjust the copy density (15 pts for each color) of CMYK according C
to a request from the user for changing (customizing) the color bal- Bk
ance because the automatic adjustment stated above is resulted in CMY
an unsatisfactory result or a fine adjustment is required. mixed
color
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal- 1) The max. density
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better and BK is very slightly copied.
efficiency. 4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

The patch density is changed gradually. C, and BK are not copied.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same (Abnormal end (Auto transition))
level.
Patch B may not be copied. 0
Patch A must not be copied. TEST SIMULATION NO.44-21 CLOSE
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard RESULT
color balance stated above. ERROR:K,C,M,Y

4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. RESULT EXECUTE
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 755 (1

999). When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500. This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To data as the reference data for the half tone correction.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. Immediately after execution of ADJ 20C (Color balance adjust-
Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satis- ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this proce-
fied. dure.
When ADJ 20B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively. operation is started.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient 8) Execute SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.
way of adjustment. (Forcible execution)
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G- 0
0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the copy TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
color balance/density check.)
7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
EXECUTE
0
TEST It takes several minute to complete the operation. After com-
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
0
EXECUTE HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
RESULT
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. COMPLETE
(Normal end (Auto transition)) RESULT EXECUTE
0 (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER 0

RESULT SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
TEST
COMPLETE
RESULT
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT EXECUTE
RESULT EXECUTE
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.
9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G- In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in to a desired level.
the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjust- This adjustment is required in the following cases:
ment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
density check.)
ment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) 9) until they are in the speci-
fied range. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
The number of repeat is, however, limited to 3 times. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
be another cause. * When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat- * When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment improper.
from the beginning. Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
(NOTE)
Kind Descriptions
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
A Factory There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each
color balance as the service target.
color of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not balance SIM 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The
required. (gamma) default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar- target which emphasizes color reproduction.
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in B Service This target is used when the user requests to customize
the next color balance adjustment. color the color balance to users desired level. In advance, the
balance users unique color balance must be registered as the
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target (gamma) service color balance target.
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode target The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg- with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM
istered color balance. 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes
(Auto color balance adjustment target gamma setting)
the color balance adjustment.
a. General When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the users color
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory
There are following three kinds of the target. color balance target set with SIM 63-11.
Factory color balance (gamma) target The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is
same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
Service color balance (gamma) target
color reproduction (DEF1))
User color balance (gamma) target If the user does not request for customizing the color
balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance
to the factory color balance target.
C User Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma)
color target
balance When the service color balance target is changed, this
(gamma) color balance target is also changed accordingly.
target
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Use SIM 63-11 to select
one of the three kinds of Factory color balance Service color balance Factory setting
color balance targets. =
target (DEF1) target
Factory color balance
target (DEF1) Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the
Factory color balance Service color balance
optional color balance, and
target (one of DEF1 3) target (Unique)
Factory color balance use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance Service color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
Factory color balance =
target (one of DEF1 3) target (The service color balance
target (DEF3)
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for

Service color balance
the user color balance =
target
adjustment
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target (DEF2) Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
Fig. 6 L*a*b* table color system +b* Direction of Yellow

chromaticity diagram
(hue and chrome)
SIM63-8
Hue
Factory color balance target
Factory color
(DEF1) = Service color balance
balance target
target/Color balance target for the
(DEF1)
user color balance adjustment
+a*
Direction Direction DEF1 Color balance with emphasis on color Default
of Green of Red reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2 Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Direction of Blue

SIM63-8 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ment (SIM 45-24). ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
SIM 63-11. judges as follows.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore, result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
changed accordingly. improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
the purpose of registration)
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
customized with SIM 46-21. made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
required.
b. Setting procedure
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
the service color balance target)
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern. 1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
(adjustment pattern).
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
same color balance target to another machine. optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. adjustment.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.
2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode. (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
0 the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
CLOSE
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
get with SIM 63-7.
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
be sure to execute this procedure.
K C M Y SETUP 1/1 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
3) Press [SETUP] key. 0

4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly TEST SIMULATION NO.6308 CLOSE
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 20C) on the document
table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
64-2 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal. ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-2, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
3) Press [YES] key.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
machine can be used.
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. ance as the factory color balance target.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
20-D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data. unnecessary to adjust)
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
0 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
TEST SIMULATION NO. 63-07 CLOSE
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUPSERVICE
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE].
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.
1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode.
EXECUTE
0
TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1 CLOSE
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image A xx AUTO
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again. A: xx B xx TEXT
C xx TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
1 99
0 D xx TEXT/PHOTO

OK
NOW CHART PATCH READING...
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color 0

(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys. TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1 CLOSE
CLOSE
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O. EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as A xx AUTO
A: xx B xx TEXT
abnormal. C xx TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again. 1 99
D xx TEXT/PHOTO
7) Press [OK] key.

OK
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
Adjustment Default 0
Display/Item (Copy mode)
value range value
E
A AUTO Auto 1 99 50
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
B TEXT Text 1 99 50
A xx AUTO1
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50
A: xx B xx AUTO2
PHOTO C xx TEXT
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50 1 99
D xx TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50

F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 99 50 OK
G MAP Map 1 99 50
H LIGHT Light document 1 99 50
10-key
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 99 50
COPY) document)
OK
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO (Copy document)
COPY) 0
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50 TEST SIMULATION NO.46-02 CLOSE
CLOSE
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone 1 99 50
A xx AUTO1
TONE enhancement)
A: xx B xx AUTO2
ENHANCEMENT) C xx TEXT
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50 1 99
D xx TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTO (COLOR (Color tone
TONE enhancement)
OK
ENHANCEMENT)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
(COLOR TONE (Color tone
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
Adjustment Default
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50 Display/Item (Copy mode)
value range value
(COLOR TONE (Color tone
A AUTO1 Auto 1 1 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 1 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph (Color 1 99 50
C TEXT Text 1 99 50
(COLOR TONE tone enhancement)
ENHANCEMENT) D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 99 50
PHOTO
Q MAP (COLOR TONE Map (Color tone 1 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 99 50
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 1 99 50 F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color (Copy 1 99 50 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) H MAP Map 1 99 50
T TWO COLOR Two-color (Red/ 1 99 50 I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 99 50
Black) copy COPY) document)
U TWO COLOR Two-color (Red/ 1 99 50 J TEXT/PRINTED Test/Printed Photo 1 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) Black) copy (Copy PHOTO (COPY TO (Copy document)
document) COPY)
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 99 50
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor- L LIGHT Light density 1 99 50
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result. document
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter- 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
obtained.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
20-E Copy density adjustment (each To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
monochrome copy mode) (Whole decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to
adjust) 20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color
This adjustment is required in the following cases. balance adjustment at each density level in
* When a U2 trouble occurs. each color copy mode) (Normally not
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. required)
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally * When a U2 trouble occurs.
individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is exe- * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
cuted when there is a request from the user.
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each
color copy mode.
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
is executed when there is a request from the user. When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased.
0 When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
with the color keys are collectively adjusted. That is, all the
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
TEXT PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO

density levels (points) from the low density point to the high
TEXT / PRT PHOTO
MAP LIGHT COPY ORG

density point can be adjusted collectively.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out.
1/1 The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
TEXT can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a cop and check it.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-10 CLOSE 20-G Monochrome copy density adjustment
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST] (Density adjustment at each density level in
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally
Axxx POINT 1
A: xxx Bxxx POINT 2
245 755
Cxxx
Dxxx
POINT 3
POINT 4
not required)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
C * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
10-key This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy
mode.
OK
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
0 1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST]

Axxx POINT 1 0
A: xxx Bxxx POINT 2
Cxxx POINT 3
245 755 ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
Dxxx POINT 4
Axxx POINT1
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
A: xxx Bxxx POINT2
Cxxx POINT3
373 627
EXECUTE EXECUTE [SYSTEM Dxxx POINT4
SETTINGS]
key EXECUTE OK
or end of print
0
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-10 CLOSE 10-key EXECUTE
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST]
Axxx POINT 1
A: xxx Bxxx POINT 2 EXECUTE

Cxxx POINT 3 or self print end
245 755
Dxxx POINT 4
K C M Y EXECUTE OK 0
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key. ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color Axxx POINT1
key. A: xxx Bxxx POINT2
Cxxx POINT3
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll 373 627
Dxxx POINT4
key.
EXECUTE OK
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default value
(Point) value range
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
A POINT1 Point 1 245 755 500
key.
B POINT2 Point 2 245 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 755 500 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
D POINT4 Point 4 245 755 500 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
E POINT5 Point 5 245 755 500 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
F POINT6 Point 6 245 755 500 sity is decreased.
G POINT7 Point 7 245 755 500 When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively
H POINT8 Point 8 245 755 500 adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low
I POINT9 Point 9 245 755 500 density point to the high density point can be adjusted collec-
J POINT10 Point 10 245 755 500 tively.
K POINT11 Point 11 245 755 500 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
L POINT12 Point 12 245 755 500 printed out.
M POINT13 Point 13 245 755 500
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
N POINT14 Point 14 245 755 500
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
O POINT15 Point 15 245 755 500
practically to make a cop and check it.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
20-H Gamma/density adjustment in the text
When the adjustment value of item A, C, or E is changed, the
image edge section (Normally not required) gamma at the edge area of text and lines is changed.
This adjustment is used to change the reproduction level of text When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast at
and outline to an optional level by changing the gamma and the the edge area of text and lines is increased. When the adjust-
density at the edge section of text image. The thickness of fine text ment value is decreased, the contrast is decreased.
and fine lines is changed by this adjustment.
When the adjustment value of item B, D, or F is increased, the
The adjustment result must be checked in the Text/Printed Photo image density at the edge area of text and lines is increased.
copy mode (Manual). When the value is decreased, the density is decreased.
This adjustment is enabled only in the Text mode, the Text/Printed 4) Press [OK] key.
Photo mode, and the Text/Photograph copy mode.
5) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
6) Make a copy in the TEXT/Printed Photo copy mode (Manual),
required in the following cases.
and check the copy.
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. checking.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. mode and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
0 obtained.
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP 20-I Copy color balance adjustment (Single

A xx BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
color copy mode) (Normally not required)
A: xx B xx BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C xx COLOR TEXT (SLOPE) This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
1 99
D xx COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE) the single color copy mode to the user's request.
The adjustment is made by changing YMC components of each
OK
color.
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
10-key is a request from the user.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
OK required in the following cases.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
0 * When a U2 trouble occurs.
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-27 CLOSE * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
A xx BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
A: xx B xx BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)

a. Adjustment procedures
1 99
C xx COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
D xx COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
0
OK
2) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP
Ax x x RED
Display/Item Adjustment Default A: xxx Bxxx GREEN
Content Cxxx BLUE

(Copy mode) range value 0 255
Dxxx YELLOW
A BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 99 50
(SLOPE) engine curve calculation K C M Y OK
coefficient (slope) setting
B BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 99 50
(INTERCEPT) engine curve calculation 10-key
coefficient (density) setting
C COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 99 50
OK
(SLOPE) engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
D COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 99 50 0
(INTERCEPT) engine curve calculation SIMULATION NO.46-25 CLOSE
TEST
E ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area 1 99 50 SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP
engine curve calculation

Axxx RED
(SLOPE)
coefficient (slope) setting A: xxx Bxxx GREEN
Cxxx BLUE
F ED TEXT Error diffusion edge area 1 99 50 0 255
Dxxx YELLOW
(INTERCEPT) engine curve calculation
K C M Y OK
2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
Adjustment Default value
Display/Item
value When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
C M Y
A RED 0 255 0 255 255 3) Press [OK] key.
B GREEN 0 255 255 0 255 When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibra-
C BLUE 0 255 255 255 0 tion (automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density)
D YELLOW 0 255 0 0 255 is not displayed in the user program mode.
E MAGENTA 0 255 0 255 0 (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
F CYAN 0 255 255 0 0 ment))
5) Press [OK] key. Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation. ance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above set-
7) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
copy. properly.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode 1) Enter the system setting mode.
and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures 2) Enter the copy setting mode.
until a satisfactory result is obtained. 3) Press the auto color calibration key.
20-J Auto color balance adjustment by the user
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
enable setting and adjustment)
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-53.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
color balance and density and the user's operational ability cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
are judged enough to execute the adjustment. the light density area is on the left side.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user. patch image (adjustment pattern).
Black Yellow
Red
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. Blue
b. Setting procedure
0
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
A x (1:YES 0:NO)
A: x
the display returns to the original operation screen.
0 1
20-K Background process condition setting in

OK the color auto copy mode
When the adjustment value is changed from the default adjustment
10-key value, this adjustment is required in the following cases.
OK
0 * When the user request for the adjustment.
This adjustment is used to set the condition for inhibiting copy of
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION the background depending on the document image kind and state.
A x (1:YES 0:NO)
A: x The setting is applied to the color auto copy mode.
0 1
OK
2 : Feb. 15 2006
1) Enter the SIM 46-33 mode. Set item A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7):
Used to set Enable/Disable of the background delete function
2 0 for various kinds of documents.
TEST SIMULATION NO.4633 CLOSE When the value of the set item corresponding to the document
kind is set to 1, the background delete function of the docu-
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS4DIGIT UNDER)
A 0 THCLMK_1
ment kind is enabled.
A: 0 B 0 THCLBK_1 To reproduce the document colors directly, set this setting to
C 0 ACSMSK_1
OFF (0).
0 9
D 0 THCLMK_2
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered
value to the memory.
BACK NEXT OK
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO):
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
2) Select COLOR AE mode with [NEXT] and [BACK] key. function is enabled for monochrome background documents.
3) Select the setting mode with the scroll key. Set to the range of 0 16.
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
Adjustment Default
Display/Item Content the set value.
range value
COLOR A SW_ ON Auto mode: Text 01 1
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
AE MODE1 OFF document Decrease the set value.
background After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
detection value to the memory.
B SW_ ON Auto mode: Text 01 1 Set item I (TH_MAX_COLOR):
MODE2 OFF mesh document
background Used to set the density level at which the background delete
detection function is enabled for color background documents.
C SW_ ON Auto mode: Text- 01 1 Set to the range of 0 16.
MODE3 OFF on-mesh To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
document
the set value.
background
detection To delete the background of dark-density documents:
D SW_ ON Auto mode: Mesh 01 0 Decrease the set value.
MODE4 OFF document After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
background value to the memory.
detection
Set item J (SW_NEWS):
E SW_ ON Auto mode: Photo 01 0
MODE5 OFF document Used to set Enable/Disable of the newspaper (monochrome)
background background delete function.
detection It is not affected by the set item H.
F SW_ ON Auto mode: text 01 0
For newspapers of color background, this setting is invalid.
MODE6 OFF document
background After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
detection value to the memory.
G SW_ ON Auto mode: Other 01 0 Set item A (TH_MODE_SCR):
MODE7 OFF document
Used to set the mesh are level at which the background delete
background
detection
function is enabled for printed documents with mesh images.
H TH_MAX_ Monochrome 0 32 15 To delete background of documents with much mesh area:
MONO background Increase the set value.
detection threshold To delete background of documents with less mesh area:
value Decrease the set value.
I TH_MAX_ Color background 0 32 15
COLOR detection threshold
Select TH_MODE_SCR, enter the set value, and press [SET]
value key to save the entered value to the memory.
J SW_NEWS Newspaper 01 0 (NOTE)
background Enable/Disable of the background delete operation is determined
forcible delete by AND condition of A (SW MODE1) G (SW MODE7), H (TH_
switch
MAX_MONO), I (TH_MAX_COLOR), and A (TH_MODE_SCR).
K SW_MODE_ Mesh area 13 3
For newspapers documents, however, it is determined by the set
SCR1 background
judgment switch
item J (SW_NEWS) only.
L SW_MODE_ Mesh area 01 0 Except for the above set items, do not change the setting in the
SCR2 background delete market. Set them to the default values.
select switch
M SW_MODE_ Auto other 12 2
MIX document
background
detection switch
N SW_HOSEI Correction table 08 4
correction (4 +4)
A TH_MODE_ Mesh ratio 0 10000 3000
SCR threshold value
B TH_SITAJI_ Background mesh 0 10000 3000
SCR threshold value
2 : Feb. 15 2006

20-L Color document identification level (ACS
operation) setting 2 0
When the machine is used with some adjustment values changed TEST SIMULATION NO.4633 CLOSE
from the default values, this adjustment is required in the following COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS4DIGIT UNDER)
cases. A 0 THCLMK_1
* When a U2 trouble occurs. A: 0 B 0 THCLBK_1
C 0 ACSMSK_1
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. 0 9
D 0 THCLMK_2
* When the user requests for the adjustment. BACK NEXT OK
This setting is used to set the recognition level of a color image in a

document.
2) Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
The actual ACS operation is executed according to the combination
of the judgment reference value in the color auto mode set by the 3) Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
device and this setting. When a monochrome document is not recognized as a mono-
When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a monochrome document, increase the set value.
chrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a When a color document is not recognized as a color docu-
color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the ment, decrease the set value.
color auto copy mode. After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment refer-
ence value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.
Large hue area Small hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
ACS color judgment setting
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set About 10mm x About 5mm x About 3mm x About 1mm x
optionally. 5mm 5mm 4mm 3mm
(30000 pixel or (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel) (7000 pixel) (1875 pixel)
more)
Can be set About About About About
optionally. 10mm 5mm 5mm 5mm 3mm 4mm 1mm 3mm
more)
Hue
C C
Large color level 5
area Hue
Hue level level 4
B B
(ACS/P/SIM
LEVEL) Hue
A A
level 3
Small color
area Hue

level 2
Hue
level 1
Device setting ACS setting level (Judgment reference set

value in the color auto mode) (5 steps)
[Monochrome] 12345 [Color]
SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL (3 steps)
Weak hue [Monochrome] [Color] Strong hue
XC XB XA
* Adjustment in 3 steps of device setting
(Example) When the ASC setting level of device setting (judgment
reference set value in the color auto mode) is 2 and SIM 46-33
ACS/P/SIM LEVEL is set to 3, the following area serves as the
ACS operating condition.
Large hue area Small hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level

(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
ACS color judgment setting Can be set About 10mm x About 5mm x About 3mm x About 1mm x
optionally. 5mm 5mm 4mm 3mm
more)
Hue

Strong hue
Hue level level 5
(SIM LEVEL) Hue
level 4
Hue
level 3
Hue
level 2

Weak hue Hue
level 1
(NOTE) Though the judgment reference in the color auto mode of

device setting is set to "5: Monochrome," if a monochrome docu-
ment is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the
set value of the set item A TH ACS5 ENLARGE (area level 5).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set value to
the memory.
Except for the above set item, do not change the setting in the mar-
ket. Set it to the default value.
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density

adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density
adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
ment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 20 print color bal-
ance/density adjustment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
(2) Flow of printer color balance/density adjustment procedures
Printer color balance/density adjustment
START
Process correction is forcibly

performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image

correction. (SIM 44-26)
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Check the printer color balance/

density. (Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5.)
Use SIM 67-25 to the color balance

check sheet, and check the patch
color balance of process black.
Are the copy No

color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
Yes
(to Next page) (to Next page)

(from Previous page) (from Previous page) Perform ADJ 21B printer color balance/
3 density auto adjustment. (SIM 67-24)
Can the Enter the SIM 67-24 mode and select
printer color balance and No A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Press the EXECUTE key.
Yes No (The adjustment pattern 1 is printed.)
4 Is PCL mode
supported?
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 21C Set the adjustment pattern 1 on the
printer color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 67-25) original table, select the FACTORY
Yes mode, and press the EXECUTE key.
(Auto adjustment step 1) *1
Yes Use SIM 67-25 to print

the color balance
Is PCL mode Press the OK key. (The initial
check sheet, and
supported? check the patch color setup of half tone image correction
balance of process is automatically performed.)
No black./Check the
printer color balance
and density. Cancel SIM 67-24.
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance (Check the test pattern
check sheet, and check the patch color of SIM 64-5)
balance of process black.
Use SIM 67-25 to print

Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color check sheet, and
balance of process black./Check the check the patch color
printer color balance and density. balance of process
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5) black.
Are No Were
Yes the color all the three kinds
of color balance/density
Are the printer
balance and density at adjustment targets 4
No color balance and density
the satisfactory changed? Yes
levels? (SIM 67-26)
at satisfactory
levels? Yes
No
Change the color balance/
Were the density adjustment factory 3
No printer color balance targets. (SIM 67-26)
and density
customized?
Were
Yes
the three kinds of Make the factory printer balance target
color balance/density (when adjusting the printer color
Yes adjustment targets
balance/density with SIM 67-24) same
changed?
Auto color balance adjustment (SIM 67-26) as the service color balance target and
service target is set. the color balance target when adjusting
No the density. (SIM67-28)
Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.
Press the SETUP key.

No Is PCL mode
Set the color patch image (adjustment supported?
pattern) printed in the printer color
balance/density adjustment on the original Yes
table, and press the EXECUTE key.
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
Press the REPEAT key.
Press the EXECUTE key. Check the printer color balance/density.

(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
Press the OK key.

Are the
Yes printer color No
Cancel SIM 67-27. balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
No Is the printer Yes

color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?
The printer color

balance and density
*1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the SERVICE mode.
adjustment completed.
(3) Printer color balance/density check The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
(Note) to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to reversed.
execute the following procedures in advance. The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction) Patch B may not be copied.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) Patch A must not be copied.
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
(Procedure) 21-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
a. When the PCL mode is supported: adjustment)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. a. General
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
print test pattern is printed. the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes of the automatic color balance

adjustment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman) (SIM 67-24
I used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
is used.) (The color balance target becomes the service tar-
get.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto adjust-

ment)
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level 2) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be 3) Before execution of the image quality check and the image
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc-
same level. tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI state.
model) * Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the * Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
black patch to check the color balance. c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Fig. 1 PG image
High density Low density 1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode.
Y
M
0
C
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
Bk PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
1) The max. density
and BK is very slightly copied. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK Patch A of each of Y, M, selected.)
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
C, and BK are not copied.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
procedure 2) on the document table.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper 0
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5 TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjust- PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
ment pattern) paper. CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
REPEAT OK
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
0
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
[EXECUTE] key. COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's

request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
6) Check the color balance and density.
0
(Method 1)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications.
Fig. 1 PG image
, High density Low density
LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
Y
FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE

M
C
The print color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
executed to print the color balance check patch image. Wait Bk
until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.

Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.) 1) The max. density
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance section is not blurred. 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the 3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
above two. The patch density is changed gradually.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
63-11.) not be reversed.
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus- The density level of each color must be almost at the same
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable) level.
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory Patch B may not be copied.
target gamma data are the same.
Patch A must not be copied.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 63-7.
(Method 2) (Normal end (Auto transition))
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance 0
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
checked more precisely. HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936

#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
Y
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
M
K C M Y
C EXECUTE 1/1
Bk (Abnormal end (Auto transition))
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26 CLOSE
1) The max. density 3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
section is not blurred. [S_VALUE]
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
The patch density is changed gradually. #6: ERR, #7: ERR, #8: ERR, #9: ERR, #10: ERR
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
(Method 3)
K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1
(This method cannot be used when the machine supports only
the GDI mode.) 9) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the 10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
print test pattern. color balance and the density again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key, Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
and the print test pattern is printed out. print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
almost at the same level.
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the 21-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not adjustment)
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the pro-
cedures from 1). * When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjust-
ment.
dures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C). * After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the a. General
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
adjust the copy density (15 points for each color) of each color
21C). (CMYK) manually when the automatic adjustment cannot obtain
7) Cancel SIM 67-25. the specified result or when a fine adjustment is required or when
For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the the user requests to change (customize) the color balance.
adjustment is completed. In this adjustment, only the patch of each color is adjusted in the
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc- above case where the automatic adjustment cannot obtain the
ible execution). specified result.
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key. When the color balance is lost, execute the automatic color bal-
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. ance adjustment in advance and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
0
CLOSE
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Manual
HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION adjustment)
TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2) When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the
document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color
EXECUTE
patch image adjustment pattern.
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
4) Before execution of the image quality check and the image
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following correc-
tions forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correc-
tion) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
c. Adjustment procedure 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
0 The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 755 (1
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE 999). When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PG balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
A xx POINT1 to 500.
A: xx B xx POINT2
C xx POINT3
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
1 99
D xx POINT4
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
K C M Y EXECUTE OK fied.
10-key
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
OK and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A O to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
0
way of adjustment.
TEST
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PG
A xx POINT1 process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A O
A: xx B xx POINT2 approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Cancel SIM 67-25.
C xx POINT3
1 99
D xx POINT4
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
K C M Y EXECUTE OK adjustment is completed.)
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
EXECUTE NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode.
EXECUTE
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this pro-
or self print end
cedure cannot be used.)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
0
The print test pattern is printed out.
TEST
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PG

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
A xx POINT1 level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
A: xx B xx POINT2 not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
1 99
C xx POINT3
almost at the same level.
D xx POINT4
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forc-
K C M Y EXECUTE OK ible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. 0
CLOSE
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the desired TEST SIMULATION NO.44-26
color balance is obtained. HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
If the above specification is not satisfied, perform the following TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
procedures.

EXECUTE
Y
M
C
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Bk
(Normal end (Auto transition))
CMY
mixed
color
0
1) The max. density HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION

3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
section is not blurred. and BK is very slightly copied. [S_VALUE]
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. #1: 907, #2: 902, #3: 909, #4:921, #5:936
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
The patch density is changed gradually. C, and BK are not copied.
#6: 347, #7:992, #8:1047, #9:1081, #10:1137
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter #11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
K C M Y
not be reversed. EXECUTE 1/1
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
0 ment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
[S_VALUE]
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
improper.
K C M Y EXECUTE 1/1 Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
9) After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26. Kind Descriptions

10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again. A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
target machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
The print test pattern is printed out.
them as the factory target. The default setting
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must which emphasizes color reproduction.
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
almost at the same level. balance (gamma) customize the color balance to users desired
target level. In advance, the users unique color
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
balance must be registered as the service color
the color balance as the service target.
balance target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not The above registration (setting) is made by the
required. serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar- balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
executes the color balance adjustment.
the next color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target is changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode color balance adjustment is also changed.
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg- When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
istered color balance. balance is set to the factory color balance target
set with SIM 67-26.
(Auto color balance adjustment service color balance target The default setting (factory setting) of the color
gamma setting) balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
a. General
(DEF1))
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer- If the user does not request for customizing the
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target. color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
There are following three kinds of the target. the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
Factory color balance (gamma) target
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
Service color balance (gamma) target balance (gamma) (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target target When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
changed accordingly.
to a desired level.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select
one of the three kinds of Factory color balance Service color balance Factory setting
color balance targets. =
target (DEF1) target
Factory color balance
target (DEF1) Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the
Factory color balance Service color balance
optional color balance, and
target (one of DEF1 3) target (Unique)
Factory color balance use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance Service color balance Execute SIM 67-28.
Factory color balance =
target (one of DEF1 3) target (The service color balance
target (DEF3)
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for

Service color balance
the user color balance =
target
adjustment
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)

By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow
SIM67-28
Hue
Factory color balance target
Factory color
(DEF1) = Service color balance
balance target
target/Color balance target for the
(DEF1)
Direction of Green
user color balance adjustment
(A)
+a*
Direction
of Red
DEF1 Color balance with emphasis on color Default

reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2 Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3 Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Direction of Blue

SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ment (SIM 67-28). required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to register the service color balance target data by use of the
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with printed adjustment pattern.
SIM 67-26. By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore, same color balance target to another machine.
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
changed accordingly.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and from discoloration and dirt.
the purpose of registration)
The service color balance target data are basically registered
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
customized with SIM 67-25. 67-25.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the (adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. 0
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. TEST SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUPSERVICE
judges as follows. BASE:8800
#B: 227, #C 624, #D: 908, #E: 1249, #F: 2074

Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment #G: 3298, #H: 18951, #I: 76117, #J: 128495, #K: 165225
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered #L: 184155, #M: 189254, #N: 194377, #:O: 197276
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be K C M Y REPEAT OK 1/1
improper.
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27. Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
abnormal.
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously. In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
b. Setting procedure 7) Press [OK] key.
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
service color balance target) ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
(adjustment pattern). color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
adjustment. by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. get with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-
0 26, be sure to execute this procedure.
CLOSE
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
0
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIBSERVICE
K C M Y SETUP 1/1
3) Press [SETUP] key.

4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21C) on the document

table. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another 3) Press [YES] key.
machine can be used. The service color balance target and the color balance target for
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image ance as the factory color balance target.
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with 21-C Auto color balance adjustment by the user
SIM 67-25 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe- (Copy color balance auto adjustment
cute SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target ENABLE setting and adjustment)
data.
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
0 ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB SETUPSERVICE tion with SIM 26-54.
NOW CHART PATCH READING...
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
EXECUTE
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. ADJ 22 Fusing paper guide position
b. Setting procedure adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 26-54 mode. This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
0 * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER
A x (1:YES 0:NO)
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear
A: x edge section.
1) Loosen the C fixing screw.
0 1
2) Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up
and down direction).
OK
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibra-
tion (automatic adjustment of printer color balance and den-
sity) is not displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
A A
ment))
C C
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
ance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above set-
B B
tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.
2) Enter the printer setting mode.
Change the position depending on the situation.
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
* When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. upward (in the arrow direction A).
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
direction A).
ADJ 23 Document size sensor

adjustment
* When the document size sensor section is disassembled.
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that * When the document size sensor section is replaced.
the light density area is on the left side. * When a U2 trouble occurs.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
patch image (adjustment pattern). * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Black Yellow 23-A Document size sensor detection point

Red adjustment
Blue 1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
0
PD SENSOR CHECK
OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3
PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
1/1
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment 1/1
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direc- 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
tion. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment With the document cover open, without placing a document on
screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal dis- the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
play when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
32 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
[EXECUTE] key.
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
detection function may malfunction.) If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper

size (width) sensor adjustment
* When the manual paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray unit is replaced.
32+
-0.5mm
0
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT

MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
EXECUTE
23-B Document size sensor sensitivity EXECUTE

adjustment
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
0
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENTE.
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVEROPENED,TURN ON THE EXECUTE
EXECUTING
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0 0
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP
SET AN A3-SIZE(1117)COPY PAPER ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE,
AND WITH THE OC OPEND,TURN ON THE EXECUTE KEY.
P1(A4)POSITION ADJUSTMENT.
EXECUTE
Adjustment Adjustment completed EXECUTE

EXECUTE
failed
EXECUTE
0
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO- SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED.

Repeat the above procedure to adjust
the A4R width MIN POSITION.
EXECUTE
0 0
TEST
PHOTO-SENSOR ERROR POSITION
. COMPLETE
PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
2) Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. ADJ 25 RSPF tray paper size (width)
sensor adjustment (Refer to
the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting

* When the operation panel is replaced.
When a U2 trouble occurs.
When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM65-1 mode.

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper 2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
feed guide is recognized. When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width. and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
display.
again.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
paper feed guide is recognized.
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
8) Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi- pressed.
tion.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image

off-center, image magnification
ratio auto adjustment with
SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning
direction) (Print engine section)
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
* ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment
display.
* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized. * ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" (Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
display is highlighted.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed. magnification ratio adjustment (Document table
mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is
executed
7) Press [OK] key.
27-A Print image main scanning direction image
The adjustment result becomes valid.
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. 0
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button. TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
0 BK MAG : ** |**|
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK
RESULT DATA
1/1 27-B Image off-center automatic adjustment

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
(Any paper size will do.) 2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.
0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
MFT CS1 CS2
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT DATA
EXECUTE 1/1 1/1
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Select [ALL] with the key button.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc- 0
tion) TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE

Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide. LEAD OFFSET
ALL
1/1
(NOTE)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
0
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE

MFT CS1 CS2 ADU
0 CS3 CS4 LCC
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT SERVICE

PLEASE WAIT
EXECUTE 1/1
NOW EXECUTING
REPRINT EXECUTE
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio
5) Press [EXCUTE] key. 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
The adjustment pattern is printed out. tion)
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc- Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
tion) guide.
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
6) Press [EXCUTE] key.
7) Press [EXCUTE] key. 0

The following items are automatically adjusted. TEST
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment PLEASE SET THE SIT CHART PAPER ON THE OC
* Print image off-center adjustment THEN PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
8) Press [OK] key.

The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray. REPRINT EXECUTE
The following items are automatically adjusted.

27-C Copy lead edge image reference position
Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment,
adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnifica-
direction image magnification ratio tion ratio automatic adjustment
automatic adjustment 7) Press [OK] key.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. The adjustment result becomes valid.
0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE
TEST
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ OC LEAD OFFSET SUB

RESULT DATA
1/1 REPRINT RESCAN RETRY DATA OK
2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. 27-D SPF mode image off-center, image lead
(Any paper size will do.)
edge position, sub scanning direction
0
image magnification ratio automatic
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-28 CLOSE adjustment
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE Refer to the RSPF (MX-RPX1) SM.
MFT CS1 CS2
EXECUTE 1/1
4) Press [EXCUTE] key.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
[7] SIMULATION
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improve-
ments in servicing.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transfer
The operating procedures and displays depend on the form of the
operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON Program key ON Asterisk (*) key
ON CLEAR key ON Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for
input of a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item.
Press START key or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the user setup key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
1) Press CA key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode, a
malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the main
power source.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 1
Basic operation flowchart
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.
2. List of simulation codes
Code
Function (Purpose) Section Purpose
Main Sub
1 1 Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit. Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
2 Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the scanning (read) Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
section and the related circuit.
5 Used to check the operations of the scanner unit. Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the RSPF/DSPF Operation test/check
control circuit.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic RSPF/DSPF Operation test/check
document feeder unit and the related circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder unit RSPF/DSPF Operation test/check
and the control circuits.
3 2 Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the Finisher Operation test/check
related circuit.
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher Operation test/check
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher Adjustment
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large Desk/Large capacity tray Operation test/check
capacity tray and the related circuit. (LCC)
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray and the Desk/Large capacity tray Operation test/check
related circuit. (LCC)
5 Used to check the operations of the clutches and the related circuits. Desk/Large capacity tray Operation test/check
(LCC)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and Operation panel Operation test/check
control circuit.
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing Operation test/check
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the circuit. Optical (Image scanning) Operation test/check
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit. Process Operation test/check
6 1 Used to check the operations of the paper transport system, the transfer system, Paper transport section Operation test/check
the fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits. (Transport, paper exit)
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Other Operation test/check
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the related circuit. Process (Transfer) Operation test/check
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Other Setting
6 Used to set the intermittent aging cycle. Other Setting
8 Used to display the warm-up time. Fusing Operation display
9 Used to check printing in the color mode. Operation test/check
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage of each color Process (Photoconductor/ Operation test/Check/
and the control circuit. Developing/Transfer/ Adjustment
Cleaning)
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each Process (Photoconductor/ Operation test/Check/
printer mode and the control circuit. Developing/Transfer/ Adjustment
Cleaning)
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the control Process (Photoconductor/ Operation test/Check/
circuit. Developing/Transfer/ Adjustment
Cleaning)/Transfer
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section Duplex Operation test/check
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the control Duplex Operation test/check
circuits.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner motor and the related circuit. Process (Developing) Operation test/check
13 -- Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. FAX Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
14 -- Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/LCC/U2/PF troubles. Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
15 -- Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble. LCC Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
16 -- Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble. MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
/ SCU PWB
17 -- Used to cancel the self-diag PF. Communication unit (RIC/ Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
MODEM)
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle. Setting
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. Adjustment/Setup/Operation
(Used to check the maintenance timing.) data check
2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of Adjustment/Setup/Operation
total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.) data check
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history. Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Others
6 Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft Adjustment/Setup/Operation
switch, counters). data check
8 Used to check the number of use of the finisher, the RSPF, the DSPF, and the Adjustment/Setup/Operation
scan (reading) unit. data check
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Code
Main Sub
22 10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware). Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is FAX Adjustment/Setup/Operation
installed) data check
12 Used to check the RSPF/DSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at RSPF/DSPF Adjustment/Setup/Operation
each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be data check
judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, Adjustment/Setup/Operation
toner cartridge). data check
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan mode and the Scanner Adjustment/Setup/Operation
internet FAX mode. data check
90 Used to output the various set data lists. Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
23 2 Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of Adjustment/Setup/Operation
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to data check
repair.)
80 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and Paper feed, transport Operation test/Check
transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are Data clear
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed Data clear
section.
3 Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, DSPF, and the scan Data clear
(reading) unit.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit Data clear
and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the Data clear
counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter. Data clear
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear Data clear
the counter.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter. Data clear
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) Data clear
15 Used to clear the counters related to the image send. Data clear
30 Used to initialize the administrator password. Data clear
31 Used to initialize the service mode password. Clear
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing Operation test/Check
section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration when replacing developer. Process (Photoconductor/ Setting
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
26 1 Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1). Paper exit Setting
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper Paper feed Setting
size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in
software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor Setting
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. Setting
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the Setting
destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner. Setting
18 Used to set the toner save mode. Setting
30 Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up control (CE mark support control). Setting
35 Used to set the trouble memory saving procedure. Setting
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the developer life is reached. Other Setting
41 Used to set YES/NO of AMS setting in the center binding mode. Setting
49 Used to set the copy speed mode. Setting
50 Used to set functions. Setting
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted Setting
up or not.
53 Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration. Setting
54 Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO. Printer Setting
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode. Setting
67 Used to set the summer time (switching timing to the summer time and the Setting
adjustment time (shift amount)) and the time zone (for switching to the summer
time and the difference between the local time and GMT (UTC) for
synchronization with the internet time server).
69 Used to set whether the toner preparation message and the toner near end Process Setting
message are displayed or not when the toner quantity reaches 25%.
27 1 Used to set whether the detection of communication error with RIC (U7-00) is Communication (RIC/ Operation test/Check
disabled or not. MODEM)
2 Used to set the FSS function (Sender registration number, HOST server TEL Communication (RIC/ Setting
number). MODEM)
Code
Main Sub
27 4 Used to set the FSS functions (initializing, call, toner order auto send). Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
5 Used to set the tag number. Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
6 Used to set YES/NO of the manual service call. Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
7 Used to set the FSS functions (enable, alert callout). Communication (RIC/ Setting
MODEM)
9 Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time Setting
between sensors is recorded or not and the threshold value for determining
whether the gain adjustment retry number is recorded or not.
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. Communication (RIC/ Data clear
MODEM)
11 Used to display the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain Communication (RIC/ Adjustment/Setup/Operation
adjustment retry number history. MODEM) data output/Check (Display/Print)
12 Used to display the high-density, half-tone process control error history and the Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
automatic register adjustment error history. data output/Check (Display/Print)
13 Used to display the history of paper feed time between sensors. Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
14 The FSS connection test mode setting is made. Operation test/Check
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed Paper feed Operation test/Check
section, the paper transport section, and the paper exit section.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed Paper feed Operation test/Check
section and the related circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the related circuits. Other Operation test/Check
(The card reader sensor operation can be monitored with the LCD display.)
(Japan only)
40 2 Used to adjust the detection level of the manual feed tray paper width detector. Paper feed Adjustment
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the detection level of the manual paper feed Paper feed Setting
tray paper width detector.
41 1 Used to display the operating state of the document sensor. Other Operation test/Check
2 Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor. Other Operation test/Check
3 Used to display the document sensor detection level (A/D) in real time and to Other Operation test/Check
display the threshold value adjusted with SIM 41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor
name.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. Fusing Setting
4 Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. (Continued from 43- Fusing Setting
01.)
20 Used to correct the environments of low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for Fusing Setting
the fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper (SIM 43-01).
21 Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H) Fusing Setting
environment for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-01) for each paper.
22 Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low humidity) correction for the fusing Fusing Setting
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
23 Used to perform H/H (high temperature, high humidity) correction for the fusing Fusing Setting
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
24 Used to enter the correction values for SIM 43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature Fusing Setting
corrections.
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor. Fusing Operation check
32 Used to make various settings of the compulsory operations of the web cleaning Fusing Operation setting
at a job end.
44 1 Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process) Setting
section are enabled or not.
2 Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and Process Adjustment
the registration sensor (two for resist are adjusted simultaneously) and the
surface scan.
4 Used to perform the correction operation of the image forming section and to set Process Setting
the process control sensor adjustment conditions.
6 Used to forcibly execute the correction in the image process section (high- Process Operation test/Check
density process correction) (process correction).
9 Used to check the data related to the result of the image forming section Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
correction (high density process correction). (Corrected main charger grid data output/Check (Display/Print)
voltage in each print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.) (This simulation is
used to check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
12 Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image forming Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
section correction (high density process correction). (This simulation is used to data output/Check (Display/Print)
check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
13 Color image density sensor adjustment (Adjustment by the jig) Process Adjustment
14 Used to check the output level of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor. data output/Check (Display/Print)
16 Used to check data related to the toner density correction result. (This Process (Developing) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
simulation allows to check that the correction is normally performed or not.) data output/Check (Display/Print)
21 Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone Process Setting
correction).
Code
Main Sub
44 22 Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
image forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used data output/Check (Display/Print)
to check that the correction is normally executed or not.)
24 (This simulation is not used in the market.) Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
Used to display the process control result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
25 Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction). Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
26 Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly. Process Adjustment
27 Used to clear the half tone process control correction value. Process Data clear
28 Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process control execution. Process Setting
29 Enable/disable of the half tone correction during each job is switched. Process Setting
31 Used to perform the phase adjustment for OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust Process (OPC drum) Adjustment
the phases of four OPC drums deflection.)
43 Used to display each developing unit installing state AD value. Process (Developing) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
This simulation is added to check the sampling data of the detection judgment of data output/Check (Display/Print)
developing unit installation not only as the judgment result (trouble display) but
also as the current state value.
52 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in 1 pixel half data output/Check (Display/Print)
tone correction. (The simulation is used to check whether the correction is
normally executed or not.)
54 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Adjustment/Setup/Operation
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correction result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
56 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Setting
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1 pixel half tone correction.
57 (This function is not used. Do not operate.) Process Data clear
Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel half tone correction.
46 1 Used to set the default exposure (color copy) for every document mode. Scanner Adjustment
2 Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK copy. Scanner Adjustment
4 Used to adjust the exposure of the color scanner. Scanner Adjustment
5 Used to adjust the exposure of the black scanner. Scanner Adjustment
8 Used to make the scanner color balance RGB adjustment (for color push Scanner Adjustment
scanner mode).
9 Used to adjust the exposure. RSPF/DSPF Adjustment
10 Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode) Engine Adjustment
16 Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG Engine Adjustment
print.
19 Used to set the BLACK auto exposure mode. Scanner Adjustment
21 Used to perform the copy color balance manual correction. [Color, All modes]: Engine Adjustment
PG print
23 Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half tone highest density correction. Setting
24 Used to the copy color balance auto adjustment. Engine Adjustment
25 Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance. Image process (ICU) Adjustment
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default. Image process (ICU) Adjustment
27 Used to set the engine gamma calculating formula coefficient. Image process (ICU) Adjustment
28 (Information on this simulation may be requested in some cases. However, this Image process (ICU) Adjustment
function is basically not used in the market.)
Used to check the auto exposure/Auto document recognition/ Line number
recognition (Color mode). If the local memory size is less than 256MB, the
operation of this simulation may not operate normally.
33 Used to execute the color auto mode adjustment. Image process (ICU) Setting
36 Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2-color (Red, Black) copy. Adjustment
37 Used to perform the BLACK image forming adjustment. Adjustment
39 Used to execute the image send sharpness adjustment. (Only when FAX is FAX Adjustment
installed)
40 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the ICU/FAX Adjustment
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
41 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
42 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
43 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
44 Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is ICU/FAX Adjustment
installed)
45 Used to execute the FAX exposure level adjustment and the individual setting FAX Adjustment
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed)
47 Used to set the JPEG compression rate in Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN). Setting
48 1 Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system. RSPF/DSPF/Scanner Adjustment
Code
Main Sub
48 5 This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a RSPF/DSPF/Scanner Adjustment
different copy magnification ratio is specified and copying is made after
adjustment of the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio with SIM 48-
1.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the
adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the
adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted. This is the magnification ratio
adjustment in the scan system.
6 Used to adjust the rotating speed of each motor. Adjustment
49 1 Used to execute the firmware update. Version-up
3 The Operation Manual saved in the hard disk is updated. Version-up
50 1 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to Adjustment
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-05 and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document table mode))
2 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to Adjustment
adjust the void area (image loss). (Simple adjustment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation provides the simpler method.)
5 Used to set the lead edge adjustment value which affects only the printer print. Printer Adjustment
6 Used to adjust the copy image position on the print paper in the copy mode and RSPF/DSPF Adjustment
to adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed
with SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF/DSPF mode)
7 Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to RSPF/DSPF Adjustment
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-6 (Simple type).) (RSPF/DSPF mode)
10 Used to adjust the print off-center for each tray. Adjustment
Image print center position adjustment (Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to execute the scan image off-center position adjustment. (Adjusted for Adjustment
each scan mode.)
20 Used to execute the manual adjustment of the main scanning direction Adjustment
registration (color shift). (Backup value input)
21 Used to execute the manual adjustment of the sub scanning registration (color Adjustment
shift). (Backup value input)
22 Used to execute the auto adjustment of the main/sub scan the main/sub Adjustment
registration. (Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration sensor (photo sensor)
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjustment) adjustment image quality
image position
24 Used to display the data acquired with the auto registration adjustment Adjustment
simulation (SIM50-22).
27 Used to adjust the image loss of scanned image in the FAX/Scanner mode. FAX/Scanner Adjustment
28 Used to execute the service adjustment, the OC adjustment, the BK main scan Adjustment
magnification ration correction, the RSPF/DSPF adjustment, and the print
position adjustment (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment)).
28 Used to adjust the OC document lead edge, off-center, and the sub scan Adjustment
magnification ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (1:
OC adjustment))
28 Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment. Adjustment
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation) (2: BK-main scan magnification ratio
correction))
28 Used to execute the RSPF/DSPF (Front/Back) document lead edge, off-center, RSPF/DSPF Adjustment
and sub scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (3: RSPF/DSPF
adjustment))
28 Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print off- Adjustment
center (individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (4: Print position
adjustment)
28 Used to display the adjustment result. Adjustment
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (5: result display)
28 Used to display the data used for the adjustment. Adjustment
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (6: data display))
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer voltage and the separation Process Adjustment
bias voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper against the registration roller (main Paper transport Adjustment
unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed, RSPF/DSPF paper feed) on each
section. (When there are much variations in print image positions for paper or
when the paper jam occurs, the adjustment is required.) Used to change the
deflection quantity correction value of each specified cassette.
53 6 Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF document tray size of the main unit. RSPF/DSPF Adjustment
7 Used to enter the adjustment value of the main unit RSPF document tray size RSPF/DSPF Adjustment
adjustment value. SIM53-06 A/D value manual input (for RSPF/DSPF).
8 Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF scan position. RSPF/DSPF Adjustment
Code
Main Sub
55 1 Used to set the engine soft SW. PCU Setting
2 Used to set the scanner soft SW Scanner Setting
3 Used to set the controller soft SW. MFP Setting
56 1 Used to execute data transfer. MFP Data transfer
2 Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of Memory, HDD Backup
EEPROM, SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to restore the data.
60 1 Used to check read/write of the expansion DIMM installed to the MFPcnt PWB. Image process (MFP) Operation test/Check
After completion of execution, the result of each slot is displayed on the panel.
MFPcnt PWB image DRAM read/write operation check, check MFP (memory)
operation.
2 Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM. Setting
61 1 The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked. LSU Operation test/Check
4 Used to execute self-print of the LSU position adjustment. LSU Adjustment
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). MFP (HDD) Data clear
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
2 Used to execute the partial check of the hard disk read/write. MFP (HDD) Operation test/Check
3 Used to execute read/write check (all areas) of the hard disk. MFP (HDD) Operation test/Check
6 Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics. MFP (HDD) Operation test/Check
7 Used to print the self-diagnostics error log. MFP Operation test/Check
8 Used to format the hard disk excluding the system area and operation manual MFP (HDD) Data clear
area.
10 Used to delete the job completion list. (The job log data are also deleted.) MFP (HDD) Data clear
11 Used to delete the document filing data. MFP (HDD) Data clear
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in HDD trouble. MFP (HDD) Data clear
13 Used to format the hard disk (operation manual area only). MFP (HDD) Data clear
63 1 Used to check the following values related to shading for RGB and OC/RSPF/ Scanner (Exposure) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
DSPF. (3 x 2 = 6 kinds) data output/Check (Display/Print)
2 Used to execute shading forcibly (MX-3500N/4500N). Scanner Adjustment
2 Used to execute shading forcibly (MX-3501N/4501N). Scanner Adjustment
3 Used to execute the gamma correction and density conversion for RGB image Scanner (scan) Adjustment
data inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction 1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set
value of color correction are set by calculating from the image data.
5 Used to reset the gamma correction and color correction parameters of the Scanner Adjustment
SCAN ASIC.
6 Used to scan the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern and to display Image process (ICU) Adjustment/Setup/Operation
the sampling result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
7 Used to display and register the engine auto density adjustment scanner target Image process (ICU) Setting
value (for servicing).
8 Used to execute the standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner Image process (ICU) Setting
target value (for servicing).
11 Used to set the factory target color balance in the auto color balance adjustment Scanner (Scanning) Setting
(SIM46-24).
64 1 Used to execute self-print (Color mode). Printer Operation test/Check
2 Used to print the density adjustment pattern. Printer Adjustment/Setup/Operation
3 Used to execute self-print. (BW mode) Printer Operation test/Check
4 Used to execute self-print. Printer Operation test/Check
5 Used to execute self print (PCL). Printer Operation test/Check
6 Used to execute the printer self print (PS). Printer Operation test/Check
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position. Operation panel Adjustment
2 Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position Operation panel Adjustment/Setup/Operation
adjustment result. data output/Check (Display/Print)
67 24 Use to execute the printer setting of auto color calibration. Printer Adjustment
25 Used to set the manual correction of the printer engine color balance. Printer Adjustment
26 Used to set the reference scanner target value of the printer engine auto density Printer Adjustment
adjustment of Simulation 67-24.
Compaired to DEF1, DEF2 and DEF3 are decreased-red color balance target
value.
27 Used to display and register the scanner target value (for servicing) of the Printer Adjustment
printer engine auto density adjustment.
28 The scanner target value (for servicing) of the printer engine auto density Scanner Adjustment
adjustment is reset to the standard value.
30 Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main unit calibration data and the process Printer Setting
control correction data to the client PC by the GDI printer.
Code
Main Sub
67 31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer Data clear
32 Used to set YES/NO of screen color change for each object. Setting
33 Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for PCL) Printer Adjustment
33 Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for GDI) Printer Adjustment
3. Details of simulation
0
TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 1 02 CLOSE
1 SCANNER SENSO R CHE CK

MHPS
1-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scan-
ner unit and its control circuit. 1/1
Section Optical (Image scanning)

Item Operation 1-5
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/check
1) Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scan-
2) Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch ner unit.
panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Item Operation
The scanner scans at the speed corresponding to the opera-
Operation/Procedure
tion mode.
1) Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
Button Selectable Default 2) Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch
Content
display magnification ratios value panel.
50 Scan magnification ratio: COLOR: 50%, 100%, 100%
50% 200%
100 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (High speed): The scanner scans continuously at the speed corresponding to
100% 100%, 200% the operation mode.
200 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (Low speed): When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
200% 50%, 100%, 200% nated.
Button Selectable Default

0 Content
display magnification ratio value
50 Scan magnification ratio: COLOR: 50%, 100%, 100%
SCANNER CHECK
50% 200%
25 400
100 % 100 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (High speed):
50 ZOOM 300 100% 100%, 200%
200 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (Low speed):
100 150 200 200% 50%, 100%, 200%
BLACK(FAST) BLACK(SLOW) COLOR EXECUTE

0
SCANNER CHECK
1-2 25 400
100 %
50 ZOOM 300
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor and
detector in the scanning (read) section and 100 150 200
the related circuit. BLACK(FAST) BLACK(SLOW) COLOR EXECUTE

Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
The scanner (read) unit is in the home position.: "MHPS" section
is highlighted.
The scanner (read) unit is not in the home position.: "MHPS" is
normally displayed.
SPLS2 RSPF document length detection long
2 STMPU
SWD_LEN
RSPF stamp unit installation detection
RSPF guide plate position
SWD_AD RSPF document detection volume output
2-1 NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto- 0
matic document feeder unit and the control TEST SIMULATION NO.02-02 CLOSE
circuit. RSPF SENSOR CHECK SWD_LEN: **** SWD_AD: ***
SSET SOCD SCOV SPED
Section RSPF/DSPF
SPPD1 SPPD2 SPPD3 SPPD4
Item Operation
STMPU
Operation/Procedure SPPD5 SPLS1 SPLS2
1) Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel. 1/1
2) Select the aging mode with [1SIDE] and [2SIDE] buttons on 1/1
the touch panel (MX-3500N/4500N only).
3) Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch (MX-3501N/4501N)
panel.
SSET DSPF installation detection
SOCD DSPF open/close detection
Aging is performed in the mode corresponding to the operation SCOV DSPF cover SW
mode. SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close detection
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during aging, the oper- SPED1 DSPF document empty detection
ation is terminated and [EXECUTE] button returns to the SPED2 DSPF document detection
original state. SPPD1 DSPF document pass detection 1
SPPD2 DSPF document pass detection 2
Button Selectable Default SPPD3 DSPF document pass detection 3
Content
display magnification ratio value SPPD4 DSPF document pass detection 4
50 Scan magnification ratio: COLOR: 50%, 100%, 100% SPPD5 DSPF document pass detection 5
50% 200%
SPOD DSPF paper exit detection
100 Scan magnification ratio: BLACK (High speed):
SPRDMD DSPF random feed paper size detection
100% 100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed): SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short
200 Scan magnification ratio:
50%, 100%, 200% SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long
200%
STLD DSPF document tray lower limit detection
STUD DSPF document tray upper limit detection
0 STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position
RSPF AGING
1-SIDE
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output
25 100 400
%
2-SIDE
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
50 ZOOM 300
100 150 200

0
BLACK(FAST) BLACK(SLOW) COLOR EXECUTE
DSPF SENSOR CHECK SWD_LEN: **** SWD_AD: ***
SSET SOCD SCOV SLCOV
SPED1 SPED2 SPPD1 SPPD2
2-2 SPPD3 SPPD4 SPPD5 SPOD
Purpose Operation test/check SPRDMD SPLS1 SPLS2 STLD

1/1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- 1/2
sors and detectors in the automatic docu-
ment feeder unit and the related circuits.
Section RSPF/DSPF 2-3
Item Operation Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- in the automatic document feeder unit and
played. the control circuits.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. Section RSPF/DSPF
(MX-3500N/4500N) Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
SSET RSPF installation detection
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
SOCD RSPF open/close detection
panel.
SCOV RSPF cover SW
SPED RSPF document empty detection
SPPD1 RSPF paper entry detection 1 and random detection The selected load operation is performed.
(common) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
SPPD2 RSPF paper entry detection 2 PS front nated.
SPPD3 RSPF before-scan detection
SPPD4 RSPF reverse gate front detection
SPPD5 RSPF reverse rear detection
SPLS1 RSPF document length detection short
(MX-3500N/4500N) <Saddle finisher (MX-FNX2)>
SPFM RSPF transport motor FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
SPRM_F RSPF paper feed reverse motor normal rotation FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
SPRM_R RSPF paper feed reverse motor reverse rotation FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
SPFC RSPF paper feed clutch FED Entry port paper detection
SRRC RSPF resist roller clutch FPDHPD Paddle HP detection
SGS RSPF document exit gate solenoid FARHPD Bundle roller HP detection
STMPS Finish stamp solenoid (*1) FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
*1: Since the stamp solenoid is an option unit, it can be operated FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
only when it is installed. FAD Alignment tray detection
FOBHPD Discharge belt HP detection
* For the same loads displayed separately depending on normal
FBED Tray paper detection
rotation and rotation, if they are selected together, normal rota-
FSLD Paper surface detection
tion is performed.
FFPD Binding position detection
In addition, if the load is rotating, reverse rotation is not accepted FFHPD Binding HP detection
until the operation is stopped. FFRHPD Binding roller HP detection
FFED Binding paper detection
0 FFE Binding lock detection
SIMULATION NO.0203 CLOSE
TEST FULD Lift upper limit detection
RSPF
OUTPUT CHECK FLLD Lift lower limit detection
SPFM SPRM_F FLE Lift lock detection
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
SPRM_R SPFC
SRRC SGS FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
STMPS FSD Staple empty detection
EXECUTE 1/1
FSUC Staple connection detection
FSPD Self prime detection
FMLD Tray intermediate detection
(MX-3501N/4501N)
FFDD Front door detection
FCD Upper cover detection
SPUM DSPF paper feed motor
FFDSW Front door SW detection
SPFM DSPF transport motor
FJSW Joint SW detection
SPOM DSPF paper exit motor
FSSSW Staple safety SW detection
SLUM DSPF lift motor
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor
SPFC DSPF paper feed clutch <Saddle finisher punch unit (AR-PN1A/B/C/D)>
SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch
SRRBC DSPF resist roller break clutch FPE Punch motor lock detection
STRRC DSPF No. 1 resist roller clutch FPUC Punch unit connection detection
STRRBC DSPF No. 1 resist roller break clutch FPHPD Punch HP detection
STRC DSPF transport clutch FPDD Punch dust detection
STMPS Stamp solenoid (*1) FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
FPTD Punch timing detection
*1: Since the stamp solenoid is an option unit, it can be operated
FPSD1 Punch horizontal resist detection 1
only when it is installed.
0 FPSD4 Punch horizontal resist detection 4
TEST
<Inner finisher (MX-FNX1)>
DSPF
OUTPUT CHECK
SPUM SPFM FED Entry port paper detection

SPOM SLUM FBED Tray paper detection
SPFFAN SPFC FULD Tray upper limit detection
SRRC SRRBC FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection
EXECUTE FLLD Tray lower limit detection
1/2
FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1
FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2
FRLD Roller up/down detection
FBRD Belt separation detection
3 FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FJPD Alignment guide position detection
3-2
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
Purpose Operation test/check FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of sensor and FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
detector in the finisher and the related cir- FSD Staple empty detection
cuit. FSTD Staple lead edge position detection
Section Finisher FDSW Door open detection
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
<Inner finisher punch unit (MX-PNX1A/B/C/D)> <4K finisher saddle unit>
FPRPD Punch rear position detection FSPIND Saddle entry port paper detection
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FSPDD Saddle paper exit detection
FPHPD Punch HP detection FSTPD Saddle tray paper detection
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection FS1PD Saddle paper detection 1
FPDD Punch dust detection FS2PD Saddle paper detection 2
FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection FS3PD Saddle paper detection 3
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1 FSLGE Paper pushing plate motor lock detection
FPPD2 Punch paper surface detection 2 FSLGHPD Paper pushing plate HP detection
FPPD3 Punch paper surface detection 3 FSLGTD Paper pushing plate lead edge position detection
FPPD4 Punch paper surface detection 4 FSFOE Paper folding motor lock detection
FPPD5 Punch paper surface detection 5 FSFOHPD Paper folding HP detection
FPPD6 Punch paper surface detection 6 FSPPHPD Paper positioning plate HP detection
FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1 FSPPPD Paper positioning plate paper detection
FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2 FSAHPD Alignment plate HP detection
<4K finisher> FSSIND Stitcher storage detection
FSVPPD Vertical path paper detection
FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection FSCRPD Semi-circular roller phase detection
FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection FSGHPD Guide HP detection
FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection FSSHP1 Stitch operation HP detection 1
FED Entry port paper detection FSSHP2 Stitch operation HP detection 2
FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1 FSSD1 Saddle needle presence detection 1
FAED2 Tray 1 area detection 2 FSSD2 Saddle needle presence detection 2
FAED3 Tray 1 area detection 3 FSAHPC Alignment HP sensor connector connection detection
FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front FSFOHPC Paper folding HP sensor connector connection detection
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear FSEJDC Paper exit door sensor connector connection detection
FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection FSFDC Front door open/close sensor connector connection
FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection detection
FCCD Tray approach detection FSPPHPC Paper positioning plate HP sensor connector connection
FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection detection
FPDD Discharged paper detection FSLGTC Paper pushing plate lead edge sensor connector
connection detection
FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection
FSLGHPC Paper pushing plate HP sensor connector connection
FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection
detection
FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection
FSINDD Inlet port cover open detection
FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection
FSEJDD Paper exit cover open detection
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
FSINDSW Saddle inlet port door detection
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSFDSW Front door open detection SW
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FSPSW1 S-PUSHSW detection
FSD Staple empty detection
FSTD Needle lead edge position detection <4K finisher saddle unit DIPSW>
FSDSW1 S-DIPSW1 detection
FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection
FSSSW Staple safety SW detection
FSSUC Saddle staple unit detection
FSHTD Shutter open detection
FCD Upper door open detection
FFDD Front cover open detection
F24V 24V output interruption detection
FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection <4K finisher/4K saddle finisher punch unit>
FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection
FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1 FPE Punch motor lock detection
FAED22 Tray 2 area detection 2 FPUC Punch unit connection detection
FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3 FPHPD Punch HP detection
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
<4K finisher DIPSW>
FPFDD Punch front door open detection
FPDD Punch dust detection
FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection
FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection 0
FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection TEST SIMULATION NO.03-02 CLOSE
FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection FIN SENSOR CHECK

FJPID FJPOD FJPDD FED
FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection FPDHPD FARHPD FFJHPD FRJHPD
FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection FAD FOBHPD FBED FSLD
FFPD FFHPD FFRHPD FFED
FFE FULD FLLD FLE

1/2
<When the 4K saddle finisher/saddle section>
3-3
Purpose Operation test/check FSIFM Saddle entry port transport motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in FSFM Saddle transport motor
the finisher and the control circuit. FSFOM Paper folding motor
FSGM Guide motor
Section Finisher FSJM Saddle alignment motor
Item Operation FSFSTM Stitch motor: Front
Operation/Procedure FSRSTM Stitch motor: Rear
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch FSLGM Paper holding motor
panel. FSFS Saddle flapper solenoid
FS1DFS Paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
FS2DFS Paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
The selected load operation is performed. FSFCS Transport plate contact solenoid
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
<External punch unit (AR-PN1A/B/C/D)>
nated.
<When the 1K saddle finisher (MX-FNX2) is installed> FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
FINRPS Entry port reverse path solenoid
<Inner punch unit (MX-PNX1A/B/C/D)>
FJPM Interface transport motor
FJFM Interface transport fan motor FPNM Punch motor
FFM Transport motor FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
FPM Paddle motor
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
0
FFJM Alignment motor front CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.0303
FRJM Alignment motor rear
FIN LOAD CHECK
FSM Staple shift motor FJPM
FINRPS FJFM FFM
FFSM Staple motor
FPM FAM FFJM FRJM
FLM Lift motor
FSM FFSM FLM FFC
FFC Folding clutch
1/1
<When the 4K finisher is installed>
EXECUTE 1/1
FJPM Interface transport motor
FJFM Interface transport fan motor 3-10
FFM Entry port transport motor Purpose Adjustment
FAM Bundle paper exit motor
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
FFJM Alignment motor front
FRJM Alignment motor rear Section Finisher
FSM Staple shift motor Item Operation
FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor Operation/Procedure
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
1) Select the item according to the adjustment content with [] []
FFSM Staple motor
buttons.
FSWM Shift motor
FASM Rear edge assist motor
FPPM Paper positioning motor 3) Press [OK] button. (The set value is saved.)
FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid <Saddle finisher (MX-FNX2)>
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid Default
Item Display Item Set range
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid value
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch A SADDLE Saddle binding 0 to 400 200
FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch POSITOIN position adjustment
B FOLDING Saddle folding 0 to 400 200
<When the inner finisher (MX-FNX1) is installed> POSITION position adjustment
C FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 to 20 10
adjustment (front)
FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid
D REAR ADJUST Alignment position 0 to 20 10
FPDS Paddle solenoid adjustment (rear)
FBRS Belt separation solenoid E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 0 to 200 100
FRM Resist motor adjustment (one
FSWM Oscillation motor position at the rear)
FAM Bundle paper exit motor F STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 0 to 200 100
FFJM Alignment motor front adjustment (one
FRJM Alignment motor rear position in front)
FSM Staple shift motor G STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 0 to 200 100
FFSM Staple motor adjustment (two
FTLM Tray lift motor positions at the
center)
FFANM Fan motor
H STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 0 to 100 50
adjustment (two
positions in pitch)
I PUNCH Punch center 47 to 53 50
CENTER adjustment
Default [Screen (Saddle finisher (MX-FNX2) installed)]
value
J PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 0 to 100 50 0
adjustment TEST SIMULATION NO.03-10 CLOSE
<Inner finisher (MX-FNX1)> FINISHER ADJUSTMENT
A200 SADDLE POSITION
Default
Item Display Item Set range A: 200 B200 FOLDING POSITION
value C 10 FRONT ADJUSUT
A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 2 to 18 10 0 400
D 10 REAR ADJUSUT
adjustment (front)
B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 to 18 10 OK
adjustment (rear)
C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 to 132 100
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
D STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 68 to 132 100
adjustment (one
position in front)
4
E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 to 132 100
adjustment (two 4-2
positions at the Purpose Operation test/check
center)
F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 to 132 100 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
adjustment (two sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
positions in pitch) ity tray and the related circuit.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 to 63 50 Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
CENTER adjustment
Item Operation
H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 42 to 58 50
adjustment Operation/Procedure
<4K finisher> The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
Default <Desk sensor>
value
A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 to 20 10 DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection
adjustment (front) DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection
B STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 94 to 106 100 DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection
adjustment (one
DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection
DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection
C STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 94 to 106 100
DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
adjustment (one
position in front) DCSS12 Desk 1 rear edge detection 2
D PUNCH Punch center 40 to 60 50 DCSS13 Desk 1 rear edge detection 3
CENTER adjustment DCSS14 Desk 1 rear edge detection 4
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 to 52 50 DCSI2 Desk 2 instillation detection
adjustment DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection
<4K saddle finisher> DLUD2 Desk 2 upper limit detection
DPED2 Desk 2 paper empty detection
Default DCSPD2 Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection
value DCSS21 Desk 2 rear edge detection 1
A SADDLE Saddle binding 197 to 203 200 DCSS22 Desk 2 rear edge detection 2
POSITOIN position adjustment DCSS23 Desk 2 rear edge detection 3
B FOLDING Saddle folding 192 to 208 200 DCSS24 Desk 2 rear edge detection 4
POSITION position adjustment DSW_DSK Desk transport cover open/close detection
C FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 to 20 10
<A4 LCC sensor>
adjustment (front)
D STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 94 to 106 100 LPFD LCC transport sensor
adjustment (one
LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
E STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 94 to 106 100
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
adjustment (one
position in front) LCD LCC tray insertion detection
F PUNCH Punch center 40 to 60 50 LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
CENTER adjustment LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
G PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 to 52 50 L24VM LCC 24V power monitor
adjustment LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
<A3 LCC sensor>
LPFD LCC transport sensor

LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
L24VM LCC 24V power monitor
4-5
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection SW
LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection SW Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the
clutches and the related circuits.
0 Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Item Operation
DSK/LCC SENSOR CHECK
DCSI1 DPFD1 DLUD1 DPED1
Operation/Procedure
DCSPD1 DCSS11 DCSS12 DCSS13
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch panel.
DCSS14 DCSI2 DPFD2 DLUD2 The selected clutch operation is performed.
DPED2 DCSPD2 DCSS21 DCSS22 When the operation is normally completed, the button is high-
lighted.
DCSS23 DCSS24 DSW_DSK
1/1
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LTRC A4/A3 LCC transport clutch
4-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads TEST SIMULATION NO. 0405 CLOSE
in the large capacity tray and the related cir- DESK/LCC SYNCRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK
cuit. DTRC : DTRC OFF
LTRC : LTRC OFF

Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch 1/1
panel.
The selected load operation is performed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi- 5
nated.
<Desk load item> 5-1
DPFM Desk main motor
DLUM1 Desk 1 lift-up motor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
DPUC1 Desk 1 paper feed clutch LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
DLUM2 Desk 2 lift-up motor cuit.
DPUC2 Desk 2 paper feed clutch Section Operation panel
DTRC Desk transport clutch Item Operation
<A4 LCC load item> Operation/Procedure
LPFM LCC transport motor
The LCD is changed as shown below. (The contrast changes every
LLM LCC lift motor
2sec from the current level to MAX MIN the current level. Dur-
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
ing this period, each LED is lighted.)
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5 01
<A3 LCC load item>
LPFM LCC transport motor

LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
LTLC LCC tray lock clutch
0 TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5 01
DSK/LCC LOAD CHECK

DPFM DLUM1 DPUC1 DLUM2
DPUC2 DTRC
EXECUTE 1/1
The selected discharge lamp is lighted.
5-2
Purpose Operation test/check DL_K Discharge lamp K
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater DL_C Discharge lamp C Same control
lamp and the control circuit. DL_M Discharge lamp M
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
Section Fusing
Item Operation 0
Operation/Procedure TEST SIMULATION NO.05-04 CLOSE
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch DISCHARGE LAMP CHECK
panel. DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y

The selected heater lamp is operated.
nated. EXECUTE 1/1
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main

HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
HL_E
HL_ALL
Heater lamp external
All heater lamps ON
6
0 6-1
TEST SIMULATION NO.0502 CLOSE Purpose Operation test/check
HEATER LAMP LOAD SETUP
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
HL_UM HL_LM transport system, the transfer system, the
HL_E HL_ALL fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and
the control circuits.
Section Paper transport section (Transport, paper
EXECUTE 1/1 exit)
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
5-3
Purpose Operation test/check panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
lamp and the circuit. The selected load operation is performed.
Section Optical (Image scanning) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
Item Operation nated.
Operation/Procedure
Transport/ PFM Transport motor
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch imaging RRM Resist motor
panel.
POMF (*) Paper exit motor normal rotation
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. POMR (*) Paper exit motor reverse rotation
The target lamp is lighted for 10 sec. FUM Fusing motor
CPFM Cassette paper feed motor
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp OSM Shifter motor
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp (MX-3501N/4501N only) WTNM Waste toner drive motor
CPFC Cassette vertical transport clutch
0 1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch
TEST SIMULATION NO.0503 CLOSE PCSS Process control shutter solenoid
COPY LAMP CHECK LSUSS1 LSU shutter solenoid 1
OC COPY LAMP DSPF COPY LAMP LSUSS2 LSU shutter solenoid 2
Paper feed CLUM1 Cassette 1 lift-up motor
CPUC1 Cassette 1 paper feed clutch
CLUM2 Cassette 2 lift-up motor
EXECUTE
CPUC2 Cassette 2 paper feed clutch
1/1
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
MPGS Manual feed gate solenoid
5-4 (*): For the same loads displayed separately depending on normal
Purpose Operation test/check rotation and rotation, if they are selected together, normal rotation
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- is performed.
charge lamp and the related circuit. In addition, if the load is rotating, reverse rotation is not accepted
Section Process until the operation is stopped.
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
panel.

0
CLOSE
7
TEST SIMULATION NO.0601
FEED OUTPUT CHECK
PFM RRM 7-1
POMF POMR
FUM CPFM OSM CPFC Purpose Setting
1TURC PCSS WTNM CLUM1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
CPUC1 CLUM2 CPUC2 MPUC
aging.
EXECUTE 1/2 Section Other

Item Operation
6-2 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation test/check 1) Select the target to be set with buttons on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
motor and its control circuit. The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
Section Other The contents set with this simulation are retained until the
Item Operation power is turned OFF.
Operation/Procedure AGING Aging operation setup
1) Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch INTERVAL Intermittent setup
panel. MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
The selected load operation is performed. WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up disable setup
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
nated.
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment free setup
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor (* POFM_U, POFM_F, and
POFM_R are driven at the same time.) 0
OZFM Ozone fan motor TEST SIMULATION NO.0701 CLOSE
PSFM Power cooling fan motor AGING TEST SETTING
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
AGING INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE FUSING DISABLE
0

TEST SIMULATION NO.0602 CLOSE WARMUP DISABLE DV CHECK DISABLE
FAN LOAD SETUP SHADING DISABLE CCD GAIN FREE

POFM OZFM
EXECUTE 1/1
PSFM LSUFM

7-6
EXECUTE 1/1 Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
6-3 Section Other
Purpose Operation test/check Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary
transfer unit and the related circuit. 1) Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key.
Section Process (Transfer) 2) Press [OK] button.
Item Operation The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
Operation/Procedure Item Item Set range Default value
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. A CYCLE TIME(SEC) 1 to 900 3
2) The load operation is started. (Separation operation: BLACK
COLOR FREE Stops at each position for 5 sec.) During 0
the operation, the current position is displayed. TEST SIMULATION NO.07-06 CLOSE
BLACK Black mode position Black mode position INTERVAL AGING CYCLE TIME SETUP
COLOR COLOR mode position COLOR mode position A 3 CYCLE TIME(SEC)
FREE Drum separation position Drum separation position A: 3

Shift to the black mode
1 900
position is repeated.
0 OK
TRANSFER LOAD CHECK
POSITION :

EXECUTE
1/1
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
7-8 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Purpose Operation display 4) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time. The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
Section Fusing set value is outputted for 30 sec.
Item Operation * The adjustment values of [MIDDLE] and [LOW] (MX-4500N/
4501N: [LOW/HIGH]) are related together.
Operation/Procedure
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Counting of the warm-up time is started. Setting Default
Button Item Display Content
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] button is inhib- range value
ited. MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing 0 to 700 450
SPEED bias set value at
DVB_K middle speed
0 B MIDDLE C developing 0 to 700 450
TEST SPEED bias set value at
WARM UP TIME DISPLAY SETTING DVB_C middle speed
0 SECONDS C MIDDLE M developing 0 to 700 450
DVB_M middle speed
D MIDDLE Y developing 0 to 700 450
EXECUTE DVB_Y middle speed
LOW A LOW K developing 0 to 700 430
DVB_K low speed
7-9 B LOW C developing 0 to 700 430
DVB_C low speed
Function (Purpose) Used to check printing in the color mode. C LOW M developing 0 to 700 430
Section SPEED bias set value at
DVB_M low speed
Item Operation
D LOW Y developing 0 to 700 430
Operation/Procedure SPEED bias set value at
1) Select a print color with buttons on the touch panel. DVB_Y low speed
HIGH E HIGH K developing 0 to 700 450
(MX-4500N/ SPEED bias set value at
Printing is started in the selected color. 4501N only) DVB_K high speed
* If no color is specified, printing is made in all colors.
0
K Setup/cancel of black SIMULATION NO.0801 CLOSE
TEST
C Setup/cancel of cyan
M Setup/cancel of magenta
A450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
Y Setup/cancel of yellow
A: 450 B450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M

0 700
0 D450 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y

PRINTING COLOR SELECT(COLOR MODE)
K C M Y
8-2
Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
EXECUTE
1/1 Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
Section Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
8 Transfer/Cleaning)
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
8-1
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] (MX-4500N/4501N:
Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment [LOW/HIGH]) buttons on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
the developing voltage of each color and
the control circuit.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
Transfer/Cleaning)
set value is outputted for 30 sec.
Item Operation
* The adjustment values of [MIDDLE] and [LOW] (MX-4500N/
Operation/Procedure 4501N: [LOW/HIGH]) are related together.
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] (MX-4500N/4501N: * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
[LOW/HIGH]) buttons on the touch panel.
Setting Default 0
Button Item Display Content
range value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid 230 to 850 645
SPEED bias set value at MHV/GRID SETTING AND OUTPUT
A645
GB_K middle speed MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B MIDDLE C charging/grid 230 to 850 645

A: 645 B645 MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C645 MIDDLE SPEED GB_M

SPEED bias set value at 230 850 D645 MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
GB_C middle speed
C MIDDLE M charging/grid 230 to 850 645
GB_M middle speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid 230 to 850 645
SPEED bias set value at 8-6
GB_Y middle speed
LOW A LOW K charging/grid 230 to 850 620 Purpose Operation test/Check/Adjustment
SPEED bias set value at Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
GB_K low speed the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
B LOW C charging/grid 230 to 850 620
GB_C low speed Transfer/Cleaning)/Transfer
C LOW M charging/grid 230 to 850 620 Item Setting
SPEED bias set value at Operation/Procedure
GB_M low speed
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
D LOW Y charging/grid 230 to 850 620
SPEED bias set value at 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
GB_Y low speed 3) Press [EXECUTE] button.
HIGH E HIGH K charging/grid 230 to 850 665 The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
(MX-4500N/ SPEED bias set value at
set value is outputted for 30 sec.
4501N only) GB_K high speed
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
(MX-3500N/3501N)
Default
output value
G TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer COLOR Normal Front surface 51 to 255 136 2A to 45A 20A
H TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias reference paper Back surface 51 to 255 136 2A to 45A 20A
I TC2 PLAIN BW SPX value BLACK Front surface 51 to 255 117 2A to 45A 16A
J TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 to 255 117 2A to 45A 16A
K TC2 HEAVY CL SPX COLOR Heavy Front surface 51 to 255 79 2A to 45A 8A
L TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 to 255 70 2A to 45A 6A
M TC2 HEAVY BW SPX BLACK Front surface 51 to 255 79 2A to 45A 8A
N TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 to 255 70 2A to 45A 6A
O TC2 OHP CL COLOR OHP 51 to 255 65 5A to 45A 5A
P TC2 OHP BW BLACK 51 to 255 65 5A to 45A 5A
Q TC2 ENVELOPE CL COLOR Envelope 51 to 255 184 5A to 45A 30A
R TC2 ENVELOPE BW BLACK 51 to 255 184 5A to 45A 30A
S TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 to 255 79 5A to 45A 8A
T TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer Low speed print 51 to 255 72 50V to 1500V 200V
U TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning bias Middle speed print 51 to 255 100 50V to 1500V 400V
V TC2 CLEAN CLEANING reference value Cleaning 51 to 255 156 50V to 1500V 800V
(MX-4500N/4501N)
Default
output value
G TC1 HIGH SPEED BW K High speed 0 to 255 232 500V to 5000V 4500V
Default
output value
H TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer COLOR Normal Front surface 51 to 255 136 2A to 45A 20A
I TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias reference paper Back surface 51 to 255 136 2A to 45A 20A
J TC2 PLAIN BW SPX value BLACK Front surface 51 to 255 117 2A to 45A 16A
K TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 to 255 117 2A to 45A 16A
L TC2 HEAVY CL SPX COLOR Heavy Front surface 51 to 255 79 2A to 45A 8A
M TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 to 255 70 2A to 45A 6A
N TC2 HEAVY BW SPX BLACK Front surface 51 to 255 79 2A to 45A 8A
O TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 to 255 70 2A to 45A 6A
P TC2 OHP CL COLOR OHP 51 to 255 65 5A to 45A 5A
Q TC2 OHP BW BLACK 51 to 255 65 5A to 45A 5A
R TC2 ENVELOPE CL COLOR Envelope 51 to 255 184 5A to 45A 30A
S TC2 ENVELOPE BW BLACK 51 to 255 184 5A to 45A 30A
T TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 to 255 79 5A to 45A 8A
U TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary transfer Low speed print 51 to 255 72 50V to 1500V 200V
V TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD cleaning bias Middle speed print 51 to 255 100 50V to 1500V 400V
W TC2 CLEAN HIGH SPD reference value High speed print 51 to 255 114 50V to 1500V 500V
X TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning 51 to 255 156 50V to 1500V 800V
9-3
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.08-06 CLOSE Purpose Operation test/check
CLOSE
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
A : 232 TC1 LOW SPEED CL K in the duplex section and the control cir-
A: 232 B : 232 TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K cuits.
C : 139 TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY
[ 0~255] Section Duplex
D : 139 TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY
Item Operation
EXECUTE OK Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation tested with the buttons on the
touch panel.
9 The selected load operation is performed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
9-2
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
Purpose Operation test/check ADUM_U ADU motor upper
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
sors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit. 0
CLOSE
Section Duplex TEST SIMULATION NO.09-03
ADU LOAD CHECK

Item Operation
ADUM_L ADUM_U ADUGS
Operation/Procedure
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed.
EXECUTE 1/1
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2
10
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.0902 CLOSE 10-1
ADU SENSOR CHECK
DSW_ADU APPD1 APPD2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
motor and the related circuit.
Section Process (Developing)
1/1 Item Operation
1/1 Operation/Procedure
* Before execution of this simulation, remove the toner cartridges.
panel.
* The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is termi-
nated.
TNM_K
TNM_C
Toner motor K
Toner motor C
15
TNM_M Toner motor M
TNM_Y Toner motor Y 15--
Purpose Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
0
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large
capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
TONER MOTOR ACTIVATION
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_Y

Section LCC
TNM_M
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE 1/1 2) Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
0
13
TEST
LCC TROUBLE CANCELLATION
13--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
YES NO
Section FAX ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
16
0 16--
TEST SIMULATION NO.13 CLOSE Purpose Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
U1 TROUBLE CANCELLATION
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Section MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
0
14 TEST SIMULATION NO.16 CLOSE
U2 TROUBLE CANCELLATION

14--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/
LCC/U2/PF troubles.
Section ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
17
0 17--
TEST S I MU LA TI O N N O . 1 4 CLOSE Purpose Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
TRO UBLE CANCELLATIO N(O THER) Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag PF.
Section Communication unit (RIC/MODEM)
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
ARE YO U SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
COPY(BW) Black copy counter
0 COPY(COL) Color copy counter
TEST SIMULATION NO.17 CLOSE COPY(2COL) 2-color copy counter
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION COPY(SGL_COL) Single color copy counter
PRINT(BW) Black print counter
PRINT(COL) Color print counter
DOC FIL(BW) Black document filing print counter
DOC FIL(COL) Color document filing print counter
DOC FIL(2COL) 2-color document filing print counter
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE DOC FIL(SGL COL) Single-color document filing print counter
OTHER(BW) Black other counter
OTHER(COL) Color other counter
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
21 MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
Maintenance counter (Color)
Primary transfer unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
21-1 distance (cm)
Purpose Setting TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transfer unit (Day)
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
Section distance (cm)
Item Specifications TC2 BELT DAY Use day of secondary transfer unit (Day)
Operation/Procedure FUSER UNIT(U&L) Fuser unit print counter (Heat roller upper and
lower)
1) Select an item corresponding to the set contents with [] []
FUSER UNIT(E) Fuser unit print counter (Heat roller external)
buttons.
FUSER DAY(U&L) Use day of fuser unit (Heat roller upper and lower)
2) Enter the value corresponding to the maintenance timing with FUSER DAY(E) Use day of fuser unit (Heat roller external)
10-key. FUSER WEB SEND Fuser web cleaning send counter
3) Press [OK] button to save the entered conditions in step 2). FUSER WEB UNIT Fuser web print counter
FUSER WEB DAY Use day of fuser web unit
Default DRUM LIFE(K) Accumulated number of drum rotations (K)
Item Display Content Set range
value DRUM LIFE(C) Accumulated number of drum rotations (C)
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: DEFAULT, 150K DRUM LIFE(M) Accumulated number of drum rotations (M)
COUNTER counter 1 300: 1K 300K
DRUM LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of drum rotations (Y)
(TOTAL) (total) 999: FREE
DEVE LIFE(K) Accumulated number of developer rotations (K)
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: DEFAULT, 100K
DEVE LIFE(C) Accumulated number of developer rotations (C)
COUNTER counter 1 300: 1K 300K
(COLOR) (color) 999: FREE DEVE LIFE(M) Accumulated number of developer rotations (M)
DEVE LIFE(Y) Accumulated number of developer rotations (Y)
0
SIMULATION NO.21-01 CLOSE 0
TEST
MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP
COUNTER DISPLAY
A: 0 ; MAINTENANCE COUNTER (TOTAL)
A: 0 B: 0 ; MAINTENANCE COUNTER (COLOR) TOTAL OUT(BW) : 00000000 TOTAL(SGL_COL) : 00000000
TOTAL OUT(COL) : 00000000 COPY(BW) : 00000000

[ 0~ 999 ]
TOTAL(BW) : 00000000 COPY(COL) : 00000000
TOTAL(COL) : 00000000 COPY(2COL) : 00000000

OK
TOTAL(2COL) : 00000000 COPY(SGL_COL) : 00000000
1/5
22 22-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
22-1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed

and troubles. (When the number of total
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check jam is considerably great, it is judged as
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each necessary for repair.)
section and each operation mode. (Used to Section
check the maintenance timing.)
Item Counter
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item Counter
The paper jam/trouble counter value is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
Change the display page with [] [] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
RSPF/DSPF JAM RSPF/DSPF JAM counter
TOTAL OUT(BW) Total output quantity of black TROUBLE Trouble counter
TOTAL OUT(COL) Total output quantity of color
TOTAL(BW) Total use quantity of black
TOTAL(COL) Total use quantity of color
TOTAL(2COL) Total use quantity of 2-color
TOTAL(SGL_COL) Total use quantity of single color
0 22-5
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-02 CLOSE Purpose Others
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DISPLAY Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
MACHINE JAM : 00000000
unit (section).
RSPF/DSPF JAM : 00000000 Section
TROUBLE : 00000000 Item Software
Operation/Procedure
1/1 The ROM version can be checked with [] [] buttons.
When there is any problem in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version of each section and revise the version if
22-3 necessary.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
S/N Serial No.
misfeed count of each position.
ICU(MAIN) ICU (Main section)
Section ICU(BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
Item Trouble LANGUAGE Language support data version
Operation/Procedure GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
IMG DATA ROM ImageASIC FlashROM data
The history of paper jams and misfeed is displayed.
COLOR PROFILE Color profile
The above histories are displayed from the newest one to the old- PCU PCU
est in this sequence. The max. 50 items are saved. (The oldest one SCU SCU
is sequentially erased.) SPF SPF
* List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12] FAX1(MAIN) FAX1 line (Main section)
OTHERS." FAX2(MAIN) FAX2 line (Main section)
DESK Desk unit
0 LCC Side LCC
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-03 CLOSE FINISHER Finisher
JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY SADDLE Saddle unit
PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 MFT TRAY3 PUNCH Punch unit
PPD2_N1 CPFD2_S2 APPD3_S DPFD2_S4 NIC NIC
LCC PPD2_PRI CPID2_S2 CPID2_S2 EFI EFI
POWER-CON Power controller
CPFD1_N1 PPD2_PRI TRAY3 APPD3_S
1/1 E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
TRAY2 MFT
1/1
0
22-4 S/N : **********
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check ICU(MAIN) : 00.00.00 COLOR PROFILE : 00.00.00
ICU(BOOT) : 00.00.00 PCU : 00.00.00

Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
LANGUAGE : 00.00.00 SCU : 00.00.00
tory.
GRAPHIC : 00.00.00 SPF : 00.00.00
Section
IMG DATA ROM : 00.00.00 FAX1(MAIN) : NONE 1/2
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed.
22-6
The trouble history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 30 items can be stored. (The oldest one is deleted Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
sequentially.) Function (Purpose) Used to output the list of the setting and
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft
* Trouble code list: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in the "[8] SELF switch, counters).
DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE". Section
Item Data (Setting, adjustment data)
0 Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
TROUBLE CODE DATA DISPLAY
E7-23 F9-20 F2-39 L4-31
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
F1-50 L4-02 F2-39 F1-50
F1-50 L4-02 F1-61 F1-50

1) Select the print mode with 10-key.
F1-50 F2-39 H5-01 E7-23
U5-12 F2-39 L1-00 E7-23 The list print selected in step 1) is started.
1/2 * When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXE-
CUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is ter-
minated.
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Display item & Set Default
Item Description LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC)
detail display range value
A DATA PATTERN Data pattern selection 1 to 2 1 ADU ADU paper feed counter
1: List print
2: List print (Sim50-24) 0
0 PAPER FEED COUNTER DISPLAY
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-06 CLOSE TRAY1 : 00000000 MFT HEAVY : 00000000
DATA PRINT MODE TRAY2 : 00000000 MFT OHP : 00000000
A: 1 ; DATA PATTERN TRAY3 : 00000000 MFT ENV : 00000000
A: 1 TRAY4 : 00000000 LCC : 00000000
MFT TOTAL : 00000000 ADU : 00000000

[ 1~ 2 ]
1/1
EXECUTE OK
22-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
22-8 Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check (option, internal hardware).
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use of the fin- Section
isher, the RSPF, the DSPF, and the scan Item Specifications (Option)
(reading) unit. Operation/Procedure
Section 1) The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of
Item Counter the installed devices and options are displayed.)
Operation/Procedure 2) Change the display with [] [] buttons.
The values of the finisher counter, the RSPF counter, the DSPF Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
counter, and the scanner (read) related counters are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. Item display Display content Content
MACHINE MX-3500FN Machine
RSPF/DSPF Document feed quantity MX-4500FN
SCAN Number of scan MX-3501FN
STAPLER Staple counter MX-4501FN
PUNCHER Puncher counter MX-3500N
STAMP Stamp counter MX-4500N
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter MX-3501N
OC_OPEN OC open/close counter MX-4501N
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN RSPF/DSPF open/close counter RSPF/DSPF MX-RPX1/ Document feed unit
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section STANDARD
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
DESK MX-DEX3 Desk unit
MX-DEX4
0
LCC MX-LCX1 Large capacity cassette (Side
LCC)
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DISPLAY
PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch unit
RSPF/DSPF : 00000000 SADDLE STAPLER : 00000000 MX-PNX1B
SCAN : 00000000 OC_OPEN : 00000000 MX-PNX1C
STAPLER : 00000000 RSPF/DSPF_OPEN : 00000000 MX-PNX1D
PUNCHER : 00000000 OC LAMP TIME : 00000:00 AR-PN1A
STAMP : 00000000 DSPF LAMP TIME : 00000:00 AR-PN1B
1/1
AR-PN1C
AR-PN1D
FINISHER MX-FNX2 Finisher
22-9
MX-FNX1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check FAX1 MX-FXX1 FAX kit
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print FAX2 MX-FLX1 FAX 2 line kit
quantity) of each paper feed section. FAX MEMORY AR-MM9 FAX expansion memory
MX-MMX1
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
HAND SET MX-HNX1 Handset
Item Counter NETWORK MX-NSX1 Network scanner expansion kit
Operation/Procedure SCANNER
The values of the paper feed related counters are displayed. PRINTER MX-PBX1 Printer expansion kit
PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
SECURITY MX-FRX2 Security kit
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter AIM MX-AMX1 Application expansion kit
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter SDRAM(SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter SDRAM(ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) NIC STANDARD NIC
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) BARCODE AR-PF1 Barcode font
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
M X3500N SIM U LATIO N 7 24

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-10 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.2212 CLOSE
CLOSE
MACHINE SYSTEM 52(,#/*+5614;&#6#&+52.#;
MACHINE : MX-3500N PUNCHER : MX-PNX1A

RSPF/DSPF : MX-RPX1/STANDARD FINISHER : MX-FNX1
STAMP : AR-SU1 FAX : MX-FXX1
DESK : MX-DEX3 FAX2 : MX-FLX1
LCC : MX-LCX1 FAX MEMORY : AR-MM9

1/3

22-11 22-13
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/ Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
installed) cartridge).
Section FAX Section
Item Counter Item Counter
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
are displayed. displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. Change the display with [] [] buttons.
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX print quantity counter (for line 2)
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge print counter (C)
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge print counter (M)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2)
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
SEND TIME FAX send time
(CM)(K)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
DRUM RANGE C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications
(CM)(C)
DRUM RANGE M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
0 (CM)(M)
TEST SIMULATION NO.2211 CLOSE DRUM RANGE Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(Y)
FAX COUNTER DISPLAY
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
FAX OUTPUT 00000000 SEND IMAGES_L2 00000000
DEVE CTRG C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
FAX OUTPUT_L2 00000000 SEND TIME 00000000:00:00 DEVE CTRG M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
FAX SEND 00000000 RECEIVED TIME 00000000:00:00 DEVE CTRG Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
FAX RECEIVED 00000000 ACR SEND 00000000 DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
SEND IMAGES 00000000
(CM)(K)
1/1
DEVE RANGE C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(C)
DEVE RANGE M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
22-12 (CM)(M)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(Y)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF/DSPF misfeed TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
positions and the number of misfeed at TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C)
each position. (When the number of mis- TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M)
feed is considerably great, it can be judged TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y)
as necessary for repair.) TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(K)
Section RSPF/DSPF TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(C)
Item Function TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(M)
Operation/Procedure TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(Y)
The history of paper jam and misfeed is displayed.

The misfeed history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 50 items are recorded. (The oldest one is sequentially TEST
deleted.) This data can be used to identify the trouble position. PROCESS CARTRIDGE DISPLAY
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. DRUM CTRG K : 00000000 DRUM RANGE K : 00000000
List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12] OTH- DRUM CTRG C : 00000000 DRUM RANGE C : 00000000
ERS". DRUM CTRG M : 00000000 DRUM RANGE M : 00000000

DRUM CTRG Y : 00000000 DRUM RANGE Y : 00000000

1/2
22-19 All custom setting list ALL CUSTOM All custom setting list
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check SETTING LIST
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET PCL symbol set list
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters LIST
related to the scan mode and the internet PCL INTERNAL FONT PCL internal font list
FAX mode. LIST
Section Scanner PCL EXTENDED PCL extended font list
FONT LIST
Item Counter
PS FONT LIST PS extended font list
Operation/Procedure PS KANJI FONT LIST PS kanji font list
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner. PS EXTENDED FONT PS extended font list
Change the display with [] [] buttons. LIST
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print. NIC PAGE NIC page
Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST One-touch address list
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity list GROUP LIST Group list
counter (B/W) (B/W scan job) PROGRAM LIST Program list
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list
counter (COLOR) (Color scan job) ALL SENDING All address registration
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity ADDRESS LIST list
counter (2-COLOR) (2-Color scan job) Document filing DOCUMENT FILING Folder list
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity folder list FOLDER LIST
counter (SINGLE) (Single-color scan job) System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS Copy
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of times of internet FAX output LIST (COPY)
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of times of internet FAX send ADMIN. SETTINGS Printer
OUTPUT LIST (PRINT)
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of times of internet FAX receive ADMIN. SETTINGS FAX/Image send
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of times of internet FAX send LIST (IMAGE SEND)
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send ADMIN. SETTINGS Document filing
FTP COUNTER Number of times of FTP send LIST (DOC FILING)
SMB SEND Number of times of SMB send ADMIN. SETTINGS Security
LIST (SECURITY)
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
ADMIN. SETTINGS Common
TRIAL MODE_B & C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan
LIST (COMMON)
job)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR All system setting list
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SETTINGS LIST
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX Receive rejection
SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
number table NUMBER LIST number table
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE
Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/ Receive rejection/allow
color)
allow address/ DOMAIN NAME LIST address/domain table
domain table
0 Transfer to Email INBOUND ROUTING Transfer to Email table
TEST SIMULATION NO.2219 CLOSE table list LIST list
NETWORK SCANNER COUNTER DISPLAY
Transfer to DOCUMENT ADMIN Transfer to
NET SCN ORG_B/W : 00000000
Administrator list LIST Administrator list
NET SCN ORG_CL
Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST Web setting list
: 00000000
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list
NET SCN ORG_2CL : 00000000
NET SCN ORG_SGL : 00000000
0
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT : 00000000
1/4 TES
TEST SIMULATION NO.22-90 CL
CLOSE
LIST PRINT
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST PCL SYMBOL SET LIST

22-90
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check PS FONT LIST PS KANJI FONT LIST
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists. PS EXTENDED FONT LIST NIC PAGE
Section EXECUTE
EX 1/4
Item Function
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] buttons.
Select the print target with the buttons on the touch panel.
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self print.
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXE-
CUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is termi-
nated.
3) Press [YES] button.
23 The target counter is cleared.
MACHINE Machine JAM counter

23-2 RSPF RSPF JAM counter (MX-3500N/4500N only)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check DSPF DSPF JAM counter (MX-3501N/4501N only)
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble history of paper
jam and misfeed. (If the number of misfeed
and troubles is considerably great, it may 0
CLOSE
be judged as necessary to repair.) TEST SIMULATION NO.2401
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DATA CLEAR

Section
MACHINE RSPF TROUBLE
Item Trouble
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
EXECUTE
0 1/1
JAM/TROUBLE DATA PRINT MODE

24-2
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
EXECUTE Section
Item Counter
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
23-80
panel.
Purpose Operation test/check 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- 3) Press [YES] button.
sors and detectors in the paper feed and
The target counter is cleared.
transport section.
Section Paper feed, transport TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
Item Function TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
Operation/Procedure
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXE- MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
CUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is termi- MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
nated. MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 or A3 LCC)
0 ADU ADU paper feed counter
DATA PRINT MODEPAPER FEED 0

PAPER FEED TIME LIST
PAPER FEED COUNTER CLEAR
TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4
MFT TOTAL MFT HEAVY MFT OHP MFT ENV
LCC ADU
EXECUTE 1/1

EXECUTE 1/1
24 24-3
Purpose Data clear
24-1
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use of the fin-
Purpose Data clear isher, RSPF, DSPF, and the scan (reading)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou- unit.
ble counter. (The counters are cleared after Section
completion of maintenance.)
Item Counter
Section Operation/Procedure
Item Counter 1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
Operation/Procedure panel.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
panel. 3) Press [YES] button.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. The target counter is cleared.
RSPF/DSPF SPF counter 24-5
SCAN Scan counter Purpose Data clear
STAPLER Staple counter
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
PUNCHER Puncher counter
replacement of developer, clear the
STAMP Stamp counter
counter.)
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
OC_OPEN OC open/close counter Section
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN RSPF/DSPF open/close counter Item Counter
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time Operation/Procedure
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
panel.
0
CLOSE
ORG./OUTPUT COUNTER DATA CLEAR

RSPF SCAN STAPLER PUNCHER The target counter is cleared.
STAMP SADDLE STAPLER OC_OPEN RSPF/DSPF_OPEN
OC LAMP TIME DSPF LAMP TIME K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
YES NO
C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE 1/1
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
24-4 Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Purpose Data clear Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
printer counters of the transfer unit and the
fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- 0
nance, clear the counters.) TEST SIMULATION NO.2405 CLOSE
Section DEVELOPER COUNTER DATA CLEAR

K C M Y
Item Counter
Operation/Procedure
panel.
YES NO
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
1/1
24-6
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Purpose Data clear
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
TC1 BELT Primary transfer unit print counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling Section
distance (cm) Item Counter
TC1 BELT DAY Primary transfer unit use day (Day) Operation/Procedure
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer unit print counter
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
panel.
distance (cm)
TC2 BELT DAY Secondary transfer unit use day (Day) 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
FUSER UNIT(U&L) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller upper and 3) Press [YES] button.
lower) The target counter is cleared.
FUSER UNIT(E) Fusing unit print counter (Heat roller external)
FUSER DAY(U&L) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller upper and lower) COPY BW Copy (B/W) counter
FUSER DAY(E) Fusing unit use day (Heat roller external) COPY COL Copy (COLOR) counter
FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web send counter SINGLE COLOR Single color
FUSER WEB Fusing web print counter 2COLOR 2-color
FUSER WEB DAY Fusing web unit use day
0
0 TEST SIMULATION NO.2406 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO.2404 CLOSE COPY COUNTER DATA CLEAR
MAINTENANCE COUNTER CLEAR COPY BW COPY COL SINGLE COLOR COLOR
MAINTENANCE ALL MAINTENANCE COL TC1 BELT TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY TC2 BELT TC2 BELT RANGE TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER UNIT(U&L) FUSER UNIT(E) FUSER DAY(U&L) FUSER DAY(E)
FUSER UNIT(U&L) FUSER UNIT(E) FUSER DAY(U&L) FUSER DAY(E)

EXECUTE 1/1
EXECUTE
1/2
24-7 24-10
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when
replacement of the OPC drum, clear the FAX is installed)
counter.) Section
Section Item Counter
Item Counter (OPC drum) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch panel.
panel. 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. 3) Press [YES] button.
3) Press [YES] button. The target counter is cleared.
FAX OUTPUT Print quantity counter (for line 1)
K Drum cartridge print counter (K) FAX OUTPUT_L2 Print quantity counter (for line 2)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) FAX SEND Send counter
C Drum cartridge print counter (C) FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C) SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
M Drum cartridge print counter (M) SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M) SEND TIME FAX send time
Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y) RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y) ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix attached communications
* The "accumulated number of drum rotation" counter of SIM22-01
is not displayed on the execution screen of this simulation, but it 0
is cleared in connection with execution of this simulation. TEST SIMULATION NO.2410 CLOSE
FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR

0 FAX OUTPUT FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX SEND FAX RECEIVED
TEST SIMULATION NO.2407 CLOSE SEND IMAGES SEND IMAGES_L2 SEND TIME RECEIVED TIME
DRUM CTRG COUNTER CLEAR ACR SEND
K C M Y

EXECUTE 1/1

EXECUTE 1/1 24-15
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
24-9 image send.
Purpose Data clear Section
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter Item Counter
and the self print mode print counter.
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
Item Counter panel.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch 3) Press [YES] button.
panel. The target counter is cleared.
3) Press [YES] button. NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W) (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (COLOR) (COLOR scan job)
PRINT BW Printer (B/W) counter
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity
PRINT COL Printer (COLOR) counter
counter (2-color) (2-color scan job)
OTHER BW Other (BW) counter
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity
OTHER COL Other (COLOR) counter
counter (Single) (Single scan job)
INTERNET FAX Internet FAX output quantity
0 OUTPUT
TEST SIMULATION NO.2409 CLOSE INTERNET FAX SEND Internet FAX send quantity
PRINT/OTHER COUNTER CLEAR
OUTPUT
PRINT BW PRINT COL OTHER BW OTHER COL
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of E-Mail send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO SMB SEND Numeric SMB send
EXECUTE 1/1
USB CNT Number of USB save
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W Scan to HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL Scan to HDD record quantity (COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color) 25
SCAN TO HDD_SGL Scan to HDD record quantity (Single color)
25-1
0
Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
NETWORK SCANNER COUTNER DATA CLEAR
oping section.
NET SCN ORG_B/W NET SCN ORG_CL
NET SCN ORG_2CL

Section Process (Developing section)
NET SCN ORG_SGL
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT Item Operation

INTERNET FAX RECEIVE INTERNET FAX SEND Operation/Procedure
ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] and [HIGH]
1/3 (MX-4500N/4501N only) buttons.
24-30 The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
min and the detection level of the toner density sensor is dis-
Purpose Data clear played.
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass-
word. TCD_K Toner concentration sensor K
TCD_C Toner concentration sensor C
Section
TCD_M Toner concentration sensor M
Item Clear TCD_Y Toner concentration sensor Y
Operation/Procedure TCV_K Toner concentration control voltage K
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. TCV_C Toner concentration control voltage C
2) Press [YES] button. TCV_M Toner concentration control voltage M
TCV_Y Toner concentration control voltage Y
The administrator password is initialized.
0 0
TEST NO.24-30
SIMULATION CLOSE
TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR
ADMIN PASSWORD INITIALIZE
TCD_ : TCV_ :
TCD_C : TCV_C :
TCD_M : TCV_M :
TCD_Y : TCV_ :
LOW MIDDLE EXECUTE

EXECUTE 1/1
25-2
24-31
Purpose Setting
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
concentration when replacing developer.
word.
Section
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item Clear
Item Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the adjustment target with the buttons on the touch
2) Press [YES] button. panel.
The service mode password is initialized. 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
The toner concentration sensor makes sampling of toner con-
0 centration to display the detection level.
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
SERVICE PASSWORD INITIALIZE
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner concentration level is not set normally.
Display Default
Display items Item descriptions
range value
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K Automatic developer 1 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C adjustment value at low 1 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M speed 1 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K Automatic developer 1 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C adjustment value at 1 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M middle speed 1 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 255 128
Display Default 26-2
Display items Item descriptions
range value
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K Automatic developer 1 255 128 Purpose Setting
(MX-4500N/4501N only) adjustment value at Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
high speed capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
AT DEVE VO_L_K Automatic developer 1 255 128 is changed, this simulation must be exe-
AT DEVE VO_L_C adjustment control 1 255 128 cuted to change the paper size in software.)
AT DEVE VO_L_M voltage at low speed 1 255 128
Section Paper feed
AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 255 128
AT DEVE VO_M_K Automatic developer 1 255 128 Item Setting
AT DEVE VO_M_C adjustment control 1 255 128 Operation/Procedure
AT DEVE VO_M_M voltage at middle speed 1 255 128 Select the paper size with the buttons on the touch panel.
AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 255 128
AT DEVE VO_H_K Automatic developer 1 255 128 LCC 0 8.5 x 11 (Default: U.S.A, Canada, Inch)
(MX-4500N/4501N only) adjustment control 1 A4 (Japan, AB_B, Europe, U.K,
voltage at high speed Australia, AB_A)
2 B5
TCD_K Toner concentration sensor K
TCD_C Toner concentration sensor C
TCD_M Toner concentration sensor M
0
TCD_Y Toner concentration sensor Y
TCV_K Toner concentration control K SIZE SETUP
B5
TCV_C Toner concentration control C LCC 8.5 11 A4
TCV_M Toner concentration control M

TCV_Y Toner concentration control Y
0
SIMULATION NO.25-02 CLOSE 1/1
TEST
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_K : 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_C : 128

26-3
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_M : 128
Purpose Setting
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y : 128 AT DEVE VO_L_Y : 128
K C M Y EXECUTE Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
1/2
Section Auditor
Item Specifications
Operation/Procedure
26 Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
When a button is pressed, the set content is saved.
26-1
Button
Purpose Setting Item Content Default
display
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1). BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
Section Paper exit AUDITOR (standard mode) operation
EC1 The built-in auditor mode is
Item Setting
changed to EC1.
Operation/Procedure OUTSIDE NONE Normal operation NONE
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. AUDITOR P VENDOR1 Vendor mode for old-type coin
2) Press [OK] button to save the entered content in step 1). vendor. Control in the copy
mode only.
Set P OTHER Vendor mode for the other
Item Display Content Default
range external auditor connected to
A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Escape tray YES 0 to 1 1 (NO) the coin vendor I/F
1 Escape tray NO DOC ADJ ON Document filing function OFF
enabled
OFF Document filing function
0 disabled
TEST PF ADJ ON Continuous paper feed is OFF
ESCAPE TRAY SETUP performed.
A 0 (0:YES 1:NO) OFF Continuous paper feed is not
A: 0 performed.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE3
0 1
MODE (*) MODE2 Vendor mode 2
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
OK
Button
Item Content Default
display 0
COUNTUP FUSER_IN The charging timing is when EXIT_OUT TEST SIMULATION NO.2605 CLOSE
TIMING1 passing the sensor paper lead
A3(1117) COUNTUP
edge after fusing. A 2 TOTAL(B/W)
FUSER_OUT The charging timing is when
A: 2 B 2 TOTAL(COL)
passing the sensor paper rear C 2 MAINTENANCE(B/W)
edge after fusing. 1 2
D 2 MAINTENANCE(COL)
EXIT_OUT The charging timing is when
passing the (machine, right)
OK
tray/after-process unit paper
exit sensor paper rear edge.
(*): AR-C260 series VENDOR MODE is supported.
26-6
The Insufficient money during The
Purpose Setting
specified copy job specified
quantity is quantity is Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
BLACK/ COLOR
Diagnosis completed. completed. magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
COLOR (No (Remainder
setting Remainder No
remainder of money Section
of money remainder
of money) left) Item Specifications (Destination)
left. of money.
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Operation/Procedure
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1 1) Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
The selected set content is saved.
Operation 1: Wait for auto clear setting time. Default, 60sec. Can
be changed by the system setting. U.S.A. United States of America
Operation 2: Auto clear is not made. CANADA Canada
Operation 3: Setting is immediately cleared. The display returns to INCH Inch series, other destinations
the initial screen. JAPAN Japan
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
EUROPE Europe
0
U.K. United Kingdom
AUS. Australia
AUDITOR SETUP
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
BUILT-IN AUDITOR EC1
P10 CHINA China
OUTSIDE AUDITOR NONE P VENDOR1 P OTHER
DOC ADJ ON OFF 0
PF ADJ ON OFF TEST SIMULATION NO.26-06 CLOSE
VENDOR MODE MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 DISTINATION SETUP
1/2
U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN
AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS
26-5 AB_A CHINA
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total EXECUTE 1/1
counter and the maintenance counter.
Section
Item Counter 26-10
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
1) Select the set item with [] [] buttons. Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. scanner.
3) Press [OK] button. Section
The set content in step 2) is saved. (Count-up number for A3 Item Operation
paper is 1 or 2.) Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Setting
Item Display Content Default * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
range *
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (BLACK) 1 to 2 2 2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (COLOR) 1 to 2 2 saved to EEPROM and RAM.
C MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter 1 to 2 2 * When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is
(B/W) (BLACK) saved to EEPROM and RAM.
D MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter 1 to 2 2
(COL) (COLOR) <Setting range and default value of each set value>
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter 1 to 2 2 Setting Default
(BLACK) Item Display Content
range value
F DEV (COL) Developer counter 1 to 2 2 A TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting 0 to 1 1
(COLOR) (0:YES 1:NO) 1 Trial mode cancel
* 1 = Count up by 1
2 = Count up by 2
Operation/Procedure
0 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-10 CLOSE is displayed.
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL MODE SETUP 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A:1 TRIAL MODE (0:YES 1:NO)
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
A: 1
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
[ 0~ 1 ] saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
OK value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
<Setting range and default value of each set value>
Setting
26-18 Item Display Content Default value
range
Purpose Setting A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 CE mark 0 to 1 Refer to <Initial
control allowed value and set
Function (Purpose) Used to set the toner save mode.
1 CE mark value linked with
Section control inhibited the destination>.
Item NOTE: Even though the control is allowed, the CE mark support
Operation/Procedure control may not be executed depending on the power fre-
1) Use [] and [] buttons to select an item. quency, etc.
The set value is highlighted and the value is displayed in the <Initial value and set value linked with the destination>
setting area.
Destination Setting value
* When there is an item over [], the display becomes active U.S.A 1 (CE not supported)
and shifts to another item. CANADA 1 (CE not supported)
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the INCH 1 (CE not supported)
operation is disabled. JAPAN 1 (CE not supported)
When there is an item under [], the display becomes active AB_B 1 (CE not supported)
and shifts to another item. EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and U.K 0 (CE supported)
the operation is disabled. AUS. 0 (CE supported)
AB_A 0 (CE supported)
CHINA 0 (CE supported)
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
0
* When [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. CE MARK CONTROL SETTING
A 1 (0:YES 1:NO)
<Setting range and default value of each set value> A: 1
Setting Default [ 0~ 1]
range value
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode 0 to 1 0
(1:YES 0:NO) is allowed OK
1 Copy toner save mode

is inhibited.
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save 0 to 1 0
26-35
(1:YES 0:NO) mode is allowed.
1 Printer toner save Purpose Setting
mode is inhibited. Function (Purpose) Used to set the trouble memory saving pro-
cedure.
0 Section
Item
TONER SAVE MODE SETUP Operation/Procedure
A 0 COPY(1:YES 0:NO)
A: 0 B 0 PRINTER(1:YES 0:NO)

0 1
OK * When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
26-30
Setting Default
Purpose Setting Item Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up con- A (0:ONCE 0 Only once. If same as the 0 to 1 0
trol (CE mark support control). 1:ANY) previous one, it is not saved.
1 Any time. Though same as
Section
the previous one, it is saved.
Item Specifications (Operation mode (common
operation))
0 value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
TEST <Setting range and default value of each set value>
TROUBLE MEMORY MODE SETUP
Setting
A 0 (0:ONCE 1:ANY) Item Display Content Default value
range
A: 0

A (0:YES 0 Center binding 0 to 1 Refer to <Initial
0 1

1:NO) mode AMS setting value and set
1 Center binding value linked with
mode AMS cancel the destination>.
OK
<Initial value and set value liked with the destination>
26-38 U.S.A 0 (Cancel)
CANADA 0 (Cancel)
Purpose Setting
INCH 0 (Cancel)
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the JAPAN 0 (Cancel)
developer life is reached. AB_B 0 (Cancel)
Section Other EUROPE 1 (Setting)
Item Specifications (Operation mode) U.K 1 (Setting)
AUS. 0 (Cancel)
Operation/Procedure
AB_A 0 (Cancel)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. CHINA 0 (Cancel)
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is 0
saved to EEPROM and RAM. SIMULATION NO.26-41 CLOSE
TEST
PAMPHLET MODE AMS SETTING.
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. A 0 (0:YES 1:NO)
<Setting range and default value of each set value> A: 0
Setting Default 0 1
range value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Continue/Stop setting 0 to 1 0 OK
LIFE OVER of print when the
(0:CONTINUE maintenance life is
1:STOP) over (Print Continue)
26-49
1 Continue/Stop setting
of print when the Purpose Setting
maintenance life is Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy speed mode.
over (Print Stop)
B FUSER WEB 0 Continue/Stop setting 0 to 1 0 Section
END of print when the Item Setting
(0:CONTINUE fusing web is end Operation/Procedure
1:STOP) (Print Continue)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 26-49, the current set
1 Continue/Stop setting
of print when the status is displayed.
fusing web is end * The current set button is highlighted.
(Print Stop) 2) Select an item to be changed, and it is highlighted. The setting
is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
0 * Only one can be selected for each item.
TEST <Item description>
ENGINE LIFE OVER SETTING
A 1 MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER (0:CONTINUE 1:STOP) Set Default
Item Content
A: 1 B 1 FUSER WEB END (0:CONTINUE 1:STOP) value value
POSTCARD LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
0 1
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH
OK
0
COPY SPEED MODE SETUP

26-41 POSTCARD LOW HIGH
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of AMS setting in the
center binding mode.
Section 1/1
Item Specifications (Operation mode)
Operation/Procedure
2) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current entered value is
26-50 Destination Setting value A Setting value B
JAPAN 1 (Display allowed) 7
Purpose Setting AB_B 1 (Display allowed) 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions. EUROPE 1 (Display allowed) 0
Section U.K 0 (Display inhibited) 0
AUS. 1 (Display allowed) 0
Item Specifications (Operation)
AB_A 1 (Display allowed) 0
Operation/Procedure CHINA 1 (Display allowed) 0
1) Select an item to be set with [] and [] buttons.
The selected value is highlighted and the value is displayed in 0
the setting area. TEST SIMULATION NO.26-50 CLOSE
* When there is an item over [], the display becomes active FUNCTION SETTING
and shifts to another item. A 1 ; BW REVERSE : YES
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the A: 1 B 0 ; COLOR MODE
operation is disabled. 0 1
C 0 ; FINISHER FUNCTION : NO
When there is an item under [], the display becomes active

and shifts to another item.
OK
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-52
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. Purpose Setting
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the entered value is set. Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
* When [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. or not.
<Setting range and default value of each set value> Section
Content Setting
Item
Item Display Default value
description range Operation/Procedure
A BW YES B/W REVERSE 01 <Setting range 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
REVERSE allowed and default
NO B/W REVERSE 01 value of each
inhibited set value> 2) When [OK] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
Refer to * When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
"Setting value value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
A."
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single 0 to 7 <Setting range <Setting range and default value of each set value>
color inhibit and default Setting
setting value of each Item Display Content Default value
range
set value>
A (0:YES 0 White paper 0 to 1 Refer to <List of default
Refer to
1:NO) countup (YES) values depending on
"Setting value
1 White paper destinations>.
B."
coutup (NO)
C FINISHER YES The number of 01 0 (YES)
FUNCTION discharge of <List of default values depending on destinations>
special paper
from the finisher
is limited. U.S.A 0 (countup)
NO The number of 01 CANADA 0 (countup)
discharge of INCH 0 (countup)
special paper JAPAN 1 (No countup)
from the finisher AB_B 0 (countup)
is not limited. EUROPE 0 (countup)
<Display when 2-color/Single color inhibit> U.K 0 (countup)
AUS. 1 (No countup)
Mode inhibit When 2-color/ AB_A 0 (countup)
SIM setting
Single 2-color Single color inhibit CHINA 0 (countup)
OFF OFF OFF 0
OFF ON OFF 1
ON OFF OFF 2 0
ON ON OFF 3 TEST SIMULATION NO.26-52 CLOSE
OFF OFF ON 4 A BLANK PAPER COUNT MODE SETUP

OFF ON ON 5 A 1 (0:YES 1:NO)
ON OFF ON 6 A: 1
ON ON ON 7
0 1
* OFF: Inhibit cancel state
ON: Inhibit state OK
Destination Setting value A Setting value B
U.S.A 1 (Display allowed) 0
CANADA 1 (Display allowed) 0
INCH 1 (Display allowed) 0
26-53 26-65
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the auto color cali- Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
bration. Section
Section Item Specifications
Item Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) When the machine enters Simulation 26-65, the following
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. screen is displayed.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. * The current set value is highlighted.
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to 2) When the set value button of an item to be changed is
EEPROM and RAM. pressed, it is highlighted and the setting is saved to EEPROM
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set and RAM.
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. * Only one can be selected for each item.
<Setting range and default value of each set value> <Item description>
Setting Default Set Setting Default
Item Display Content Item Content
range value value range value
A (1:YES 0:NO) 1 ACC YES 0 to 1 1 LIMIT 30 Staple limit sheets: 30 sheets 30 or 50 30
0 ACC NO SHEETS 50 Staple limit sheets: 50 sheets
LIMIT ON Staple limit copies ON ON or OFF ON
COPIES OFF Staple limit copies OFF
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-53 CLOSE <LIMIT SHEETS>
ENABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION
* Valid only when the 1K finisher is installed.
A 1 (1:YES 0:NO) [Target paper size]
A: 1 Staplable S-size paper described on the product specifications
0 1 A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR
* 25 sheets for L-size paper (A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
OK 8K) regardless of setting
* 25 sheets for mixed loading of a same width regardless of setting
26-54 0
Purpose Setting TEST SIMULATION NO.26-65 CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO. FINISHER ALARM MODE SETUP (STAPLE LIMIT)
LIMIT SHEETS : 30 50
Section Printer
LIMIT COPIES : ON OFF
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
1/1
2) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
26-67
display.
Purpose Setting
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Function (Purpose) Used to set the summer time (switching
timing to the summer time and the adjust-
<Setting range and default value of each value>
ment time (shift amount)) and the time zone
Setting Default (for switching to the summer time and the
range value difference between the local time and GMT
A (1:YES 0:NO) 1 ACC YES 01 1 (UTC) for synchronization with the internet
0 ACC NO time server).
Section
0 Item Specifications
TEST
Operation/Procedure
ENABLING OF AUTOMATIC COLOR CALIBRATION OF PRINTER
1) Select a mode to be set. ([SUMMER TIME] is selected in this
A 1 (1:YES 0:NO)
example.)
A: 1
* When [TIME ZONE] or [SUMMER TIME] button is pressed,
0 1 it is highlighted and item of the selected button is displayed.
* Only one can be selected, and the selected button is high-
OK lighted.
In the default display, [TIME ZONE] is selected.
2) Change the set item with [] and [] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
* When there is an item over [], the display becomes active 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
and shifts to another item. * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the 4) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
operation is disabled. set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
When there is an item under [], the display becomes active After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
and shifts to another item. display.
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and * When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
the operation is disabled. pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.

Setting Default
Category Item Display Content Remark
range value
TIME ZONE A GMT +/- + GMT +/ 0 1
1
B GMT HOUR GMT HOUR 0 to 13 *
C GMT MINUTE GMT MINUTE 0 to 59 *
D INTERNET YES Internet time YES/ 0 * When YES, time is synchronized with
NO NO 1 the internet time server.
SUMMER Common A AUTO SUMMER ON Auto summertime 0 *
TIME TIME ADJ OFF setting ON/OFF 1
B ADJ TIME HOUR Adjustment time 0 to 23 1
HOUR
C ADJ TIME MINUTE Adjustment time 0 to 59 *
MINUTE
SUMMER Start time D START TIME MONTH Start time MONTH 1 to 12 *
TIME setting E START TIME DAY Start time DAY 1 to 31 * When the set value is changed, it is
F START TIME WEEK Start time WEEK 1 to 5 * reflected to the START MODE.
G START TIME A DAY MONDAY Stat time DAY OF 1 *
OF THE WEEK TUESDAY THE WEEK 2
WEDNESDAY 3
THURSDAY 4
FRIDAY 5
SATURDAY 6
SUNDAY 7
H START TIME HOUR Start time HOUR 0 to 23 *
I START TIME MINUTE Start time MINUTE 0 to 59 *
J START MODE DAY Start mode 0 * Specified with date (Related item: E)
WEEK & A DAY 1 Specified with WEEK, DAY OF THE
OF THE WEEK WEEK. (Related item: F, G)
K START UTC YES UTC YES/NO 0 * When set to YES, values of D to I are
NO 1 not used.
End time L END TIME MONTH End time MONTH 1 to 12 *
setting M END TIME DAY End time DAY 1 to 31 * When the set value is changed, it is
N END TIME WEEK End time WEEK 1 to 5 * reflected to END MODE.
O END TIME A DAY MONDAY End time DAY OF 1 *
OF THE WEEK TUESDAY THE WEEK 2
WEDNESDAY 3
THURSDAY 4
FRIDAY 5
SATURDAY 6
SUNDAY 7
P END TIME HOUR End time HOUR 0 to 23 *
Q END TIME MINUTE End time MINUTE 0 to 59 *
R END MODE DAY End mode 0 * Specified with DATE (Related item: M)
WEEK & A DAY 1 Specified with WEEK, DAY OF WEEK
OF THE WEEK (Related item: N, O)
S END UTC YES UTC YES/NO 0 * When set to YES, values of L to Q are
NO 1 not used.
Displays of Item A, D, G, J, K, O, R, S are "Item name: Detail."

Example: PAPER: CS1
*: Refer to <<Initial value and set value linked with the destination>>.
<Initial value/set value liked with the destination>
Setting Destination
value U.S.A CANADA INCH JAPAN AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA
Time zone 5 (Hour) 5 (Hour) 5 (Hour) 9 (Hour) 8 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 0 (Hour) 10 (Hour) 8 (Hour) 8 (Hour)
correction
value (hour)
Time zone 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute)
correction
value
(minute)
Summer time Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer Summer
enable/ OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
disable flag
Summer time 4 (Month) 4 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 3 (Month) 3 (Month) 10 1 (Month) 1 (Month)
start date (Month)
(Month)
Summer time 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day)
start date
(Day)
Summer time 2 (Hour) 2 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 2 (Hour) 1 (Hour) 1 (Hour)
start date
(Hour)
Summer time 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute) 0 (Minute)
start date
(Minute)
Summer time 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week) 5 (Week) 5 (Week) 5 (Week) 1 (Week) 1 (Week)
start date
(Week)
Summer time 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 0 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday)
start date (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday)
(Day of
week)
Day of week 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Day 1 (Day 1 (Day 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Day 1 (Day
specifying week week specifying) specifying) specifying) week week week specifying) specifying)
flag specifying) specifying) specifying) specifying) specifying)
UTC 0 (UTC 0 (UTC 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC 1 (UTC 0 (UTC 1 (UTC ON) 1 (UTC ON)
specifying OFF) OFF) ON) ON) OFF)
flag
Summer time 10 10 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month) 10 10 3 (Month) 1 (Month) 1 (Month)
end date (Month) (Month) (Month) (Month)
(Month)
Summer time 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day) 1 (Day)
end date
(Day)
end date
(Hour)
Summer time 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute)
end
Week of 5th (week) 5th (week) 1st (week) 1st (week) 1st (week) 5th (week) 5th (week) 5th (week) 1st (week) 1st (week)
summer time
end
Day of week 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday) 0 0 0 1 (Monday) 1 (Monday)
of summer (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday) (Sunday)
time end
Flag to 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Date 1 (Date 1 (Date 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 0 (Day of 1 (Date 1 (Date
specify the week is week is specification) specification) specification) week is week is week is specification) specification)
day of week specified) specified) specified) specified) specified)
Flag to UTC OFF UTC OFF UTC ON UTC ON UTC ON UTC ON UTC ON UTC OFF UTC ON UTC ON
specify UTC
correction
value (Hour)
Summer time 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute) 0 (minute)
correction
value
(minute)
Flag to OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
synchronize
with the
internet clock
server
<Reflection of items J and R after settlement of the value>
When the values of E to G (M to O) are changed and settled and
[OK] button is pressed, the values are saved to EEPROM and RAM
and set to Item J (R) at the same time.
* The numbers of printable sheets specified above are calculated
0 with A4 paper and print ratio 5% (The numbers, therefore, differ
TEST SIMULATION NO.26-67 CLOSE depending on the paper size and the print ratio.).
SUMMER TIME&TIME ZONE ADJUSTMENT NOTE: When the set item B is set to "0" and the toner remaining
A: 1 ; GMT :- quantity reaches toner near end, the toner near end mes-
A: 1 B: 0 ; GMT HOUR
sage is displayed and the number of sheet set in item D
[ 0~ 1 ]
C: 0 ; GMT MINUTE
can be outputted (copy/print/FAX). During this operation,
D: 0 ; INTERNET: YES
insufficient density, blur, and failed color balance may be
resulted depending on the user conditions.
TIME ZONE SUMMER TIME OK
To prevent against occurrence of those symptoms, set the
set item D to "1." When the toner remaining quantity
reaches toner near end, the toner near end display is not
26-69
displayed and the toner end display is shown to disable
Purpose Setting copy/print/FAX, and toner cartridge replace is required.
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether the toner preparation
message and the toner near end message 0
are displayed or not when the toner quan- SIMULATION NO.26-69 CLOSE
TEST
tity reaches 25%.
TONER NEAR END SETTING
Section Process A 0 TONER PREPARATION(0:YES 1 :NO)
Item Specifications A: 0 B 0 TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1: NO)

C 3 TONER END
Operation/Procedure 0 1 D 3 TONER END COUNT
[The items which can be set by this simulation]

Used to set whether the toner preparation message is displayed OK
or not when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25% (set by
item A).
Used to set whether the toner near end message is displayed or
not when the toner remaining quantity reaches toner near end
(set by item B).
27
Used to set whether the machine operation is allowed or not
27-1
when the toner remaining quantity reaches toner end (set by item
C). Purpose Operation test/Check
Used to set whether the toner near end message is displayed Function (Purpose) Used to set whether the detection of com-
and to set what number of sheets can be outputted (copy/print/ munication error with RIC (U7-00) is dis-
FAX) when the toner remaining quantity reaches toner near end abled or not.
message with the set item B set to "0." (The set range is 0 - 200 Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
sheets (set by item D)).
Item Specifications (Operation mode)
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-01, following the
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is set. screen is displayed.
* When [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is
<Setting range and default value of each value> saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Set Initial After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
Display item Content
range value display.
A TONER PREPA 0 The toner preparation 0 to 1 0 * When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
RATION message is displayed. current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
(0:YESS 1:NO) 1 The toner preparation
message is not displayed. <Setting range and default value of each value>
B TONER 0 The toner near end message 0 to 1 0 Setting Default
NEAREND is displayed. Item Display Content
range value
(0:YESS 1:NO) 1 The toner near end message A DISABLE 0: YES (U7-00) Not YES 0 to 1 0 0: Not
is not displayed. 1: NO detected NO 1 detected
C TONER END 1 Operation enabled at 1 to 3 3
TONER END
2 Operation disabled at 0
TONER END TEST SIMULATION NO.27-01 CLOSE
3 Operation disabled at DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE
TONER END DISABLE
A 0
NO
D TONER END 1 0 sheet printable after 1 to 5 3 A: 0
COUNT TONER NEAR END *
0 1
2 25 sheets printable after
TONER NEAR END *
3 50 sheets printable after OK
TONER NEAR END *
TONER NEAR END *
TONER NEAR END *
27-2 27-4
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (Sender regis- Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS functions (initializing,
tration number, HOST server TEL number). call, toner order auto send).
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item Data (User data) Item Data (User data)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-02, the screen is dis- 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
played. is displayed.
2) Select a desired button. 2) Select an item to be set with [] and [] buttons.
The button is highlighted and the value is displayed. The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. The entered value is displayed value is displayed in the setting area.
at "NEW." * When there is an item over [], the display becomes active
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. and shifts to another item.
4) When [SET] button is pressed, the entered value is set. When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When the entered value is set, it is displayed in "PRESENT:"
<Item and content descriptions>
Display Description Number of digits When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number Max. 16 digits the operation is disabled.
SERVA TEL_NO. HOST server TEL number Max. 16 digits
0 4) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
CLOSE
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
FSS FUNCTION SETUPINPUT
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
PRESENT 00000000000000000000000000000001
display.

NEW SET * When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
USER
FAX_NO. SERVA TEL_NO
1/1

Setting
Item Display Content Default value Remark
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 FSS mode setting Only send in NE-B mode 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
B RETRY Retry number setting 0 to 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) Retry timer setting (minute) 1 to 15 3
D TONER ORDER 100% 75% Toner order auto send 100% to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING (K) 74% 50% timing setting (K) 74% to 50% 4
49% 25% 49% to 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0
E TONER ORDER 100% 75% Toner order auto send 100% to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING (C) 74% 50% timing setting (C) 74% to 50% 4
49% 25% 49% to 25% 3
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0
F TONER ORDER 100% 75% Toner order auto send 100 to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING(M) 74% 50% timing setting (M) 74% to 50% 4
49% 25% 49% to 25% 3
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0
G TONER ORDER 100% 75% Toner order auto send 100% to 75% 5 3 (49% to 25%)
TIMING(Y) 74% 50% timing setting (Y) 74% to 50% 4
49% 25% 49% to 25% 3
NEAREND Near end 1
EMPTY Empty 0
0 27-7
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-04 CLOSE Purpose Setting
FSS FUNCTION SETUP Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS functions (enable, alert
A: 1 ; FSS MODE: NEB2 callout).
A: 1 B: 2 ; RETRY
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
[ 0~ 1]
Item Specifications
C: 3 ; TIMER (MINUTE)
D: 3 ; TONER ORDER TIMING (K): 3 (49% - 25%)

Operation/Procedure
OK
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
is displayed.
27-5 2) Select an item to be set with [] and [] buttons.
Purpose Setting The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the tag number.
* When there is an item over [], the display becomes active
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) and shifts to another item.
Item Data (User data) When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Operation/Procedure operation is disabled.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-05, the following When there is an item under [], the display becomes active
screen is displayed. and shifts to another item.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (Max. 8 digits) When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
The entered value is displayed on "NEW." the operation is disabled.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) When [SET] button is pressed, the entered value is set. * Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
When the entered value is set, it is displayed in "PRESENT:" * In the FSS function setting, change from YES (0) to NO (1)
and "NEW" disappears. cannot be made.
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
0 EEPROM and RAM.
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-05 CLOSE * When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
TAG# SETTING value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
PRESENT : 11111111 * When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
NEW :
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
SET
Setting Default
range value
A FUNCTION 0 FSS function is 0 to 1 1
(0:YES 1:NO) enabled. (NO)
27-6 1 FSS function is
Purpose Setting disabled. (*)
B ALERT 0 Alert callout is enabled. 0 to 1 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the manual service
(0:YES 1:NO) 1 Alert callout is disabled. (YES)
call.
(*): In the FSS function setting, change from Disable to Enable can
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
be made, but change from Disable to Enable cannot be made.
Item Specifications
<Alert item>
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item Send timing
No cause of callout Initial/Trouble/Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance Maintenance timing detection
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
Service call When Service Call key is pressed.
EEPROM and RAM.
Toner send request When toner order auto send setting reaches.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set Toner collect request Toner installation data revision. However, only
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. for a new product.
<Setting range and default value of each value> Alert resend
Setting Default
Item Display Content 0
range value
A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Manual service call YES 0 to 1 0 TEST SIMULATION NO.27-07 CLOSE
1 Manual service call NO FSS FUNCTION SETUP (FUNCTION)

A 1 ; FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
0 A: 1 B 0 ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-06 CLOSE [ 0~ 1 ]
MANUAL SERVICE CALL SETUP

A 0 0:YES, 1:NO
OK
A: 0
0 1
OK
27-9 27-10
Purpose Setting Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold value for deter- Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
mining whether the paper feed time information.
between sensors is recorded or not and the Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
threshold value for determining whether the
Item Specifications
gain adjustment retry number is recorded
or not. Operation/Procedure
Section
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
Item Specifications
become active display.
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
The history information of the trouble prediction information is
is displayed.
cleared. [YES] button is highlighted.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
CUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
value is displayed in the setting area. [NO] buttons gray out.
* When there is an item over [], the display becomes active * After completion of the trouble prediction information history
clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
operation is disabled.
<Clear target history item>
and shifts to another item. Target history
Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
Half tone process control error history
Automatic register adjustment error history
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. Gain adjustment retry history
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to Paper transport time between sensors
EEPROM and RAM.
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal 0
display. SIMULATION NO.27-10 CLOSE
TEST
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set TROUBLE PRECOGNITION HISTORY CLEAR
Setting Default
range value
A FEED TIME1 Threshold value of paper 0 to 100 50 (%) YES NO
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE
feed time between sensors
(Main unit)
B FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 to 100 50 (%)
feed time between sensors 27-11
(SPF) Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
C GAIN Threshold value of gain 1 to 100 50 Check (Display/Print)
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES)
RETRY Function (Purpose) Used to display the serial communication
D JAM ALERT Threshold value of 1 to 100 10 retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
continuous JAM alert (TIMES) ment retry number history.
judgment Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
* Item A: 0% is the standard passing time between sheets. 100% Item Specification
is the time for judgment as a JAM between sheets. Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-11, the following
0 screen is displayed.
TEST * Select the display page of process data with [] and [] but-
FSS FUNCTION ADJUSTMENT tons.
A 50 FEED TIME1
* When there is an item over [], the display becomes active
A: 50 B 50 FEED TIME2 and shifts to the previous page.
0100 C 50 GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
D 50 JAM ALERT operation is disabled.
OK When there is an item under [], the display becomes active
and shifts the following page.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of the simulation.
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
<Display item> * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
Display item
RSPF/ * Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
Occurrence date
Retry DSPF Content
Item and time <Display item and content descriptions>
number
(Display)
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Common Serial Occurrence Error
communication Display item Content date and time code
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
retry number (Display) (Digits)
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
history display HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 99/99/99 Max. 4
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
99:99:99 digits
INSERTER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF
HV_ERR2 High density error history 2 99/99/99 Max. 4
INSERTER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits model
99:99:99 digits
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Common HV_ERR3 High density error history 3 99/99/99 Max. 4
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits 99:99:99 digits
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF HV_ERR4 High density error history 4 99/99/99 Max. 4
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits model 99:99:99 digits
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Common Scanner gain HV_ERR5 High density error history 5 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ1 adjustment 99:99:99 digits
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits retry history H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ2 display 99:99:99 digits
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits H_TONE ERR2 Half tone error history 2 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ3 99:99:99 digits
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF DSPF gain H_TONE ERR5 Half tone error history 5 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ1 model adjustment 99:99:99 digits
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits retry history AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ2 display ADJ1 adjustment error history 1 99:99:99 digits
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ3 ADJ2 adjustment error history 2 99:99:99 digits
AUTO REG Automatic register 99/99/99 Max. 4
ADJ5 adjustment error history 5 99:99:99 digits
0
TEST SIMULATION NO. CLOSE
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT 0
DATE RETRY TEST SIMULATION NO. CLOSE
LSU1 99/99/99 999999 99999999
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
LSU2 99/99/99 999999 99999999 DATE ERROR CODE
DESK1 99/99/99 999999 99999999
HV ERR1 99/99/99 999999 9999
DESK2 99/99/99 999999 99999999 HV ERR2 99/99/99 999999 9999
FINISHER1 99/99/99 999999 99999999 HV ERR3 99/99/99 999999 9999
FINISHER2 99/99/99 999999 99999999 HV ERR4 99/99/99 999999 9999
1/2 HV ERR5 99/99/99 999999 9999
H_TONE ERR1 99/99/99 999999 9999
1/3
27-12
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ 27-13
Check (Display/Print) Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Function (Purpose) Used to display the high-density, half-tone Check (Display/Print)
process control error history and the auto- Function (Purpose) Used to display the history of paper feed
matic register adjustment error history. time between sensors.
Section Process Section
Item Specifications Item Specifications
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-12, the following 1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-13, the following
screen is displayed. screen is displayed.
* Select the display page of process data with [] and [] but- * Select the display page of process data with [] and [] but-
tons. tons.
* When there is an item over [], the display becomes active * When there is an item over [], the display becomes active
and shifts to the previous page. and shifts to the previous page.
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled. operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [], the display becomes active When there is an item under [], the display becomes active
and shifts the following page. and shifts the following page.
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled. the operation is disabled.
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
<Display item and content descriptions>

Occurrence date Code between Passing
Display item Content Passing time
and time sensors reference time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper feed time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper feed time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper feed time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF/ FEED TIME1(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
DSPF FEED TIME2(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3(SPF) History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.27-13 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.27-14 CLOSE
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(FEED TIME) FSS TEST MODE SETUP

DATE SENSOR CODE PASS TIME STANDARD TIME
A:0 ; CONNECTION TEST MODE (1:ON 0:OFF)
FEED TIME1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
A: 0
FEED TIME3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
[ 0~ 1 ]
FEED TIME4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999
FEED TIME6 : 99/99/99 99:99:99 99999 99999 99999 OK
1/4
27-14
Purpose Operation test/Check 30
Function (Purpose) The FSS connection test mode setting is
made. 30-1
Section Purpose Operation test/Check
Item Operation
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
Operation/Procedure sors and detectors in the paper feed sec-
1) When the machine enters Simulation 27-14, following the tion, the paper transport section, and the
screen is displayed. paper exit section.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section Paper feed
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value. Item Operation
* The FSS connection test mode setting cannot be changed Operation/Procedure
from Enable (1:ON) to Disable (0:OFF). 1) When the machine enters Simulation 30-01, the following
3) When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
saved to EEPROM and RAM. * When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set name is highlighted.
<Sensor name>
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted. Code of sensor Sensor name
PPD1 Resist front detection
<Setting range and default value of each set value> PPD2 Resist detection
Setting POD1 Fusing after detection
Item Display Content Default
range POD2 Paper exit detection
A CONNECTION 1 Set the FSS connection 0 to 1 0 POD3 Right tray paper exit detection
TEST MODE test mode to Enable. (OFF) TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection
(1: ON 0: OFF) 0 Set the FSS connection TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection
test mode to Disable. * HPOS Shifter home detection
*: The FSS connection test can be changed only from Disable to DSW_R Right door open/close detection
Enable, and cannot be changed from Enable to Disable. DSW_C Cassette 1 transport cover open/close detection
Code of sensor Sensor name
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection 33
DHPD_K K phase detection
DHPD_CL CL phase detection
33-1
1TNFD Waste toner full detection
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation CL detection Purpose Operation test/Check
1TUD_K Primary belt separation BK detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card
reader sensor and the related circuits. (The
0 card reader sensor operation can be moni-
tored with the LCD display.) (Japan only)
TEST
MAIN UNIT SENSOR CHECK Section Other
PPD1 PPD2 POD1 POD2
Item Operation
POD3 TFD2 TFD3 HPOS Operation/Procedure
DSW_R DSW_C DSW_F DHPD_K 1) When the machine enters Simulation 33-01, the following
DHPD_CL 1TNFD 1TUD_CL 1TUD_K screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor name
1/1 is highlighted.
<Sensor name>
30-2 Code (Display) Sensor name
Purpose Operation test/Check CARD Card insertion detection
DATA Card number signal detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
CLOCK Standard clock signal detection
sors and detectors of the paper feed sec-
tion and the related circuits.
0
Section Paper feed
Item Operation
CARD READER SENSOR CHECK
Operation/Procedure CARD DATA CLOCK

screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
name is highlighted. 1/1
<Sensor name> 1/1
Sensor name (Display) Content

CPFD1 Cassette 1 transport detection
CLUD1 Cassette 1 upper limit detection
CPED1 Cassette 1 paper empty detection 40
CSPD1 Cassette 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS11 Cassette 1rear edge detection 1 40-2
CSS12 Cassette 1 rear edge detection 2
Purpose Adjustment
CSS14 Cassette 1 rear edge detection 4 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
CPFD2 Cassette 2 transport detection manual feed tray paper width detector.
CLUD2 Cassette 2 upper limit detection Section Paper feed
CPED2 Cassette 2 paper empty detection Item Operation
CSPD2 Cassette 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Operation/Procedure
CSS22 Cassette 2 rear edge detection 2 1) Extend the manual feed tray guide to the max. width and press
CSS23 Cassette 2 rear edge detection 3 [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the
CSS24 Cassette 2 rear edge detection 4 current AD value is temporality saved to RAM as the max.
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection width.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection * During adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
MTOP1 Manual feed tray reduction detection * After completion of the max. width adjustment, the P1 width
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection (A4) adjustment value start screen is displayed.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection 2) Extend the manual feed tray guide to the P1 (A4) width posi-
tion and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is high-
0 lighted and the current AD value is temporality saved to RAM
TEST SIMULATION NO.3002 CLOSE as the P1 width (A4) position. (Hereinafter, the value is saved
TRAY SENSOR CHECK(MAIN) for each size setting.)
CPFD1 CLUD1 CPED1 CSPD1
3) Perform the adjustment of P2 position width (A4R) and min.
CSS11 CSS12 CSS13 CSS14
position according to the above procedures.
CPFD2 CLUD2 CPED2 CSPD2
4) After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed
CSS21 CSS22 CSS23 CSS24 and the RAM contents are saved to EEPROM. If the adjust-
MPFD MPLD MTOP1 MTOP2 ment is not completed normally for any reason, "ERROR" is
1/2
displayed and data are not saved to EEPROM. In this case,
the adjustment must be tried again.
<List of set items>
Display Description of item 41
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 41-1
P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operating state of the
<List of result displays>
document sensor.
Item name Item content Section Other
COMPLETE Adjustment completed
Item Operation
ERROR Adjustment failed
Operation/Procedure
0
screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.

* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
MAXPOSITION ADJUSTMENT.
name is highlighted.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START <Sensor name>
Code (Display) Sensor name
OCSW Original cover SW
EXECUTE PD1 Document detection 1
PD2 Document detection 2
40-7 PD4 Document detection 4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the PD7 Document detection 7
detection level of the manual paper feed
tray paper width detector.
0
Section Paper feed
Item Specifications PD SENSOR CHECK
Operation/Procedure OCSW PD1 PD2 PD3
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-

played in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and 1/1
item is shifted. 1/1
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. 41-2
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and Purpose Operation test/Check
item is shifted.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the document size sensor.
operation is invalid.
Section Other
Item Operation
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Operation/Procedure
3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
screen is displayed.
RAM.
Press [EXECUTE] button without a document on OC.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the sensor level setting
Set Default without document is performed.
Item Item Item content
range value 2) The sensor level setting without document is completed.
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 0 to 255 241
Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on OC and press [EXECUTE] button.
B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position 0 to 255 231
(A4) The sensor level setting with document detection is performed.
C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position 0 to 255 140 3) After completion of sensor level setting with document, the
(A4R) message is displayed to show the adjustment has been suc-
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 0 to 255 19 cessfully completed. (In case of an error, the error message is
displayed with the failed sensor name.)
0 <Document sensor names, adjustment ranges and default val-
ues>
BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING
Sensor name Content Set range Default value
A : 241 ; MAX POSITION
PD1 Document sensor 1 0 255 128
A: 241 B : 231 ; P1 POSITION
C : 140 ; P2 POSITION PD2 Document sensor 2

[ 0~ 255 ] D : 19 ; MIN POSITION PD3 Document sensor 3
PD4 Document sensor 4
OK PD5 Document sensor 5
0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.41-02 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.4103 CLOSE
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP PD SENSOR DISPLAY
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVEROPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE OCSW : 1 PD5[] :

KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
PD1[] : PD6[] :
PD2[] : PD7[] :
PD3[] :
EXECUTE
PD4[] :
1/1
41-3
Purpose Operation test/Check 43
Function (Purpose) Used to display the document sensor
detection level (A/D) in real time and to dis- 43-1
play the threshold value adjusted with SIM
41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor name. Purpose Setting
Section Other Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
operation mode.
Item Operation
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
Item Operation
screen is displayed. Operation/Procedure
* ON/OFF detection of the OCSW sensor and the A/D value 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
check of each PD sensor are performed in real time. The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
<Display content>
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
Display Content Range item is shifted.
OCSW Original cover SW 0 1 ("1": Close)
PD1 Document detection 1 0 255
PD2 Document detection 2 0 255
PD3 Document detection 3 0 255 If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
PD4 Document detection 4 0 255 item is shifted.
PD5 Document detection 5 0 255 If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
PD6 Document detection 6 0 255 operation is invalid.
PD7 Document detection 7 0 255 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* In an actual control, the A/D value is sent by polling at a regular * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
interval from the SCU or the controller. 3) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
* When [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the current set values is saved in EEPROM and RAM.
<Fusing temperature setting range and default values>
Default value
Switch A Switch B Switch C (Cool-down
control YES, default =
OFF)
Set Thin plain paper Thick plain paper General plain paper
range (Cool-down control YES)
MX-3500N/ MX-4500N/ MX-3500N/ MX-4500N/ MX-3500N/ MX-4500N/
MX-3501N MX-4501N MX-3501N MX-4501N MX-3501N MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2
*1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2
A HL_UM READY TH_UM set value in 70 to 230 165 165 165 165 170 180 175 180 170 170 170 170
READY standby
B HL_LM READY TH_LM set value in 30 to 200 120 120 120 120 120 140 120 140 120 130 130 130
READY standby
C HL_E READY TH_E set value in READY 70 to 230 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155
standby
D HL_UM PLAIN BW normal paper TH_UM 70 to 230 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175
PAPER BW set value
E HL_LM PLAIN BW normal paper TH_LM 30 to 200 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
PAPER BW set value
F HL_E PLAIN BW normal paper TH_E 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER BW set value
G HL_UM PLAIN COLOR normal paper 70 to 230 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175
PAPER CL TH_UM set value
H HL_LM PLAIN COLOR normal paper 30 to 200 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
PAPER CL TH_LM set value
I HL_E PLAIN COLOR normal paper 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER CL TH_E set value
Default value
OFF)
Set Thin plain paper Thick plain paper General plain paper
range (Cool-down control YES)
*1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2
J WARMUP FUMON Fusing motor front rotation 30 to 200 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155 155
HL_UM T start TH_UM set value
K WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor front rotation 30 to 200 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
HL_LM T end TH_LM set value
L WARM UP END WARM UP complete time 30 to 255 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235 235
TIME
M HL_UM HEAVY Heavy paper TH_UM set 70 to 230 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
PAPER value
N HL_LM HEAVY Heavy paper TH_LM set 30 to 200 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
PAPER value
O HL_E HEAVY Heavy paper TH_E set 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER value
P HL_UM OHP OHP-TH_UM set value 70 to 230 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
PAPER
Q HL_LM OHP OHP-TH_LM set value 30 to 200 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145
PAPER
R HL_E OHP PAPER OHP-TH_E set value 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
S HL_UM ENV Envelope TH_UM set 70 to 230 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185
PAPER value
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set 30 to 200 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145 145
value
U HL_E ENV PAPER Envelope TH_E set value 70 to 230 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170
V HL_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when 30 to 200 150 150 165 165 150 150 165 165 150 150 165 165
preheating
W HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when 30 to 200 165 165 165 165 165 165 175 175 165 165 170 170
resetting from preheating
X HL_E PRE-JOB TH_E set value when 30 to 200 165 165 165 165 165 165 175 175 165 165 170 170
resetting from preheating
Y HL_UM PLAIN BW normal paper 70 to 230 175 175 175 180 175 175
PAPER BW TH1_UM-45
Z HL_LM PLAIN BW normal paper TH_LM- 30 to 200 130 130 130 130 130 130
PAPER BW 45
AA HL_E PLAIN BW normal paper TH_E- 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER BW 45
*1 : Japan, China, AB_B
*2 : U.S.A., Canada, Europe, U.K., Australia, Inch, AB-A
43-4
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
Purpose Setting
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
TH_E Fusing thermister external Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main operation mode. (Continued from 43-01.)
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Section Fusing
HL_E Heater lamp external Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
0
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
FUSER TEMP SETUP FOR PAPER
A170 HL_UM READY
A: 170 B130 HL_LM READY * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
70 230
C155 HL_E READY
item is shifted.
D175 HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW
OK
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
When setting is completed, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
<Fusing temperature setting range and default values>
Default value
OFF)
Set
Thin plain paper Thick plain paper General plain paper
Item Display Content range
(Cool-down control YES)
*1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *1 *2
A HL_UM PLAIN BW plain paper duplex 70 to 230 165 165 165 175 170 175 175 180 165 165 170 175
PAPER BW DUP TH_UM set value
B HL_LM PLAIN BW plain paper duplex 30 to 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
PAPER BW DUP TH_LM set value
C HL_E PLAIN BW plain paper duplex 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER BW DUP TH_E set value
D PLAIN PAPER BW BW plain paper duplex 0 to 60 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
DUP APP CNT applicable number of
sheets
E HL_UM PLAIN COLOR plain paper 70 to 230 165 165 165 165 170 175 170 175 165 165 165 165
PAPER CL DUP duplex TH_UM set value
F HL_LM PLAIN COLOR plain paper 30 to 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
PAPER CL DUP duplex TH_LM set value
G HL_E PLAIN COLOR plain paper 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER CL DUP duplex TH_E set value
H PLAIN PAPER CL COLOR plain paper 0 to 60 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
DUP APP CNT duplex applicable number
of sheets
I HL_UM HEAVY BW heavy paper duplex 70 to 230 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175
PAPER BW DUP TH_UM set value
J HL_LM HEAVY BW heavy paper duplex 30 to 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
PAPER BW DUP TH_LM set value
K HL_E HEAVY BW heavy paper duplex 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER BW DUP TH_E set value
L HEAVY PAPER BW heavy paper duplex 0 to 60 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BW DUP APP CNT applicable number of
sheets
M HL_UM HEAVY COLOR heavy paper 70 to 230 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175 170 175
PAPER CL DUP duplex TH_UM set value
N HL_LM HEAVY COLOR heavy paper 30 to 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
PAPER CL DUP duplex TH_LM set value
O HL_E HEAVY COLOR heavy paper 70 to 230 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
PAPER CL DUP duplex TH_E set value
P HEAVY PAPER CL COLOR heavy paper 0 to 60 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DUP APP CNT duplex applicable number
of sheets
*1 : Japan, China, AB_B
43-20
*2 : U.S.A., Canada, Europe, U.K., Australia, Inch, AB-A
Purpose Setting
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main Function (Purpose) Used to correct the environments of low
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the
TH_E Fusing upper thermister external fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main (SIM 43-01).
Section Fusing
HL_E Heater lamp upper external
Item Operation
0 Operation/Procedure
TEST SIMULATION NO.4304 CLOSE 1) When the machine enters Simulation 43-20, the screen on the
right is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
FUSER TEMP SETUP2 FOR PAPER
A175 HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP 2) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
A: 175 B100 HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
C160 HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
70230
D 0 PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT
played on the set setting area.
OK item is shifted.
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the Set Default
operation is invalid. Item Display item Item content
range value
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. R HL_E OHP LL Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 60
TH_E set value under LL
environment
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are S HL_UM Correction value for 1 to 99 60
saved to EEPROM and RAM. ENVELOPE LL ENVELOPE TH_UM set
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the cur- value under LL environment
rent set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. T HL_LM Correction value for 1 to 99 60
ENVELOPE LL ENVELOPE TH_LM set
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
value under LL environment
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
U HL_E Correction value for 1 to 99 60
negative setting due to negative correction.
ENVELOPE LL ENVELOPE TH_E set value
Correction value: (49 to +49) Input value: Actually entered value under LL environment
(1 to 99) V HL_UM E- Correction value for 1 to 99 60
STAR LL preheating TH_UM set
Correction value 49 25 5 0 +5 +25 +49 value under LL environment
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99 W HL_UM PRE- Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 60
<List of setting parameters> JOB LL set value when resetting
from preheating under LL
Set Default environment
Item Display item Item content
range value X HL_E PRE- Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 60
A HL_UM Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 55 JOB LL set value when resetting
READY LL set value in Ready standby from preheating under LL
under LL environment environment
B HL_LM Correction value for TH_LM 1 to 99 55 Y HL_UM Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55
READY LL set value in Ready standby PLAIN-45 BW high speed plain paper
under LL environment *1 TH_UM set value under LL
C HL_E READY Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 55 environment
LL set value in Ready standby Z HL_LM PLAIN- Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55
under LL environment 45 BW *1 high speed plain paper
D HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55 TH_LM set value under LL
BW LL plain paper TH_UM set environment
value under LL environment AA HL_E PLAIN- Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55
E HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55 45 BW *1 high speed plain paper
BW LL plain paper TH_LM set TH_E set value under LL
value under LL environment environment
F HL_E PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 55 *1 : MX-4500N/4501N only
BW LL plain paper TH_E set value
* WARMUP END TIME LL 1s change by 1 count
under LL environment
G HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for COLOR 1 to 99 55 The other correction values 1C change by 1 count
CL LL plain paper TH_UM set <Code descriptions in the above list>
value under LL environment
H HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for COLOR 1 to 99 55 TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
CL LL plain paper TH_LM set TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
value under LL environment TH_E Fusing upper thermister external
I HL_E PLAIN Correction value for COLOR 1 to 99 55 HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
CL LL plain paper TH_E set value HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
HL_E Heater lamp external
J WARMUP Correction value for fusing 1 to 99 60
FUMON motor front rotation start
HL_UM T LL TH_UM set value under LL 0
environment TEST SIMULATION NO.43-20 CLOSE
K WARMUP Correction value for fusing 1 to 99 60 FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL)

FUMOFF motor front rotation start A 60 HL_UM READY LL
HL_LM T LL TH_LM set value under LL A: 60 B 60 HL_LM READY LL
environment C 60 HL_E READY LL

1 99
L WARMUP Correction value for WARM 1 to 99 80 D 60 HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
END TIME LL UP complete time under LL

environment OK
M HL_UM Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 60

HEAVY LL paper TH_UM set value
43-21
N HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 60
LL paper TH_LM set value Purpose Setting
under LL environment Function (Purpose) Used to perform correction of high temper-
O HL_E HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 60 ature and high humidity (H/H) environment
LL paper TH_E set value under for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM
LL environment
43-01) for each paper.
P HL_UM OHP Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 60
LL TH_UM set value under LL Section Fusing
environment Item Operation
Q HL_LM OHP Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 60 Operation/Procedure
LL TH_LM set value under LL
environment 1) When the machine enters SIM 43-21, the following screen is
displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- Set Default
played on the set setting area. Item Item display Content of item
range value
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and M HL_UM HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 50
item is shifted. HH paper TH_UM set value
under HH environment
N HL_LM HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 50
HH paper TH_LM set value
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and under HH environment
item is shifted. O HL_E HEAVY Correction value for heavy 1 to 99 50
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the HH paper TH_E set value under
operation is invalid. HH environment
P HL_UM OHP Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 50
HH TH_UM set value under HH
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. environment
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are Q HL_LM OHP Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 50
saved to EEPROM and RAM. HH TH_LM set value under HH
environment
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
R HL_E OHP HH Correction value for OHP 1 to 99 50
TH_E set value under HH
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is environment
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a S HL_UM Correction value for 1 to 99 50
negative setting due to negative correction. ENVELOPE ENVELOPE TH_UM set
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49), Input value: Actual input HH value under HH
environment
(1 to 99)
T HL_LM Correction value for 1 to 99 50
Set value 49 25 5 0 +5 +25 +49 ENVELOPE ENVELOPE TH_LM set
HH value under HH
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
environment
<List of setting parameters> U HL_E Correction value for 1 to 99 50
Set Default ENVELOPE ENVELOPE TH_E set value
Item Item display Content of item HH under HH environment
range value
A HL_UM Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 50 V HL_UM E- Correction value for 1 to 99 50
READY HH set value in READY STAR HH preheating TH_UM set
standby under HH value under HH
environment environment
B HL_LM READY Correction value for TH_LM 1 to 99 50 W HL_UM PRE- Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 50
HH set value in READY JOB HH set value when resetting
standby under HH from preheating under HH
C HL_E READY Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 50 X HL_E PRE- Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 50
HH set value in READY JOB HH set value when resetting
standby under HH from preheating under HH
D HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50 Y HL_UM PLAIN- Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50
BW HH plain paper TH_UM set 45 BW *1 high speed plain paper
value under HH TH_UM set value under LL
E HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50 Z HL_LM PLAIN- Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50
BW HH plain paper TH_LM set 45 BW *1 high speed plain paper
value under HH TH_LM set value under LL
F HL_E PLAIN Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50 AA HL_E PLAIN- Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50
BW HH plain paper TH_E set value 45 BW *1 high speed plain paper
under HH environment TH_E set value under LL
environment
G HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 50
CL HH COLOR plain paper TH_UM *1 : MX-4500N/4501N only
set value under HH * WARMUP END TIME HH 1s change by 1 count
environment
The other correction values 1C change by 1 count
H HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 50
CL HH COLOR plain paper TH_LM <Code descriptions in the above list>
set value under HH
environment TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
I HL_E PLAIN Correction value for 1 to 99 50 TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
CL HH COLOR plain paper TH_E TH_E Fusing upper thermister external
set value under HH HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
environment HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
J WARMUP Correction value for fusing 1 to 99 50 HL_E Heater lamp external
FUMON motor front rotation start
HL_UM T HH TH_UM set value under HH
environment
K WARMUP Correction value for fusing 1 to 99 50
FUMOFF motor front rotation end
HL_LM T HH TH_LM set value under HH
environment
L WARMUP END Correction value for WARM 1 to 99 50
TIME HH UP end time under HH
environment
Set Default
0 Item Display item Item content
range value
TEST G HL_E PLAIN Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH) CL DUP LL TH_E COLOR plain paper
A 10 HL_UM READY HH duplex under LL environment
A: 10 B 10 HL_LM READY HH
H PLAIN CL Correction value for COLOR 1 to 99 50
1 99
C 10 HL_E READY HH DUP APP plain paper duplex applicable
D 10 HL_UM PLAIN BW HH CNT LL number of sheets under LL
environment
OK
I HL_UM Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55
HEAVY BW TH_UM BW heavy paper
DUP LL duplex under LL environment
43-22 J HL_LM Correction value for lower 1 to 99 55
HEAVY BW TH_LM BW heavy paper
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low K HL_E HEAVY Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55
humidity) correction for the fusing tempera- BW DUP LL TH_E BW heavy paper
ture setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper. duplex under LL environment
Section Fusing L HEAVY BW Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50
DUP APP heavy paper duplex
Item Operation CNT LL applicable number of sheets
Operation/Procedure under LL environment
1) When the machine enters Simulation 43-22, the following M HL_UM Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55
screen is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.) HEAVY CL TH_UM COLOR heavy
DUP LL paper duplex under LL
2) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. environment
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- N HL_LM Correction value for lower 1 to 99 55
played in the setting area. HEAVY CL TH_LM COLOR heavy paper
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and DUP LL duplex under LL environment
item is shifted. O HL_E HEAVY Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55
CL DUP LL TH_E COLOR heavy paper
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the duplex under LL environment
operation is invalid. P HEAVY CL Correction value for COLOR 1 to 99 50
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and DUP APP heavy paper duplex
item is shifted. CNT LL applicable number of sheets
operation is invalid. * PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL, PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL,
HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL, HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT LL
1s change by 1 count
The other correction values 1C change by 1 count
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
<Code descriptions in the above list>
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is TH_E Fusing upper thermister external
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
negative setting due to negative correction. HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49) HL_E Heater lamp external
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
0
Set value 49 25 5 0 +5 +25 +49 TEST SIMULATION NO.43-22 CLOSE
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99 FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL :DUP)
<List of setting parameters> A 10 HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL
A: 10 B 50 HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL
Set Default
Item Display item Item content 1 99
C 50 HL_E PLAIN BW DUP LL
range value D 50 PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL
A HL_UM Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55
PLAIN BW TH_UM BW plain paper OK
B HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for lower 1 to 99 55
BW DUP LL TH_LM BW plain paper 43-23
duplex under LL environment
C HL_E PLAIN Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55
Purpose Setting
BW DUP LL TH_E BW plain paper duplex Function (Purpose) Used to perform H/H (high temperature,
under LL environment high humidity) correction for the fusing tem-
D PLAIN BW Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50 perature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each
DUP APP plain paper duplex applicable paper.
CNT LL number of sheets under LL
environment Section Fusing
E HL_UM Correction value for upper 1 to 99 55 Item Operation
PLAIN CL TH_UM COLOR plain paper Operation/Procedure
F HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for lower 1 to 99 55
CL DUP LL TH_LM COLOR plain paper
screen is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
duplex under LL environment 2) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- Set Default
played in the setting area. Item Display item Item content
range value
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and O HL_E HEAVY Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 50
item is shifted. CL DUP HH COLOR heavy paper duplex
P HEAVY CL Correction value for COLOR 1 to 99 50
DUP APP CNT heavy paper duplex
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and HH applicable number of sheets
item is shifted. under HH environment
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the * PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH, PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH,
operation is invalid. HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH, HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT HH
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1s change by 1 count
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. The other correction values 1C change by 1 count
4) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is <Code descriptions in the above list>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main
RAM.
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
TH_E Fusing upper thermister external
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
negative setting due to negative correction.
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49) HL_E Heater lamp external
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
0
Set value 49 25 5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH:DUP)
<List of setting parameters> A 10 HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH
Set Default A: 10 B 10 HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH
Item Display item Item content HL_E PLAIN BW DUP HH

range value 1 99
C 10
PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH

A HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 50 D 10
BW DUP HH BW plain paper duplex

OK
B HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for TH_LM 1 to 99 50
under HH environment 43-24
C HL_E PLAIN Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 50 Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to enter the correction values for SIM
43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature correc-
D PLAIN BW Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50
DUP APP CNT plain paper duplex
tions.
HH applicable number of sheets Section Fusing
under HH environment Item Operation
E HL_UM PLAIN Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 50
CL DUP HH COLOR plain paper duplex
Operation/Procedure
under HH environment 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
F HL_LM PLAIN Correction value for TH_LM 1 to 99 50 The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
CL DUP HH COLOR plain paper duplex played on the set setting area.
G HL_E PLAIN Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 50
CL DUP HH COLOR plain paper duplex
item is shifted.
under HH environment If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
H PLAIN CL Correction value for COLOR 1 to 99 50 operation is invalid.
DUP APP CNT plain paper duplex If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
HH applicable number of sheets item is shifted.
I HL_UM Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 50
HEAVY BW BW heavy paper duplex operation is invalid.
DUP HH under HH environment 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
J HL_LM Correction value for TH_LM 1 to 99 50 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
HEAVY BW BW heavy paper duplex
DUP HH under HH environment
K HL_E HEAVY Correction value for TH_E 1 to 99 50
pressed, the entered value is set.
BW DUP HH BW heavy paper duplex * Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
under HH environment because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
L HEAVY BW Correction value for BW 1 to 99 50 negative setting due to negative correction.
DUP APP CNT heavy paper duplex Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49)
HH applicable number of sheets
under HH environment Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
M HL_UM Correction value for TH_UM 1 to 99 50
Set value 49 25 5 0 +5 +25 +49
HEAVY CL COLOR heavy paper duplex
DUP HH under HH environment Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
N HL_LM Correction value for TH_LM 1 to 99 50
HEAVY CL COLOR heavy paper duplex
DUP HH under HH environment
Set Default
Item Display items Item descriptions
range value
A NN_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E WARMUP end temperature 120C or below when turning Item Sim. 43-1-A, C 1 to 99 50
B NN_120_WUP_HL_LM correction value on the power under NN Item Sim. 43-1-B 1 to 99 50
environment
C LL_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E 120C or below when turning Item Sim. 43-20-A, C 1 to 99 55
D LL_120_WUP_HL_LM on the power under LL Item Sim. 43-20-B 1 to 99 60
environment
E HH_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E 120C or below when turning Item Sim. 43-21-A, C 1 to 99 50
F HH_120_WUP_HL_LM on the power under HH Item Sim. 43-21-B 1 to 99 50
environment
G ON_120_WUP_HL_UM Temperature correction value 120C or below when turning Item Sim. 43-1-A 1 to 99 60
H ON 120 WUP HL_E immediately after completion of on the power Item Sim. 43-1-C 1 to 99 55
warm-up and during continuation
of temperature correction
I NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_E Fusing temperature correction 120C or below when turning Item Sim. 43-4-A, C, 1 to 99 55
value on the power under NN E, G
J NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM environment Item Sim. 43-4-B, F 1 to 99 50
K LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_E 120C or below when turning Item Sim. 43-22-A, 1 to 99 60
on the power under LL C, E, G
L LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM environment Item Sim. 43-22-B, F 1 to 99 50
M HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_E 120C or below when turning Item Sim. 43-23-A, 1 to 99 50
on the power under HH C, E, G
N HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM environment Item Sim. 43-23-B, F 1 to 99 50
O NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count Applicable number of sheets for SIM43-24-I, J (NN 1 to 60 5
environment)
P LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Applicable number of sheets for SIM43-24-K, L (LL 1 to 60 10
environment)
Q HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT Applicable number of sheets for SIM43-24-M, N (HH 1 to 60 5
environment)
R COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool-down time Cool-down time (Heavy paper Ready) 1 to 60 15
S COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool-down time (OHP Ready) 1 to 60 30
T COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Cool-down time (Envelope Ready) 1 to 60 40
U WUP DUP TIME Temperature correction Applicable time for SIM43-24-G, H (Timer from 0 to 255 120
continuation time immediately completion of ready)
after completion of warm-up
V FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor operation Web motor operation interval 1 to 20 6
interval
* On adjustment values
43-31
Each temperature correction value Temperature 1C change
by 1 count Purpose Operation check
Each paper exit count 1 sheet by 1 count Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
web cleaning motor.
Each cool-down time 1s change by 1 count
<Code descriptions of the above list> Section Fusing
Item Operation
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister MAIN center Operation/Procedure
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister MAIN
1) Remove the fusing unit.
TH_E Fusing thermister external
HL_UM Heater lamp upper MAIN
2) Enter the simulation mode with the door open, and press
HL_LM Heater lamp lower MAIN
[EXECUTE] button.
HL_E Heater lamp external 3) Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive (continuous rota-
tion for 10 sec). After completion, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.43.-24 CLOSE 0
FUSER TEMP RESET
FUSER WEB CLEANING CHECK
A 50 NN_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E
A: 50 B 50 NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
C 50 LL_120_ WUP_HL_UMHL_E
199
D 50 LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
OK
EXECUTE 1/1
<Set items>
43-32
Default
Purpose Operation setting Display Content Set range
value
Function (Purpose) Used to make various settings of the com- HV Normal operation high- Normal Allow
pulsory operations of the web cleaning at a density process control YES/ (Inhibit: 1: NO)
job end. NO setting Highlighted
HT Normal operation half-tone (Allow: 0: YES) Allow
Section Fusing
process control YES/NO
Item Operation setting
Operation/Procedure TC Transfer output correction Allow
1) Select the item according to the adjustment content with [] [] YES/NO setting *1
buttons. MD VG Membrane decrease grid Allow
voltage correction YES/NO
2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. setting
3) Press [OK] button. (The set value is saved.) MD LD Membrane decrease laser Inhibit
<Set items> power voltage correction
YES/NO setting
Set Default MD EV Membrane decrease Allow
Item Display Item
range value environment grid voltage
A JOB END YES Conditions for Allow 0 to 0 1 correction YES/NO setting
COMP NO compulsory Inhibit 1 1 MD DL Membrane decrease Normal (Inhibit: Allow
ACT operations of discharge light quantity 1: NO)
CHECK the fusing web correction YES/NO setting Highlighted
motor at a job MD DL EV Membrane decrease (Allow: 0: YES) Inhibit
end. environment discharge light
B JOB END COMP Interval of the print 1 to 100 quantity correction YES/NO
ACT INTERVAL quantity for compulsory 200 setting
operations of the fusing TN_HUM Toner density humidity Allow
web motor at a job end. correction YES/NO setting
C JOB END COMP Count number of 1 to 5 1 TN_AREA Toner density area correction Allow
ACT CNT compulsory operations YES/NO setting
of the fusing web motor TN_LIFE Toner density life correction Allow
at a job end. YES/NO setting
TN_COV Toner density print rate Allow
0 correction YES/NO setting
TEST SIMULATION NO.4332 CLOSE TN_PROCO Toner density process control Allow
N correction YES/NO setting
JOB END WEB CLEANING COMPULSORY CHECK
A 0 JOB END COMP ACT CHECK
TN_ENV Toner density environment Allow
correction YES/NO setting
A: 0 B100 JOB END COMP ACT INTERVAL
C 1 JOB END COMP ACT CNT TN_DRIP Toner density correction, Allow
0 1 unconditional supply YES/
NO setting
OK TN_SPEND Toner compulsory Allow
consumption mode YES/NO
setting
PHT 1Pixel half-tone process Inhibit
control correction YES/NO
44 setting
AR_AUTO Auto resist adjustment YES/ Allow
NO setting
44-1
AR_ERROR Error check YES/NO setting Allow
Purpose Setting during auto resist adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether the correction func- DM_PHASE Drum phase alignment YES/ Allow
tions of the image forming (process) sec- NO setting
tion are enabled or not. SENSITIVITY Toner density correction Inhibit
YES/NO setting
Section PRT_HT Half tone process control Allow
Item printer correction feedback
Operation/Procedure Enable/Disable setting
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-01, the currently set *1: The transfer efficiency fluctuation is corrected with temperature
button is highlighted. and humidity (absolute moisture). YES/NO setting. Transfer
Set the item to be set to the normal display. high output voltage correction.
(Two or more items can be selected.) When an item is
selected, its button is highlighted. When the highlighted button
0
is pressed again, it returns to the normal display. TEST
MODE SETTING
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the current set value is
HV HT TC MD VG
saved to EEPROM and RAM. After completion of setting,
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display. MD LD MD EV MD DL MD DL EV
TN_HUM TN_AREA TN_LIFE TN_COV
TN_PROCON PHT AR_AUTO AR_ERROR
EXECUTE 1/2
* When an error occurs in the adjustment, "ERROR" is dis-
44-2
played in the value display section at the right of the error
Purpose Adjustment item, and the drum motor is stopped. Data saving to
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the light quantity adjust- EEPROM is not performed at all and the operation is termi-
ment of the process control sensor and the nated. [EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
registration sensor (two for resist are * When there is a page over [], the display becomes active
adjusted simultaneously) and the surface and shifts up to another page. When there is no page over
scan. [], the display grays out and the operation is disabled.
Section Process * When there is a page under [], the display becomes active
Item Operation and shifts down to another page. When there is nor page
under [], the display grays out and the operation is dis-
Operation/Procedure
abled.
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
<Operation content>
the drum motors are driven to start the adjustments of the pro-
cess control sensor and the registration sensor. 1) Adjust so that the LED light emitting quantity of BK/CL is the
target value 2.
* After completion of the adjustments of the process control
sensor and the registration sensor, the drum motors are * Target value
stopped and the set contents are displayed. The necessary BK: Item B of SIM 44-04
data are saved to EEPROM. CL: Item A of SIM 44-13
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display. 2) After completion of the adjustment, check the belt surface con-
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during adjustment of dition with the BK sensor.
the process control sensor and the registration sensor, the
monitor is terminated and the drum motor is stopped. [ECE-
CUTE] button returns to the original state.
Data saving is not performed, but the result at that time is
displayed.
<Set range and default value of each fusing temperature setting>

Classification Item Display item Content Set range Default value Save
PROCON A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 to 255 21 YES
B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value 1 to 255 21 YES
C PCS_CL DARK Color dark voltage 0 to 255 0 NO
D PCS_K DARK Black dark voltage 0 to 255 0 NO
E PCS_K GRND Belt surface when item B adjustment is completed. 0 to 255 0 NO
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value 0 to 255 0 NO
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value 0 to 255 0 NO
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item E Item F) 0 to 255 0 NO
REGIST I REG_F LED ADJ Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F 1 to 255 56 YES
J REG_R LED ADJ Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R 1 to 255 56 YES
K REG_F DARK Registration sensor dark voltage F 0 to 255 0 NO
L REG_R DARK Registration sensor dark voltage R 0 to 255 0 NO
M REG_F GRND Belt surface when completion of Item I adjustment 0 to 255 0 NO
N REG_R GRND Belt surface when completion of Item J adjustment 0 to 256 0 NO
O REG_F BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value (Front side) 0 to 255 0 NO
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (Front side) 0 to 255 0 NO
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item O Item P) 0 to 255 0 NO
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt surface input max. value (Rear side) 0 to 255 0 NO
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt surface input min. value (Rear side) 0 to 255 0 NO
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt surface input difference (Item R Item S) 0 to 255 0 NO
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch light receiving potential F (K) 0 to 255 0 YES
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch light receiving potential F (C) 0 to 255 0 YES
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch light receiving potential F (M) 0 to 255 0 YES
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving potential F (Y) 0 to 255 0 YES
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch light receiving potential R (K) 0 to 255 0 YES
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch light receiving potential R (C) 0 to 255 0 YES
AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch light receiving potential R (M) 0 to 255 0 YES
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving potential R (Y) 0 to 255 0 YES
<List of errors> Error name Error content
Registration sensor R REG_R LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
Error name Error content adjustment error not reached
Black sensor PCS_K LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target Registration surface F REG_F GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
adjustment error not reached read error range of effective difference between upper and
Color sensor PCS_CL LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, lower values
adjustment error target not reached Registration surface R REG_R GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
Surface read error PCS_K GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the read error range of effective difference between upper and
range of effective difference between upper and lower values
lower values
Registration sensor F REG_F LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
adjustment error not reached
Set Default
0 Item Display content
range value
TEST SIMULATION NO.4402 CLOSE J Y_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 123
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT ID value (YELLOW)
PCS_CL LED ADJ : 21 PCS_ GRND : 0 K M_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 140
ID value (MAGENTA)
PCS_ LED ADJ : 21 PCS_K BELTMAX : 0
L C_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 132
PCS_CL DARK : 0 PCS_K BELTMIN : 0 ID value (CYAN)
PCS_K DARK : 0 PCS_K BELTDIF : 0 M K_PAT TARGET Patch density standard 1 to 255 5
EXECUTE ID value (BLACK)
1/3
N HV BK_GROUND Patch position surface 1 to 255 29
LIMIT light receiving effective
range
44-4
Purpose Setting 0
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the correction operation of TEST SIMULATION NO.4404 CLOSE
the image forming section and to set the PROCON INITIAL DENSITY SETUP
process control sensor adjustment condi- A200 PCS_C TARGET
tions. A: 200 B201 PCS_K TARGET
C 51 LED_C OUTPUT
Section Process 1 255
D 51 LED_K OUTPUT
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure OK
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, set the set values to

the default values.
44-6
played in the setting area. Function (Purpose) Used to forcibly execute the correction in
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and the image process section (high-density
item is shifted. process correction) (process correction).
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the Section Process
operation is invalid. Item Operation
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and Operation/Procedure
item is shifted. 1) When the machine enters SIM 44-06, the screen shown on the
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the right is displayed.
operation is invalid. 2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. the drum motors are driven to rotate. The high-density process
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. control is started.
When setting is completed, [OK] button returns to the normal 3) While the high-density process control is executed, "NOW
display. EXECUTING..." is displayed.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to 4) After completion of the high-density process control, the drum
EEPROM and RAM. motors are stopped and [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor-
mal display.
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the cur-
rent set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed and the execution result is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
Set Default In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed and the details of
Item Display content
range value the error are displayed below.
A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target set 1 to 255 108 * When the high-density process control is interrupted by an
value external factor (pressing [EXECUTE] button), the forcible
B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target set 1 to 255 155 interruption screen is displayed and the drum motors are
value
stopped. [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light 1 to 255 21
emitting quantity set * The result of the high-density process control is displayed
value with the following simulations:
D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light 1 to 255 21 SIM.44-09 (Process control result display (High density cor-
emitting quantity set rection))
value
SIM.44-12 (Process control result display (Half tone correc-
E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment 1 to 255 2
tion))
LIMIT target limit value
F BELT GROUND Belt 1 lap, effective 1 to 255 255 <Result display and content description>
DIF difference between
Result display Content description
upper and lower values
COMPLETE Normal completion
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) 0 to 255 0
STANDARD DIF reference calculating ERROR Abnormal completion
difference INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) 0 to 255 0
STANDARD DIF reference calculating
difference
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output 1 to 255 60
INTERVAL interval
<Detailed error display and content description>
44-9
Detailed error display Content description
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment error (*) Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
BK_ SEN _ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment error (*) Check (Display/Print)
K_HV_ERR K high density process control error Function (Purpose) Used to check the data related to the result
C_ HV_ERR C high density process control error of the image forming section correction
M_ HV_ERR M high density process control error (high density process correction). (Cor-
Y_ HV _ERR Y high density process control error rected main charger grid voltage in each
TIMEOUT_ERR Timeout print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.)
* (*) Same as the error in SIM 44-02. (This simulation is used to check whether
the correction is normally executed or not.)
0 Section Process
Item Data (Machine condition)
PROCON COMPULSORY EXECUTION
Operation/Procedure
PRESS[EXECUTE] TO START
1) Change the page with [] [] buttons.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
EXECUTE grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
2) Select a mode with the following buttons:
[CPY/PRN] button: Display of each process control mode in
the copier/printer.
[OTHER] button: Display of environment area, membrane
decrease correction steps and process control execution
counter, and model type.
basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
<Display item and content description> [MX-3500N/3501N]

Default
Mode Page number Display item (*: correction value) Content description Display range
value
CPY/PRN 1/2 P (PROCON) Left BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB/DV GB: 230 to 850 GB: 645
*3 CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** data (KCMY) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N (M) Right BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (middle speed GB: 230 to 850 GB: 645
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** display) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 430
(MIDDLE)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
2/2 N (L) (NORMAL BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (low speed GB: 230 to 850 GB: 620
(LOW)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** display) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 400
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER 1/10 TN/TC Left TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 to 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD 0 to 1023 0
value
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1 to 9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 to 1023 0
Right TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1 to 9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 to 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity 1 to 14 9
area
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity 0 to 1023 0
AD value
2/10 DRUM Left MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction 0 to 4 0
MD C STEP step display (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
Right MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling 0 to 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER distance area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
Default
value
OTHER 3/10 VG MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease grid voltage 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
4/10 LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser power 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** voltage correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
5/10 HV MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** High density membrane decrease 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** environment GB correction display
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** (KCMY)
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
6/10 CP MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** environment grid voltage correction
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** display (KCMY)
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
7/10 DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge 0 to 100 50
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
8/10 DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** Drum membrane decrease 100 to 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** environment discharge light quantity
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** correction (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
9/10 CRUM Left DESTINATION Machine side control CRUM Refer to CRUM
destination <CRUM information
destination *2
code list>.
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0 to 1 0
Right CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination Refer to CRUM
CRUM DEST_C <CRUM information
CRUM DEST_M destination *2
CRUM DEST_Y code list>.
10/10 CNT Left PROCON COUNT HV Number of execution of high density 0 to 99999999 0
process control
PROCON COUNT HT Number of execution of half tone 0 to 99999999 0
process control
<Display item and content description> [MX-4500N/4501N]
Default
value
CPY/PRN 1/2 P Left BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB/DV GB: 230 to 850 GB: 645
*3 (PROCON) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** data (KCMY) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N (M) Right BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (middle speed GB: 230 to 850 GB: 645
(MIDDLE)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
2/2 N (L) Left BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (low speed GB: 230 to 850 GB: 620
(LOW)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N (H) Right BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (high speed GB: 230 to 850 GB: 665
(NORMAL display) GB/DV data (K) DV: 0 to 700 DV: 430
(HIGH))
OTHER 1/12 TN/TC Left TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 to 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value 0 to 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1 to 9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 to 1023 0
Right TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1 to 9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 to 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity 1 to 14 9
area
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity 0 to 1023 0
AD value
Default
value
OTHER 2/12 DRUM Left MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction 0 to 4 0
MD C STEP step display (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
Right MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling 0 to 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER distance area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
3/12 VG MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** H*** Drum membrane decrease grid voltage 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** correction display (KCMY) *1
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
4/12 LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** H*** Drum membrane decrease laser power 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** voltage correction (KCMY) *1
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
5/12 HV MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** H*** High density membrane decrease 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** environment GB correction display
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** (KCMY) *1
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
6/12 CP MD K REVISE(CP): L *** M *** H*** Drum membrane decrease 0 to 255 0
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** environment grid voltage correction
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** display (KCMY) *1
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
7/12 DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease Color 0 to 100 70
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** discharge light quantity
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** correction (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
8/12 MD K REVISE BW (DL): L *** M *** H *** B/W 80
9/12 DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** Drum membrane decrease Color 100 to 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** environment discharge light
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M*** quantity correction (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
10/12 MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** B/W
H ***
11/12 CRUM Left DESTINATION Machine side control CRUM destination Refer to CRUM
<CRUM information
destination *2
code list>.
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0 to 1 0
Right CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination Refer to CRUM
CRUM DEST_C <CRUM information
CRUM DEST_M destination *2
CRUM DEST_Y code list>.
12/12 CNT Left PROCON COUNT HV Number of execution of high density 0 to 99999999 0
process control
PROCON COUNT HT Number of execution of half tone 0 to 99999999 0
process control
*1: K only for the high speed.
*2: The CRUM information installed at the first is retained. Refer to 0
the list of the CRUM destination codes. TEST SIMULATION NO.4409 CLOSE
*3: The left part of the correction value is the result of execution, PROCON DATA DISP (PROCON/NORMAL(M))
and the right part is the reference value. BLACK : GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700 BLACK : GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700
CYAN : GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700 CYAN : GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700
<CRUM destination code list>
MAGENTA: GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700 MAGENTA: GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700
Display code No. Destination YELLOW : GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700 YELLOW : GB_ 230/850 DV_ 0/700
06 A
CPY/PRN OTHER 1/2
07 B EX Japan
08 C
09 B Japan
10 E
44-12 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ TEST SIMULATION NO.44-12 CLOSE
Check (Display/Print)
PATCH/TARGET DATA DISPLAY
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sampling toner image CARB DATA : 108 TARGET(K) : 0.00
patch density data in the image forming SEAL ADJ DATA : 108 TARGET(C) : 0.00
section correction (high density process
ADK SL(K) : 0.00 TARGET(M) : 0.00
correction). (This simulation is used to
ADK INT(K) : 0.0 TARGET(Y) : 0.00
check whether the correction is normally
executed or not.) TARGET PATCH 1/1
Section Process
44-13
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment
1) Change the page with [] [] buttons.
Function (Purpose) Color image density sensor adjustment
(Adjustment by the jig)
grays out and the operation is invalid. Section Process
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and Item Operation
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the Operation/Procedure
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid. 1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the
2) Change the display with the following buttons: color sensor adjustment is started by using the patch seal.
[TARGET] button: Display of each color target * After completion of the color sensor adjustment, [EXECUTE]
[PATCH] button: Display of patch sampling data button returns to the normal display, and the set content is
displayed. At that time, the necessary data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the sensor
adjustment, the sensor adjustment is interrupted and [EXE-
key.
CUTE] button returns to the normal display.
<Display item and content description> * In case of an adjustment error, "ERROR" is displayed in the
Content Display Default value display section at the right of the error item. No data
Item Display item
description range value are saved to EEPROM, and the operation is terminated.
TARGET CARB DATA Calibration plate 1 to 255 108 [EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
(Page 1) sensor value <Operation contents>
SEAL ADJ Jig patch seal 1 to 255 108
1) The target value of CL is set and the LED emitting level is
DATA sensor value
adjusted, and the operation is terminated.
ADK_SL (K) Developing 9.99 to 9.99 0
characteristics <Display item and content description>
gradient coefficient
Set Default
ADK_INT (K) Developing 999.9 to 0 Item Display item Description Writing
range value
characteristics 999.9
intercept A PCS_CL Calibration plate 1 to 255 108 YES
coefficient CARB OUT sensor value
ID(K) Sensor target 0.00 to 0.00 B PCS_CL Color dark voltage 0 to 255 0 NO
value 255.00 DARK
ID(CMY) Color sensor 0.00 to 0.00 C PCS_CL LED Color sensor light 1 to 255 21 YES
target set value 255.00 ADJ emitting quantity
adjustment value
PATCH N-1 Patch data nth 0 to 255 0
(Page 1 front patch
to 5) (n = 1 to 10) 0
N-2 Patch data nth 0 to 255 0 SIMULATION NO.4413 CLOSE
TEST
center patch
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
(n = 1 to 10)
N-3 Patch data nth rear 0 to 255 0 PCS CL CARB OUT: 108
patch : 0
PCS CL DARK
(n = 1 to 10)
PCS CL LED ADJ : 21
* PATCH item: If the patch is converged to the target range in less

than 10 times of patch acquisition, "0" is displayed in the other
EXECUTE
display items. 1/1
* When [PATCH] button is pressed, the following page is dis-
played.
n = 1 to 2 Page 1
n = 3 to 4 Page 2
n = 5 to 6 Page 3
n = 7 to 8 Page 4
n = 9 to 10 Page 5
44-14
0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ TEST SIMULATION NO.4414 CLOSE
Check (Display/Print) SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output level of the fusing TH_UM : 255FGI/ XXX
temperature sensor, the machine tempera- TH_UM_AD1 : 255.0FGI/ XXX
ture sensor, and the humidity sensor. TH_UM_AD2 : XXX
Section Process TH_LM : 255FGI/ XXX
Item Operation TH_E : 255deg / XXX

1/2
Operation/Procedure
1) The machine enters this simulation, the current data are dis-
44-16
played.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
grays out and the operation is invalid. Function (Purpose) Used to check data related to the toner
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and density correction result. (This simulation
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the allows to check that the correction is nor-
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid. mally performed or not.)
* Data are revised every 5sec. Section Process (Developing)
* For the temperature and humidity only, data outside the range Item Operation
are displayed as "-". Operation/Procedure
<Display item and description> 1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-16, the screen on the
right is displayed.
Default
Display item Description Display range Specify the color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
value
TH_UM Fusing upper Temperature: Sensor is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
thermister main A/D 0 to 255 C (1C) value * Only one color button can be selected. When a color button
value (Temperature AD value: 0 to 1023 is selected, it is highlighted. (Black ([K]) is selected in the ini-
C/AD value) tial state.)
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper Temperature: Sensor
* Change the page with [] or [] key.
thermistor main 0.0 to 255.0 C value
compensation (0.2C) * If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
sensor temperature AD value: 0 to 1023 page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
(C) grays out and the operation is invalid.
AD value (AD value) If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper AD value: 0 to 1023 Sensor the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
thermistor main value
sensor AD value
(AD value) 2) When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are
TH_LM Fusing lower Temperature: Sensor displayed.
thermister main A/D 0 to 255 C (1C) value * When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data
value (Temperature AD value: 0 to 1023 display, the data of the first category are displayed.
C/AD value)
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next cate-
TH_E A/D value outside of Temperature: Sensor
gory are displayed regardless of the display page.
the fusing upper 0 to 255 C (1C) value
thermistor AD value: 0 to 1023 * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the
(Temperature: C) copy basic screen of simulation.
TH_US Fusing upper Temperature: Sensor * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
thermister sub A/D 0 to 255 C (1C) value [BLACK] key.
value (Temperature AD value: 0 to 1023
C/AD value)
TEMPRATURE Temperature Temperature: 40.0 to Sensor
thermister 60.0C (0.1C) value
(Temperature/AD AD value: 0 to 1023
value)
HUMIDITY Humidity sensor Humidity: Sensor
(Humidity/AD value) 5.0 to 90.0% (0.1%) value
AD value: 0 to 1023
TH1_LSU Thermister 1 A/D Humidity: Sensor
value (Temperature 5.0 to 60.0 C value
C/AD value) (0.1C)
AD value: 0 to 255
* The above display range is converted into hexadecimal number
to display the AD value.
* When the door open, the power of the sensor would be down, so
that the sensor display is treated as outside the range.
* "C" is displayed as "deg" on the panel because of the display
fonts.
<Display item and content description>
<Toner density>
Set Default
Display item Item content
range value
TONER DEN_LT(M) Current toner density sensor output value 1 to 255 129
(final value) at middle speed (KCMY)
TONER DEN_ST(M) Current toner density reference value 128
(including all the correction values) at
middle speed (KCMY)
TONER DEN_LT(L) Current toner density sensor output value 129
(final value) at low speed (KCMY)
TONER DEN_ST(L) Current toner density reference value 128
(including all the correction values) at low
speed (KCMY)
TONER DEN_LT(H) Current toner density sensor output value 129
(MX-4500N/4501N) (final value) at high speed (K)
TONER DEN_ST(H) Current toner density reference value 128
(MX-4500N/4501N) (including all the correction values) at
high speed (K)
<Details of toner density sensor reference value correction>
Default
Display item Item content Content description Set range
value
AUTO DEVE (M) Automatic developer adjustment value Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at middle speed) 1 to 255 128
(at middle speed) (KCMY)
ALL(M) All correction reference value (at middle Correction reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all
speed) the correction values for auto developer adjustment value (KCMY)
AUTO DEVE (L) Automatic developer adjustment value Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at low speed)
(at low speed) (KCMY)
ALL(L) All correction reference value (at low Correction reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all the
speed) correction values for auto developer adjustment value (KCMY)
AUTO DEVE(H) Automatic developer adjustment value Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at high speed)
(MX-4500N/4501N) (at high speed) (K)
ALL(H) All correction reference value (at high Correction reference value (at high speed) used to calculate all the
(MX-4500N/4501N) speed) correction values for auto developer adjustment value (K)
AREA Area correction value Correction value for environment area (K) 127 to 127 0
HUD Humidity correction value Correction value for humidity change (K)
PRINT RATE Print rate correction value Correction value for document print rate (K)
PROCON Process control correction value Correction value for high density process control result (K)
LIFE Life correction value Correction value for developer life (K)
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity correction value Correction for toner density sensor sensitivity (K) 1 to 999 500
<Details of toner density sensor control voltage correction>
Default
Display item Item content Content description Set range
value
AUTO DEVE VO(M) Automatic developer adjustment control Sensor control voltage value (at middle speed) after executing SIM 1 to 255 128
voltage (at middle speed) 25-02 (KCMY)
ALL VO(M) All correction reference control voltage Control voltage reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate
(at middle speed) all the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
(KCMY)
AUTO DEVE VO(L) Automatic developer adjustment control Sensor control voltage value (at low speed) after executing SIM 25-
voltage (at low speed) 02 (KCMY)
ALL VO(L) All correction reference control voltage Control voltage reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all
(at low speed) the correction values for auto developer adjustment value (KCMY)
AUTO DEVE VO(H) Automatic developer adjustment control Sensor control voltage value (at high speed) after executing SIM
(MX-4500N/4501N) voltage (at high speed) 25-02 (K)
ALL VO(H) All correction reference control voltage Control voltage reference value (at high speed) used to calculate
(MX-4500N/4501N) (at high speed) all the correction values for auto developer adjustment value (K)
AREA VO Area correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for environment area (KCMY) 127 to 127 0
HUD VO Humidity correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for humidity change (KCMY)
PRINT RATE VO Print rate correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for document print rate (KCMY)
PROCON VO Process control correction control Control voltage correction value for high density process control
voltage result (KCMY)
LIFE VO Life correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for developer life (KCMY)
SENSITIVITY VO Sensitivity correction control voltage Control voltage correction value for toner density sensor sensitivity 1 to 999 500
(KCMY)
ENV VO Environment correction control voltage Control voltage correction value under high temperature 127 to 127 0
environment (KCMY)
* When the correction for the developer counter (life) or the humidity correction is inhibited (OFF) in SIM 44-01, the correction level is dis-
played as "0."
<Display of current humidity area and that in auto developer adjustment>
* Common to KCMY
Set Default
Display item Item content Content description
range value
AUTO DEVE AREA Auto developer adjustment area Auto developer adjustment humidity area display 1 to 14 8
AREA Current area Current humidity area display
0
TONER CONTROL DATA DISPLAY

TONER DEN_LT(M) : 129
TONER DEN_ST(M) : 128
TONER DEN_LT(L) : 129
TONER DEN_ST(L) : 128
K C M Y NEXT
1/1
44-21 44-22
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Function (Purpose) Used to register the half tone process con- Check (Display/Print)
trol reference value (half tone correction). Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner patch image den-
Section Process sity level of each color in half tone image
forming section correction (process correc-
Item Operation
tion). (This simulation is used to check that
Operation/Procedure the correction is normally executed or not.)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-21, the screen shown
Section Process
on the right is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control refer-
ence value is registered. (When [EXECUTE] button is pressed Operation/Procedure
during execution, the operation is interrupted.) 1) Change the page with [] [] buttons.
2) The display automatically shifts to the first step completion * If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
screen or the sensor adjustment error screen. page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the
second step is automatically started. If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
When the display shifts to the sensor adjustment error screen, the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation.
2) Select desired patch sampling data with the following buttons:
* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is
displayed. [1ST STEP] button: [1ST STEP] patch sampling data display
3) When the second step is completed, the following message is [2ND STEP] button: [2ND STEP] patch sampling data display
displayed. (The message is automatically proceeds.) * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END basic screen of simulation.
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END key.
YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END <Display item and content description>
4) The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error Button item Display item Content description
screen automatically. 1ST STEP ID_n 1ST patch data display (n = 1 to 5)
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is dis- 2ND STEP ID_n 2ND patch data display (n = 1 to 16)
played.
* Data of each color are displayed with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. 0
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button TEST SIMULATION NO.4422 CLOSE
is highlighted. (Black ([K]) is selected in the initial state.) HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT
PTK/BASE PTC PTM PTY PTK/BASE PTC PTM PTY
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control ID 1 : 255/255 255 255 255 ID 4 : 255/255 255 255 255
reference value setting is performed again. ID 2 : 255/255 255 255 255 ID 5 : 255/255 255 255 255
ID 3 : 255/255 255 255 255
0
1ST STEP 2ND STEP 1/1
HALF TONE PROCON STANDARD VALUE REGISTER
TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
EXECUTE
Page
44-24 Category Display item Content
number
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ For printer 1/3 [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone
Check (Display/Print) process control
Function (Purpose) (This simulation is not used in the market.) correction value
Used to display the process control result. 2/3 [PRINTER_BASE_DI Printer half tone
THER_VALUE] process control
Section Process reference dither value
Item Data (Machine condition) 3/3 [PRINTER_AUTO_HT Printer auto density
Operation/Procedure _VALUE] adjustment correction
value
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K] is
selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed. * When the display item is not executed yet, is displayed. In
case of an error, "ERR" is displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.) * An error display is not made for the reference value and the cor-
rection value, and the previous value is displayed.
* Change the display page with [] or [] .
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the 0
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display SIMULATION NO.4424 CLOSE
TEST
grays out and the operation is invalid. HALF TONE PROCON RESULT DISPLAY
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and [RIZE] 16 [SATURATE] 109 [STEP] 9.3
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the [EX-LOW] A: 0.0 , B: 100.0
[LOW] A:- 0.013 , B:- 0.569 , C: 107.444
2) When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are [CONNECT] A: 0.0 , B: 0.0
displayed.
K C M Y
* When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data NEXT 1/2
display, the data of the first category are displayed.
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next cate-
gory are displayed regardless of the display page. 44-25
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
basic screen of simulation. Check (Display/Print)
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] Function (Purpose) Used to check the initial condition of pro-
key. cess control (half tone correction).
Section Process
<Display item and content of each category> Item Data (Machine condition)
Page Operation/Procedure
Category Display item Content
number 1) Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
Coefficient 1/2 [RIZE] Low density rising point is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
[SATURATE] High density saturation * Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
point
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
[STEP] (Saturation pint Rising
point) / 10 2) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
[EX-LOW] Coefficient of the The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
approximation formula played in the setting area.
of lowest density * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
[LOW] Coefficient of the item is shifted.
approximation formula
of low density If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
[CONNECT] Coefficient of the operation is invalid.
approximation formula If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
when connecting low item is shifted.
density and middle
density
2/2 [MID] Coefficient of the
approximation formula 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
of middle density * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
[HIGH] Coefficient of the 4) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
approximation formula
set data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
of high density
[CONNECT POINT] Density sections * Also when [OK], [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
connection output ratio pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
Reference 1/1 [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process RAM.
value control reference value <Set range of each set value>
Correction 1/1 [S_VALUE] Half tone process
value control correction Set Default
amount range value
A 1ST PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 40
1ST step 1st patch print
gradation
B 2ND PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 60
1ST step 2nd patch print
gradation
Set Default
range value
C 3RD PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 80 TEST SIMULATION NO.4426 CLOSE
1ST step 3rd patch print HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
gradation TOUCH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
D 4TH PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 100
1ST step 4th patch print
gradation
E 5TH PATCH 0 to 255 Half tone process control 255
1ST step 5th patch print EXECUTE
gradation
0
44-27
Purpose Data clear
HALF TONE PROCON INITIAL VALUE DISPLAY
A200 1ST PATCH Function (Purpose) Used to clear the half tone process control
A: 200 B 47 2ND PATCH correction value.
C 63 3RD PATCH
0 255 Section Process
D 79 4TH PATCH
Item Clear
K C M Y OK Operation/Procedure
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
44-26 become active display.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Press [YES] button.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con- The half tone process control correction value is cleared.
trol forcibly. [YES] button is highlighted.
Section Process
Item Operation [NO] buttons gray out.
Operation/Procedure * After completion of clearing the half tone process control
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-26, the screen on the correction value, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal
right is displayed. display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control is * The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
forcibly executed. (When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during
<Standard value restore item>
execution, the operation is interrupted.)
2) The display automatically shifts to the first step completion Standard value restore item
screen or the sensor adjustment error screen. 1 to 15 Half tone process control correction value
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the
second step is automatically started. 0
When the display shifts to the sensor adjustment error screen, TEST SIMULATION NO.4427 CLOSE
press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation. HALF TONE PROCON ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
3) When the second step is completed, the following message is

displayed. (The message is automatically proceeds.)
BLACK : 2ND STEP BLACK END
CYAN : 2ND STEP CYAN END
MAGENTA : 2ND STEP MAGENTA END ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
YELLOW : 2ND STEP YELLOW END

4) The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error
screen automatically. 44-28
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is dis- Purpose Setting
played. Function (Purpose) Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process
* Data of each color are displayed with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. control execution.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
Section Process
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K] is selected.)
Item Operation
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the half tone process
control correction value setting is resumed. Operation/Procedure
<Result display and content>
Display Content played in the setting area.
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment error
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment error
[YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] error
CONNECTION_ERR Connection error
pressed, the current set data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item Display Content Set range Default value
A Process control SW ON YES When supplying the power (when canceling sleep.) Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
execution YES/NO NO Inhibited 1
B setting 24H YES When READY (sleep setting) is kept for 24H or more Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO Inhibited 1
C HUM YES The temperature and humidity in the machine are monitored Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO every 2 hours (which can be set with Item I), and they are more Inhibited 1
than the specified level (more than the set value of item 10)
compared with the previous process control.
D REV1 YES When the power is supplied, and when the accumulated Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO traveling distance of BK or M position drum unit reaches a Inhibited 1
certain level.
E REV2 YES When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M position Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO drum unit reaches a certain level from the previous density Inhibited 1
correction.
F INITIAL YES When warming up after clearing the counter of OPC drum and Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO the developing unit. Inhibited 1
G PIX YES When one of the accumulated toner counts for each colors Allowed 0 to 1 0 1
NO reaches over the specified count from the previous high density Inhibited 1
correction.
H HUM_LIMIT YES The set conditions of item C are added to the set conditions of Allowed 0 to 1 0 1
NO items A to G. Inhibited 1
I BK ONLY YES BK process control execution setting when monochrome Allowed 0 to 1 0 0
NO printing is continued Inhibited 1
J HUM HOUR Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval setting (H: 1 to 24 2
Hour)
K HUM_DIF Specified value of area difference compared with that in the previous process 1 to 9 2
control execution of item C
L BK_RATIO Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of BK position OPC drum traveling distance of 1 to 999 20
item E
M M_RATIO Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of M position OPC drum traveling distance of 1 to 999 20
item E
N PIX_RATIO Pitch count zoom ratio setting (%) 1 to 999 100
O COLOR BORDER Setting of the magnification ratio (%) at the upper limit of the M position 1 to 999 20
photoconductor traveling distance when BK process control is executed
* A H display: "Item name: Detail display." If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Example: SW ON:YES operation is invalid.
0 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
PROCON TIMING ADJUSTMENT pressed, it is highlighted and the current set data are saved to
A 1 SW ON NO EEPROM and RAM.
A: 1 B 0 24H YES
<Set item description: JOB kinds>
C 0 HUM YES
0 1
D 0 REV1 YES Display Description Default
Item Set range
item of item value
OK A COPY Copier 0 to 4 0: No execution 4
B PRINTER Printer 1: HV only 2
C FAX FAX 2: HV PHT 2
44-29 D SELF Self print 3: HV HT 4
PRINT 4: HV PHT HT
Purpose Setting
* The actual display is "Display item: Set range."
Function (Purpose) Enable/disable of the half tone correction
during each job is switched. Example: COPY:HV PHT HT
Section Process
0
Item Operation SIMULATION NO.44-29 CLOSE
TEST
Operation/Procedure
HALF TONE SETTING
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. A 1 COPY : HV
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- A: 1 B 4 PRINTER : HVPHTHT
played in the setting area. 0 4

C 2 FAX : HVPHT
D 4 SELF PRINT : HVPHTHT

item is shifted.
OK
item is shifted.
5) When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
44-31
Purpose Adjustment * When [EXECUTE], [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the phase adjustment for pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust the RAM.
phases of four OPC drums deflection.) 6) Check the output pattern to examine deflections of C, M, Y,
Section Process (OPC drum) and K.
Item Adjustment The deflection is within 2 lines. Simulation is completed.
Operation/Procedure The deflection is not within 2 lines. Go to step 9.
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. 7) Shift to the set item A and enter "1" with 10-key.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- 8) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the drum deflection
played in the setting area. adjustment pattern is printed. (8 sheets are outputted.)
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and * Numbers 1 8 are printed sequentially in the output pattern.
item is shifted. 9) Check 8 sheets of print patterns to find the print pattern in
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the which the deflection is within2 lines for C, M, and Y. Set the
operation is invalid. print value of the print pattern to set item B.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and 10) To check the deflection in the set value, enter "3" to set item A
item is shifted. with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE] button to print one sheet of
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the the drum deflection adjustment pattern.
operation is invalid. * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
2) Enter "3" with 10-key in the print mode of set item A to change pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
the set value. (Default is 3.) * After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. original state.
3) Set A3 paper in the cassette 1 tray. * For cassette selection, the manual feed cassette is set. (Set item
C is 1)
4) Use [] button to shift to the paper of set item "C" and enter "3"
with 10-key. (The default is 3.)
<Set item, set range, and default values>
Display item: Detail Set Default

Item Description Writing
of display range value
A PRINT 45deg Print mode 45 degree Deflection check pattern every 45 degree (8 sheets of print) 1 to 3 1 3 NO
MODE (1) 0 (2) 45 (3) 90 (4) 135 (5) 180 (6) 225 (7) 270 (8) 315 (SET
* The number in ( ) is printed on the output pattern. VALUE)
90deg 90 degree 2: Deflection check pattern for every 90 degree (4 sheets of print) 2
(1) 0 (3) 90 (5) 180 (7) 270
* The number in ( ) is printed on the output pattern.
SET VALUE SET VALUE 3: Deflection check print (One sheet of print) at the set value. 3
B COLOR Phase adjustment value Angle step 0 (1) 45 (2) 90 (3) 135 (4) 180 (5) 1 to 8 2 YES
BK CL 225 (6) 270 (7) 315 (8)
C PAPER MFT Cassette selection Manual feed 1 to 6 1 3 NO
CS1 Machine 1 stage 2 (CS2)
CS2 Machine 2 stage 3
CS3 Option paper feed desk 1 stage 4
CS4 Option paper feed desk 2 stage 5
LCC LCC 6
* The display of item A/C is "Display item: Detail of display."
44-43
Example: PAPER : CS2
0 Check (Display/Print)
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-31 CLOSE Function (Purpose) Used to display each developing unit
installing state AD value.
A 3 PRINT MODESET VALUE This simulation is added to check the sam-
A: 3 B 2 COLOR
pling data of the detection judgment of
1 3
C 2 PAPERSELECT
developing unit installation not only as the
judgment result (trouble display) but also as
EXECUTE OK
the current state value.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 44-43, the data stored in
EEPROM are displayed.
* Data are revised every 5sec.
<List of display items>
Display
Item Item name Item content Remark
range
A DVCH KIND K K developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) Developing unit model identification information saved in EEPROM on the
B DVCH KIND C C developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) machine side.
C DVCH KIND M M developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) A judgment is made by verifying this information and the model information in
D DVCH KIND Y Y developing unit kind state 1 to 9 (*) CRUM. Since the result (OK or NG) is known when warming up, the error
display is not required in SIM. The display is made by the division code of 1
to 9 instead of the model name.
E DVCH_AD_K K developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
F DVCH_AD_C C developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
G DVCH_AD_M M developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
H DVCH_AD_Y Y developing unit installation AD value 0 to 255 Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
(*): The kind of a developing unit is identified with the ID number.
For ID and the contents of developing unit models, refer to <List of developing unit ID> below.
<List of developing unit ID>
ID number Developing unit model name
0
CLOSE
1 OEM4, etc. TEST SIMULATION NO.4452
2 PASTEL MFP 1 PIXEL HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT
3 PASTEL PRT PTK PTC PTM PTY PTK PTC PTM PTY
4 C-JUPITER MFP ID 1 : 255 255 255 255 ID 4 : 255 255 255 255
ID 2 : 255 255 255 255
5 C-JUPITER PRT ID 5 : 255 255 255 255
ID 3 : 255 255 255 255 ID 6 : 255 255 255 255
6 OEM1, etc.
7 OEM2, etc.
8 OEM3, etc. 1/3
9 No developing unit
44-54
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.44-43 CLOSE Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
DEVELOPER UNIT AD MONITOR
DVCH KIND K : DVCH AD K :

Function (Purpose) (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correc-
DVCH KIND C : DVCH AD C :
tion result.
DVCH KIND M : DVCH AD M :
Section Process
DVCH KIND Y : DVCH AD Y :
1/1
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K] is
selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
44-52
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
* Change the display page with [] [] buttons.
Used to check the toner patch image den-
sity level of each color in 1 pixel half tone
correction. (The simulation is used to check
whether the correction is normally executed If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
or not.) the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
Section Process
2) When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are
Item Data (Machine condition) displayed.
Operation/Procedure * When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data
1) Change the page with [] [] buttons. display, the data of the first category are displayed.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the * When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next cate-
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display gory are displayed regardless of the display page.
grays out and the operation is invalid. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and basic screen of simulation.
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid. key.
key.
<Display item and content description>
Display item Content description Display range
ID_n Patch data display 0 to 255
(n = 1 to 16)
<Display item and content of each item>
Category Page number Display item Content Display range
Approximation 1/2 [EX-LOW] EXTRA lowest density area approximation formula A: 10.000 to +10.000
result coefficient B: 255.000 to +255.000
[LOW] Low density approximation formula coefficient A: 10.000 to +10.000
B, C:-255.000 to +255.000
[CONNECT] Approximation formula coefficient when connecting low A: 10.000 to +10.000
density and middle density B: 255.000 to +255.000
[MID] Middle density approximation formula coefficient A: 10.000 to +10.000
B, C: 255.000 to +255.000
2/2 [HIGH] High density approximation formula coefficient A: 10.000 to +10.000
B: 255.000 to +255.000
[CONNECT SENSOR] Sensor output at connecting point of each density area #1 to #4: 0 to 255
Reference 1/1 [SENSOR_TARGET] Reference value registration value of each color and each #1 to #15
register value point of 1 pixel half tone correction
Correction value 1/1 [S_VALUE] Correction value of each color and each point of 1 pixel #1 to #15
half tone correction
* When the display item is not executed yet, is displayed. In case of an error, ERR is displayed.
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the correction value, and the previous value is displayed.
0 0
1 PIXEL HALF TONE RESULT DISPLAY
1PIXEL HALF TONE DENSITY CORRECT EXECUTION
[EX-LOW] A: 01.000 , B: 100.000
TOUGH [EXECUTE] THEN EXECUTION START.
[LOW] A: -10.000 , B: -200.000 , C: 200.000
[CONNECT] A: 10.000 , B: -150.000
[MID] A: 05.000 , B: 200.000 , C: 150.000
K C M Y NEXT 1/2 EXECUTE
44-56
44-57
Purpose Setting
Purpose Data clear
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1 Function (Purpose) (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
pixel half tone correction. Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel
half tone correction.
Section Process
Section Process
Item Operation
Item Data clear
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the forcible execution of [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
1 pixel process control is started. (When [EXECUTE] button is becomes active display.
pressed during execution, the operation is interrupted.) 2) Press [YES] button.
* In case of a sensor adjustment error, press [EXECUTE] but- * The half tone correction value is cleared. [YES] button is
ton to resume the operation. highlighted.
2) The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error * When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
screen automatically. CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is dis- [NO] buttons gray out.
played. * After completion of clearing the half tone correction value,
* Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. The data of the [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES]
selected color are displayed. and [NO] buttons gray out.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button * The cleared data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.) <Half tone correction value clear item>
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the 1 pixel process
Half tone correction value clear item
control correction value setting is performed again.
1 to 15 Process control half tone correction value
<Result display and content description>
Display Content 0
COMPLETE Normal completion TEST SIMULATION NO.4457 CLOSE
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption 1 PIXEL HALF TONE ADJUSTMENT DATA CLEAR
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment error
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment error
[YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] error
CONNECTION_ERR Connection error

EXECUTE
Set Default
46 Item Display Description
range value
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph(Color 1 to 99 50
(COLOR TONE tone enhancement)
46-1 ENHANCEMENT)
Purpose Adjustment Q MAP (COLOR TONE Map (Color tone 1 to 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default exposure (color
R SINGLE COLOR Single color 1 to 99 50
copy) for every document mode.
S SINGLE COLOR Single color (Copy 1 to 99 50
Section Scanner (COPY TO COPY) document)
Item Adjustment T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/black) 1 to 99 50
Operation/Procedure copy
U TWO COLOR (COPY 2-color (red/black) 1 to 99 50
TO COPY) copy (Copy
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- document)
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and 0
item is shifted. TEST S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 01 CLOSE
CLOSE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
operation is invalid. A 45 AUTO
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and A: 45 B 50 TEXT
item is shifted. 1 99
C 50 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
D 50 TEXT/PHOTO
OK
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ]
[ ] buttons. 46-2
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit Purpose Adjustment
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are copy.
saved to EEPROM and RAM. Section Scanner
* When [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is Item Adjustment
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Operation/Procedure
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
key.
<Set range and default value of each setup> item is shifted.
Item Display Description
Set Default If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
range value operation is invalid.
A AUTO Auto 1 to 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 to 99 50
item is shifted.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
PHOTO If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50 operation is invalid.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 1 to 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
G MAP Map 1 to 99 50 * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ]
H LIGHT Light density 1 to 99 50 [ ] buttons.
document
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy 1 to 99 50
COPY) document) value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Print (Copy 1 to 99 50 3) When [OK], [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
PHOTO (COPY TO document) is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
COPY) RAM.
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo (Coy 1 to 99 50 * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
(COPY TO COPY) document)
L TEXT (COLOR TONE Text (Color tone 1 to 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Print (Color tone 1 to 99 50 key.
PHOTO (COLOR enhancement) <Set range and default value of each setup>
TONE
ENHANCEMENT) Set Default
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 to 99 50 range value
(COLOR TONE (Color tone A AUTO1 Auto1 1 to 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) B AUTO2 Auto2 1 to 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo (Color 1 to 99 50 C TEXT Text 1 to 99 50
(COLOR TONE enhancement) D TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
Set Default
range value
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50 TEST CLOSE
H MAP Map 1 to 99 50 EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[ SCANNER]
I TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Copy 1 to 99 50 A 45 TEXT
document) A: 45 B 50 EXT/PRINTED PHOTO
C 50 TEXT/PHOTO
J TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo 1 to 99 50 1 99
D 50 PTINTED PHOTO
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
OK
L LIGHT Light density 1 to 99 50
document
46-5
0 Purpose Adjustment
CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the exposure of the black
scanner.
A 45 AUTO1
A: 45 B 50 AUTO2 Section Scanner

C 50 TEXT Item Adjustment
1 99
D 50 TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
Operation/Procedure
OK
46-4
item is shifted.
Purpose Adjustment If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the exposure of the color operation is invalid.
scanner. If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
Section Scanner item is shifted.
Item Adjustment If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Operation/Procedure operation is invalid.
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
played in the setting area. * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ]
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and [ ] buttons.
item is shifted. When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
operation is invalid. 3) When [OK], [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
item is shifted. RAM.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
operation is invalid. copy basic screen of simulation.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ] <Set range and default value of each setup>
[ ] buttons. Set Default
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit range value
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1. A AUTO TEXT Auto text 1 to 99 50
B AUTO TEXT/PRINT Auto text/Print Photo 1 to 99 50
3) When [OK], [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
PHOTO
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
C AUTO TEXT/PHOTO Auto text/Photo 1 to 99 50
RAM.
D TEXT Text 1 to 99 50
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the E TEXT/PRINT PHOTO Text/Print Photo 1 to 99 50
copy basic screen of simulation. F TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] G PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50
key. H PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50
<Set range and default value of each setup> I MAP Map 1 to 99 50
Set Default
range value
A TEXT Text 1 to 99 50 CLOSE
B TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed 1 to 99 50 EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER]
Photo A 45 AUTO TEXT
C TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 1 to 99 50 A: 45 B 50 AUTO EXT/PRINTED
C 50 AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 to 99 50 1 99
D 50 TEXT
E PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 to 99 50
F MAP Map 1 to 99 50
OK
46-8
item is shifted.
Purpose Adjustment If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Function (Purpose) Used to make the scanner color balance operation is invalid.
RGB adjustment (for color push scanner 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
mode).
Section Scanner * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ]
Item Adjustment [ ] buttons.
Operation/Procedure When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
1) Select a desired color with [B] [G] [R] buttons. (In this example, value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
[B] is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed. 3) When [OK], [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
is highlighted. (Blue is selected in the initial screen.) RAM.
2) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- the copy basic screen of simulation.
played in the setting area. * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and [BLACK] key.
item is shifted. <Set range and default value of each setup>
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the [MX-3500N/4500N]
operation is invalid. Set Default
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and range value
item is shifted. A COPY: LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 to 99 42
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the adjustment (low density side)
operation is invalid. B SCAN: LOW RSPF scanner mode 1 to 99
exposure adjustment (low
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. density side)
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. C FAX: LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 to 99
4) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is adjustment (low density side)
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and D COPY: HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 to 99 53
RAM. adjustment (high density side)
E SCAN: HIGH RSPF scanner mode 1 to 99
exposure adjustment (high
copy basic screen of simulation. density side)
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] F FAX: HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 to 99
key. adjustment (high density side)
<Set range and default value of each setup> [MX-3501N/4501N]
Set Default Set Default
Item Display Content Item Button Display Content
range value range value
A LOW DENSITY Low density side 1 to 99 50 A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 to 99 42
POINT correction set value SIDEA: LOW exposure
B HIGH DENSITY High density side 1 to 99 50 adjustment (low
POINT correction set value density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 to 99
SIDEA: LOW mode exposure
0 adjustment (low
TEST density side)
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT COLOR SCANNER MODE C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 to 99
A 70 LOW DENSITY POINT LOW exposure
A: 70 B 50 HIGH DENSITY POINT
adjustment (low
density side)
1 99
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 to 99 53
SIDEA: HIGH exposure
B G R OK adjustment (high
density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 to 99
46-9 SIDEA: HIGH mode exposure
adjustment (high
Purpose Adjustment density side)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the exposure. F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 to 99
HIGH exposure
Section RSPF/DSPF adjustment (high
Item Adjustment density side)
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted.
Item Button Display Content operation is invalid.
range value
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 to 99 45 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
SIDEB: LOW exposure
* When [C] key is pressed, the input value is cleared.
adjustment (low
density side) * The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ]
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 to 99 [ ] buttons.
SIDEB: LOW mode exposure When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
adjustment (low value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
density side)
5) When [OK], [EXECUTE], [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR], or
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 to 99
[BLACK] key is pressed, the current entered value is saved to
LOW exposure
adjustment (low EEPROM and RAM.
density side) 6) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 to 99 50 print is executed.
SIDEB: HIGH exposure * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
adjustment (high
ton is pressed during self print, the operation is terminated.
density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 to 99 * After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
SIDEB: HIGH mode exposure the original state.
adjustment (high * When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed once during setting,
density side) the display returns to the menu selecting screen.
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 to 99
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed twice during setting,
HIGH exposure
the display returns to the sub number entry screen.
adjustment (high
density side) <Setting item>
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 to 99 50
Item Item content
SIDEB: R R
TEXT Text
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 to 99
SIDEB: G G TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 to 99 PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
SIDEB: B B PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO Photo+Text/Photo
MAP Map
0 LIGHT Light density document
COPY ORG Copy document
TEST
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
A 42 COPY LOW
Item Display Item Set range Default value
A: 42 B 42 SCANLOW
A POINT1 Point 1 245 to 755 500
C 42 FAXLOW
1 99
D 53 COPYHIGH
B POINT2 Point 2 245 to 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 to 755 500
OK D POINT4 Point 4 245 to 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 to 755 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 to 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 to 755 500
46-10
H POINT8 Point 8 245 to 755 500
Purpose Adjustment I POINT9 Point 9 245 to 755 500
Function (Purpose) Used to the copy density adjustment (man- J POINT10 Point 10 245 to 755 500
ual). (color mode) K POINT11 Point 11 245 to 755 500
Section Engine L POINT12 Point 12 245 to 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 to 755 500
Item Operation
N POINT14 Point 14 245 to 755 500
Operation/Procedure O POINT15 Point 15 245 to 755 500
1) Select an item to be set.
When a button is pressed, the display is shifted to each setting 0
screen. TEST SIMULATION NO.4610 CLOSE
2) Select a color. ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
* Select [K](BLACK), [C](CYAN), [M](MAGENTA), or [Y](YEL- TEXT TEXT / PRT PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
LOW) button. The selected button is displayed and the MAP LIGHT COPY ORG
adjustment value of the selected color is displayed.
* Only one color can be selected. The selected button is high-
lighted.
1/1
On the initial screen, [K] is selected.
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
46-16 46-19
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to the copy density adjustment (man- Function (Purpose) Used to set the BLACK auto exposure
ual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG print. mode.
Section Engine Section Scanner
Item Operation Item Operation
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the current set status
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- is highlighted.
played in the setting area. 2) Press a set value button to be changed, and the button is high-
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and lighted and the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. (In
item is shifted. this example, [MODE2] button is pressed.)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the * Only one item can be selected.
operation is invalid. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and copy basic screen of simulation.
item is shifted. * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the key.
operation is invalid. <Set range and default value of each set value>
Default
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. Item Content Set value
value
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ] AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE1
[ ] buttons. MODE2
AE_STOP_COPY Auto BLACK exposure ON/OFF ON
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
STOP (for copy)
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
AE_STOP_FAX Auto BLACK exposure ON/OFF ON
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self STOP (for FAX)
print is started. AE_STOP_SCAN Auto BLACK exposure ON/OFF ON
* When [OK], [EXECUTE], [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR], STOP (for scanner)
or [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter setup SOFT NORMAL
and RAM. NORMAL
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to SHARP
the normal display.
<Set range and default value of each setup> 0
TEST NO.4619
SIMULATION
EXPOSURE MODE SETUP (B/W-AE)
AE_MODE MODE1 MODE
AE_STOP COPY OFF ON
C POINT3 Point 3 373 to 627 500
D POINT4 Point 4 373 to 627 500 FAX
AE_STOP OFF ON
E POINT5 Point 5 373 to 627 500 SCAN

AE_STOP OFF ON
F POINT6 Point 6 373 to 627 500 AE_FILTER SOFT NORMAL SHARP
G POINT7 Point 7 373 to 627 500 1/1
H POINT8 Point 8 373 to 627 500
I POINT9 Point 9 373 to 627 500
46-21
J POINT10 Point 10 373 to 627 500
K POINT11 Point 11 373 to 627 500 Purpose Adjustment
L POINT12 Point 12 373 to 627 500 Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy color balance
M POINT13 Point 13 373 to 627 500 manual correction.
N POINT14 Point 14 373 to 627 500 [Color, All modes]: PG print
O POINT15 Point 15 373 to 627 500
Section Engine
Item Adjustment
0
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. The adjustment value
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
of the selected color is displayed. (In this example, [C] is
A500 POINT1
selected.)
A: 500 B500 POINT2
C500 POINT3 * Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
373627
D500 POINT4 is highlighted. (On the default display, [K] is selected.)
* Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
EXECUTE OK The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
operation is invalid. 0
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. TEST SIMULATION NO.4623 CLOSE
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. ENGINE MAXIMUM DENSITY ADJUSTMENT MODE
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [ ] A 0 (0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
[ ] buttons. A: 0

When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit 0 1

value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and self OK
print is started.
* When [OK], [EXECUTE], [], [], [ ], [ ] button, [COLOR],
or [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM 46-24
and RAM.
Purpose Adjustment
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the normal display. Function (Purpose) Used to the copy color balance auto adjust-
ment.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during self-printing, the operation is stopped. Section Engine
Item Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 46-24, the initial screen
is displayed.
C POINT3 Point 3 245 to 755 500 When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the high density process
D POINT4 Point 4 245 to 755 500 control is executed and self print of 48 patches is started.
E POINT5 Point 5 245 to 755 500 Check to confirm that there is A3 paper on the paper feed tray.
F POINT6 Point 6 245 to 755 500 If there is no A3 paper, supply it.
G POINT7 Point 7 245 to 755 500 2) While the high density process control is executed, [EXE-
H POINT8 Point 8 245 to 755 500 CUTE] button is highlighted.
I POINT9 Point 9 245 to 755 500 3) During the self print of 48 patches, [EXECUTE] button is high-
J POINT10 Point 10 245 to 755 500 lighted.
K POINT11 Point 11 245 to 755 500
4) After completion of the self print, the display is shifted to the
L POINT12 Point 12 245 to 755 500
output patch read standby screen.
M POINT13 Point 13 245 to 755 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 to 755 500 Place the printed 48 patches on the glass table, and press
O POINT15 Point 15 245 to 755 500 [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] button to select the process mode.
5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
48 patches set on the table glass are scanned.
0
SIMULATION NO.4621 CLOSE Check to confirm that there is A3 paper on the paper feed tray.
TEST
If there is no A3 paper, supply it.
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A500 POINT1
6) After reading the patches, self print of 16patches is automati-
A: 500 B500 POINT2 cally started.
C500 POINT3 7) After completion of the self print, the display is shifted to the
245~755
D :500 POINT4 registration standby screen. When [REPEAT] button is
pressed, the display returns to the initial screen without exe-
K C M Y EXECUTE OK cuting registration.
[When [OK] button is pressed, the correction value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM, and the half tone process control refer-
46-23 ence value correction is started.
Purpose Setting 8) The display is shifted to the reference value registration pro-
Function (Purpose) Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half cess 1 end screen automatically, and the reference value reg-
tone highest density correction. istration process 2 (BLACK) is executed automatically.
9) After completion of the reference value registration process 2,
Section
the following message is displayed. (Each message is auto-
Item Specifications matically shifted.)
Operation/Procedure BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END
2) When [OK] button, [COLOR] or [BLACK] key is pressed, the YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END
current entered value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is
<Set range and default value of each setup> displayed.
Set Default 10) All the registration processes are completed normally.
range value * When [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
A (0: ENABLE 0 Engine highest density 0 to 1 0 pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
1: DISABLE) correction mode ENABLE
1 Engine highest density
correction mode DISABLE
[Cancel during execution of the operation] (Completion of all the processes)
To cancel and resume the operation, press [EXECUTE].
0
(Initial screen)

0
COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH. PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
46-25
Purpose Adjustment
(48-patch print)
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the fine adjustment of sin-
gle color mode color balance.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE Section Image process (ICU)
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT Item Adjustment
TEST PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS... Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color to be set. (In this example, [C] (Cyan) is
selected.)
* When a color button ([C](Cyan), [M](Magenta), [Y](Yellow))
EXECUTE
is selected, the selected button is highlighted and the adjust-
ment value of the selected button is displayed.
(Output patch read (FACTORY)) * Only one color can be selected. The selected button is high-
lighted.
0 In the initial state, [C] is selected.

,
DARK AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS. item is shifted.
FACTORY SERVICE EXECUTE If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
(16-patch self print) If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
0 If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24 CLOSE operation is invalid.
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ADJUSTED PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS.
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
EXECUTE
(Standby for registration process) * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
0
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT Default value
Item Description Range
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA C M Y
,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE. A RED 0 to 255 0 255 255
B GREEN 0 to 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 to 255 255 255 0
REPEAT OK D YELLOW 0 to 255 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 to 255 0 255 0
F CYAN 0 to 255 255 0 0
(Registration of half tone process control reference value)
0 0
CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.4625 CLOSE
TEST SIMULATION NO. 46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT SINGLE COLOR MODE COLOR BALANCE SETUP
A255 RED
PLEASE WAIT.
A: 255 B255 GREEN
C255 BLUE
0 255
D 0 YELLOW
NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON.
OK K C M Y OK
46-26
key.
Purpose Adjustment * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color copy basic screen of simulation.
balance set value to the default.
Section Image process (ICU)
Set Default
Item Adjustment Item Display Set range
range value
Operation/Procedure A BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 to 99 50
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. (SLOPE) engine curve
calculating coefficient
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons (slope) setting
become active display. B BLACK TEXT Black text edge area 1 to 99 50
2) Press [YES] button. (INTERCEPT) engine curve
The single color mode color balance set value is reset to the calculating coefficient
(intercept) setting
default value. [YES] button is highlighted.
C COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 to 99 50
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE- (SLOPE) engine curve
CUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and calculating coefficient
[NO] buttons gray out. (slope) setting
* After completion of default reset of the single color mode D COLOR TEXT Color text edge area 1 to 99 50
color balance set value, [EXECUTE] button returns to the (INTERCEPT) engine curve
normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. calculating coefficient
(intercept) setting
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
E ED TEXT Error diffusion edge 1 to 99 50
<Standard value reset item> (SLOPE) area engine curve
calculating coefficient
Standard value reset item (slope) setting
1 RED set ratio F ED TEXT Error diffusion edge 1 to 99 50
2 GREEN set ratio (INTERCEPT) area engine curve
3 BLUE set ratio calculating coefficient
4 YELLOW set ratio (intercept) setting
5 MAGENTA set ratio
6 CYAN set ratio 0
0 COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP
TEST SIMULATION NO.4626 CLOSE A 50 BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
SINGLE COLOR MODE STANDARD RATE SETUP A: 50 B 50 BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C 50 COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)

1 99
D 50 COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
OK

EXECUTE
46-28
Purpose Adjustment
46-27
Function (Purpose) (Information on this simulation may be
Purpose Adjustment
requested in some cases. However, this
Function (Purpose) Used to set the engine gamma calculating function is basically not used in the market.)
formula coefficient. Used to check the auto exposure/Auto doc-
Section Image process (ICU) ument recognition/ Line number recognition
Item Adjustment (Color mode). If the local memory size is
less than 256MB, the operation of this sim-
Operation/Procedure
ulation may not operate normally.
Item Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning. After completion of
scanning, the result is displayed.
operation is invalid. 2) Press [NEXT] button to switch to the process data of another
category.
item is shifted. Use [] and [] keys to change the display page of the process
data.
operation is invalid. * If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and display grays out and the operation is invalid.
RAM.
3) Press [SETUP] button to return to the initial screen.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] * When [NEXT] button is pressed under the final category data dis-
key. play state, the head category data are displayed.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the * Pressing [NEXT] button displays the next category data regard-
copy basic screen of simulation. less of the display page.
<Content of process data>

Set range/
Category Detail of category Display Content Number of Remark
digits
ACS (Auto RESULT COL/MONO COLOR 2 kinds COLOR 1 to 2
recognition of (Judgment result) MONO (COLOR BLACK
Color document/ document,
Monochrome Monochrome
document) document)
STATISTICS ACSCONT ACS judgment counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
(Image process
statistic amount)
COLOR AE RESULT SITAJI_JUDGE Base division detection result 0 to 32
(Color auto (Judgment result)
exposure) STATISTICS RATE_SCR Mesh ratio 0 to 10000
(Image process SHITAJI Base number judgment result 0 to 3
statistic amount) BEAT_JUDGE Background judgment result 0 to 8
SUM_SITAJI_SCR Base area mesh number Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
ORG RECOG RESULT ORIGINAL TXT Document Auto text 1
(Document type (Judgment result) TXT/HT Auto text mesh 2
auto recognition) HT Auto mesh 3
TXT/PIC Auto text/photo 4
PIC Auto photo 5
TXT ON HT Auto text on dot 6
OHT Other auto 7
BACKGROUND Base None 1
GR Gray 2
WH White 3
NE Newspaper 4
WH_GR White gray 5
WH_NE White newspaper 6
WH_CO White color 7
CO Color 8
IM Image 9
MESH Mesh No mesh 0
IMAGE Image mesh 1
BASE Base mesh (Non-image 2
mesh)
HTFE HIGH Line High number of lines 1
LOW Low number of lines 0
STATISTICS HTCNT Mesh counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
(Image process PHOTOCNT Photographic paper counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
statistic amount) STRCNT Text counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
FLATCNT Background counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
PREHTCNT Document type judgment mesh counter Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
value
HTXTCNT Text on mesh counter value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
SUMF Flat mesh counter value Max. 10 digits
SUMM_L Total of Max. reverse numbers (lower Max. 10 digits
32bit)
SUMM_H Total of Max. reverse numbers (Upper Max. 3 digits
4bit)
SUMFM_L Total of flat section max. reverse Max. 10 digits
number (lower 32bit)
SUMFM_H Total of flat section max. reverse Max. 3 digits
number (Upper 4bit)
FHSTDR Background pixel histogram value Max. 10 digits #1 to #32 display A3
(RED) pixel number
FHSTDG Background pixel histogram value Max. 10 digits
(GREEN)
FHSTDB Background pixel histogram value Max. 10 digits
(BLUE)
HTHSTDR Mesh pixel histogram value (RED) Max. 10 digits
Set range/
Category Detail of category Display Content Number of Remark
digits
ORG RECOG STATISTICS HTHSTDG Mesh pixel histogram value (GREEN) Max. 10 digits #1 to #32 display A3
(Document type (Image process HTHSTDB Mesh pixel histogram value (BLUE) Max. 10 digits pixel number
auto recognition) statistic amount) LHSTD L component histogram value other Max. 10 digits
than mesh
MDHSTD Max. difference histogram value other Max. 10 digits
than mesh
OHSTDR Pixel histogram value other than mesh Max. 10 digits
(RED)
OHSTDG Pixel histogram value other than mesh Max. 10 digits
(GREEN)
OHSTDB Pixel histogram value other than mesh Max. 10 digits
(BLUE)
SUM_BETA_RGB Total of high-level division number in 0 to 32
background pixel histogram
EREA_BETA RGB Number of high-level division areas in 0 to 16
background pixel histogram (for base)
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB Number of high-level division areas in 0 to 16
background pixel histogram (for
photographic paper)
RATE_BETA Background ratio 0 to 10000
SHITAJI Base number judgment result 0 to 3
BETA_JUDGE Background judgment result 0 to 8
RATE_SCR Mesh ratio 0 to 10000
RATE_SCR2 Mesh judgment ratio 0 to 10000
RATE_TSCR Text-on-mesh ratio 0 to 10000
HTFE_JUDGE Line number judgment result Max. 3 digits
SCR_HIST_JUDGE Mesh histogram judgment result 0 to 2
SCR_CNT_JUDGE Mesh counter value judgment result 0 to 1
TSCR_JUDGE Text-on-mesh counter value judgment 0 to 2
result
SCR_JUDGE Mesh judgment result 0 to 5
RATE_OTHER Other ratio 0 to 10000
TEXT_JUDGE Text judgment result 0 to 1
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE Photographic paper pixel counter value 0 to 1
judgment result
OTHER_JUDGE Other pixel counter value judgment 0 to 1
result
PHOTO_JUDGE Photographic paper judgment result 0 to 1
TH_BETA2 Threshold value to detect high-level A3 pixel
division in background pixel histogram number
TH_BETA_PHT2 Threshold value to detect high-level Max. 2 digits
division in background pixel histogram
(photographic paper)
TH_SCR2 Mesh high-level threshold value Max. 5 digits A3 pixel number
TH_SCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the mesh counter Max. 5 digits
value
TH_TSCR_CNT2 Threshold value for the text-on-mesh Max. 5 digits A3 pixel number
counter value
TH_TEXT2 Text judgment threshold value Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
TH_PHOTO2 Photographic paper judgment threshold Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
value
ALLCNT Total pixel number of judgment area Max. 10 digits A3 pixel number
HTFE RESULT HIGH2 Number of High number of lines 2 2
mesh lines (htfe_out = 3)
HIGH1 High number of lines 1 1
(htfe_out = 2)
LOW1 Low number of lines 1 3
(htfe_out = 1)
LOW2 Low number or lines 2 4
(htfe_out = 0)
REVERSE AVE Max. reverse average 0 to 100.00 ********: ave_m (When
100 is exceeded, "-" is
displayed.)
REVERSE AVE(FLAT) Flat section max. reverse average 0 to 100.00 ******** : ave_fm
(When 100 is
exceeded, "-" is
displayed.)
FLAT SELECT YES Flat section When flatr > THflatr 0
NO mesh pixel When other than flatr > 1
comparison THflatr
(Initial screen) 7) When [SET] button is pressed, setting is revised.
* The display in the frame of [NEW] is deleted, and the value
0 entered in the procedure 6 is displayed in the column of
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-28 CLOSE [PRESENT].
AUTO EXPOSURE/ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM
* If a new value if less than 9 digits, revision is not made.

PRESS [EXECUTE] TO SCAN START
* Switch the category sequentially with [NEXT] and [BACK]
buttons.
EXECUTE
(Completion of scan = ACS judgment result screen)
0
AUTO EXPOSURE/ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM

NOW READING THE ORIGINAL.
PLEASE WAIT
* Press [] to display the image process statistic amount, and

press [NEXT] to display the judgment result of "COLOR
AE","ORG RECOG", and"SCR RECOG".
46-33
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the color auto mode
adjustment.
Item Image quality
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, keep the default val-
ues except for the following items. For the following items,
change the set values according to the necessity.
COLOR AE(SW MODE 1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO / TH MAX
COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS(SIM LEVEL)
1) Select a category to be set with [NEXT] and [BAC] buttons. (In
this example, "ACS4 digits or less" is set.)
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
RAM.
5) Select a desired button.
The selected button is highlighted and the value is displayed.
(In the default state, [TH_ACS5 ENLARGE] is highlighted.)
6) Enter a new value (000000002 in this example) with 10-key.
* The number of digits is max. 9. The 10th digit cannot be
entered. Entry is made after clearing.
* 10-key: [0] to [9]
Default Screen
Category Item Display Content Set range/Number of digits
value type
ACS 4 digits or A THCLMK_1 Pixel judgment threshold value A
09 7
less setting (1)
B THCLBK_1 Final pixel judgment threshold
03 2
value (1)
C ACSMSK_1 ACS mask size select (1) 01 0
D THCLMK_2 Pixel judgment threshold value
09 7
(2)
E THCLBK_2 Final pixel judgment threshold
03 2
value (2)
F ACSMSK_2 ACS mask size select (2) 01 0
G THCLMK_3 Pixel judgment threshold value
09 7
(3)
H THCLBK_3 Final pixel judgment threshold
03 2
value (3)
I ACSMSK_3 ACS mask size select (3) 01 0
J THCLMK_4 Pixel judgment threshold value
09 7
(4)
K THCLBK_4 Final pixel judgment threshold
03 2
value (4)
L ACSMSK_4 ACS mask size select (4) 01 0
M THCLMK_5 Pixel judgment threshold value
09 7
(5)
N THCLBK_5 Final pixel judgment threshold
03 2
value (5)
O ACSMSK_5 ACS mask size select (5) 01 0
P SIM_LEVEL ACS judgment select switch
13 2
(density difference)
Q TH_ACS5_RT TH_ACS5: Calculation ratio of
the threshold value for 0 100 50
reduction
5 digits or A TH_ACS5 ENLARGE ACS judgment threshold value 0 134217727 000030000 B
less setting 5 (for enlargement) (A3 pixel number)
COLOR AE 4 digits or A SW_MODE1 ON Base detection of auto text 0 1 1 A
less setting OFF document 1 0
B SW_MODE2 ON Base detection of auto text 0 1 1
OFF mesh document 1 0
C SW_MODE3 ON Base detection of auto text-on- 0 1 1
OFF mesh document 1 0
D SW_MODE4 ON Base detection of auto mesh 0 1 0
OFF document 1 0
E SW_MODE5 ON Base detection of auto photo 0 1 0
OFF document 1 0
F SW_MODE6 ON Base detection of auto text/ 0 1 0
OFF photo document 1 0
G SW_MODE7 ON Base detection of auto other 0 1 0
OFF document 1 0
H TH_MAX_MONO Monochrome base detection 0 32
17
threshold value
I TH_MAX_COLOR Color base detection threshold 0 32
17
value
J SW_NEWS Newspaper base forcible 01
0
removal switch
K SW_MODE_SCR1 Mesh area base judgment 13
3
switch
L SW_MODE_SCR2 Mesh area base removal select 01
0
switch
M SW_MODE_MIX Auto other document base 12
2
detection switch
N SW_HOSEI Correction table correction 0 8 (-4 +4) 4
5 digits or A TH_MODE_SCR Mesh ratio threshold value 0 10000 03000 B
less setting B TH_SITAJI_SCR Base mesh threshold value 0 10000 03000
Default Screen
value type
ORG RECOG 4 digits or A MVSTRSEL REDUCE Text pixel judgment result 02 0 A
less setting select register (for reduction)
B MVSTRSEL ENLARGE Text pixel judgment result 02 0
select register (for
enlargement)
C PSEL1 REDUCE Photographic paper judgment 01 0
table select register for each
signal (for reduction)
D PSEL1 ENLARGE Photographic paper judgment 01 0
table select register for each
signal (for enlargement)
E PSEL2 REDUCE Photographic paper pixel final 02 0
judgment table select register
(for reduction)
F PSEL2 ENLARGE Photographic paper pixel final 02 0
judgment table select register
(for enlargement)
G BUSYSEL REDUCE Frequency comparison value 01 1
select register (for reduction)
H BUSYSEL ENLARGE Frequency comparison value 01 1
enlargement)
I HTSEL REDUCE AREA Mesh Area 0 0 1
judgment separation 1
result select mesh
(for reduction) judgment
result
ORG Document 1
discrimination
mesh
judgment
result
J HTSEL ENLARGE AREA Mesh Area 0 0 1
judgment separation 1
result select mesh
(for judgment
enlargement) result
ORG Document 1
discrimination
mesh
judgment
result
K ASEL REDUCE Integrated judgment priority 0 23 16
select register (for reduction)
L ASEL ENLARGE Integrated judgment priority 0 23 16
enlargement)
M HSTSEL REDUCE Histogram division fluctuation 03 0
register (for reduction)
N HSTSEL ENLARGE Histogram division fluctuation 03 0
register (for enlargement)
O HSTSEL2 REDUCE Max. density difference 03 3
histogram division fluctuation
register (for reduction)
P HSTSEL2 ENLARGE Max. density difference 03 3
histogram division fluctuation
register (for enlargement)
Q TH_SUM_BETARGB Threshold value of all divisions 0 32 6
of background high level
number (for base)
R TH_BETA_SUB Monochrome base judgment 0 32 5
threshold value
S TH_WHITE_BETA White base judgment threshold 0 32 25
value
T TH_GRAY_BETA1 Gray base judgment threshold 0 32
18
value 1
U TH_GRAY_BETA2 Gray base judgment threshold 0 32 25
value 2
V TH_NOISE REDUCE Mesh noise threshold value (for 0 32 10
reduction)
W TH_NOISE ENLARGE Mesh noise threshold value (for 0 32 10
enlargement)
X SW_SCR1 Mesh ratio judgment switch 01 0
Y SW_SCR2 Mesh judgment switch 01 0
Default Screen
value type
ORG RECOG 4 digits or Z TH_HTFE Threshold value of high 03 A
0
less setting number of lines
AA SW_TSCR Text-on-mesh judgment switch 01 1
AB TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB Threshold value of all divisions 0 32 15
of background high level
number (photographic paper)
AC TH_BETA_RT TH_BETA: Calculation ratio of 0 100 50
the threshold value for
reduction
AD TH_SCR_RT TH_SCR: Calculation ratio of 0 100 50
reduction
AE TH_SCR_CNT_RT TH_SCR_CNT: Calculation 0 100 50
ratio of the threshold value for
reduction
AF TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT TH_TSCR_ CNT: Calculation 0 100 50
reduction
AG TH_TEXT_RT TH_TEXT: Calculation ratio of 0 100 50
reduction
AH TH_PHOTO_RT TH_PHOTO: Calculation ratio 0 100 50
of the threshold value for
reduction
AI TH_BETA_PHT_RT TH_BETA_PHT: Calculation 0 100 50
reduction
5 digits or A TH_BETA ENLARGE Threshold value to detect high 0 134217727 1000000 B
less setting level number division in (A3 pixel number)
background pixel histogram
(base) (for enlargement)
B TH_SCR ENLARGE Mesh high level number 0 134217727 20000
threshold value (for (A3 pixel number)
enlargement)
C TH_SCR_RATE Threshold value for mesh ratio 0 10000 04500
D TH_SCR_CNT EL Threshold value (for 0 134217727 000800000
enlargement) for the mesh dot (A3 pixel number)
counter value
E TH_MANSEN_RATE Ten-thousand line/print area 0 10000 1500
judgment threshold value
F TH_TSCR_RATE Threshold value for ratio of text 0 10000 00300
on mesh dots
G TH_TSCR_CNT EL Threshold value for counter 0 134217727 000010000
value of text on mesh (for (A3 pixel number)
enlargement)
H TH_TEXT ENLARGE Threshold value of text 0 134217727 000050000
judgment (for enlargement) (A3 pixel number)
I TH_PHOTO ENLARGE Threshold value of 0 134217727 000050000
photography judgment (for (A3 pixel number)
enlargement)
J TH_BETA_RATE Background ratio threshold 0 10000 03000
value
K TH_BETA_PHT_EL Threshold value to detect high 0 134217727 100000
density section in background
pixel histogram (photograph)
(for enlargement)
L TH_OTHER Text judgment threshold value 0 10000 07000
(for reduction)
SCR RECOG 4 digits or A THBAVEM1 REDUCE Threshold value 1 for 13 x 7 0 255 170 A
less setting mask average value (for
reduction)
B THBAVEM1 ENLARGE Threshold value 1 for 13 x 7 0 255 170
mask average value (for
enlargement)
C THBAVEM2 REDUCE Threshold value 2 for 13 x 7 0 255 105
reduction)
D THBAVEM2 ENLARGE Threshold value 2 for 13 x 7 0 255 105
enlargement)
E THBAVEM3 REDUCE Threshold value 3 for 13 x 7 0 255 50
reduction)
Default Screen
value type
SCR RECOG 4 digits or F THBAVEM3 ENLARGE Threshold value 3 for 13 x 7 0 255 50 A
less setting mask average value (for
enlargement)
G CMSUB1 REDUCE Adjustment value 1 for 13 x 7 0 255 55
reduction)
H CMSUB1 ENLARGE Adjustment value 1 for 13 x 7 0 255 55
enlargement)
I CMSUB2 REDUCE Adjustment value 2 for 13 x 7 0 255 0
reduction)
J CMSUB2 ENLARGE Adjustment value 2 for 13 x 7 0 255 0
enlargement)
K MREVSEL REDUCE High line number judgment 03 0
method select (for reduction)
L MREVSEL ENLARGE High line number judgment 03 0
method select (for
enlargement)
M MSDSEL REDUCE Output select when 01 0
MREVSEL=3 (for reduction)
N MSDSEL ENLARGE Output select when 01 0
MREVSEL=3 (for enlargement)
O THAVEFM1 REDUCE THAVEFM1 for reduction 0 720 65
P THAVEFM1 ENLARGE THAVEFM1 for enlargement 0 720 96
Q THAVEFM2 REDUCE THAVEFM2 for reduction 0 720 54
R THAVEFM2 ENLARGE THAVEFM2 for enlargement 0 720 80
S THAVEFM3 REDUCE THAVEFM3 for reduction 0 720 48
T THAVEFM3 ENLARGE THAVEFM3 for enlargement 0 720 70
U THAVEM1 REDUCE THAVEM1 for reduction 0 720 65
V THAVEM1 ENLARGE THAVEM1 for enlargement 0 720 96
W THAVEM2 REDUCE THAVEM2 for reduction 0 720 54
X THAVEM2 ENLARGE THAVEM2 for enlargement 0 720 80
Y THAVEM3 REDUCE THAVEM3 for reduction 0 720 48
Z THAVEM3 ENLARGE THAVEM3 for enlargement 0 720 70
SEGMENT 4 digits Text-on- A MESH_TXT ON HT (Auto) text on mesh 0 0 0 A
or less mesh ON/ 3 (THROUGH) (THROUGH)
setting OFF (auto/ B MESH_TXT/HT1 (Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line 1 (OFF)
manual 1)
mode) C MESH_TXT/HT2 (Auto) text mesh (Under 2, Line 2 (ON1)
1)
D MESH_TXT/PR (Manual) test print 3 (ON2)
Print E PR_TXT ON HT (Auto) Text on mesh 0 0
document 3 (THROUGH)
text F PR_TXT/HT1 (Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line 1(ON1)
detection 1, 2)
level G PR_TXT/HT2 (Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line 2 (ON2)
1, 2)
H PR_TXT/PR (Manual) Text print 3 (ON3)
I PR_CHECK1(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
OFF [(Auto) text on mesh] 1 1
J PR_CHECK2(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
OFF [(Auto) Text mesh (Under 2, 1 1
Line 1, 2)]
K PR_CHECK3(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
Line 1, 2)]
L PR_CHECK4(*2) ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
OFF [(Manual) text print] 1 1
M THWMAX(*2) THWMAX (Print document text 0 255 220
detection level)
N THWMIN(*2) THWMIN (Print document text 0 255 153
detection level)
Default Screen
value type
SEGMENT 4 digits Chroma O COLOR_PRINT MODE Print mode 0 0 0 A
or less saturation/ 3 (THROUGH) (THROUGH)
setting No Chroma 1(OFF)
saturation P COLOR_PHOTO MODE Photographic paper mode 2(ON1)
judgment 3(ON2)
level
Q COLOR_CHECK1 ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
(*3) OFF (Print mode) 1 1
R COLOR_CHECK2 ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
(*3) OFF (Photographic paper mode) 1 1
S THILVC(*3) THILVC (Chromatic/Achromatic 0 255 166
judgment level print system
mode)
T THACOLL(*3) THACOLL (Chromatic/ 0 255 21
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
U THACOLH(*3) THACOLH (Chromatic/ 0 255 18
system mode)
V THILVG(*3) THILVG (Chromatic/ 0 255 118
system mode)
W THAGRYL(*3) THAGRYL (Chromatic/ 0 255 14
system mode)
X THAGRYH(*3) THAGRYH (Chromatic/ 0 255 20
system mode)
Color auto Y SCREEN FILTER H Filter Heavy 13 3 (Auto)
document LEVEL emphasis emphasis
recognition L setting Light
filter emphasis
emphasis AUTO Auto
setting
Specification Z SEG_ACT_A_OTR ON (Auto) Other mode 0 1 1
mode area OFF 1 0
separate AA SEG_ACT_M_PRT1 ON (Manual) Print document mode 0 1 1
(ON/OFF OFF (Text) 1 0
setting)
AB SEG_ACT_M_PRT2 ON (Manual) Print document mode 0 1 1
OFF (Text/Print) 1 0
INDEX AC SEG_DS_A_TOH (Auto) Text on mesh 0 512 0
direct (Manual) Text print 0 512
AD SEG_DS_M_TPP
appointment
Quantity of AE SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1 Text print system, Black text 1 0 20 10
detection AF SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2 Text print system, Black text 2 0 20 10
adjustment AG SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL Text print system, Color text 0 20 10
AH SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR Text print system, Chromatic/ 0 20
10
Achromatic
AI SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH Text print system, Mesh 0 20 10
AJ SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1 Text system, Black text 1 0 20 10
AK SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2 Text system, Black text 2 0 20 10
AL SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL Text system, Color text 0 20 10
AM SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR Text system, Chromatic/ 0 20
10
Achromatic
AN SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH Text system, Mesh 0 20 10
AO SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1 Other, Black text 1 0 20 10
AP SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2 Other, Black text 2 0 20 10
AQ SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL Other, Color text 0 20 10
AR SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR Other, Chromatic/Achromatic 0 20 10
AS SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH Other, Mesh 0 20 10
Text-on- AT BKUCR_ACTM ( THROUGH 99% 0 0 0
mesh blur 99%) OFF 2 1
adjustment ON 2
AU BKUCR_ACTM THROUGH 100% 199% 0 0 0
(100% 199%) OFF 2 1
ON 2
AV BKUCR_ACTM THROUGH 200% 0 0 0
(200% ) OFF 2 1
ON 2
Default Screen
value type
SEGMENT 4 digits Text-on- AW BKUCR_ACTA ( THROUGH 99% 0 0 0 A
or less mesh blur 99%) OFF 2 1
setting adjustment ON 2
AX BKUCR_ACTA THROUGH 100% 199% 0 0 0
(100% 199%) OFF 2 1
ON 2
AY BKUCR_ACTA THROUGH 200% 0 0 0
(200% ) OFF 2 1
ON 2
5 digits Text on A MESH_CHECK1 ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0 B
or more mesh ON/ OFF [(Auto) text on mesh] 1 1
setting OFF (Auto/ B MESH_CHECK2 ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
Manual OFF [(Auto) Text mesh (Under 1, 1 1
mode) Line 1)
C MESH_CHECK3 ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
Line 1)
D MESH_CHECK4 ON Check button for investigation 0 0 0
OFF [(Auto) text print] 1 1
E THED3A(*1) THED3A (Text on mesh ON/ 0 65535 1000
OFF)
F THED3B(*1) THED3B (Text on mesh ON/ 0 65535 1000
OFF)
* When the check item for investigation is OFF, the set value is not written.
(Initial screen)
46-36
0 Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2-
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS4DIGIT UNDER) color (Red, Black) copy.
A 0 THCLMK_1
A: 0 B 0 THCLBK_1 Section
C 0 ACSMSK_1 Item Image quality
0 9
D 0 THCLMK_2
Operation/Procedure
BACK NEXT OK
1) Select a category to be set.
* When [RANGE] (red judgment range), [COEFFICIENT] (out-
put color coefficient) button is pressed to select each cate-
(On the screen, [NEXT] is pressed.)
gory, the selected button is highlighted and the set items of
the selected category are displayed.
0
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
highlighted.
COLOR AUTO MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS5DIGIT OVER)
PRESENT 000010000
In the initial state, [RANGE] is selected.

NEW SET
TH_ACS5 ENLARGE
BACK NEXT item is shifted.
item is shifted.
RAM.
Color Set Default value
Category Item Display Content
button range C M Y
RANGE (Red judgment range) A PARAMETER O Red adjustment coefficient O 0 to 6 3
B PARAMETER M Red adjustment coefficient M 0 to 6 3
C PARAMETER INTENSITY Chroma saturation emphasis coefficient 0 to 6 3
COEFFICIENT (Output color coefficient) A RED R output color CMY 0 to 255 0 255 255
B GREEN G output color CMY 0 to 255 255 0 255
C BLUE B output color CMY 0 to 255 255 255 0
D CYAN C output color CMY 0 to 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA M output color CMY 0 to 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW Y output color CMY 0 to 255 0 0 255
0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-36 CLOSE SIMULATION NO.4637 CLOSE
TEST
RED/BLACK COLOR COPY ADJUSTMENT
B&W IMAGE CREATE ADJUSTMENT
A 2 RR2
A 35 R/G
A: 2 B 3 R
A: 35 B 0 B/G
C 1 GG1

0 2 0 99
D: 3 G

RANGE INTENCITY COEFFICIENT OK DEFAULT ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
46-37
46-39
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the BLACK image forming
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the image send sharpness
adjustment.
adjustment. (Only when FAX is installed)
Section
Section FAX
Item Image quality
Item Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
4) When [YES] button is pressed, [YES] button is highlighted. RAM.
The set value is saved to EEPROM.
* When [NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the set
value changing screen. Set Default
range value
5) When [DEFAULT] button is pressed, each set value (ratio) is
A 200 x 100[DPI] 200 x 100[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
reset to the default value and the set value is saved to
OFF OFF
EEPROM and RAM.
B 200 x 200[DPI] 200 x 200[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
<Set range and default value of each setup> OFF OFF
C 200 x 200[DPI] ON 200 x 200[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
Set Default
Item Display Content ON
range value
D 200 x 400[DPI] 200 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
A R/G Gray forming setting (R/G) 0 to 99 35
OFF OFF
B B/G Gray forming setting (B/G) 0 to 99 0
E 200 x 400[DPI] ON 200 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
ON
F 400 x 400[DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
OFF OFF
G 400 x 400[DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
ON
H 600 x 600[DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
OFF OFF
I 600 x 600[DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] half tone 0 to 2 1
ON
0 item is shifted.
TEST SIMULATION NO.4639 CLOSE If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
IMAGE SEND SHARPNESS ADJUSTMENT operation is invalid.
A 1 100100DPI OFF 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A: 1 B 0 200100DPI OFF
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
C: 0 200200DPI OFF
0 2
D: 0 200200DPI ON 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
OK the adjustment is started.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
* When [], [], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
46-40 pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Purpose Adjustment * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust-
ment. (Collective adjustment of all the <Set range and default value of each setup>
modes). (Only when FAX is installed) Display item & Set Default
Item Content
Section MFP/FAX Detail of display range value
Item Image quality A AUTO Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
Operation/Procedure
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1 1 (AUTO)
the adjustment is started. MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the EXP2 Exposure 2 3
normal display. EXP3 Exposure 3 4
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
* When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is * Items G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted. Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
<Set range and default value of each setup> <Reflection to item G after settlement of values>
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed after changing and settlement of
Display item & Set Default
Item Content exposure adjustment values A to F, the data are saved to EEPROM
Detail of display range value
and RAM and set to item G at the same time.
A EXPOSURELEVEL Exposure data value 1 to 99 50
(ALL) (Collective)
0
0 TEST
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-40 CLOSE EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAXNORMAL)

D 50 EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAXALL)
A 50 EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
F: 45 E 50 EXPOSURE4
A: 50 B 2 PAPERCS1
1 99 F 45 EXPOSURE5
C 1 EXIT TRAYC
1 99 G 6 EXECUTE MODEEXP5
EXECUTE OK
EXECUTE OK
46-42
46-41 Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust-
ment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust- installed)
ment (Normal). (Only when FAX is
installed) Section MFP/FAX
Item Image quality
Section MFP/FAX
Operation/Procedure
Item Image quality
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
operation is invalid. normal display.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * When [], [], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
the adjustment is started.
Item Display item & Detail of display Content Set range Default value
A AUTO Fine/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE AUTO Print mode Fine/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Fine/Exposure 1 2
AUTO H_TONE Fine/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
* Items M are displayed as "Display item : Detail of display."
46-43
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
Purpose Adjustment
<Reflection to item M after settlement of the values>
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed after changing and settlement
ment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
of the exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to
installed)
EEPROM and RAM and reflected to item M at the same time.
Section MFP/FAX
0 Item Image quality
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-42 CLOSE Operation/Procedure
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : FFINE) 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
A : 50 AUTO
A: 50 B : 50 EXPOSURE1
[ 1~ 99]
C : 50 EXPOSURE2
D : 50 EXPOSURE3
item is shifted.
EXECUTE OK If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
item is shifted.
normal display.
* When [], [], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50
M EXE-CUTE MODE AUTO Print mode Super Fine/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 2
AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." Operation/Procedure
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
<Reflection to item M after settlement of the values> The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed after changing and settlement played in the setting area.
of the exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
EEPROM and RAM and reflected to item M at the same time. item is shifted.
0 operation is invalid.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)
A : 50 ; AUTO
item is shifted.
A: 50 B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1 If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
[ 1~ 99] C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2 operation is invalid.
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
EXECUTE OK
46-44
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjust- normal display.
ment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is * When [], [], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
installed) pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Section MFP/FAX * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
Item Image quality ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.

Item Display item & Detail of display Content Default value Default value
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50
Item Display item & Detail of display Content Default value Default value
M EXECUTE MODE AUTO Print mode Ultra Fine/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 2
AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." Operation/Procedure
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
<Reflection to item M after settlement of values> The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed after changing and settlement of played in the setting area.
exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to EEPROM * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
and RAM and set to item M at the same time. item is shifted.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ULTRA FINE)
A : 50 ; AUTO
item is shifted.
A: 50 B : 50 ; EXPOSURE1 If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
[ 1~ 99] C : 50 ; EXPOSURE2 operation is invalid.
D : 50 ; EXPOSURE3
EXECUTE OK
46-45
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure level normal display.
adjustment and the individual setting * When [], [], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed) the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Section FAX * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button
Item Image quality is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.

A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 to 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 to 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 to 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 to 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 to 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 to 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/Half tone 1 to 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone 1 to 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone 1 to 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone 1 to 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone 1 to 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone 1 to 99 50
M EXECUTE MODE AUTO Print mode 600dpi/Auto 1 to 12 1 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 600dpi/Exposure 1 2
AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/Half tone 7
EXP1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone 8
* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
<Reflection to item M after settlement of values>
46-47
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed after changing and settlement of
exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to EEPROM Purpose Setting
and RAM and set to item M at the same time. Function (Purpose) Used to set the JPEG compression rate in
Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN).
0 Section
TEST SIMULATION NO.46-45 CLOSE Item Setting
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX600DPI) Operation/Procedure
J 50 EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
L: 45 K 50 EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
1 99 L 45 EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
M 12 EXECUTE MODE ; EXP5 H_TONE
EXECUTE OK item is shifted.
item is shifted.
RAM.
Category Item Display Content Set range Default value

COPY (COLOR) A COPY (C) LOW Low compression (Color) 0 0 (LOW)
MIDDLE Middle compression (Color) 1
HIGH High compression (Color) 2
COPY (GRAY) B COPY (G) LOW Low compression (Gray) 0 0 (LOW)
MIDDLE Middle compression (Gray) 1
HIGH High compression (Gray) 2
PUSH SCAN (COLOR) C SCAN (C) MIDDLE1 Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table (for 0 0 (MIDDLE1)
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table (for
MIDDLE2 Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table (for 1
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table (for
MIDDLE3 Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table 2
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
PUSH SCAN (GRAY) D SCAN (G) MIDDLE1 Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table 0 0 (MIDDLE1)
0 48
COPYSCAN COMPRESS RATE ADJUSTMENT

48-1
A 1 COPY(C) MIDDLE
A: 1 B 0 COPY(G) LOW Purpose Adjustment
0 2
C 0 SCAN(C) MIDDLE
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the magnification adjust-
C 0 SCAN(G) MIDDLE
ment in the scan system.
Section RSPF/DSPF/Scanner
OK
Item Image quality (Size/magnification ratio)
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted.
48-5
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and Purpose Adjustment
item is shifted. Function (Purpose) This adjustment is executed when a satis-
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the factory result is not obtained when a differ-
operation is invalid. ent copy magnification ratio is specified and
copying is made after adjustment of the sub
scanning direction image magnification
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. ratio with SIM 48-1.
3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is When there is an error in the copy magnifi-
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and cation ratio in reduction copy, the adjust-
RAM. ment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/ When there is an error in the copy magnifi-
[BLACK] key. cation ratio in enlargement copy, the adjust-
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to ment value of low speed mode is adjusted.
the copy basic screen of simulation. This is the magnification ratio adjustment in
the scan system.
Section RSPF/DSPF/Scanner
Set Default
Item Display Content Item Adjustment
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN, main scan 1 to 99 50 Operation/Procedure
magnification ratio 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
adjustment (CCD)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN, sub scan 1 to 99 50 played in the setting area.
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD) * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF/DSPF document front 1 to 99 50 item is shifted.
surface magnification ratio If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
adjustment (Main scan) operation is invalid.
D SPF (SUB) RSPF/DSPF document front 1 to 99 50 If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
surface magnification ratio
item is shifted.
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF/DSPF document back 1 to 99 50 If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
surface magnification ratio operation is invalid.
adjustment (Main scan) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF/DSPF document back 1 to 99 50 * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan) 3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
* Item A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the magnifi- RAM.
cation ratio is increased by 0.02%.
* Item B, D, F: When the set value is increased by 1, the magnifi-
[MX-3500N/4500N]
cation ratio is increased by 0.01%.
* When D is adjusted, F is varied accordingly. (The individual Set Default
adjustment cannot be made.) * MX-3501N/4501N only Item Display Content
range value
* This adjustment affects PC scanning and other scanning other A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High 1 to 99 50
than copy. speed)
B MR (MID) Scanner motor 1 to 99 50
0 (Reference speed)
C MR (LO) Scanner motor (Low 1 to 99 50
TEST
speed)
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
D RSPF (HI) Document feed (SPF) 1 to 99 50
A 50 CCD(MAIN)
motor (High speed)
A: 50 B 50 CCD(SUB)
C 50 SPF(MAIN)
E RSPF (MID) Document feed (SPF) 1 to 99 50
1 99
D 50 SPF(SUB)
motor (Reference
speed)
OK
F RSPF(LO) Document feed (SPF) 1 to 99 50
motor (Low speed)
[MX-3501N/4501N]
Set Default
range value
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 to 99 50
B MR (MID) Scanner motor (Reference 1 to 99 50
speed)
C MR (LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 to 99 50
D DSPF (HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 to 99 50
(High speed)
E DSPF (MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 to 99 50
(Reference speed)
F DSPF(LO) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 to 99 50
(Low speed)
<Reference speed> Set Default
Item Display Content Mode select
HI=314mm/sec range value
MID=157mm/sec G POM Paper exit motor correction value COLOR 1 to 99 45

*1
LO=78.5mm/sec
F FUSER Fusing speed switch timing HEAVY 1 to 99 50
<Reference calculation formula> SETTING
Employed speed = MID speed x {100 + [(Sim48-01 set value - 50) *1: Common to COLOR, MONO, and HEAVY paper. The item is
+ (Sim48-05 set value - 50)] x 0.1} / Magnification ratio displayed only when COLOR button is highlighted.
"Sim48-01 set value" varies depending on the magnification ratio * Adjustment value
(speed).
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and
vice versa. When the value is changed by 1, the speed is
0 changed by about 0.1%.
* Paper size detection method for fusing motor (FSM) normal
MOTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
paper
A 50 MR(HI)
A: 50 B 50 MR(MID) A3W, A3, WLT, EXTRA, USER EXTRA (420mm or above) are
C 50 MR(LO) large sizes.
199
D 50 RSPF(HI)
0
OK TEST SIMULATION NO.4806 CLOSE
VELOCITY ADJUSTMENT
A 49 RRM
A: 49 B 45 BTM
48-6 C 23 FSM
199
Purpose Adjustment D 45 DM_K
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotating speed of each COLOR MONO HEAVY OK
motor.
Section
Item Adjustment
Operation/Procedure 49
1) Select a mode to be set.
* When [COLOR], [MONO], or [HEAVY] button is selected, 49-1
the selected button is highlighted and the set item of the
Purpose Version-up
selected mode is displayed.
Only one button can be selected. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the firmware update.
In the initial state, [COLOR] is selected. Section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item Adjustment
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. Operation/Procedure
3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is NOTE: To update the firmware, set DIP SW 2 on the MFP control
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and PWB to ON.
RAM. 1) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
The correction value of the specified motor is changed. The * When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRM-
smaller the correction value is, the slower the speed is, and WARE STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
vice versa. When the value is changed by 1, the speed is pressed, the display is shifted to the folder or file selection
changed by 0.1%. screen.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/ 2) When a firmware update folder or file button is pressed, the
[BLACK] key. display is shifted to the firmware update screen.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to * The number of buttons depends on the number of files in the
the copy basic screen of simulation. inserted USB memory.
<Set range and default value of each setup> A folder name or file name is displayed on the button.
Set Default If the folder name or file name is of more than 34 characters,
Item Display Content Mode select only 34 characters are displayed.
range value
A RRM Resist motor Color COLOR 1 to 99 49 For a folder name, "<DIR>" is displayed at the head.
correction value Monochrome MONO * When [ .. ] button is pressed on the file selection screen, the
Heavy paper HEAVY 60 display is shifted to the folder or file selection screen. On the
B BTM Belt K motor Color COLOR 1 to 99 45 folder or file selection screen, the keys are disabled.
correction value Monochrome MONO
* The path of the folder or file is displayed on the title section.
Heavy paper HEAVY
C FSM Fusing motor Color COLOR 1 to 99 18
If the path is of more than 50 characters, only 50 characters
correction value Monochrome MONO
are displayed.
Heavy paper HEAVY 26 3) The current version and the update version are displayed for
D DM_K Drum K motor Color COLOR 1 to 69 42 each firmware.
correction value Monochrome MONO 4) When a button of the firmware to be updated is selected, it is
Heavy paper HEAVY highlighted.
E DM_CL Drum CL motor Color COLOR 1 to 69 42 * When the selected button is pressed again, its selection is
correction value Heavy paper HEAVY canceled (normal display).
F PFM Transport motor correction value COLOR 1 to 99 50
* When [ALL] button is pressed, all the buttons are selected
*1
and highlighted.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the Number of
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display Display item Item description
digits
grays out and the operation is invalid. ANIMATION Animation data 8 digits
When there is a page under [], the display becomes active IMAGE_DATA Image ASIC data 8 digits
and the page is shifted down.When there is no page under COLOR PROFILE Color profile 8 digits
[], the display grays out and the operation is invalid. <List of error display in case of error end>
5) Press [EXECUTE] button. Display item Item description
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons CONF Configuration data
are changed from gray-out display to active display. ICUM ICU main section former half
* If no firmware button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is dis- ICUBM ICU boot section main
abled. ICUBS ICU boot section sub
6) Press [YES] button. LANG Language support data program (Generic name)
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
[YES] button is highlighted, and update of the selected firm-
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
ware is executed.
PCUB PCU boot section
* When [NO] and [EXECUTE] button are pressed, the display PCUM PCU main section
returns to the firmware select screen. At that time, the DESKB Desk unit boot section
selected firmware remains highlighted, and [EXECUTE] but- DESKM Desk unit main section
ton returns to the normal display. LCC4B Side LCC (A4) boot section
7) After completion of update, the result is displayed. LCC4M Side LCC (A4) main section
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLET" is dis- FINB Inner finisher boot section
played. In case of an error, "ERROR" and the firmware where FINM Inner Finisher main section
the error occurred are displayed. FIN1B 1K Finisher boot section
* The operation cannot be interrupted midway. FIN1M 1K Finisher main section
INSB Inserter boot section
* When [OK] button is pressed, the machine is rebooted.
INSM Inserter main section
* When [CA] key is pressed on the folder or file selection screen or FIN4B 4K Finisher boot section
the file selection screen, the simulation is terminated. FIN4M 4K Finisher main section
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed on the folder or file LCC3B Side LCC (A3) Boot section
selection screen or the file selection screen, the display returns LCC3M Side LCC (A3) main section
to the sub code entry screen. SCUB SCU boot section
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit SCUM SCU main section
the simulation on the file version display screen and the following DSPFB DSPF boot section
screens before execution, the machine is rebooted. DSPFM DSPF main section
FAXB FAX1 Boot section
<Update target data firmware>
FAXM FAX1 main section
Number of FAXOPB FAX2 Boot section
Display item Item description
digits FAXOPM FAX2 main section
CONFIG Configuration data 8 digits ESCP ESC/P fonts
ICU (MAIN) ICU main section former half 8 digits PDL PDL fonts
ICU (BOOTM) ICU boot section main 8 digits ANIME Animation data
ICU (BOOTS) ICU boot section sub 8 digits IMGDT Image ASIC data
LANGUAGE Language support data program 8 digits
(Generic name)
0
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD 8 digits
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD 8 digits
FIRMWARE UPDATE/usbbd00
PCU (BOOT) PCU boot section 8 digits
PCU (MAIN) PCU main section 8 digits <DIR> FOLDER1 FILE1
DESK (BOOT) Desk unit boot section 8 digits FILE2 <DIR> FOLDER2
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit main section 8 digits
A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) boot section 8 digits
A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section 8 digits .. 1/1
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher boot section 8 digits
FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main section 8 digits
INSERTER (BOOT) Inserter boot section 8 digits
49-3
INSERTER (MAIN) Inserter main section 8 digits
1KFIN (BOOT) 1K Finisher boot section 8 digits Purpose Version-up
1KFIN (MAIN) 1K Finisher main section 8 digits Function (Purpose) The Operation Manual saved in the hard
4KFIN (BOOT) 4K Finisher boot section 8 digits disk is updated.
4KFIN (MAIN) 4K Finisher main section 8 digits
Section
A3LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A3) boot section 8 digits
A3LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A3) main section 8 digits Item Adjustment
SCU (BOOT) SCU boot section 8 digits Operation/Procedure
SCU (MAIN) SCU main section 8 digits 1) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF boot section 8 digits * When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE E-
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF main section 8 digits MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section 8 digits pressed, the display is shifted to the folder selection screen
FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section 8 digits 1.
FAX OPTION (BOOT) FAX2 Boot section 8 digits
2) When a operation manual update folder button is pressed, the
FAX OPTION (MAIN) FAX2 Main section 8 digits
display is shifted to the operation manual update screen.
ESCP_FONT ESC/P fonts 8 digits
PDL_FONT PDL fonts 8 digits * A folder name is displayed on the button.
* "<DIR>" is displayed at the head.
If the folder name is of more than 34 characters, only 34 50
characters are displayed.
* When [ .. ] button is pressed on the folder selection screen 2, 50-1
the display is shifted to the folder selection screen 1. On the
Purpose Adjustment
folder or file selection screen, the keys are disabled.
* The path of the folder or file is displayed on the title section. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper in the copy mode and to adjust
If the path is of more than 50 characters, only 50 characters
the void area (image loss). (The similar
are displayed.
adjustment can be executed with SIM50-05
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document
4) Press [EXECUTE] button. table mode))
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons Section
are changed from gray-out display to active display. Item Image quality (Image position)
5) Press [YES] button. Operation/Procedure
[YES] button is highlighted, and update of the selected opera- 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
tion manual is executed.
* When [NO] and [EXECUTE] button are pressed, the display played in the setting area.
returns to the version display screen.
6) After completion of update, the result is displayed. item is shifted.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLET" is dis- If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
played. In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed. operation is invalid.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTING] key is pressed during If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
execution, the operation is interrupted and the machine is reboo- item is shifted.
ted.
* When [OK] button is pressed, the machine is rebooted. operation is invalid.
* When [CA] key is pressed on the folder selection screen 1 and 2, 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
the simulation is terminated.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed on the folder selec-
tion screen 1 and 2, the display returns to the sub code entry
screen.
RAM.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
the simulation on the version display screen and the following
the copy basic screen of simulation.
screens before execution, the machine is rebooted.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
<Folder selection screen 1>
[BLACK] key.
0
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR> FOLDER1 <DIR> FOLDER2

<DIR> FOLDER3 <DIR> MANUAL1
.. 1/1
<Folder selection screen 2>
0
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR> MANUAL2 <DIR> MANUAL3
.. 1/1
Item Display item Description Set range Default value
A Lead edge adjustment RRCA Document lead edge reference position (OC) 0 to 99 50
value The timing from start of document scan to recognition of the image lead
edge is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing is. The greater the set
value is, the slower the timing is.
B RRCB-CS12 Resist motor ON timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 to 99 50
C RRCB-CS34 The timing to turn ON the resist roller from reception Desk 1 to 99 50
D RRCB-LCC of the resist signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) LCC 1 to 99 50
E RRCB-MFT * The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing Manual feed 1 to 99 50
is. The greater the set value is, the slower the
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 to 99 50
timing is.
G Image loss quantity set LEAD Lead edge image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 30
value The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. The difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
(0.1mm/step))
* The greater the value is, the grater the image loss is.
H SIDE Side image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 20
The side image loss quantity is specified. (Document width Document
edge scan range) / 2 (0.1mm/step)
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
I Void amount setting DENA Print lead edge adjustment 1 to 99 30
The void quantity formed at the paper lead edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
J DENB Sub scan direction print range adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantity formed at the paper rear edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
K FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void amount adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantities formed at the right and left edges are adjusted.
(0.1mm/step)
4) Measure the distances L1 and L2 on the copied image in the
0 unit of 0.1mm, and multiple the distance values with 10, and
TEST SIMULATION NO.5001 CLOSE enter the obtained values. (Be sure to enter L1 and L2
together.)
A 50 RRCA L1: Distance between the copy image lead edge position
A: 50 B 50 RRCA-S
and the scale of 10mm.
C 50 RRCB-CS12
0 99 L2: Distance between the paper lead edge and the copy
D 50 RRCB-CS34
image lead edge position.
OK
L1
50-2
Paper lead
Purpose Adjustment edge
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position on
the void area (image loss). (Simple adjust-
ment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation pro-
vides the simpler method.)
Section
Item Image quality (Image position)
L2
Operation/Procedure 400% enlargement copy
1) In advance to this adjustment, execute the magnification ratio
adjustment in the sub scanning direction (SIM48-01).
2) Select "TRAY"and set 0 to L1 and L2.
Fig. 1
* L1 and L2 are changed to 0, the following adjustment values
are automatically set.
RRCA adjustment value: 50 5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the current entered value
is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
RRCB adjustment value: 90
6) Make a black copy in 100%, and adjust the rear edge void.
(Reference value 50 + paper lead 49 (4.9mm))
3) Place a ruler along the left edge of the document table, and
make a black copy in 400%.
key.
A Actual measured L1 Distance between the image lead edge and the scale of 10mm (Platen 400%, 0 to 999
value unit of 0.1mm)
B L2 Distance between the paper lead edge and the image lead edge (unit of 0.1mm) 0 to 999
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 30
quantity set value The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. Difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
D SIDE Side image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 20
The side image loss (SIDE) is specified. (Document width Document edge
scan range / 2
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
E Void quantity DENA Print lead edge adjustment 1 to 99 30
setting The void quantity at the paper lead edge is specified.
F DENB Sub scanning direction print range adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantity at the paper rear edge is specified.
G FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void quantity adjustment 1 to 99 20
The void quantities at the left and right edges of paper are specified.
A to G:1step = 0.1mm * When [], [], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
A. Document lead edge reference position: (L1), B. Paper lead [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
edge positions and RAM.
Except for A and B, same as the item adjusted with SIM50-01. * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
lead edge reference position (RRC-A) and all the paper lead edge * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
positions (RRCB-**). rence of an interruption, self print is resumed.
4) Check the adjustment pattern image position.
0 Measure the dimensions of void area in the right and the left
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-02 CLOSE frame direction of the adjustment pattern to check that the
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(CALC)
dimensions are as follows:
A 60 L1 If DEN-C = 3.0 2.0mm and DEN-B = 3.0 2.0mm, there is no
A: 60 B 0 L2 need to adjust.
C 30
0 999
LEAD
If the values are as shown above, there is no need to adjust.
D 15 SIDE
If not, go to step 5.
EXECUTE
5) Change the adjustment values of A (DEN-C) and B (DEN-B).
When the adjustment value of A (DEN-A) is decreased by 1,
the sub scanning direction print start position is shifted toward
the paper lead edge by 0.1mm.
50-5
When the adjustment value of B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1,
Purpose Adjustment
the paper transport direction print range is extended toward
Function (Purpose) Used to set the lead edge adjustment value the rear edge by 0.1mm.
which affects only the printer print. 6) Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the conditions of step 4 are satisfied.
Section Printer
Item Image quality
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and print-
ing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
normal display.
<Description of item>
Display item & Default
Item Description of item Set range Remark
Detail of display value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge 1 to 99 30 Adjustment value to fit with the print lead edge for the printer.
adjustment When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the
printer print start position is shifted toward the lead edge in the
paper transport direction by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print 1 to 99 20 Void quantity formed at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment
range adjustment value of Item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the sub scanning
direction print range adjustment value in the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void quantity 1 to 99 20 Adjustment of void quantity formed at the right and left edges of
adjustment paper. The greater the value is, the greater the void quantity is.
D MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 99 1
E PAPER MFT Cassette Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 select Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO)
NO select Not selected 1
* Items E and F are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." <Set range and default value of each setup>
Example: PAPER:CS1 Set Default
Item Display item Description
range value
0 A SIDE1 Front surface 1 to 99 50
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-05 CLOSE document
scan start
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)
A : 30 ; DEN-C
position
adjustment
A: 30 B : 20 ; DEN-B
(CCD)
C : 20 ; FRONT/REAR
[ 1~99 ] B SIDE2 Back surface 1 to 99 50
D: 1 ; MULTI COUNT
document
EXECUTE OK
scan start
position
adjustment
(CCD)
50-6 C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 to 99 20
Purpose Adjustment loss (SIDE1) image loss
quantity quantity
setting setting
the print paper in the copy mode and to SIDE1
D FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 to 99 20
adjust the void area (image loss). (The sim- (SIDE1) side image
ilar adjustment can be executed with loss quantity
SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF/DSPF setting
mode) E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface 0 to 99 30
Section RSPF/DSPF (SIDE1) rear edge
image loss
Item Image quality quantity
Operation/Procedure adjustment
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface 0 to 99 RSPF:
loss (SIDE2) image loss 20
quantity quantity DSPF:
played in the setting area. setting setting 30
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and G SIDE2 FRONT_REAR Back surface 0 to 99 20
item is shifted. (SIDE2) side image
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the loss quantity
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface 0 to 99 RSPF:
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and (SIDE2) rear edge 30
item is shifted. image loss DSPF:
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the quantity 20
operation is invalid. adjustment
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. A,B: The greater the value is, the slower the scan timing is.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. The greater the adjustment values of C to H are, the greater the
3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is image loss is.
pressed, it is highlighted and the currently entered data are A to H: 1 step = 0.1 m
saved to EEPROM and RAM. The RSPF rear edge image loss is provided against shade.
key.

<DSPF back surface>
0
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)

A : 50 ; SIDE1
A: 50 B : 50 ; SIDE2
C : 20 ; LEAD EDGE
[ 1~ 99 ]
D : 20 ; FRONT_REAR
OK
50-7
Purpose Adjustment
the void area (image loss). (The similar
adjustment can be executed with SIM50-6
(Simple type).) (RSPF/DSPF mode)
Distance A
Section RSPF/DSPF
Item Image quality
Operation/Procedure 6) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered
1) In advance, execute the RSPF/DSPF sub scanning direction data are saved in EEPROM and RAM, and calculation is exe-
magnification ratio (SIM48-01). cuted.
2) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
The highlighted section is and the value is displayed in the set- copy basic screen of simulation.
ting area. * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and key.
item is shifted. <Description of item>
Set Default
operation is invalid. Item Display item Description of item
range value
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and A L4 Distance from the front 0 to 999
item is shifted. surface image lead edge to
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the the scale of 10mm (RSPF/
operation is invalid. DSPF 200%, unit 0.1mm)
B L5 Distance from the back 0 to 999
3) Set L4 and L5 to 0.
surface image lead edge to
When the values of L4 and L5 are changed to 0, the following the scale of 10mm (RSPF/
adjustment values are automatically set. DSPF 200%, unit 0.1mm)
Adjustment values of SIDE1, 2: 50 C LEAD_EDGE Image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 20
(SIDE1) SIDE1
After completion of calculation, the value of L4/L5 returns to 0.
D FRONT_REAR 0 to 99 20
4) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and press [COLOR] or (SIDE1)
[BLAC] key to make a copy. E TRAIL_EDGE 0 to 99 30
5) Measure the copied image, and enter the measure value of (SIDE1)
distance A (RSPF/DSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of 0.1mm. F LEAD_EDGE Image loss quantity setting 0 to 99 RSPF:
(SIDE2) SIDE2 20
L4 : Distance A (RSPF/DSPF front surface: 200%) (Unit:
DSPF:
0.1mm)
30
L5 : Distance A (RSPF/DSPF back surface: 200%) (Unit: G FRONT_REAR 0 to 99 20
0.1mm) (SIDE2)
<RSPF>/<DSPF front surface> H TRAIL_EDGE 0 to 99 RSPF:
(SIDE2) 30
DSPF:
20
A to H: 1step=0.1mm
C to H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
increased.
* It is linked with items C to H of SIM50-6.
0
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT (SPF CALC.).

A 0 L4
A: 0 B 0 L5
C 20 LEAD_EDGE(SIDE1)
0 999
D 20 FRONT_REAR(SIDE1)
Distance A
EXECUTE

50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print off-center for each ing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
tray.
Image print center position adjustment
normal display.
(Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
* When [], [], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
Section the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item Image quality (Image position) * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
Operation/Procedure pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. * When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- an interruption, self printing is resumed.
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
Item Display item & Detail of display Item content Set range Default value Writing
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 to 140 100 YES
B MFT Print off-center adjustment value (manual feed) 1 to 99 50 YES
C CS1 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 1) 1 to 99 50 YES
D CS2 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 2) 1 to 99 50 YES
E CS3 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 3) 1 to 99 50 YES
F CS4 Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 4) 1 to 99 50 YES
G LCC Print off-center adjustment value (LCC) 1 to 99 50 YES
H ADU Print off-center adjustment value (ADU) 1 to 99 50 YES
I MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 NO
J PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) NO
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
K DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) NO
NO Not selected 1
Item A adjustment position
The main scanning direction paper size is greater than 216mm: 0
CLOSE
Reference: Main scanning direction print front image center TEST SIMULATION NO.5010
position (160mm from the BD sensor in the LSU unit) 120mm in PAPER CENTER OFFSET SETUP
the main scanning direction A100 BK-MAG
The main scanning direction paper size is 257mm or less:

A: 100 B50 MTF
C50 CS1
Reference: Main scanning direction print front image center posi- 64140
D50 CS2
tion (160mm from the BD sensor in the LSU unit) 60mm in the
main scanning direction EXECUTE OK
Adjustment direction
+ direction: Enlargement of magnification ratio
- direction: Reduction of magnification ratio
When the adjustment value of item B to H is decreased by 1, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
When the adjustment value of item B to H is increased by 1, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the rear side by 0.1mm.
Items J and K are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1

50-12 50-20
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the scan image off-center Function (Purpose) Used to execute the manual adjustment of
position adjustment. (Adjusted for each the main scanning direction registration
scan mode.) (color shift). (Backup value input)
Section Section
Item Image quality (Image position) Item Image quality
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
played on the set setting area. played on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted. item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted. item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid. operation is invalid.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. * When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Then
RAM. the main scanning direction registration adjustment pattern is
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the printed.
copy basic screen of simulation. After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK] normal display.
key. * When [], [], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
Set Default
Item Display item Set range * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
value value
ton is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
A OC OC document off-center 1 to 99 50
adjustment * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
B SPF (SIDE1) RSPF/DSPF front surface 1 to 99 50 rence of an interruption, self printing is resumed.
off-center adjustment
C SPF (SIDE2) RSPF/DSPF back surface 1 to 99 50
off-center adjustment
Shift the pixel center position. The default value of the center is
3750 pixels.
A to C: When the adjustment value is increased, the center position
is shifted to the rear side. 1step=0.1mm
0
ORGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP

A 99 OC
A: 99 B 50 SPF(SIDE1)
C 50 SPF(SIDE2)
1 99
OK

Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value Writing
A CYAN (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Cyan laser writing position F side)
B CYAN (REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Cyan laser writing position R side)
C MAGENTA (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Magenta laser writing position F side)
D MAGENTA (REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Magenta laser writing position R side)
E YELLOW (FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Yellow laser writing position F side)
F YELLOW (REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Yellow laser writing position R side)
G MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 NO
H PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 3 (CS2) NO
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
I DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) NO
NO Not selected 1
* Items H and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display." * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
Example: PAPER:CS1 item is shifted.
TEST SIMULATION NO.5020 CLOSE If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR DIRECTION
A50 CYAN(FRONT) If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
A: 50 B50 CYAN(REAR) operation is invalid.
1199
C50 MAGENTA(FRONT)
D50 MAGENTA(REAR)
EXECUTE OK
currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Then
the main scanning direction registration adjustment pattern is
printed.
50-21
Purpose Adjustment normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the manual adjustment of * When [], [], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
the sub scanning registration (color shift). [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
(Backup value input) and RAM.
Section * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
Item Image quality pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure * When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. an interruption, self printing is resumed.
Item Display item & Detail of display Description Set value Default value Writing
A CYAN Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Cyan drum Black drum)
B MAGENTA Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Magenta drum Black drum)
C YELLOW Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1 to 199 100 YES
(Yellow drum Black drum)
D MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 NO
E PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) NO
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) NO
NO Not selected 1
* Items E and F are displayed as "Display item : Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1

Operation/Procedure
0 1) Select the mode. (In this example, [REGIST] is selected.)
TEST * Press the button to select a category. The selected button is
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING DIRECTION highlighted. The set item of the selected button is displayed.
A100 CYAN
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
A: 100 B100 MAGENTA
highlighted. In the initial state, [ALL] button is selected.
C100 YELLOW
1199 * If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
D 1 MULTIOUNT
EXECUTE OK grays out and the operation is invalid.
50-22 display grays out and the operation is invalid.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
Purpose Adjustment
the drum motors are driven to start the adjustment.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the auto adjustment of the
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor is
main/sub scan the main/sub registration.
stopped and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal dis-
(Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration
play. The adjustment result is displayed.
sensor (photo sensor)
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjust- MAIN, SUB:
ment) adjustment image quality image posi- After the adjustment, the adjustment value is displayed.
tion ( ) Difference from the previous value.
Section Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
Item Image quality PHASE:
The number assigned to the phase is displayed.
( ) Difference from the previous value.
Example: This time 90, previous time 45: 3(2)
In this case, the necessary data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* In case of an error end, "ERROR" and the detail are dis-
played.
* When the registration auto adjustment is interrupted by an
external cause (pressing [EXECUTE] key, opening the door,
etc.), "SUSPENDED" is displayed and the drum motor stops
and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
* In case of an error end or a forcible interruption, the data are
not written to EEPROM and RAM.
<Display items and contents in normal end>

Default
Button Display Content Display Remark
value
ALL (All REGIST (Auto MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 100.0 Same item with SIM50-20
execution (Both registration direction (Cyan laser writing position F side) 199.0 *
of the auto adjustment is M Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 100.0 However, the adjustment
registration executed.) direction (Magenta laser writing position F 199.0 accuracy is in the unit of
adjustment and side) 0.1 dot. (The adjustment
the auto phase Y Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 100.0 accuracy of 50-20, -21 is
adjustment are direction (Yellow laser writing position F side) 199.0 in the unit of 1.0dot.)
executed.) MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 100.0
direction (Cyan laser writing position R side) 199.0
M Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 100.0
direction (Magenta laser writing position R 199.0
side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scan 1.0 100.0
direction (Yellow laser writing position R side) 199.0
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scan 1.0 100.0
direction (Cyan drum Black drum) 199.0
M Registration adjustment value sub scan 1.0 100.0
direction (Magenta drum Cyan drum) 199.0
Y Registration adjustment value sub scan 1.0 100.0
direction (Yellow drum Magenta drum) 199.0
DLUM POS PHASE Phase adjustment Angle step 18 2 Same item with SIM 44-31
(Auto phase value BK CL 0 (1) 45 (2) 90 (3) 135
adjustment is (4) 180 (5) 225 (6) 270
executed.) (7) 315(8)

<Error displays and contents in error end>
Error
Error display Error content Detail of content
code
Compulsory - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during operation
end error - SUSPENDED CA end Pressing [CA] button during operation
- - OFF end Unconfirmed operation (power OFF) during operation
Basic error 1 TONER EMPTY Toner empty BK or all colors toner empty detection
2 TONER BEFORE Other conditions Other conditions
BEHAVIOR
4 SENSOR CALIBRATION Calibration error With 3 times of retry of F or R, the target is not reached.
5 TIME OVER Time error Data is not acquired for 90sec from data acquisition
7 PROCESS CONTROL Process control error Process control error detection
Sub scan 10 MAIN BLACK FRONT Number error sub scan BLACK F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
adjustment 11 MAIN BLACK FRONT Pitch error sub scan BLACK F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
error 15 SUB BLACK REAR Number error sub scan BLACK R The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
16 SUB BLACK REAR Pitch error sub scan BLACK R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
20 SUB CYAN FRONT Number error sub scan CYAN F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
21 SUB CYAN FRONT Pitch error sub scan CYAN F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
22 SUB CYAN FRONT Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN F range.
23 SUB CYAN FRONT Result value error sub scan CYAN F The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
25 SUB CYAN REAR Number error sub scan CYAN R The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
26 SUB CYAN REAR Pitch error sub scan CYAN R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
27 SUB CYAN REAR Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN R range.
28 SUB CYAN REAR Result value error sub scan CYAN The variation of the calculation result value is over the
R specified allowable range.
30 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Number error sub scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
F
31 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Pitch error sub scan MAGENTA F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
32 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA F range.
33 SUB MAGENTA FRONT Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
MAGENTA F specified allowable range.
35 SUB MAGENTA REAR Number error sub scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
R
36 SUB MAGENTA REAR Pitch error sub scan MAGENTA R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
37 SUB MAGENTA REAR Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA R range.
38 SUB MAGENTA REAR Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
MAGENTA R specified allowable range.
40 SUB YELLOW FRONT Number error sub scan YELLOW F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
41 SUB YELLOW FRONT Pitch error sub scan YELLOW F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
42 SUB YELLOW FRONT Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW F range.
43 SUB YELLOW FRONT Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW F specified allowable range.
45 SUB YELLOW REAR Number error sub scan YELLOW R The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
46 SUB YELLOW REAR Pitch error sub scan YELLOW R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
47 SUB YELLOW REAR Adjustment value error sub scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW R range.
48 SUB YELLOW REAR Result value error sub scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW R specified allowable range.

Error
Error display Error content Detail of content
code
Main scan 50 MAIN BLACK FRONT Number error main scan BLACK F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
adjustment 51 MAIN BLACK FRONT Pitch error main scan BLACK F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
error 55 MAIN BLACK REAR Number error main scan BLACK R The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
56 MAIN BLACK REAR Pitch error main scan BLACK R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
60 MAIN CYAN FRONT Number error main scan CYAN F The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
61 MAIN CYAN FRONT Pitch error main scan CYAN F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
62 MAIN CYAN FRONT Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN F range.
63 MAIN CYAN FRONT Result value error main scan CYAN The variation of the calculation result value is over the
F specified allowable range.
65 MAIN CYAN REAR Number error main scan CYAN R The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
66 MAIN CYAN REAR Pitch error main scan CYAN R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
67 MAIN CYAN REAR Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
CYAN R range.
68 MAIN CYAN REAR Result value error main scan CYAN The variation of the calculation result value is over the
R specified allowable range.
70 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Number error main scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
F
71 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Pitch error main scan MAGENTA F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
72 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA F range.
Main scan 73 MAIN MAGENTA FRONT Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
adjustment MAGENTA F specified allowable range.
error 75 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Number error main scan MAGENTA The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
R
76 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Pitch error main scan MAGENTA R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
77 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
MAGENTA R range.
78 MAIN MAGENTA REAR Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
MAGENTA R specified allowable range.
80 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Number error main scan YELLOW The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
F
81 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Pitch error main scan YELLOW F The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
82 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW F range.
83 MAIN YELLOW FRONT Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW F specified allowable range.
85 MAIN YELLOW REAR Number error main scan YELLOW The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
R
86 MAIN YELLOW REAR Pitch error main scan YELLOW R The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
87 MAIN YELLOW REAR Adjustment value error main scan The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
YELLOW R range.
88 MAIN YELLOW REAR Result value error main scan The variation of the calculation result value is over the
YELLOW R specified allowable range.
Other error 99 OTHER Other error Other error
(Initial screen or when in normal end) (Error end screen)
0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION NO.50-22 CLOSE
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION

MAIN F MAIN R SUB PHASE
ERROR : TONNER EMPTY 01
C 105.0 (+0.2) 110.0 (-0.1) 103.0 (+0.4) 4 (3)
M 100.0 (+0.0) 99.0 (-0.2) 99.0 (+0.2)

Y 98.0 (+0.3) 98.0 (+0.1) 105.0 (+0.0)
EXECUTE
REGIST DRUM POS ALL EXECUTE 1/1
(Adjustment screen)
0
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION

NOW EXECUTING
EXECUTE

Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
50-24
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
Purpose Adjustment
9) Sampling status check (6) (KCMY)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the data acquired with the
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
auto registration adjustment simulation
Y).
(SIM50-22).
Section
Item Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 50-24, the following Y).
* Select the kind of display with [NEXT] and [BACK] buttons.
* Specify the color with [K], [C], [M], and [Y] buttons. (Depend-
11) Temperature correction value check screen (CMY)
ing on the selected kind of data, selection of a color button
cannot be made. In that case, the key entry is disabled.) Press [C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (C/M/Y).
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
grays out and the operation is invalid. 12) Temperature correction value check screen (No color specifi-
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and cation)
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the Press [K] button to display the initial screen (K).
display grays out and the operation is invalid. Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
13) Error code status check (No color specification)
Press [K] button to display the initial screen (K).
key.
<Display content> Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
1) Registration adjustment confirmation screen
Use [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (No color
0
specified/C/M/Y). TEST
AUTO REGISTRATION DATA DISPLAY
REG_EXE_CNT 00000000
Press [BLACK] button to display the previous category.
REG_SUC_CNT 00000000
2) Phase adjustment status check screen
REG_CNT 00000000
Y).
K
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. C M Y BACK NEXT 1/1
Initial screen (Registration adjustment status check screen (No
3) Sensor calibration status check (No color specification) color specification))
Press [K] button to display the initial screen of K.
Press [NEXT] button to display the category. 50-27
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category. Purpose Adjustment
4) Sampling status check (1) (KCMY/No color specification) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss of scanned
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/ image in the FAX/Scanner mode.
Y).
Section FAX/Scanner
Item Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1) Use [FAX] button and [SCANNER] button to select the mode.
Y).
6) Sampling status check (3) (KCMY) item is shifted.
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/ If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Y). operation is invalid.
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category. item is shifted.
7) Sampling status check (4) (KCMY) If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/ operation is invalid.
Y). 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category. * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category. 4) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
8) Sampling status check (5) (KCMY) saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/ * When [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
Y). the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.

key.

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 30 (3mm)
B setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
E setting RSPF FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
F (DSPF) SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 RSPF: 20 (2mm)
setting RSPF DSPF: 30 (3mm)
H (DSPF) SIDE2 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 20 (2mm)
I TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 RSPF: 30 (3mm)
DSPF: 20 (2mm)
SCANNER A Image loss LEAD_EDGE(OC) OC lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
mode (FAX, B setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
other than C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
COPY) D Image loss LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
E setting RSPF FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
F (DSPF) SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
H setting RSPF FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
I (DSPF) SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss setting 0 to 100 0 (0mm)
* A to I: The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is. 1step=0.1mm
Menu
0 NO. Content Description
display item
TEST SIMULATION NO.5027 CLOSE 3 SPF ADJ RSPF/DSPF RSPF/DSPF (front/back)
SCANNER/FAX-SEND ALL EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE adjustment document lead edge, off-
A 30 LEAD_EDGE(OC) center, sub scan
A: 30 B 20 FRONT_REAR(OC)
magnification ratio
C 20 TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
adjustment
0 100
D 30 LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) 4 SETUP/ Print position Print lead edge adjustment,
PRINT ADJ adjustment all-cassette print off-center
FAX SCANNER OK (individual cassette, ADU)
adjustment
5 RESULT Result display Display of the adjustment
result
50-28
6 DATA Data display Display of data used for the
Purpose Adjustment adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the service adjustment, <List of adjustment items and adjustment menus>
the OC adjustment, the BK main scan mag-
Adjustment
nification ration correction, the RSPF/DSPF Adjustment item
menu
adjustment, and the print position adjust- Scanner OC Document lead edge OC ADJ
ment (Auto void adjustment (Service instal- Document off-center
lation adjustment)). Sub scan
Section magnification ratio
Item Image quality adjustment
RSPF SIDE1 Document lead edge SPF ADJ
Operation/Procedure
(front) Document off-center (RSPF)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 50-28, the following Sub scan
screen is displayed. magnification ratio
2) Press the button of an item to be adjusted, and the display is SIDE2 Document lead edge
shifted to the adjustment screen. (back) Document off-center
* The operating procedures and the display shift for each adjust- Sub scan
ment and the display, refer to the next page. magnification ratio
DSPF SIDE1 Document lead edge SPF ADJ
<List of adjustment items> (front) Document off-center (DSPF)
Menu Sub scan
NO. Content Description
display item magnification ratio
1 OC ADJ OC adjustment OC document lead edge, SIDE2 Document lead edge
off-center, and sub scan (back) Document off-center
magnification ratio Sub scan
adjustment magnification ratio
2 BK-MAG BK main scan BK main scan
ADJ magnification ratio magnification ratio
correction adjustment

Adjustment <Adjustment item>
Adjustment item
menu OC document lead edge adjustment
Engine BK main scan BK-MAG ADJ
OC document off-center adjustment
magnification ratio
MFT Print off-center SETUP/PRINT OC sub scan magnification ratio adjustment
Print lead edge ADJ 6) The adjustment result is displayed.
CS1 Print off-center The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
Print lead edge from the previous value in ( ).
CS2 Print off-center
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
Print lead edge
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the OC
ADU Print off-center
adjustment pattern again.
Print lead edge
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the OC
CS3 Print off-center
adjustment pattern is started again.
Print lead edge
CS4 Print off-center * When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
Print lead edge not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
LCC Print off-center the top menu screen.
Print lead edge * When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjust-
ment are displayed.
0 7) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
TEST SIMULATION NO.5028 CLOSE EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE screen.
OC ADJ BK-MAG ADJ

* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the
result display screen.
RESULT DATA
0
1/1 AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE

MFT CS1 CS2
50-28
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OC document lead EXECUTE 1/1
edge, off-center, and the sub scan magnifi-
cation ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service
installation adjustment) (1: OC adjustment)) 50-28
Section Purpose Adjustment
Item Image quality Function (Purpose) Used to execute the BK main scan magnifi-
Operation/Procedure cation ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation)
1) When [OC ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen, the
(2: BK-main scan magnification ratio cor-
screen shown on the right side is displayed.
rection))
2) Select a cassette of self print of the OC adjustment pattern.
(Only one cassette can be selected.) Section
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to start self print of the OC adjust- Item Image quality
ment pattern. Operation/Procedure
* During self printing of the OC adjustment 1) When [BK-MAG ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the OC screen, the following screen is displayed.
adjustment start screen. 2) Select a cassette for self print of the BK magnification ratio
4) Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC with the corner refer- adjustment pattern. (Only one cassette can be selected.)
ence, and cover the black background chart over the OC 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the BK mag-
adjustment pattern. nification ratio adjustment pattern (print position adjustment
* Set the adjustment pattern in traversal position (A4). Check pattern) is started.
to confirm that there is no clearance with the document * During self print of the BK magnification ratio adjustment
guide. pattern
* Kind and size of black background charts made with a cut- After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the OC
ting sheet equivalent to 310 x 470 cutting sheet No. 791 adjustment screen.
(Black). 4) Load the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern to the OC.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the OC adjust- * When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
ment pattern. the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the BK
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to magnification ratio adjustment pattern again.
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the OC 5) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the BK magnifi-
adjustment pattern again. cation ratio adjustment pattern.
* During scanning of the OC adjustment pattern and calculat- * During scanning of the main scan magnification ratio correc-
ing of the adjustment value tion pattern and calculating the magnification ratio adjust-
After completion of scanning, the adjustment value is calcu- ment value
lated. After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment
After completion of calculation of the adjustment value, the value is started.
display is shifted to the result display screen.

After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the After completion of calculation of the front surface adjust-
result display screen. ment value, the display is shifted to the RSPF/DSPF adjust-
<Adjustment item> ment pattern (back surface) scan start screen.
BK magnification ratio adjustment <Adjustment item>
6) The adjustment result screen is displayed. RSPF/DSPF document lead edge adjustment front surface
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference RSPF/DSPF document off-center adjustment front surface
from the previous value in ( ). RSPF/DSPF sub scan magnification ratio adjustment front
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to surface
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the BK 7) Load the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pattern to the RSPF/DSPF.
magnification ratio adjustment pattern again. (Print face down)
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the BK * When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
magnification ratio adjustment pattern is started again. the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the RSPF/
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is DSPF adjustment pattern again.
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to 8) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the RSPF/DSPF
the top menu screen. adjustment pattern (back surface).
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjust- * During scanning of the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pattern
ment are displayed. (back surface)
7) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to After completion of scanning the back surface, calculation of
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu the adjustment value (back surface) is started.
screen. After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the result result display screen.
display screen. <Adjustment item>
RSPF/DSPF document lead edge adjustment back surface
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.5028 CLOSE RSPF/DSPF document off-center adjustment back surface
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE RSPF/DSPF sub scan magnification ratio adjustment back
MFT CS1 CS2 surface
9) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
EXECUTE 1/1
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the RSPF/
50-28 DSPF adjustment pattern (front/back) again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the RSPF/
Purpose Adjustment
DSPF adjustment pattern (front/back) is started again.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the RSPF/DSPF (Front/
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
Back) document lead edge, off-center, and
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
sub scan magnification ratio adjustment.
the top menu screen.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (3: RSPF/DSPF adjustment)) * When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjust-
ment are displayed.
Section RSPF/DSPF
10) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
Item Image quality EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the completed
Operation/Procedure screen.
1) When [SPF ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen, * When [BACK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
the screen on the right is displayed. result display screen.
2) Select an item to be adjusted. The display is shifted to the cas- <List of adjustment items>
sette select screen for printing the RSPF/DSPF adjustment
pattern. Menu display item Content
SIDE1 SPF adjustment front surface
3) Select a cassette for printing the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pat-
SIDE2 SPF adjustment back surface
tern. (Only one cassette can be selected.)
ALL SPF adjustment front/back surface
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the RSPF/
DSPF adjustment pattern is started.
0
* During self print of the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pattern SIMULATION NO.5028 CLOSE
TEST
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
RSPF/DSPF adjustment screen.
SIDE1 SIDE2
5) Load the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pattern to the RSPF/DSPF. ALL
(Print face up)
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the RSPF/ 1/1
DSPF adjustment pattern again.
6) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the RSPF/DSPF
adjustment pattern (front surface).
* During scanning of the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pattern
(front surface) and calculating
After completion of scanning the front surface, calculation of
the adjustment value (front surface) is started.

* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the result
50-28
display screen.
Purpose Adjustment
<List of adjustment items>
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the print lead edge adjust-
ment and the all-cassette print off-center Menu display item Content
(individual cassette, ADU) adjustment. LEAD Print lead edge adjustment
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation OFFSET Print off-center adjustment
adjustment) (4: Print position adjustment) ALL Print lead edge, print of-center adjustment
Section
0
Item Image quality SIMULATION NO.5028 CLOSE
TEST
Operation/Procedure AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
1) When [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu LEAD OFFSET
screen, the screen on the right is displayed. ALL
2) When an item to be adjusted is selected, the display is shifted
to the cassette select screen for printing the print position
adjustment pattern. 1/1
3) Select a cassette for use in print. (Two or more cassettes can
be selected.) The selected cassette is highlighted.
When the selected cassette is pressed again, it returns to the 50-28
normal display. Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [EXECUTE] button to start self-printing of the print posi- Function (Purpose) Used to display the adjustment result.
tion adjustment pattern. (Auto void adjustment (Service installation
* During self-printing of the print position adjustment pattern adjustment) (5: result display)
(CS3) Section
* When two or more cassettes are selected, continuous self Item Image quality
print (max. 7 sheets) is executed.
Operation/Procedure
After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
1) When [RESULT] button is pressed on the top menu screen,
print position adjustment.
the screen on the right is displayed.
5) Load the print position adjustment pattern (CS3) to the OC.
2) When [BACK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to top menu screen.
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the print
position adjustment pattern again.
0
6) Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the print position SIMULATION NO.5028 CLOSE
TEST
adjustment (CS3).
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
* During scanning of the print position adjustment pattern OC LEAD OFFSET SUB
(CS3) and calculation BK-MAG BK-MAG:
After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment SPFSIDE1 LEAD OFFSET SUB
value (CS3) is started. SPFSIDE2 LEAD OFFSET SUB
After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
result display screen. BACK 1/2
<Adjustment item>
Print lead edge (CS3/CS4)
50-28
Print off-center (CS3)
Purpose Adjustment
* When two or more cassettes are selected, scanning and cal-
culation are repeated for the number of output sheets (3 to Function (Purpose) Used to display the data used for the
max.7). adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
7) The adjustment result screen is displayed.
adjustment) (6: data display))
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
Section
from the previous value in ( ).
Item Image quality
* "**"is displayed for an item which is not adjusted yet.
Operation/Procedure
* An item which is not installed is not displayed depending on
the option status. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 50-28, the following
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the print When [OCSPF] button is pressed, the data used for the OC
position adjustment pattern again. adjustment and the SPF adjustment are displayed.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the print When [BK-MAG] button is pressed, the data used for BK main
position adjustment pattern is started again. scan magnification ratio adjustment are displayed.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is When [PRINT] button is pressed, the data used for the print
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to position adjustment are displayed.
the top menu screen. * If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for adjust- page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
ment are displayed. grays out and the operation is invalid.
8) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
screen. display grays out and the operation is invalid.

* When [OK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the top
menu screen.
<Data display item and description>
Adjustment item Display range (difference from the
Item display Display content Unit
(page) previous value)
OCSPF OC (1) ADJ_OC OC adjustment value, correction 1 to 99 (99 to +99) STEP
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST) value
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R) OC magnification ratio, lead SCAN: 4.99 to +4.99 SCAN: %
edge data LEAD: 4.9 to +4.9 LEAD: mm
DATA_OFFSET OC off-center data 4.9 to +4.9 mm
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN OC Main scan magnification ratio 4.99 to +4.99 %
correction value
SPF1 (2) ADJ_SPF1 SPF1 adjustment value, 1 to 99 ( 99) STEP
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST) correction value
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R) SPF1 magnification ratio, lead SCAN: 4.99 to +4.99 SCAN: %
DATA_OFFSET SPF1 off-center data 4.9 to +4.9 mm
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN SPF1 main scan magnification 4.99 to +4.99 %
ratio correction value
SPF2 (3) ADJ_SPF2 SPF2 adjustment value, 1 to 99 ( 99) STEP
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST) correction value
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R) SPF2 magnification ratio, lead SCAN: 4.99 to +4.99 SCAN: %
DATA_OFFSET SPF2 off-center data 4.9 to +4.9 mm
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN SPF2 main scan magnification 4.99 to +4.99 %
ratio correction value
Status (4) PAPER (OC/SPF1/SPF2) Paper information A4, A4R, A3, LT, LTR, WL
COUNT (OC/SPF1/SPF2) Counter 0 to 255 Times
ERROR Error history Error code
BK-MAG ADJ (BK-MAG)/PAPER/ BK-MAG adjustment value, ADJ: 1 to 199 (199 to +199) ADJ STEP
COUNT correction value PAPER_SCAN DEVICE: OC, SPF1, SPF2 PAPER: -
PAPER_PAPER_SIZE: A4, A4R, A3, LT, COUNT: Times
LTR, WL PAPER_CS: MFT,CS1,CS2, CS3,
CS4,LCC PAPER_PRINT_DIR: F, R, U, L
COUNT: 0 to 255
BK-MAG BK-MAG data -9.99 to +9.99 mm
SCAN_MAG (SUB, MAIN) BK-MAG scan magnification ratio SUB:-99 to +99 SUB:MAIN:-4.99
correction value MAIN:-4.99 to +4.99 to +4.99
PRINT ADJ_MFT (LEAD/OFST) PRINT adjustment value, LEAD,OFST:-4.9 to +4.9 PAPER_SCAN LEAD, OFST: mm
correction value DEVICE: LEAD, OFST: OC, SPF1, SPF2 PAPER:
PAPER_PAPER_SIZE: A4, A4R, A3, LT, COUNT: Times
LTR, WL
PAPER_PRINT_DIR: F, R, U, L COUNT: 0
to 255
LEAD (F/C/R) PRINT lead edge data -4.9 to +4.9 mm
OFFSET R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L) Off-center data -4.9 to +4.9 mm
0 51
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE

51-1
ADJ_OC (SCAN / LEAD / OFST) 50(r99) / 50(r99) / 50(r99)
SCAN(F /C /R) / LEAD(F /C /R) r4.99 /r4.99 /r4.99 , r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9
Purpose Adjustment
OFFSET R(U /M /L) / F(U /M /L) r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9 , r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
SCAN_MAIN r4.99 transfer voltage and the separation bias
voltage.
OCSPF BK-MAG PRINT OK
Section Process
Item Operation (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted.

51-2
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the Purpose Adjustment
operation is invalid. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure of
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. paper against the registration roller (main
unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed,
RSPF/DSPF paper feed) on each section.
3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is (When there are much variations in print
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. image positions for paper or when the
<Set range and default value of each set value> paper jam occurs, the adjustment is
required.) Used to change the deflection
Description of Set Default
Item Display item
content range value
quantity correction value of each specified
A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer 1 to 99 40
cassette.
voltage ON timing Section Paper transport
setting
Item Operation
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer 1 to 99 60
voltage OFF timing
Operation/Procedure
setting 1) Select a category to be set. (In this example, [SIDE1] is
selected.)
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is decreased, the trans-
fer ON/Off timing for paper is advanced. * Select a category, and the selected button is highlighted.
The set item of the selected category button is displayed.
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is increased, the trans-
fer ON/Off timing for paper is delayed. * Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
highlighted.
(1: about 10ms change)(Set range: 490 to +490ms)
* Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
0 The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
TEST SIMULATION NO.5101 CLOSE played on the set setting area.
TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
A 99 TC2 ON TIMING
item is shifted.
A: 99 B 60 TC2 OFF TIMING If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
1 99
item is shifted.
OK
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
<Set range and default value of each set value> * RSPF model
Description of item (Mode, document, paper feed Set Default
Item Button Display item Transport direction
speed) range value
A SIDE1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, plain paper, HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, plain paper, LOW)
C NORMAL_ THIN _HIGH RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, thin paper, HIGH)
D NORMAL__THIN LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (normal, thin paper, LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (random, plain paper, LOW)
F RANDOM_ THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value (random, thin paper, LOW)
A SIDE2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 1(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 1(normal, plain paper, LOW)
C NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 2(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
D NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2 RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity 1 to 99 50
adjustment value 2(normal, plain paper, LOW)

speed) range value
A ENGIN TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection LT size or less 1 to 99 30
adjustment value (small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
adjustment value (large size)
C TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (lower stage), deflection LT size or less 1 to 99 30
D TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (lower stage), deflection Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
E MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper, LT size or less 1 to 99 30
small size)
F MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper, Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
large size)
G MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S) Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy LT size or less 1 to 99 45
paper, small size)
H MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L) Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy Longer size than the above 1 to 99 45
paper, large size)
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (OHP) 1 to 99 45
J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value 1 to 99 45
(Envelope)
K ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 30
size)
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
size)
M ADU HEAVY PAPER (S) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 45
size)
N ADU HEAVY PAPER (L) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 45
size)
O DESK(S) DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 30
size)
P DESK(L) DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
size)
Q A4LCC A4LCC, Deflection adjustment value 1 to 99 30
R A3LCC (S) A3LCC, Deflection adjustment value (small size) LT size or less 1 to 99 30
S A3LCC (L) A3LCC, Deflection adjustment value (large size) Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
<Expression of (Large size) and (Small size)>
(Small size): The paper length in the transport direction is LT
(216mm) or less.
(Large size): The paper length in the transport direction is longer
than LT (216mm).
<Adjustment value>
The adjustment unit is the distance of the 0.1 mm unit.
When the adjustment value is increased, the deflection quantity is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the deflection
quantity is decreased.

<Set range and default value of each set value> * DSPF model
speed) range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (normal, 1 to 99 50
HIGH plain paper, HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (normal, 1 to 99 50
MID plain paper, MID)
C NORMAL_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (normal, 1 to 99 50
LOW plain paper, LOW)
D NORMAL_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (normal, 1 to 99 50
HIGH thin paper, HIGH)
E NORMAL_THIN_MID DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (normal, 1 to 99 50
thin paper, MID)
F NORMAL_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (normal, 1 to 99 50
LOW thin paper, LOW)
G RANDOM_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
H RANDOM_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
I RANDOM_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
J RANDOM_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
K RANDOM_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
MID thin paper, MID)
L RANDOM_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
A REGI2 NORMAL_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (normal, 1 to 99 50
B NORMAL_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (normal, 1 to 99 50
C NORMAL_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (normal, 1 to 99 50
D NORMAL_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (normal, 1 to 99 50
E NORMAL_THIN_MID DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (normal, 1 to 99 50
thin paper, MID)
F NORMAL_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (normal, 1 to 99 50
G RANDOM_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (random, 1 to 99 50
H RANDOM_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 2 (random, 1 to 99 50
I RANDOM_PLAIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
J RANDOM_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
K RANDOM_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50
MID thin paper, MID)
L RANDOM_THIN_ DSPF deflection quantity adjustment value 1 (random, 1 to 99 50

speed) range value
A ENGIN TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection LT size or less 1 to 99 30
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
C TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette (lower stage), deflection adjustment LT size or less 1 to 99 30
value (small size)
D TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette (lower stage), deflection adjustment Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
value (large size)
E MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper, LT size or less 1 to 99 30
small size)
F MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper, Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
large size)
G MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S) Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy LT size or less 1 to 99 45
paper, small size)
H MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L) Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy Longer size than the above 1 to 99 45
paper, large size)
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (OHP) 1 to 99 45
J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value 1 to 99 45
(Envelope)
K ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 30
size)
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
size)
M ADU HEAVY PAPER (S) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 45
size)
N ADU HEAVY PAPER (L) ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 45
size)
O DESK(S) DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small LT size or less 1 to 99 30
size)
P DESK(L) DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
size)
Q A4LCC A4LCC, Deflection adjustment value 1 to 99 30
R A3LCC A3LCC, Deflection adjustment value (small size) LT size or less 1 to 99 30
S A3LCC A3LCC, Deflection adjustment value (large size) Longer size than the above 1 to 99 30
<Expression of (Large size) and (Small size)>
(Small size): The paper length in the transport direction is LT 53
(216mm) or less.
(Large size): The paper length in the transport direction is longer 53-6
than LT (216mm).
Purpose Adjustment
* Document size judgment of DSPF for items B and D: Small size
for 148mm (A5) or less Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF document
tray size of the main unit.
* The adjustment unit is the distance of the 0.1 mm unit.
Section RSPF/DSPF
* The smaller the set value is, the smaller the deflection amount of
each specified item is. The greater the set value is, the greater Item Operation
the deflection amount is. Operation/Procedure
<Adjustment value> 1) Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and
When the adjustment value is increased, the deflection quantity is press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the deflection size volume maximum value adjustment is started.
quantity is decreased. (When the adjustment value is changed by * During the adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
1, the stop timing is changed by 1.0 msec.) * After completion of the tray size volume maximum value
adjustment, the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM
0 and the display is shifted to the tray volume A4R size adjust-
TEST SIMULATION NO.5102 CLOSE ment value start screen. (Each set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM at each setting.)
REGIST ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
A 50 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH 2) Set the tray document guide to A4R (11 x 8.5R) width position
A: 50 B 50 NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW and press [EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is high-
C 50 NORMAL_THIN_HIGH lighted and the tray A4R size adjustment is started.
1 99
D 50 NORMAL_THIN_LOW
3) Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume min-
imum value according to the above procedures.
OK
SIDE1 SIDE2 ENGIN 4) After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE"is displayed.
If the adjustment is not completed normally for any rea-
son,"ERROR"is displayed. In that case, the adjustment must
be executed again.

<Adjustment item and content> <Display item, set range, and default values>
No. Display Content Display Default
Item Guide plate position Set range
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value item value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value A AD_MAX Maximum position 0 to 1023 RSPF: 948
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment DSPF: 66
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value B AD_P1 Middle position (L) 0 to 1023 RSPF: 517
DSPF: 438
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is C AD_P2 Middle position (S) 0 to 1023 RSPF: 219
shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown DSPF: 699
in the table below. The value of the document width sensor D AD_MIN Minimum position 0 to 1023 RSPF: 68
(RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM. DSPF: 893
<Guide plate positions and widths on the mechanism and A/D * A/D is 10 bit.
values to be saved>
Widths on the mechanism A/D value, 0
Guide plate AB INCHI Code in the code in TEST SIMULATION NO.53-07 CLOSE
No. Remark
position series series figure below the figure
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL).
below
A 791 ; AD_MAX
1 Maximum 303.3 303.3 WIDTH_MAX AD_MAX
A: 791 B 713 ; AD_P1
position C 456 ; AD_P2
2 Middle 210 215,9 WITH_P1 AD_P1 A4R OR [ 0~ 1023 ]
D 66 ; AD_MIN
position (L) LTR
3 Middle 148.5 139.7 WITH_P2 AD_P2 A5R OR
OK
position INVR
(S)
4 Minimum 118 118 WITH_MIN AD_MIN
position 53-8
Purpose Adjustment
0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF scan posi-
tion.
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT
TRAYVOLMAX TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
Section RSPF/DSPF
Item Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered value is
set.
<Display item, set range and default value>
53-7
Set Default
Purpose Adjustment Item Display item Description
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to enter the adjustment value of the A ADJUST VALUE RSPF/DSPF scan 1 to 99 50
main unit RSPF/DSPF document tray size position adjustment
adjustment value. SIM53-06 A/D value When the set value is increased by 1, the distance between the
manual input. home position and the RSPF/DSPF scan position is increased by
Section RSPF/DSPF 0.1mm.
Item Operation When the set value is changed by 1, the position is shifted by
Operation/Procedure 0.1mm.
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. * Since the distance of RRCA-S and RSPF/DSPF scan position is
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis- changed, RRCA are not changed by this adjustment value.
item is shifted. TEST SIMULATION NO.53-08 CLOSE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
operation is invalid. A 50 ADJUST VALUE
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and A: 50

item is shifted. [ 1~ 99 ]
operation is invalid. OK
pressed, the currently entered value is set.

After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
55 normal display.
55-1
0
Purpose Setting
SCANNER SOFT SW. SETTING.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the engine soft SW. SW NO. AAA (SW No.1-16)
Section PCU DATA 12345678

12345678
Item Operation (Specifications)
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 55-01, the screen on the EXECUTE
right is displayed.
* On the initial screen, [SW-NO.] button is highlighted.
2) With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with 55-3
10-key. Purpose Setting
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. Function (Purpose) Used to set the controller soft SW.
3) Press [DATA] button.
Section MFP
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is dis-
played.
Operation/Procedure
4) With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 55-03, the screen on the
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
right is displayed.
display is switched as shown below.
[1] [0]
2) With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with
[0] [1]
10-key.
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
5) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered
3) Press [DATA] button.
data are set.
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is dis-
After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
played.
normal display.
0 When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
TEST
ENGINE SOFT SW. SETTING
[1] [0]
SW NO. : AAA (SW No.1-16) [0] [1]
DATA : 12345678 * Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
12345678
data are set.
EXECUTE After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
55-2 0
Purpose Setting TEST
MFP SOFT SW. SETTING.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the scanner soft SW SW NO. AAA (SW No.1-16)

Section Scanner DATA 12345678
12345678
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 55-02, the screen on the EXECUTE
right is displayed.
2) With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with
10-key. 56
3) Press [DATA] button. 56-1
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is dis- Purpose Data transfer
played.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute data transfer.
Section MFP
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below. Item Data transfer
[1] [0] Operation/Procedure
[0] [1] 1) Select an item of data transfer.
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective. * The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is dis-
played in the corresponding display section.
data are set.

* When another button is selected, the newly selected button * If a USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORAGE TO
is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the correspond- THE USB PORT" is displayed. When [OK] button is pressed,
ing display section. The previously selected button returns to the display is shifted to the menu selection screen.
the normal display and "DISABLE" is displayed in the corre- 2) Select a desired menu to be executed, and the display is
sponding display section. shifted to the execution screen.
* On the initial screen, [ALL HDD] is highlighted. Only one * When [HDD EXPORT] or [EEPROM & SRAM EXPORT] is
button can be selected. selected, the display is shifted to the execution screen.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the 3) Select a file button to be imported, and the display is shifted to
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display the execution screen.
* A file name is displayed on the button. If the file name is of
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and more than 70 characters, only 70 characters are displayed.
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the * The maximum number of buttons is 30 items.
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
4) Press [EXECUTE] button, and it is highlighted and [YES] and
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
[NO] buttons becomes active from the gray-out display.
[YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
* Display during importing
3) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the data of
"HDD IMPORT"
the highlighted button are transferred.
* Display during exporting
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the dis-
play is shifted to the set item select screen. "HDD EXPORT"
* During execution, "RUNNNING" is displayed in the corre- 5) Press [YES] button, and it is highlighted and importing is exe-
sponding display section. cuted.
* After completion of execution,"COMPLETE" is displayed in * When [NO] or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the display is
the corresponding display section, and reset is executed shifted to the execution screen.
automatically. [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
If the execution is not completed for any reason,"ERROR" is * Message during importing
displayed in the corresponding display section. (Rest is not IMPORTING THE DATA. PLEASE WAIT...
executed.)
* Message during exporting
<Data transfer item> "EXPORTING THE DATA. PLEASE WAIT....."
Target data Content 6) When updating is completed, the result is displayed.
ALL HDD All memory contents are transferred to HDD. After normal completion, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
HDD ALL The contents of HDD are transferred to all the
In case of an error completion, "EEROR" is displayed.
memories.
EEPROM HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD * When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
HDD EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
SRAM HDD Transfer from SRAM to HDD.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory 0
(memory for FAX) is installed, the data are TEST SIMULATION NO.5602 CLOSE
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
EXPORT/IMPORT FILING DATA
memory for FAX.
HDD SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM. HDD EXPORT HDD IMPORT
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory EEPROM&SRAM EXPORT EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
(memory for FAX)* is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX.
* If FLASHROM and OP.FLASHROM are not installed, transfer is 1/1
not executed.

0 60
TEST
COPY DATA
ENABLE
60-1
ALL HDD :
HDD ALL : DISABLE Purpose Operation test/Check

EEPROM HDD : DISABLE Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the expansion
HDD EEPROM : DISABLE DIMM installed to the MFPcnt PWB.
After completion of execution, the result of
EXECUTE
1/2 each slot is displayed on the panel.
MFPcnt PWB image DRAM read/write
operation check, check MFP (memory)
56-2 operation.
Purpose Backup Section Image process (MFP)
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data (user authentica- Item Operation
tion data, address book, etc.) of EEPROM, Operation/Procedure
SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to
1) When the machine enters Simulation 60-01, the screen on the
restore the data.
right is displayed.
Section Memory, HDD When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
Item Data test is started.
Operation/Procedure 2) During testing, "SLOT-2:NOW EXECUTING..." is displayed.
1) Insert a USB memory into the machine. 3) SLOT-2 test completed

4) SLOT-3 test completed
60-2
5) SLOT-4 test completed
Purpose Setting
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM.
When the test is normally completed,"OK"is displayed.
Section
<Result display>
Item
Result display Detail
Operation/Procedure
OK Success
NG Fail
NG Fail: SLOT4 (standard) is unconnected The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
(SDRAM IS NOT IN SLOT4) and SLOT3 (option) is connected. played on the set setting area.
NONE Not installed (including DIMM trouble) * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
<SLOT descriptions> item is shifted.
SLOT Descriptions
SLOT1 Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Since it is of only the system area, it is excluded from the targets If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
of Red/Write check. item is shifted.
SLOT2 Memory connected to the MFP controller. If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
Read/Write check is executed for some memory area. operation is invalid.
SLOT3 Option memory connected to the ICU-ASIC. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Since SLOT4 (standard) memory is not installed, Read/Write
check cannot be executed. * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
SLOT4 Standard memory connected to the ICU-ASIC 3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently set data are set.
0
SDRAM READ/WRITE TEST
EXECUTE
<Set range and default value of each set value>

Set Default
range value
A SETTING ENABLE DISABLE SDRAM setting DDR setting of onboard SPD 0 0
ENABLE change flag DDR setting after the following 1
B.
B NUMBER OF ROW 11BIT ROW address width 0 2
12BIT 1
13BIT 2
C NUMBER OF COLUMN 8BIT COLUMN address width 0 2

9BIT 1
10BIT 2
11BIT 3
12BIT 4
D TWR SETTING VALUE 2CLOCK TWR setting value 0 1
3CLOCK 1
4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
E TRAS SETTING VALUE 4CLOCK TRAS setting value 0 2
5CLOCK 1
6CLOCK 2
7CLOCK 3
F TRC SETTING VALUE 6CLOCK TRC setting value 0 3
7CLOCK 1
8CLOCK 2
9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4
G TRCD SETTING VALUE 2CLOCK TRCD setting value 0 1
3CLOCK 1
4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3

Set Default
range value
H TRP SETTING VALUE 2CLOCK TRP setting value 0 1
3CLOCK 1
4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
I TFRC SETTING VALUE 7CLOCK TFRC setting value 0 3
8CLOCK 1
: :
20CLOCK 13
J CAS LATENCY CL=2 CAS latency 0 1
CL=2.5 1
CL=3 2
K TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR NONE Total capacity of onboard DDR 0 1
128MBYTE 1
256MBYTE 2
L NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK NON Total capacity of onboard DDR 0 1
1CHIP SELECT 1
2CHIP SELECT 2
0 <Error list> (MX-3500N/3501N)

Display Content Operation
SDRAM SETTING
A 0 SETTING ENABLEDISABLE
LSU TESTRESULT LSU check polygon mirror is Operation
A: 0 B 2 NUMBER OF ROW13BIT NG: PG abnormal interruption and
C 2 NUMBER OF COLUMN10BIT end
0 1 LSU TESTRESULT LSU check K-colored LD Operation
D 1 TWR SETTING VALUE3CLOCK
NG: K emission of light is abnormal interruption and

OK end
LSU TESTRESULT LSU check CL-colored LD Operation
NG: CL emission of light is abnormal interruption and
end
61 0
61-01 LSU TEST

Function (Purpose) The polygon motor rotation and the BD sig-
nal detection are checked.
Section LSU EXECUTE 1/1
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure <Error list> (MX-4500N/4501N)
1) Press [COLOR], [MONO] button, and it chooses LSU to want
Display Content Operation
to make check (MX-4500N/4501N only).
LSU TESTRESULT LSU check Color Operation interruption
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the LSU check is started. NG: PG CL polygon mirror mode and end
3) When checking is normally completed, [OK] is displayed. LSU TESTRESULT is abnormal B/W Operation interruption
NG: PG BW mode and end
When an error occurs in checking, [NG] is displayed and the
LSU TESTRESULT LSU check K- Color Operation interruption
detail is displayed.
NG: K CL colored LD mode and end
LSU TESTRESULT emission of light B/W Operation interruption
NG: K BW is abnormal mode and end
LSU TESTRESULT LSU check CL-colored LD Operation interruption
NG: CL emission of light is and end
abnormal
0
LSU TEST
COLOR MONO EXECUTE 1/1

61-4
62
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute self-print of the LSU posi-
62-1
tion adjustment.
Purpose Data clear
Section LSU
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
Item Adjustment
(except operation manual area).
Operation/Procedure * Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section MFP (HDD)
Item Clear
Operation/Procedure
item is shifted. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
operation is invalid. become active.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and 2) Press [YES] button.
item is shifted. Execute formatting of the hard disk. [YES] button is high-
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the lighted.
operation is invalid. * When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When the hard disk formatting is not completed normally,
"HDD FORMAT NG" is displayed.
ing is started.
* After completion of the hard disk formatting, [EXECUTE]
* After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to
button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO]
the normal display.
buttons gray out.
* When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
* When [CA] key is pressed during formatting, the operation is
pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When [SYS-
saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
TEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, formatting is interrupted
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key and the display returns to the sub number entry screen.
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur- the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
rence of an interruption, printing is resumed.
<Set range and default value of each set item> 0
Display item &
Default
Item Detail of Description of item Set range HDD FORMAT
value
display
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
B PAPER MFT Cassette Manual 1 to 6 1 3 (CS2)
select feed
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3 ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
62-2
* Item B is displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the partial check of the
0 hard disk read/write (except operation man-
TEST SIMULATION NO.6104 CLOSE ual area).
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF PRINT)
A 1 MULTICOUNT Section MFP (HDD)
A: 1 B 2 PAPERCS1
Item Operation
1 999 Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE OK [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
The procedures (Write Retrieve Check for any abnormal-
ity.) are executed.
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
* When the procedures (Write Retrieve Abnormality
check) are not completed normally, "HDD R/W TEST NG" is
displayed.

check) are completed normally, [EXECUTE] button returns 62-6
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. Purpose Operation test/Check
* When [CA] key is pressed during the procedures (Write Function (Purpose) Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics.
Retrieve Check for any abnormality.), the operation is * Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When [SYS-
TEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted Section MFP (HDD)
and the display returns to the sub number entry screen. Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
0 1) Select an item to execute the self-diagnostics.
CLOSE
* The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is dis-
HDD R/W TEST(PART) played in the corresponding display section.
* When another button is selected, the newly selected button
is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the correspond-
ing display section. The previously selected button returns to
the normal display and "DISABLE" is displayed in the corre-
sponding display section.
self-diagnostics is started.
62-3 * During self diagnostics, "EXECUTING..." is displayed in the
Purpose Operation test/Check corresponding display section.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute read/write check (all * After completion of self-diagnostics, [EXECUTE] button
areas) of the hard disk. returns to the normal display and the result of diagnostics is
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32. displayed in the corresponding display section. (In the case
of OK, "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed. In the case of NG,
Section MFP (HDD)
"NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
Item Operation
* If the operation is not executed or completed for any reason,
Operation/Procedure "ERROR" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
<Self diagnostics method>
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active. Target data Content
SHORT S.T Partial check
EXTENDED S.T All areas check
The procedures (Write Retrieve Check for any abnormal-
ity.) are executed.
0
SMART OFFLINE TEST
[NO] buttons gray out. SHORT S.T ENABLE
* When the procedures (Write Retrieve Abnormality EXTENDED S.T DISABLE
check) are not completed normally, "HDD R/W TEST NG" is
displayed.
EXECUTE
check) are completed normally, [EXECUTE] button returns 1/1
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during Write Retrieve, the
62-7
operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated.
When [SYSTEM SETTGINGS] key is pressed instead, the Purpose Operation test/Check
operation is interrupted and the display is shifted to the sub Function (Purpose) Used to print the self-diagnostics error log.
number entry screen. * Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section MFP
0 Item Data
Operation/Procedure
HDD R/W TEST(ALL)
Check that there is A4 paper in the paper feed tray. If not, sup-
ply paper.
EXECUTE error log is printed.
After completion of self-printing, the display returns to the initial
screen.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-

0 CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
TEST SIMULATION NO.62-07 CLOSE [NO] buttons gray out.
SMART ERROR LOG PRINT OUT * During delete operation of the job log data [EXECUTE] but-
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE SMART ERROR PRINT ton is highlighted and "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* If delete of the jog log data is not completed normally, "NG"
is displayed.
* After completion of delete of the job log data, [EXECUTE]
EXECUTE button returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] but-
tons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the oper-
ation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
62-8 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is inter-
Purpose Data clear rupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk excluding the
system area and operation manual area.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32. 0
Section MFP (HDD)
JOB COMPLETE DATA CLEAR(WITH JOB LOG DATA)
Item Clear
Operation/Procedure
become active.
EXECUTE
3) The hard disk (excluding the system area) is formatted. [YES]
button is highlighted.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE- 62-11
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and Purpose Data clear
[NO] buttons gray out. Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
* During formatting the hard disk (excluding the system area), * Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "HDD FORMAT Section MFP (HDD)
(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) EXECUTING..." is displayed.
Item Clear
* If formatting of the hard disk (excluding the system area) is
Operation/Procedure
not completed normally, " HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYS-
TEM AREA) NG" is displayed. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
* When formatting of the hard disk (excluding the system [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
area) is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal become active.
display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. 2) Press [YES] button.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to The document filing data are deleted.
exit from the simulation are restart. [YES] button is highlighted.
0 CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
TEST SIMULATION NO.62-08 CLOSE [NO] buttons gray out.
HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) * During delete of the document filing data, [EXECUTE] but-
ton is highlighted and "DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* If delete of the document filing data is not completed nor-
mally, "NG" is displayed.
* After completion of delete of the document filing data, [EXE-
EXECUTE
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the oper-
62-10 ation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
Purpose Data clear [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is inter-
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job completion list. (The rupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
job log data are also deleted.) screen.
0
Section MFP (HDD)
Item Clear DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
Operation/Procedure
become active.
2) Press [YES] button. ARE YOU SURE? YES NO
EXECUTE
The job log data are deleted. [YES] button is highlighted.

62-12
0
Purpose Data clear TEST SIMULATION NO.6212 CLOSE
CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format AUTO FORMAT SETTINGHDD TROUBLE
in HDD trouble. A 1 (0:YES 1:NO)
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32. A: 1

Section MFP (HDD) 0 1
Item Clear
Operation/Procedure OK
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the screen on the
right is displayed.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. 63
3) When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, it is
highlighted and the current entered value is saved to EEPROM
and RAM. 63-1
<Descriptions of buttons, set range, and default values>
Set Default Function (Purpose) Used to check the following values related
Item Content
range value
to shading for RGB and OC/RSPF/DSPF.
A (0: YES, 0 Auto format Enable 0 to 1 1 (Disable)
(3 x 2 = 6 kinds)
1: NO) 1 Auto format Disable
Section Scanner (Exposure)
Item Operation
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.6212 CLOSE Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
AUTO FORMAT SETTINGHDD TROUBLE
1) Select a color button to be displayed.
A 0 (0:YES 1:NO) The shading set value of the selected button is displayed.
A: 0 * When [B](Blue), [G](Green), or [R](Red) button is selected,
0 1 the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
of the selected color is displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
OK
ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
62-13 grays out and the operation is invalid.
Purpose Data clear If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk (operation the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
manual area only). display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32. * When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
Section MFP (HDD) basic screen of simulation.
Item Clear * Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
Operation/Procedure key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. <Display item and description> (MX-3500N/4500N)
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons Display item Description Remark
become active. GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
2) Press [YES] button. (ODD)
3) The hard disk (operation manual area only) is formatted. [YES] GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
(EVEN)
button is highlighted.
OFFSET ODD Offset value (ODD)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE- OFFSET EVEN Offset value (EVEN)
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and SMP AVE ODD Reference plat sampling
[NO] buttons gray out. average value (ODD)
* During formatting the hard disk (operation manual area SMP AVE EVEN Reference plat sampling
only), [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "HDD FORMAT average value (EVEN)
(MANUAL AREA ONLY) EXECUTING..." is displayed. TARGET VALUE Target value
* If formatting of the hard disk (operation manual area only) is BLACK LEVEL Black output level
not completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (MANUAL AREA ERROR CODE Error code (0, 1 to 4) 0: No error
ONLY) NG" is displayed. 1: STAGE1. Over the
loop number
* When formatting of the hard disk (operation manual area 2: STAGE2. The target
only) is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal value is less than the
display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. specified level.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to 3: STAGE3. The gain
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted. set value is negative.
4: END is not
asserted.
RSPF WHITE First scan, RSPF white
LEVEL 1ST reference level

Display item Description Remark
RSPF WHITE Second and later scan, 0
LEVEL 2ND RSPF white reference TEST SIMULATION NO.6301 CLOSE
level SHADING DATA DISPLAY
<Display item and description> (MX-3501N/4501N) GAIN ODD : 147

GAIN EVEN : 143
Button Display item Description Remark
OFFSET ODD : 0
OC GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
(ODD) OFFSET EVEN : 0
GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
B G R
(EVEN) 1/3
* On the screen, [G] is pressed.
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (EVEN)
SMP AVE ODD Reference plat
sampling average 63-2
value (ODD) Purpose Adjustment
SMP AVE Reference plat
EVEN sampling average
Function (Purpose) Used to execute shading forcibly. (MX-
value (EVEN) 3500N/4500N)
TARGET Target value Section Scanner
VALUE Item Operation
BLACK LEVEL Black output level
Operation/Procedure
ERROR CODE Error code (0, 1 to 4) 0: No error
1: STAGE1. Over 1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
the loop number shading is started.
2: STAGE2. The * During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
target value is less
than the specified
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during execution, the
level. operation is interrupted.
3: STAGE3. The * When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] button
gain set value is returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis-
negative. played.
4: END is not
asserted.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other
DSPF FACE First scan, DSPF front
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
WHITE LEVEL surface white screen.
1ST reference level
DSPF FACE Second and later scan, 0
WHITE LEVEL DSPF front surface TEST SIMULATION NO.6302 CLOSE
2ND white reference level
SHADING EXECUTION
DSPF GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO SHADING START
(ODD)
GAIN_EVEN Gain adjustment value
(EVEN)
OFFSET EVEN Offset value (EVEN) EXECUTE
SMP AVE ODD Reference plat
sampling average
value (ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plat 63-2
EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN)
Purpose Adjustment
TARGET Target value Function (Purpose) Used to execute shading forcibly. (MX-
VALUE 3501N/4501N)
BLACK LEVEL Black output level Section Scanner
ERROR CODE Error code (0, 1 to 4) 0: No error
1: STAGE1. Over
Item Operation
the loop number Operation/Procedure
2: STAGE2. The 1) Select [OC SHADING], [DSPF SHADING].
target value is less
than the specified
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
level. shading is started.
3: STAGE3. The * During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
gain set value is * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during execution, the
negative.
operation is interrupted.
4: END is not
asserted. * When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] button
DSPF BACK First scan, DSPF back returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis-
WHITE LEVEL surface white played.
1ST reference level * When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other
DSPF BACK Second and later scan, than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
WHITE LEVEL DSPF back surface screen.
2ND white reference level

<Descriptions of buttons> When a scanner motor error occurs (during execution):
Display Content
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading 0
SHADING correction data making (Document table mode) TEST SIMULATION NO.6303 CLOSE
DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
SHADING correction data making (SPF mode) SCANNER MOTOR IS NOT READY
<Result display>
Display Content
ERROR Abnormal completion (When executing DSPF shading) EXECUTE 1/1
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption (When executing DSPF
shading)
When auto adjustment error occurs:
0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.6302 CLOSE SIMULATION NO.6303 CLOSE
TEST
SHADING EXECUTION SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
SELECT OC SHADING/DSPF SHADING, AND PRESS EXECUTE SAMPRING DATA UNFIT
#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,
#16, #17, #18, #19, #20, #22, #24
PLEASE CHECK THE CHART AND PLATEN GLASS
OCSHADING DSPFSHADING EXECUTE B G R RESULT 1/1
* When an error occurs, all the error patch numbers are displayed.
63-3 If there is no error after selection of a color, the screen is similar
Purpose Adjustment to the initial screen. Only the color of an error is displayed as the
above error display.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the gamma correction and
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
density conversion for RGB image data
played. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set value of
displayed.)
color correction are set by calculating from
the image data. (MX-3500N/4500N)
Section Scanner (scan)
0
Item Image quality (Color balance) SIMULATION NO.6303 CLOSE
TEST
Operation/Procedure SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
1) When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
selected color is displayed. #7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected, #13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16:15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value #19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
of the selected color is displayed. B G R OC 1/2

* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
(MX-3501N/4501N)
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display 0
grays out and the operation is invalid. SIMULATION NO.63-03 CLOSE
TEST
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and SCANNER COLOR BALANCE AUTO ADJUSUTMENT
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165, #4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
display grays out and the operation is invalid. #7: 88, #8: 75, #9: 55, #10: 45, #11: 38, #12: 29,
2) Press a button to be executed. #13: 27, #14: 21, #15: 18, #:16:15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
3) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color #19: 5, #20: 4, #22: 2, #:24: 2
auto adjustment is executed. B G R DSPF OC 1/4

* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
* Process contents during execution (OC) 63-5
a) Sampling setting Purpose Adjustment
b) Scan request
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the gamma correction and
c) Waiting for reaching the document lead edge color correction parameters of the SCAN
d) Sampling end ASIC.
e) Sampling result acquisition Section Scanner
f) Calculation for sampling result Item Clear
g) Calculation result save Operation/Procedure
1) When a touch panel button to execute the standard reset is
pressed, the selected button is highlighted and [EXECUTE]
button becomes active from the gray-out display.
* When the selected button is pressed again, selection is can-
celed and the button returns to the normal display.

* If no button is selected for standard reset, [EXECUTE] but- Only one color button can be selected. (In the initial screen,
ton grays out. [K] is selected.)
* Two or more items can be selected for standard reset. * After completion of sampling, [EXECUTE] button returns
2) Press [EXECUTE] button. to the normal display.
become active. 0
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE CHART READING
The scanner color balance standard value reset is executed. SET THE CHART ON PLATEN AND TOUCH [EXECUTE]
[YES] button is highlighted.

* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE]
button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
gray out. EXECUTE
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* During the scanner color balance standard value reset, [EXE-
CUTE] and [YES] buttons are highlighted. 63-7
* After completion of the scanner color balance standard value Purpose Setting
reset delete, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display
Function (Purpose) Used to display and register the engine
and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
auto density adjustment scanner target
<Standard value reset item> * MX-3500N/4500N value (for servicing).
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction Section Image process (ICU)
1
coefficient Item Image quality (Color balance)
2 SIDE A TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction Operation/Procedure
(OC) coefficient
3 Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color
correction coefficient screen is displayed.
* Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the data of each color.
<Standard value reset item> * MX-3501N/4501N
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K] is selected.)
1
coefficient 2) When [SETUP] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
2 SIDE A TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction sampling start screen.
(OC) coefficient
Put the chart self-printed with SIM46-21 on the glass table,
3 Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color
correction coefficient and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is high-
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction lighted and the sampling screen is displayed.
1
SIDE B coefficient 3) After completion of sampling, the sampling result is displayed.
2 (DSPF) TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction When [REPEAT] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
coefficient sampling start screen.
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the displayed result of sampling
0 is saved to EEPROM and RAM as the target value.
<Display data content>
STANDARD SCANNER GAMMA SETUP
SIDE AOC Display data Display content
B Point B target value
C Point C target value
D Point D target value
YES NO
E Point E target value
ARE YOU SURE? EXECUTE 1/1
F Point F target value
G Point G target value
H Point H target value
63-6 I Point I target value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ J Point J target value
Check (Display/Print) K Point K target value
Function (Purpose) Used to scan the engine color balance auto L Point L target value
adjustment pattern and to display the sam- M Point M target value
pling result. N Point N target value
O Point O target value
BASE Base sampling value
Item Image quality (Color balance)
* BASE is displayed only on the sampling result display screen.
Operation/Procedure
1) Put the chart self-printed with SIM46-21 on the glass table, 0
and press [EXECUTE] button. Sampling is started. (When TEST SIMULATION NO.6307 CLOSE
[EXECUTE] button is pressed during execution, the operation SCANNER TARGET OF COLOR CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
is interrupted.) #B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
* During sampling, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted. #G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198
* The sampling value of each patch from the high density side #L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
is displayed as the result.

When [K][C][M][Y] button is pressed on the sampling result K C M Y SETUP 1/1
display screen, the data of each color are displayed.

63-8
0
Purpose Setting TEST SIMULATION NO.6311 CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the standard value reset of STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
the engine auto adjustment scanner target TARGET TBL DEF1 DEF2 DEF3
value (for servicing).
Item Image quality (Color balance)
Operation/Procedure
1/1
become active.
2) Press [YES] button. 64
The standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scan-
ner target value is executed. [YES] button is highlighted.
64-1
[NO] buttons gray out. Function (Purpose) Used to execute self-print (Color mode).
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Section Printer
* During execution of the standard value reset of the engine Item Operation
auto adjustment scanner target value, [EXECUTE] and Operation/Procedure
[YES] buttons are highlighted. 1) Press [K][C][M][Y] button to select a color.
* After completion of the standard value reset of the engine The selected button is highlighted. When the highlighted but-
auto adjustment scanner target value, [EXECUTE] button ton is pressed, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more
returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons buttons can be selected.)
gray out.
<Standard value reset item> The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
1 Auto density adjustment target value (KCMY) played in the setting area.
0 item is shifted.
TEST SIMULATION NO.6308 CLOSE If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SETTING:SERVICE
item is shifted.
EXECUTE
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
print is started.
63-11
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing,
Purpose Setting
and returns to the normal display after completion of self-print-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the factory target color balance ing.
in the auto color balance adjustment * When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
(SIM46-24). pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
Section Scanner (Scanning) saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
Item Image quality * When [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed
Operation/Procedure during self-printing, the operation is interrupted.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 63-11, the button of the * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
current set value of the target value table is highlighted. rence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
2) When the button of the target value to be changed ([DEF2] is resumed.
button in this example) is pressed, it is highlighted and the set * When paper is selected which does not satisfy the paper
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. feed and paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
* Only one item can be selected.
<Display data item description>
Set Default
Item Content
value value
Target value table select DEF1 DEF1 mode setting DEF1
DEF2 DEF2 mode setting
DEF3 DEF3 mode setting

<Set item description>
Item Display item Description of item Set range Default value Writing
A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19) Print pattern specification 1 to 20 1 Yes
(* For details, refer to the following.) (Only 1, 2, 9 to 11,
and 14 to 19 can
be printed.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Print dot number setting (Self print patter: m by n) Pattern 2, 11: 2 to 1 Yes
255
Other than above:
1 to 255
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Empty dot number setting (Self print patter: m by n) Pattern 2, 11: 2 to 254 Yes
255
Other than above:
0 to 255
D DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9) Print gradation specifications Pattern 9: 255 255 Yes
(fixed)
Other than above:
1 to 255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 No
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (Through) Pattern 14 to 1 8 (STANDARD Yes
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~ CHAR/PIC specifications Text/Printed Photo 19: 2 to 8 2 DITCH)
19) CHAR/PRPIC Text/Photograph Other than 3
CHAR Text above: 1 to 8 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITCH Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Cassette select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) No
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Select 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) No
NO Not select 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Plain paper 1 to 4 1 1 (PLAIN) No
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the other, manual feed only.
* Items F, G, H, I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1

<Detailed descriptions of print pattern at item A>
Pattern Color select M parameter N parameter
Pattern Gradation Exposure
NO. Content forming When Enable/ Default Enable/ Default Remark
size Condition select select
section NO Disable value Disable value
1 Grid pattern All LSU-ASIC { K only { { 1 { 254 All colors are
surface selected in the print
width of 100 or more
(Print in 3 colors
(CMY), print is
started at 4mm from
the paper lead edge.
2 Mesh print { K only { { 2 { 2
3 16 gradations: Sub { (up to K only No When all colors are
sub scan fixed 3 colors) selected, print is
4 16 gradations: Main { (Up to K only No made in CMY.
main scan fixed 3 colors) 16-gradattion print
Gradation change
for every 256dot.
5 Even pitch All { K only { { 1 { 4
pattern (MBYN): surface
sub scan
6 Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
7 4-color overlap (4- { { 1 { 4
even pitch color
pattern (MBYN): fixed)
sub scan
8 4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
9 Each color 10% Fixed (4- { { 10 Each interval is
area (A4/4R) range color 41.86MM(989dot)
density print fixed) When M is outside 1
to 13%, it is
rounded.
[K] print is started at
17mm from the
paper lead edge.
10 8-color band (4- {
print color
fixed)
11 4-color mesh All (4- { { 2 { 2 Each color print is
print surface color made for every 1/4
(Each fixed) of sub scan paper
color size.
1/4) When N=0, 4-color
all surface print.
12 Input K only
13 process (For
14 256 gradations: Sub (IMG-ASIC { (up to through/ No { When all colors are
sub scan fixed preprocess) 3 colors) default, selected, print is
C only.) made in CMY.
Print is made from
255 gradations in
the range of 0 to 254
gradations.
Print in 256
gradations.
Print is started at
5mm from the paper
lead edge.
15 16 gradations Sub IMG-ASIC { (up to K only No { { 2 { 2 When all colors are
+MBYN (Center fixed 3 colors) selected, print is
gradation made in CMY.
section only): Print in 16
sub scan gradations.
16 16 gradations Main { (up to K only No { { 2 { 2 Gradation is
+MBYN (Center fixed 3 colors) changed for every
gradation 256dot.
section only):
main scan

Pattern Color select M parameter N parameter
NO. Content forming When Enable/ Default Enable/ Default Remark
size Condition select select
section NO Disable value Disable value
17 All background All Half tone { (up to K only { { When all colors are
(Half tone) surface (IMG-ASIC 3 colors) selected, print is
after- made in CMY.
18 256-gradation Fixed process) { (up to K only No { When all colors are
pattern (Other range 3 colors) selected, print is
dither) made in CMY.
19 256-gradation Fixed (up to K only No { Print is made for 16
pattern (Dither range 3 colors) gradations in the
for text) main scan direction,
and for the next 16
gradations, in return.
(16 x 16 patch print)
Print is started at
5mm from the paper
lead edge.
Print is started from
255 gradation in the
range of 0 to 254
gradations.
20 4-color grid All Controller (4- 117
pattern (Cross): surface (memory) color
main/sub scan fixed)
0
Display item & Detail Set Default
TEST SIMULATION NO.64-01 CLOSE Item Content
of display range value
SELF PRINT(COLOR) : SERVICE A COPIES Print quantity 1 to 999 1
A 1 PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9~11, 14~19)
B PROC ADJ YES 0 The half tone 0 to 1 1
A: 1 B 1 DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2,11)
process control
C254 DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2,11)
1 20 correction value is
D255 DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9)
added.
K C
NO 1 The half tone
M Y EXECUTE OK
process control
correction value is
not added.
64-2
* When PROC ADJ is set to YES, the pattern with the half tone
Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/ process control correction value added is printed after execution
Check (Display/Print) of high density process control.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the density adjustment pat- * Item B is displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
tern. Example:PROC ADJ:NO
Section Printer
Item Operation 0
Operation/Procedure TEST SIMULATION NO.6402 CLOSE
1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. ENGINE COLOR BALANCE PATCH PRINT MODE
A 1 COPIES
played in the setting area. A: 1 B 1 PROC ADJ:NO
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the EXECUTE OK
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the 64-3
operation is invalid. Purpose Operation test/Check
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to execute self-print. (BW mode)
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. Section Printer
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the Item Operation
main scan direction registration adjustment pattern is printed. Operation/Procedure
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
normal display.
* When [OK], [], [], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or item is shifted.
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
item is shifted.
rence of an interruption, self-printing is resumed.

2) Enter the set value with 10-key. * When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared. pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and print- saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
ing is started. * When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
* After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the normal display. * When the machine returns to the ready state after occur-
Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value Writing
A PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19) Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.) 1 to 20 1 Yes
(Only 1, 2, 9 to
11, and 14 to
19 can be
printed.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Print dot number setting (Self print pattern: for M BY N) Pattern 2, 11: 1 Yes
2 to 255
Other than
above: 1 to
255
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2, 11) Space dot number setting (Self print pattern: for M BY N) Pattern 2, 11: 254 Yes
2 to 255
Other than
above: 0 to
255
D DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9) Print gradation specification Pattern 9: 255 255 Yes
(fixed)
Other than
above: 1 to
255
E MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1 No
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure No process (Through) Pattern 1 8 (STANDARD Yes
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~ mode specification 14 to 19: DITCH)
19) CHAR/PIC Text/Printed Photo 2 to 8 2
CHAR/PRPIC Text/Photograph Other 3
CHAR Text than 4
above: 1
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
to 8
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITCH Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1) No
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print select Selected 0 to 1 0 1 (NO) No
NO Not selected 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper kind select Plain paper 1 to 4 1 1 (PLAIN) No
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed and paper exit conditions is selected, printing cannot be executed.
Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual. For the other, manual feed only.
Items F, G, H and I are as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1

<Detailed description on each print pattern of item A>
Pattern M parameter N parameter
NO. Content forming Enable/ Default Enable/ Default Remark
size select select
section Disable value Disable value
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC { { 1 { 254 When all colors are
selected in the print width
of 100 or more, print is
made in CMY (3 colors).
Print is started at 4mm
from the paper lead edge.
2 Mesh print All surface { { 2 { 2
3 16 gradations: sub Sub fixed No When all colors are
scan selected, print is made in
4 16 gradations: main Main fixed No CMY.
scan Print for 16 gradations.
Gradation is changed for
every 256 dots.
5 Even pitch pattern All surface { { 1 { 4
(MBYN): sub scan
6 Even pitch pattern
(MBYN): main scan
7 4-color overlap Even All surface { { 1 { 4
pitch pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
8 4-color overlap Even
pitch pattern (MBYN):
main scan
9 Each color 10% area Fixing { { 10 Each interval is
(A4/4R) density print range 41.86mm(989dot)
When M is other than 1 to
13%, it is rounded.
K print is started at 17mm
10 8-color band print Fixing {
range
11 4-color Mesh print All surface { { 2 { 2 Each color print is made
(Each color for every 1/4 of sub scan
1/4) paper size.
When N=0, 4-color all
surface print.
12 Input
13 process
14 256 gradations: sub Sub fixed (IMG-ASIC No { When all colors are
scan preprocess) selected, print is made in
CMY.
Print is started at 255
gradation in the range of
0 to 254 gradations.
Print in 256 gradations.
fromthepaperleadedge.
15 16 gradations+M byN Sub fixed IMG-ASIC No { 2 { 2 When all colors are
(Center gradation selected, print is made in
section only): sub scan CMY.
16 16 gradations+M byN Main fixed No { 2 { 2 Print in 256 gradations.
(Center gradation Gradation is changed for
section only): main every 256 dot.
scan
17 All background (Half All surface Half tone { { When all colors are
tone) (IMG-ASIC selected, print is made in
after- CMY.
18 256 gradation pattern Fixing process) No { When all colors are
(Other dither) range selected, print is made in
19 256 gradation pattern Fixing No { CMY.
(Dither for text) range Print is made for 16
gradations in the main
scan direction, and for the
next 16 gradations, in
return. (16 x 16 patch
print).
Print is started at 255
gradation in the range of
0to254gradations.
20 Frame cross pattern All surface Controller
(Memory)

0 The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TEST SIMULATION NO.64-03 CLOSE played in the setting area.
SELF PRINT(BW) * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
A 1 PRINT PATTERN item is shifted.
A: 1 B 5 DENSITY
1 23
C 6 MULTI COUNT
D 1 EXPOSURE:THROUGH
EXECUTE OK item is shifted.
64-4
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
Function (Purpose) Used to execute self-print. print is started.
Section Printer [EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
Item Operation After completion of self-printing, it returns to the normal dis-
Operation/Procedure play.
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. * When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
buttons can be selected.) * When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SET-
TINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is inter-
rupted.
rence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed condi-
tions and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
Item Display item & Detail of display Description of item Set range Default value
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.) 1 to 5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 to 255 128
C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray select Manual feed 1 to 6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE PHOTO Half tone Photo 0 to 2 0 0 (PHOTO)
TEXT/GRAPHICS Text/Graphic 1
CAD Design 2
F BIT DEPTH 1BIT Bit number 1 bit 0 to 1 0 1 (4BIT)
4BIT 4 bit 1
G DITHER STRAIGHT Dither correction Straight 1 to 2 1 2 (CALIB)
CALIB specification Calibration 2
* When print pattern 2 or 5 is selected, items E to G cannot be selected. (Though entry of the value is possible, it is not reflected to setting.)
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions, printing cannot be made.
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the
other, manual feed only.
* Items D, E, F, G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print in item A>
Color select Gradation

NO. Content select/ Dither Remark
Condition When NOT
select
1 256 gradation pattern (COLOR) { K only 1: Straight C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y are
2: Calibration executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
2 256 gradation pattern (B/W) K only 1: Straight Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
2: Calibration
3 256 gradation pattern (COLOR) 1: Straight 4 pages are continuously printed in the sequence of Y only, M
(Y-M-C-K continuous) 2: Calibration only, C only, and K only.
4 Half tone pattern (COLOR) { K only 1 to 255 C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y/ C & M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
5 Half tone pattern (B/W) K only 1 to 255 Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.

0 The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TEST SIMULATION NO.6404 CLOSE played in the setting area.
PRINTER SELF PRINT * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
A: 3 B128 DENSITY
C 1 MULTI COUNT
1 5 operation is invalid.
D 2 PAPER
K C M Y EXECUTE OK
item is shifted.
64-5 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Operation test/Check * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute self print (PCL). 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
print is started.
Section Printer
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
Item Operation
After completion of self-printing, it returns to the normal dis-
Operation/Procedure play.
1) Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. * When [OK], [], [], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more value is not saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
buttons can be selected.) * When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SET-
TINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is inter-
rupted.
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification (*For details, refer to below.) 1 to 3 3
B DITHER STRAIGHT Dither correction Straight 1 to 2 1 2
C MULTI COUNT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
TEXT/GRAPHICS Text/Picture 1
CAD Design 2
4BIT 4 bit 1
G INTENT SHARP COLOR Rendering indent Sharp color 0 to 4 0 0 (SHARP COLOR)
PERCEPTUAL Perceptual 1
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 2
SATURATION Saturation 3
CAD CAD 4
H GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray compensation K only 0 to 1 0 0 (K)
KCMY KCMY 1
I TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode Setting 0 to 1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF No setting 1
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation is disabled. (Though
entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print pattern in item A>
Gradation
Color select
NO. Content select Remark
Condition No Dither select
1 PCL process inspection pattern 1:Straight
(COLOR) 2:Calibration
2 PCL process inspection pattern K only 1:Straight Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT state. Print is made at
(B/W) 2:Calibration the B/W mode process speed.

Gradation
Color select
NO. Content select Remark
Condition No Dither select
3 PCL process inspection pattern 2:Calibration Continuous printing is made at the default setting in the sequence of
(COLOR/B/W continuous) COLOR and B/W. B/W printing is made at the B/W mode process speed.
0 * The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis-
TEST SIMULATION NO.6405 CLOSE played in the setting area.
PRINTER SELF PRINTPCL * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
A: 3 B 2 DITHER CALIB
C 1 MULTI COUNT
1 3 operation is invalid.
D 2 PAPERCS1
K C M Y EXECUTE OK item is shifted.
64-6 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Operation test/Check * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the printer self print (PS). 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set self-
print is started.
Section Printer
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
Item Operation
* When [OK], [], [], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
Operation/Procedure [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The
1) Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. value is not saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is * When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SET-
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more TINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is inter-
buttons can be selected.) rupted.
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to 1 to 2 1
below.)
B DITHER STRAIGHT Dither correction Straight 1 to 2 1 2
C MULTI CONUT Print quantity 1 to 999 1
CS1 Cassette 1 2
CS2 Cassette 2 3
CS3 Cassette 3 4
CS4 Cassette 4 5
LCC LCC 6
TEXT/GRAPHICS Text/Graphic 1
CAD Design 2
4BIT 4 bit 1
G INTENT SHARP COLOR Rendering intent Sharp color 0 to 4 0 0 (SHARP COLOR)
PERCEPTUAL Perceptual 1
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 2
SATURATION Saturation 3
CAD CAD 4
H GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray compensation K only 0 to 1 0 0 (K)
KCMY KCMY 1
I INK SIMULATION OFF Ink simulation OFF 0 to 3 0 0 (OFF)
SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation/ ink simulation is dis-
abled. (Though entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1

<Detailed description for each print pattern in item A>
Color select Gradation select
NO. Content Remark
Condition When NO dither select
1 PS inspection pattern (COLOR) 1:Straight
2:Calibration
2 PS inspection pattern (B/W) K only 1:Straight Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
2:Calibration Print is made at the B/B mode process speed.
0 65-2
TEST SIMULATION NO.6406 CLOSE Purpose Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
PRINTER SELF PRINTPS Check (Display/Print)
A 1 PRINT PATTERN
Function (Purpose) Used to check the touch panel (LCD dis-
A: 1 B 2 DITHER CALIB
play section) detection position adjustment
C 1 MULTI COUNT
1 2 result.
D 2 PAPERCS1
Section Operation panel

K C M Y EXECUTE OK Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the simulation.
When the touch panel is not touched at all, the coordinates of
65 X and Y are "0."
2) Touch the touch panel.
65-1 The coordinates of the currently touched position are dis-
Purpose Adjustment played in real time.
* X-coordinates (horizontal direction) and Y-coordinates (verti-
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
cal direction) are displayed in decimal numbers.
play section) detection position.
* When you take your finger off the touch panel, the last dis-
Section Operation panel
play value is displayed. (It does not return to "0.")
Item Adjustment
* As far as the touch panel is properly adjusted, the range of coor-
Operation/Procedure dinates in the LCD display range is:
1) Touch the four cross marks on the screen. The coordinates of X-axis: "0" to "639"
the pressed points are set.
Y-axis: "0" to "239"
* The four cross marks may be touched in any sequence.
* A touched cross mark grays out. 40 20
600
* When all the four marks are touched and in the case of OK, 40
X 0 Y 0 40
the sampled correction value is saved and the display 70

returns to the sub number entry screen. 20 120 220 320 420 520 620
In the case of NG, the display returns to the initial screen. 120
* The correction value sampled by this simulation and the

170
coordinates of sampled positions are used to obtain the 40 600
coordinates from the correction values of the touched posi- 200 200
tion. 220
67
67-24
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Use to execute the printer setting of auto
color calibration.
Section Printer
Item Setting
Operation/Procedure
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the high density pro-
cess control is started and the 48-patch self-printing is
started.
Check to confirm that there is A3 paper in the paper feed
tray. If paper is insufficient, supply it.
2) During the 48-patch self-printing, [EXECUTE] button is high-
lighted.
3) After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
output patch scan start standby screen.

Place the printed 48-patch pattern on the glass table, and (During the 16-patch self-printing)
press [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] button to select the process
mode. 0
4) Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE
and the set 48-patch pattern is scanned. PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
Check to insure that there is A3 paper in the paper feed tray. If ADJUSTED PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS.
paper is insufficient, supply it.

5) After completion of patch scan, the 16-patch self-printing is
automatically started.
EXECUTE
6) After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
registration process standby screen.
When [REPEAT] button is pressed, the correction value is not (The half-tone process control reference value registration screen)
saved and the display returns to the initial screen.
When [OK] button is pressed, the correction value is saved to 0
EEPROM and RAM and the half-tone process control refer- TEST
ence value registration process is started. PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
PLEASE WAIT.
7) The display is shifted to the reference value registration pro-
cess 1 completion screen. The reference value registration NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON.
process 2 (Black) is automatically started.
8) When the reference value registration process 2 (Black) is EXECUTE
completed, the following message is displayed. (Each mes-
sage is automatically shifted.)
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END (All processes complete screen)
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END
0
MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END
YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END
* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE.
displayed.
9) All the registration processes are completed.
* When [CA], [SYSTEM STTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during self-printing, the operation is interrupted.
[Cancel of execution during operation]
To cancel or resume, press [EXECUTE] button.
[Initial Screen] 67-25
Purpose Adjustment
0
CLOSE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the manual correction of the
printer engine color balance.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH. Section Printer

Item Adjustment
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
Operation/Procedure
1) Use [K][C][M][Y] button to select a color. (The selected button
EXECUTE
is highlighted.)
Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
(During the 48-patch printing) The highlighted section of the set value is switched and dis-
0 * If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE item is shifted.
TEST PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS...
item is shifted.
EXECUTE
(The output patch scan screen)
When [OK] button is pressed, the set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
0
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-24 CLOSE * Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE * Use [ ] [ ] buttons to change the set values collectively.
PLEASE WAIT. When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
each item value is increased (decreased) by one. If the set
NOW READING THE PRINTED TEST PATCH value is the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
To change the color balance, change each color set value as
EXECUTE below.

User request Black Cyan Magenta Yellow
Cyan-rich - (increase) decrease decrease Item content Set value Target setting
Magenta-rich - decrease (increase) decrease Target value table DEF1 Standard adjustment setting
Yellowish - decrease decrease (increase) setting DEF2 5% reduced red setting (Color balance
Reddish - decrease decrease (increase) with slightly strong Cyan)
Greenish - (increase) decrease (increase) DEF3 10% reduced red setting (Color
Blueish - (increase) decrease decrease balance with emphasis on Cyan)
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self-

printing is started. 0
* Also when [OK], [], [], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or TEST
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF PRT ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJ
RAM. TARGET TBL : DEF1 DEF2 DEF3
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed and the self-printing is

completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] but-
ton is pressed, self-printing is interrupted. 1/1
<Set range and default value of each value>

Item Item name Set range Default value
67-27
A POINT1 1 to 99 50
B POINT2 1 to 99 50 Purpose Adjustment
C POINT3 1 to 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to display and register the scanner
D POINT4 1 to 99 50 target value (for servicing) of the printer
E POINT5 1 to 99 50 engine auto density adjustment.
F POINT6 1 to 99 50 Section Printer
G POINT7 1 to 99 50
Item Registration
H POINT8 1 to 99 50
I POINT9 1 to 99 50
Operation/Procedure
J POINT10 1 to 99 50 1) When the machine enters Simulation 67-27, the following
K POINT11 1 to 99 50 screen is displayed.
L POINT12 1 to 99 50 * Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to display the data of each color.
M POINT13 1 to 99 50 Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
N POINT14 1 to 99 50 is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K](BLACK) is selected.)
O POINT15 1 to 99 50 2) Press [SETUP] button, and the display is shifted to the sam-
pling start screen.
0 Place the 16-patch pattern printed with SIM67-25 on the glass
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-25 CLOSE table and press [EXECUTE] button.
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PG [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the display is shifted to
A 50 POINT1 the sampling screen.
A: 50 B 50 POINT2
3) After completion of sampling, the display is shifted to the sam-
POINT3
pling result display screen. Press [REPEAT] button to return to
C 50
1 99
D 50 POINT4
the sampling start screen.
K C M Y
4) When [OK] button is pressed, the displayed sampling result is
EXECUTE OK
5) The display returns to the initial screen, and the registered tar-
get value is displayed.
67-26
<Display data content>
Purpose Adjustment
Display data Display content
Function (Purpose) Used to set the reference scanner target B Point B target value
value of the printer engine auto density C Point C target value
adjustment of Simulation 67-24. D Point D target value
Compaired to DEF1, DEF2 and DEF3 are E Point E target value
decreased-red color balance target value. F Point F target value
Section Printer G Point G target value
Item Image quality H Point H target value
Operation/Procedure I Point I target value
J Point J target value
1) When the machine enters Simulation 67-26, the current set
K Point K target value
button of the target value table is highlighted.
L Point L target value
2) When the target value button to be changed is pressed, it is M Point M target value
highlighted and the setting is saved to EEPROM and RAM. N Point N target value
* Only one item can be selected. O Point O target value
3) Excute Simulation 67-24. BASE Base sampling value
* BASE is displayed only on the sampling result display screen.

0 0
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-27 CLOSE TEST SIMULATION 6730 CLOSE
CALIBRATION DATA RELEASE ADJUSTMENT
#B: 91, #C 2944, #D: 3227, #E: 5822, #F: 8600
A 0 (0:YES 1:NO)
#G: 28935, #H: 54344, #I: 86968, #J: 122678, #K: 151198 A: 0
#L: 169731, #M: 195950, #N: 201249, #:O: 207112
0 1
K C M Y SETUP 1/1 OK
67-28
67-31
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) The scanner target value (for servicing) of
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
the printer engine auto density adjustment
is reset to the standard value. Section Printer
Section Scanner Item Clear
Item Image quality Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
and [YES] and [NO] buttons become active. become active.
2) If it is ready for execution, press [YES]. The standard value 2) Press [YES] button.
reset process is executed. [YES] button is highlighted. The printer calibration value is cleared.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE- [YES] button is highlighted.
CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and * The cleared data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
[NO] buttons gray out. * When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXE-
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. CUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
* After completion of the reset process, [EXECUTE] button [NO] buttons gray out.
returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons * After completion of calibration value clear, [EXECUTE] but-
gray out. ton returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] but-
tons gray out.
0
<Clear item>
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIBSERVICE Clear item

1 Printer calibration value
0
YES NO PRINTER CALIBRATION DATA CLEAR

67-30
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main
unit calibration data and the process control
correction data to the client PC by the GDI 67-32
printer.
Purpose Setting
Section Printer
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of screen color
Item Setting change for each object.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item Setting
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values. Operation/Procedure
2) When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is 1) Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is played in the setting area.
<Set range and default value of each setup> item is shifted.
Item Display Content operation is invalid.
range value
A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Delivery of 0 to 1 1 If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
calibration data is item is shifted.
inhibited.
1 Delivery of
calibration data is
allowed. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.

3) When [OK], [], [] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is <Set range and default value of each setup>
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and Default value
Set
RAM. Item Display Description SCREEN1 SCREEN10
range
9 (KCMY) , 11 (K)
A POINT1 Point 1 0 to 255 128 127
Set Default B POINT2 Point 2 0 to 255 128 125
range value C POINT3 Point 3 0 to 255 128 124
A SCREEN 0 Change of screen for 0 to 1 0 D POINT4 Point 4 0 to 255 128 124
(0:YES 1:NO) each object is allowed. (YES) E POINT5 Point 5 0 to 255 128 122
1 Change of screen for F POINT6 Point 6 0 to 255 128 120
each object is inhibited. G POINT7 Point 7 0 to 255 128 114
B COLOR 0 Change of color for 0 to 1 0 H POINT8 Point 8 0 to 255 128 105
(0:YES 1:NO) each object is allowed. (YES)
I POINT9 Point 9 0 to 255 128 95
1 Change of color for
J POINT10 Point 10 0 to 255 128 82
each object is inhibited.
K POINT11 Point 11 0 to 255 128 70
L POINT12 Point 12 0 to 255 128 64
0 M POINT13 Point 13 0 to 255 128 57
TEST SIMULATION NO.67-32 CLOSE N POINT14 Point 14 0 to 255 128 62
O POINT15 Point 15 0 to 255 128 75
MODE
A :0 SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO)
<Selectable items on the screen>
A: 0 B:0 COLOR(0:YES 1:NO)
Display Content
0 1 SCREEN1 4bit_LOW (Photo)
SCREEN2 4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
OK SCREEN3 1bit_LOW (Photo)
SCREEN4 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
SCREEN5 4bit_CAD
67-33 SCREEN6 Mono (600 x 600) (*)
SCREEN7 Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
Purpose Adjustment
SCREEN8 Toner save 1bit_LOW (Photo)
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the gamma correction SCREEN9 Toner save 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
between printer screens. (for PCL) SCREEN10 Toner save Mono (600 x 600) (*)
Section Printer SCREEN11 Toner save Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
Item Adjustment (*): When SCREEN6/SCREEN7/SCREEN10/SCREEN11 is dis-
Operation/Procedure played, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y] button is pressed, the gray-
1) Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to select a color. (The selected color out keys are disabled.
button is highlighted.)
Use [SCREEN] button to select a screen. (In this example, 0
SCREEN2 is selected.) TEST SIMULATION NO.67-33 CLOSE
Select the set item with [] and [] buttons. PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT(SCREEN 1)
A128
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is dis- ; POINT1
played in the setting area. A: 128 B128 ; POINT2
C128 ; POINT3
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and 0 255 D128 ; POINT4
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the K C M Y SCREEN OK
item is shifted.
* Use [ ] [ ] buttons to change the set values collectively.
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [], [], [ ], [ ] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.

67-33
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the gamma correction
between printer screens. (for GDI)
Section Printer
Item Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1) Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to select a color. (The selected color
button is highlighted.)
Use [SCREEN] button to select a screen. (In this example,
SCREEN2 is selected.)
Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
item is shifted.
item is shifted.
* Use [ ] [ ] buttons to change the set values collectively.
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
3) When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [], [], [ ], [ ] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Default value
Item Display Description Set range SCREEN13 SCREEN2
K C M Y
A POINT1 Point 1 0 to 255 128 128 128 128 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 to 255 128 128 128 128 127
C POINT3 Point 3 0 to 255 128 127 127 128 127
D POINT4 Point 4 0 to 255 128 127 128 128 127
E POINT5 Point 5 0 to 255 128 127 127 126 126
F POINT6 Point 6 0 to 255 128 127 126 127 126
G POINT7 Point 7 0 to 255 128 123 124 124 123
H POINT8 Point 8 0 to 255 128 119 122 122 123
I POINT9 Point 9 0 to 255 128 111 116 117 121
J POINT10 Point 10 0 to 255 128 112 113 112 117
K POINT11 Point 11 0 to 255 128 106 108 115 116
L POINT12 Point 12 0 to 255 128 110 113 110 115
M POINT13 Point 13 0 to 255 128 120 112 117 118
N POINT14 Point 14 0 to 255 128 110 119 120 118
O POINT15 Point 15 0 to 255 128 110 119 121 116
<Selectable items on the screen>

0
Display Content
SCREEN1 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 1bit Graphic PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT(SCREEN 1)
SCREEN3 1bit Mono (*) A128 ; POINT1
A: 128 B128 ; POINT2

(*): When SCREEN3 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y] C128 ; POINT3
button is pressed, the gray-out keys are disabled. 0 255 D128 ; POINT4
K C M Y SCREEN OK

[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE Service Manual
MX3500N
1. Self diag C. Self diag operation and related work flow

The machine always monitors its own state.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum-
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
displays the trouble message.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the nearly expired or is expired.
machine to minimize the damage. When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
A. Function and purpose
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a the LCD.
trouble.)
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
stopped on detection of a trouble.) tion.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
improving the repair efficiency.) sages must be cleared by a simulation.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Monitors the machine
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- conditions.
sumable part.)
Detects/analyzes
B. Self diag message kinds the content.
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by

the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life Warning
Trouble/Warning
expiration, etc.)
Serviceman Warning of troubles which can be recovered only
by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, Trouble
etc.)
Other The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Other
Warning A consumable NO
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime.
Trouble YES
Troubleshoot the cause. Replace or supply

the consumable part.
Repair
Cancel the self-

diagnostic message with
the diagnostics
(test commands).
Reset
Standby state
MX3500N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan Notification
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan FAX FAX List
block (including Scan pull To Print to FAST
push send print print
interruption) HDD host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 { { { { 1 1 { { 1
(North
America
only)
HDD trouble E7 (03)
SCU communication E7 (80), A0-02 { { { {
trouble
PCU communication E7 (90), A0-01 {
trouble L8-20
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) {
Printer port system trouble F9 (00) { { { { {
*13 *14
Controller fan motor L4-30
trouble
Connection trouble (MFP E7 (60 65),
detection) A0 (10 12, 20)
Serial number U2 (30)
discrepancy
Memory error (included U2 (00, 05, 10, {
not installed the expansion 11, 22, 23, 24,
RAM) 25)
HDD registration data sum U2 (50) {
error
Image memory trouble, E7 (00, 01, 05, {
decode error 06, 08, 09)
Network error Not displayed. { { { { { { { {
(Only the Operatable Operatable
message for but send but send
each trouble is NG NG
displayed.)
Process control trouble F2 (80 87) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (MFP
detection)
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 28, 29), {
L6 (10) * 10
Connection trouble (PCU E7 (50, 55),
detection) A0 (21)
PCU section troubles H2, H3, H4, H5, {
(motor, fusing, etc.) L4 (excluding L4- * 10
30), U2 (90, 91),
F2 (40, 64, 70,
74), L8 (01, 02)
PCU color system E7 (21), F2 (41 {
troubles 43, 65 67, 71 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9
73, 75 77) * 10
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3-12 3 { { { { 3 3 3 {
* 10
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3-22 3 { { { { 3 3 3 {
* 10
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6-01 3 { { { { 3 3 3 {
* 10
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6-02 3 { { { { 3 3 3 {
* 10
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 (09, 20 22, 3 { { { { 3 3 3 {
51) * 10
Paper feed tray other U6 (00, 10, 50) 11 { { { { 11 11 11 {
troubles * 10
Staple trouble F1 (10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 {
* 10
After-process trouble F1 (excluding 10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 {
* 10
Other troubles PCU EE (EL, EU, EC) { { { { { { { { {
Process control trouble F2 (39, 44, 45, { { { { { { { { {
(PCU detection) 49, 50, 51, 58, * 12
78)

Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan Scan Notification
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan FAX FAX List
block (including Scan pull To Print to FAST
push send print print
interruption) HDD host
Connection trouble (SCU SCU E7 (70, 75),
detection) A0 (22)
SCU color system UC (02) { { { {
troubles
Document control trouble UC (20) { { { {
EEPROM system U2 (80, 81) { { { {
Scanner section troubles L1, L3 { { { {
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading, E7 (10, 11, 14) { { { {
etc.)
Process control trouble MFP F2 (80 87, 90) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (MFP
detection)
Process control trouble PCU F2 (91 94) { { { { { { { { {
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
{: Operation enabled, : Operation disabled
1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * When, however,
the right tray is set.
* 9: When the color mode is set to Disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the Black
mode.
* 10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
* 12: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
*13 : When EFI is installed, PCL and GDI will not operate. (Machine specifications) (Exclusive)
*14 : Only EFI list print (self print) is disabled.
* Trouble mode process
Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
The operations excluding the trouble mode are enabled (READY). For the mode where operations are disabled, only setting is enabled and
the operation disable message is made.
(NOT READY)
(Display) A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message.
When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U 3, 4, 11, perform the following procedures. (In order to avoid patent interference.)
When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
When a trouble is detected during other than a JOB, the trouble display is not made and the trouble position cannot be selected. (The dis-
play is not turned off. Machine/Button)
Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made, and all the modes cannot be set.
Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM 26-35. When this simulation is set, any trouble is written to the
trouble memory unconditionally.
(Sim.26-35)
0: Only once. If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: Any time. Though same as the previous one, it is saved.

(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
When the power is turned ON and each trouble of H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, PF, U6 (09) is stored, it is judged as a trouble immediately.
MFP event
Each block
manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, PF, U6 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing check is made in each block.
and data are sent to the MFPcnt. Communication of trouble status
H3, H4, H5: Saved in the MFPcnt. [Trouble code] [Trouble status]
U1: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U2: Saved in each block.
PF: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U6-09: Saved in the PCU.
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
(To the corresponding

SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel block) Trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory is
cancel) initialized.)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel Trouble cancel status is communicated.
2. Trouble code list

Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble code content Remarks Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
A0 01 PCU ROM abnormality PCU
02 SCU ROM abnormality Scanner
10 Controller ROM error MFP
11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU) MFP
12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU) MFP
20 Machine level error (CTL detection) MFP
21 Machine level error (PCU detection) PCU
22 Machine level error (SCU detection) Scanner
CE 00 Communication error other than CE-01 08 The trouble MFP
01 Network controller trouble code is not MFP
02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error displayed, MFP
03 Communication error in image send but only the MFP
message for
04 FTP server account name or authentication password MFP
each trouble
input error
is displayed.
05 FTP server directory input error MFP
06 POP3 server access error MFP
07 POP3 server authentication check error MFP
08 POP3 server timeout error MFP
E6 10 Back-face shading trouble black correction (DSPF) Scanner
11 Shading trouble white correction (DSPF) Scanner
14 Back-face ASIC communication trouble (DSPF) Scanner
E7 00 System memory access error MFP
01 System data trouble MFP
03 HDD trouble MFP
05 Local memory access error MFP
06 Decode error trouble: Compression decode error (A MFP
compression file cannot decompressed.)
08 Local memory specifications error MFP
09 Local memory combination error MFP
10 Shading trouble (Black correction) Scanner
11 Shading trouble (White correction) Scanner
14 SCAN-ASIC trouble Scanner

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
E7 20 LSU BD detection trouble PCU
21 LSU LD deterioration trouble PCU
28 LSU control ASIC connection abnormality PCU
29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality PCU
50 Engine connection trouble PCU
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU
60 Controller connection trouble (Engine detection) MFP
61 Controller connection trouble (Engine) MFP
62 Controller connection trouble (Scanner) MFP
65 PWB information sum error (Controller detection) MFP
70 Scanner connection trouble SCU
75 PWB information sum error (Scanner detection) SCU
80 Communication trouble between the controller and the MFP
scanner
90 Communication trouble between the controller and the MFP
engine
EE EC Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level PCU
for every rotation is other than 128 10.)
EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (overtoner error) PCU
EU Auto development adjustment trouble (Under-toner PCU
abnormality)
F1 00 Finisher communication trouble (Machine side PCU
detection)
02 Saddle finisher transport motor trouble PCU
03 Finisher paddle motor trouble (MX-FNX2), finisher PCU
swing motor trouble (MX-FNX1)
08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble PCU
10 Finisher staple motor abnormality PCU
11 Finisher bundle process motor abnormality PCU
15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality PCU
19 Finisher pre-alignment motor abnormality PCU
20 Finisher after-alignment motor abnormality PCU
21 Finisher fan motor abnormality (MX-FNX1), Finisher PCU
interface fan motor abnormality (MX-FNX2)
31 Finisher folding sensor trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU
32 Communication trouble between the finisher and the PCU
punch unit (MX-FN2)
33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble PCU
34 Finisher punch motor trouble PCU
35 Finisher punch side registration sensor trouble (MX- PCU
FNX2)
36 Finisher punch registration sensor trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU
38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU
39 Finisher punch dust sensor trouble (MX-FNX2) PCU
40 Saddle finisher punch power interruption trouble (MX- PCU
FNX2)
50 Finisher incompatibility trouble PCU
F2 39 Process thermistor trouble PCU
40 Toner empty sensor abnormality (BLACK) PCU
41 Toner empty sensor abnormality (CYAN) PCU
42 Toner empty sensor abnormality (MAGENTA) PCU
43 Toner empty sensor abnormality (YELLOW) PCU
44 Black exclusive image density sensor trouble (Transfer PCU
belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
45 Color exclusive image density sensor trouble PCU
(Calibration plate surface reflection ratio abnormality)
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU
50 K phase sensor sensing trouble PCU
51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble PCU
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU
64 Toner supply abnormality error (BLACK) PCU
65 Toner supply abnormality error (CYAN) PCU
66 Toner supply abnormality error (MAGENTA) PCU
67 Toner supply abnormality error (YELLOW) PCU
70 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection (BLACK) PCU
71 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection (CYAN) PCU
72 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection PCU
(MAGENTA)

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
F2 73 Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection PCU
(YELLOW)
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK) PCU
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN) PCU
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA) PCU
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW) PCU
78 Registration exclusive image density sensor trouble PCU
(Transfer belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
80 Half tone process control 1st patch reference value PCU
trouble (BLACK)
trouble (CYAN)
trouble (MAGENTA)
trouble (YELLOW)
84 Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value PCU
trouble (BLACK)
trouble (CYAN)
trouble (MAGENTA)
trouble (YELLOW)
92 High-density process control density correction error PCU
(CYAN)
(MAGENTA)
(YELLOW)
F3 12 Main unit tray 1 lift-up trouble PCU
22 Main unit tray 2 lift-up trouble PCU
F6 00 Communication trouble between the ICU and the FAX Refer to FAX manual for details
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX soft switch
30 Access error to power controller on the FAX board
(FAX detection)
97 FAX PWB incompatibility trouble
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB
destination information and the machine destination
information.
F9 00 Communication trouble between the controller and the MFP
printer controller (EF1)
H2 00 Non-contact thermistor detection thermistor open PCU
(TH_UM_AD2)
01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US) PCU
03 Non-contact thermistor compensation thermistor open PCU
(TH_UM_AD1)
04 Hang-up preventing thermistor open (TH-US) PCU
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor fusing section high temperature trouble PCU
(TH_US)
04 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU
02 Sub thermistor fusing section low temperature trouble PCU
(TH_US)
30 Thermistor differential input trouble (TH_UM) PCU
H5 01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam PCU
L1 00 Mirror feed trouble Scanner
L3 00 Mirror return trouble Scanner
L4 02 Paper feed motor lock trouble PCU
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU
06 Transfer belt separation position sensor trouble PCU
11 Shift motor trouble PCU

Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
L4 30 Controller fan/HDD fan motor trouble MFP
31 Paper exit cooling fan/Toner hopper fan trouble PCU
32 Power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection LSUcnt
L8 01 No full wave signal PCU
02 Full wave signal width abnormality PCU
20 Power controller communication trouble MFP
PC -- Personal counter not installed MFP
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP
U2 00 EEPROM read/write error (MFP detection) MFP
05 HDD/Flash/EEPROM data discrepancy MFP
10 SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP
11 EEPROM check sum error (MFP detection) MFP
22 SRAM memory check sum error MFP
23 MFPC section SRAM memory individual data check MFP
sum error
24 SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum MFP
error
25 Flash memory user authentication counter check sum MFP
error
30 Serial number data discrepancy (MFP PCU) MFP
50 HDD section individual data check sum error MFP
80 EEPROM read/write error (SCU detection) Scanner
81 Adjustment value check sum error (SCU detection) Scanner
90 EEPROM read/write error (PCU detection) PCU
91 EEPROM (PCU) check sum error PCU
U5 00 SPF communication trouble Scanner
16 SPF fan motor trouble Scanner
30 SPF tray lift-up trouble Scanner
31 SPF tray lift-down trouble Scanner
40 SPF install trouble Scanner
U6 00 Desk communication trouble PCU
01 Tray 1 lift-up trouble PCU
02 Tray 2 lift-up trouble PCU
09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU
10 Desk transport motor trouble PCU
20 LCC communication trouble PCU
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU
22 LCC 24V power abnormality PCU
50 Desk incompatibility trouble PCU
51 LCC incompatibility trouble PCU
UC 02 CPT-ASIC abnormality Scanner
20 Document control module trouble Scanner
3. Details of trouble code A0-10 Controller ROM error

A0-01 PCU ROM abnormality Trouble content SFU combination error in the controller
Section MFP
Trouble content PCU ROM content trouble Case 1 Cause SFU upgrade was not properly made when upgrading
Section PCU the firmware.
Case 1 Cause Firmware upgrade is not made properly due to power Check Controller firmware upgrade
OFF, etc. and
Check Use SIM49-1 to upgrade the firmware. remedy
and
remedy
A0-11 IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU)
A0-02 SCU ROM abnormality Trouble content Combination error between CTL and PCU
Section MFP
Trouble content SCU ROM content trouble Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and PCU
Section Scanner Check Check the firmware combination between CTL and
Case 1 Cause Some part of SFU is not upgraded during upgrading of and PCU.
the firmware. remedy
Check Use SIM49-1 to execute the firmware.
and
remedy

A0-12 IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU) CE-02 Not-specified mail/FTP server error
Trouble content Combination error between CTL and SCU Trouble content The specified mail server, FTP server, and SMB
Section MFP server are not found
Case 1 Cause Combination error between CTL and SCU Section MFP
Check Check the firmware combination between CTL and Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
and SCU. Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
remedy and connected.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Network setup trouble
A0-20 Machine level error (CTL detection) Check 1) Check that the connected network supports TCP/
and IP protocol.
remedy 2) Check from Web page that the Primary/
Trouble content Combination error between the machine production/
Secondary E-mail Server Address or the FTP
remodeling and the firmware
server/Desktop PC/SMB server address as the
Section MFP
destination is properly set.
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine production/ 3) When the above address is described with the
remodeling and the firmware Hostname, check that the DNS server is properly
Check Check the combination between the machine set or not.
and production/remodeling and the firmware. Case 3 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
remedy
Check Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server
and for any trouble.
remedy
A0-21 Machine level error (PCU detection)
Trouble content Combination error between the machine production/ CE-03 Communication error in image send
Section PCU Trouble content The specified server does not respond during image
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine production/ send.
remodeling and the firmware Section MFP
Check Check the combination between the machine Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
and production/remodeling and the firmware. Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
remedy and connected.
remedy
Case 2 Cause SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
A0-22 Machine level error (SCU detection) Check Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server
and for any trouble.
Trouble content Combination error between the machine production/ remedy
Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the machine production/ CE-04 FTP server account name or authenti-
remodeling and the firmware cation password input error
Check Check the combination between the machine
and production/remodeling and the firmware.
remedy Trouble content The entered FTP server account name or the
authentication password is invalid.
The entered SMB server log-in name or the password
is invalid.
CE-00 Communication error other than CE-
Section MFP
01 08 Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely
Trouble content Another communication error occurs. and connected.
Section MFP remedy
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the
Check Check to insure that the network cable is securely destination or the password for the account is
and connected. incorrect.
remedy Check Check to insure that the FTP server account name
and registered as the destination or the password for the
remedy account is correct.
CE-01 Network controller trouble Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the
destination or the password for the account is
incorrect.
Trouble content Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble Check Check to insure that the SMB server account name
Section MFP and registered as the destination or the password for the
Case 1 Cause Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble remedy account is correct.
Check 1) Check the network controller and its peripheral
and circuit.
remedy 2) Output the NIC Config Page and check the NIC
version.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.

CE-05 FTP server directory input error E6-10 Back-face shading trouble black
correction (DSPF)
Trouble content The entered FTP server directory is invalid.
The entered SMB server folder is invalid. Trouble content CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy
Section MFP lamp is turned off. (MX-3501N/4501N)
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Section Scanner
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
remedy connected.
Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
Case 2 Cause The FTP server account name registered as the remedy CCD unit.
destination or the password for the account is Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality
incorrect.
Check and Check the CCD unit.
Check and Check to insure that there exits the FTP server remedy
remedy directory registered as the destination.
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
Case 3 Cause The SMB server account name registered as the
Check and Check the SCU PWB.
destination or the password for it is incorrect.
remedy
Check and Check to insure that there exists the SMB server
remedy folder registered as the destination.
E6-11 Shading trouble white correction
CE-06 POP3 server access error (DSPF)
Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) is not found. Trouble content CCD white scan level abnormality when the copy
(POP3 server access error) lamp is on. (MX-3501N/4501N)
Section MFP Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
remedy connected. remedy CCD unit.
Case 2 Cause Network setup error Case 2 Cause Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
Check and 1) Check that the connected network supports plate.
remedy TCP/IP protocol. Check and Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
2) Check the Web page to insure that the POP3 remedy plate.
server address is correctly set. Case 3 Cause Copy lamp lighting trouble
3) If the above address is described in Check and Check the installing state of the flat cable to the
Hostname, check to insure that the DNS remedy copy lamp unit.
server is correctly set. Case 4 Cause CCD unit abnormality
Case 3 Cause PO3 server trouble Check and Check the CCD unit.
Check and Check the POP3 server for any trouble. remedy
remedy Case 5 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
Check and Check the SCU PWB.
remedy
CE-07 POP3 server authentication check
error
E6-14 Back-face SCAN-ASIC trouble
Trouble content The entered POP3 server account name or the
authentication password is invalid. (POP3 server Trouble content Written register value cannot be read correctly
authentication check error) Section Scanner
Section MFP Case 1 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble Check and Check the SCU PWB.
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely remedy
remedy connected.
Case 2 Cause The POP3 server account name or the password
registered for the account is incorrect.
Check and Check to insure that the POP3 server account
remedy name or the password for the account is correct.
CE-08 POP3 server timeout error
Trouble content The specified mail server (POP3) does not

respond. (POP3 server timeout error)
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Network cable connection trouble
Check and Check to insure that the network cable is securely
remedy connected.
Case 2 Cause POP3 server trouble
Check and Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
remedy

E7-00 System memory access error E7-05 Local memory access error
Trouble content System memory trouble (Tandem memory cannot be Trouble content Local memory cannot be accessed.
guaranteed.) Section MFP
Access to system memory cannot be made. Case 1 Cause Local memory installation abnormality
Section MFP Check Check the installing state of the local memory.
Case 1 Cause Expansion memory instillation error and
Check Check installation of the system expansion memory. remedy
and Case 2 Cause Dirt on local memory pin
remedy Check Clean the local memory pin with alcohol.
Case 2 Cause Garbled data and
Check 1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write remedy
and 2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.) Case 3 Cause Garbled data
remedy 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB. Check 1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write.
Case 3 Cause Dirt on the memory pin and 2) Replace the memory.
Check Clean the memory pin with alcohol. remedy 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
and
* Combination where local memory Slot 4 (inside) and Slot 3 (out-
remedy
side) operate normally (Refer to E7-09) but a hard error occurs.
* When E7-00 is in the following combination where system mem-
ory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a
hard error occurs. (Combination of system memory (slot 1, slot 2) E7-06 Decode error trouble: Compression
System memory Operation guarantee
decode error (A compression file
When turning cannot decompressed.)
No. Slot2 Slot1
Hard Soft on the power
(Inside) (Outside)
1 Since the Trouble content A decode error occurs when forming an image.
machine is not
Section MFP
booted, the
Case 1 Cause Compression data abnormality
trouble display is
not made. Check 1) Check the installing state of the PWB. (PCI bus)
and 2) When an error occurs during a FAX job, check
2 256MB { { Normal operation
remedy the installation of the FAX PWB. In the other
cases, check the installation of the MFPcnt PWB
4 256MB 256MB { { Normal operation and HDD.
5 512MB 256MB { { Normal operation 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
6 256MB 512MB { { Normal operation Case 2 Cause HDD connection abnormality
7 512MB 512MB { { Normal operation Check Check the HDD connection.
8 256MB { { Normal operation and
9 512MB { { Normal operation remedy
Case 3 Cause Data are garbled in image compression/send.
Check 1) Check the installation of the PWB. (PCI bus)
E7-01 System data trouble and 2) When an error occurs during a FAX job, check
remedy the installation of the FAX PWB. In the other
cases, check the installation of the MFPcnt PWB
Trouble content ICU data trouble occurs.
and HDD.
Section MFP 3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 1 Cause ICU image transfer trouble Case 4 Cause MFPcnt PWB abnormality
Check 1) Check the connection state of the MFPcnt PWB Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
and connector. and
remedy 2) Replace the MFPcnt PWB. remedy
Case 5 Cause Local memory access trouble
Check Check and execute remedy similarly to E7-05.
E7-03 HDD trouble and
remedy
Trouble content HDD connection trouble
File control area data trouble (when FAT is broken)
Section MFP E7-08 Local memory specifications error
Case 1 Cause The HDD is not properly installed to the MFPcnt PWB
Check 1) Check installation of the HDD of the MFPcnt Trouble content DIMM of different specification is detected in the local
and PWB. memory slot.
remedy 2) Check connection of the harness of the MFPcnt Section MFP
PWB.
Case 1 Cause DIMM of different specification is installed to the local
3) Use SIM62-2 and -3 to check read/write from/to
memory slot.
the HDD.
Check Check the installed DIMM.
Case 2 Cause The HDD does not work properly.
and
Check Replace the HDD. remedy
and
remedy * The error occurs when a DIMM which is not recommended by
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB trouble Sharp.
Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
and
remedy

E7-09 Local memory combination error E7-11 Shading trouble (White correction)
Trouble content Local memory slot combination error Trouble content CCD white scan level abnormality when the copy lamp
Section MFP is on.
Case 1 Cause DIMM of other than 256MB is installed to the default Section Scanner
slot. Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
Check Check the combination of installed DIMM. Check Check the installing state of the flat cable to the CCD
and and unit.
remedy remedy
Case 2 Cause DIMM of other than 256MB is installed to the Case 2 Cause Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
expansion slot. plate.
Check Check the combination of installed DIMM. Check Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate.
and and
remedy remedy
* When the following combination (E7-09) where operation is not Case 3 Cause Copy lamp lighting trouble
performed properly is used. Local memory (slot 3, slot 4) combi- Check Check the installing state of the flat cable to the copy
and lamp unit.
nation
remedy
Local memory Operation guarantee Case 4 Cause CCD unit abnormality
When turning Check Check the CCD unit.
No. Slot 4 Slot 3
Hard Soft on the power and
(Inside) (Outside)
remedy
1 E7-09
Case 5 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
Check Check the SCU PWB.
3 512MB { E7-09
and
4 256MB 256MB { E7-09
remedy
5 512MB 256MB { E7-09
6 256MB 512MB { { Normal operation
7 512MB 512MB { E7-09 E7-14 SCAN-ASIC trouble
8 256MB E7-09
9 512MB E7-09
Trouble content Written register value cannot be read correctly
Section Scanner
E7-10 Shading trouble (Black correction) Case 1 Cause SCU PWB abnormality
and
Trouble content CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy lamp remedy
is turned off.
Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable E7-20 LSU BD detection trouble
Check Check the installing state of the flat cable to the CCD
and unit.
remedy Trouble content LSU BD signal is not detected.
Case 2 Cause CCD unit abnormality Section PCU
Check Check the CCD unit. Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
and connector between LD/BD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
remedy Check Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside
Case 3 Cause SCU PWB abnormality and the LSU.
remedy
and Case 2 Cause 1) Optical axis shift
remedy 2) BK laser deterioration, power reduction
3) BD PWB trouble
Check 1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
and 2) Replace the LSUcnt/BD PWB.
remedy 3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the above 1)
to 2), replace the LSU.
E7-21 LSU LD deterioration trouble
Trouble content The color laser does not light up normally.

Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
connector between LD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
Check Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside
and the LSU.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Y/M/C laser deterioration
Check 1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
and 2) Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
remedy 3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the above 1)
to 2), replace the LSU.

E7-28 LSU control ASIC connection abnor- E7-60 Controller connection trouble
mality (Engine detection)
Trouble content Access error between the CPU of the PCU PWB Trouble content Unknown PWB kind information is detected in the
and the LSU control ASIC MFPcnt PWB.
Section PCU A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
Case 1 Cause <When this trouble occurs in the initial process on machine specifications is connected.
turn on the power> Section MFP
Communication connector trouble between the Case 1 Cause Controller PWB trouble
PCU PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB). Check and Replace the controller PWB.
Harness trouble. remedy
Check and Check the connector connection between the PCU Case 2 Cause A firmware which is not compatible with the
remedy PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB). machine specifications is applied.
Check the harness. If the trouble cannot be Check and Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
removed, replace the LSUcnt PWB or the PCU remedy
PWB.
Case 2 Cause <When this trouble occurs on starting printing/
during printing, and SIM61-1 is used to check the E7-61 Controller connection trouble
LSU unit operation for each of B/W and COLOR
and the judgment is NG.> (Engine)
Connected the connector between the PCU PWB
and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB) / Harness Trouble content MFPcnt PWB connection trouble
trouble Compatibility trouble between the controller and
Check and Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the the engine
remedy LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB). If the trouble cannot Section MFP
be removed, replace the LSUcnt PWB or the PCU Case 1 Cause Combination trouble of the controller PWB and the
PWB. engine
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB or LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB) Check and Check the controller PWB.
trouble remedy Check the combination between the controller
Check and Replace the PCU PWB or the LSUcnt PWB PWB and the engine.
remedy (interface PWB).
E7-62 Controller connection trouble

E7-29 LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality
(Scanner)
Trouble content Oscillation trouble of the external oscillator used in
Trouble content Controller connection trouble
LSU-ASIC and the internal oscillation circuit
Compatibility trouble between the controller and
Section PCU
the scanners
Case 1 Cause Trouble of the oscillator on the LSU-ASIC PWB,
Section MFP
the resistor and capacitor for the oscillation circuit,
Case 1 Cause Combination trouble between the controller PWB
and the LSU-ASIC itself.
and the engine
Check and Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Check and Replace the controller PWB.
remedy
remedy Check the combination between the controller
PWB and the engine.
E7-50 Engine connection trouble
E7-65 PWB information sum error
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is
detected in the PCU PWB.
(Controller detection)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause A PWB which is incompatible with the machine Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
specifications is connected. Section MFP
Check and 1) Replace the PCU PWB. Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
remedy 2) Replace the LSU PWB. 2) EEPROM device contact failure
Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine 3) Device access error due to noises
specifications is used. Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Check and Check the kind and the version of the firmware. remedy
remedy
E7-70 Scanner connection trouble

E7-55 PWB information sum error
(Engine detection) Trouble content Unknown identification information is detected in
the SCU PWB.
Section SCU
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB trouble
Section PCU
Check and Replace the SCU PWB.
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device error
remedy
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to noises Case 2 Cause A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is connected.
Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
Check and Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
remedy
remedy

E7-75 PWB information sum error EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble
(Scanner detection) (overtoner error)
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error Trouble content The sample level is 76 or below, or the control
Section SCU voltage is 208V or above. <Detection only with
Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble SIM25-2, no trouble memory, only display>
2) EEPROM device contact failure Section PCU
3) Device access error due to noises Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
Check and Replace the scanner control PWB. developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
remedy developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development
remedy adjustment.
E7-80 Communication trouble between the
controller and the scanner
EE-EU Auto development adjustment trouble
Trouble content Communication trouble between the MFP and the
(Under-toner abnormality)
scanner MFP detection
Communication establishment error/Framing/ Trouble content The sample level is 178 or above, or the control
Parity/Protocol error voltage is 51V or below. <Detection only with
Section MFP SIM25-2, no trouble memory, only display>
Case 1 Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble Section PCU
Check and Check the connector connection between the SCU Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
remedy PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the SCU PWB and the developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
MFPcnt PWB Check and Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development
Check and Check the harness between the SCU PWB and remedy adjustment.
remedy the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the SCU PWB mother
board F1-00 Finisher communication trouble
Check and Check grounding of the machine. (Machine side detection)
remedy
Trouble content Communication line test error when turning on the

power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
E7-90 Communication trouble between the Communication error with the finisher
controller and the engine Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to noises
Trouble content Communication trouble between the MFP and the Check and Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
PCU (MFP detection) remedy
Communication establishment error/Framing/ Case 2 Cause PCU finisher connector or harness connection
Parity/Protocol error error or disconnection
Section MFP Check and Check the connector and harness in the
Case 1 Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble remedy communication line.
Check and Check the connector connection between the PCU Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble
remedy PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
Case 2 Cause Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the remedy
MFPcnt PWB Case 4 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Check and Check the harness between the PCU PWB and Check and Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy the MFPcnt PWB. remedy
Case 3 Cause Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB mother
board
Check and Check grounding of the machine. F1-02 Saddle finisher transport motor
remedy trouble
EE-EC Auto developer adjustment trouble Trouble content Transport drive motor trouble
Section PCU
(The sample level for every rotation is Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
other than 128 10). overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the transport
Trouble content Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample remedy motor (FFM).
level for every rotation is other than 128 10.) Replace the finisher control PWB.
<Detection only with SIM25-2, no trouble memory,
only display>
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development
remedy adjustment.

F1-03 Finisher paddle motor trouble (MX- F1-20 Finisher after-alignment motor
FNX2), finisher swing motor trouble abnormality
(MX-FNX1)
Trouble content After-alignment motor trouble
Trouble content Paddle motor operation trouble (MX-FNX2) Section PCU
Swing motor operation trouble (MX-FNX1) Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Section PCU overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the after-
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble remedy alignment motor (FRJM).
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the motor Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy (FPM/FSWM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-21 Finisher fan motor abnormality (MX-
FNX1), Finisher interface fan motor
F1-08 Finisher stapler shift motor trouble abnormality (MX-FNX2)
Trouble content Stapler shift motor operation trouble
Trouble content Cooling fan motor trouble (MX-FNX1)
Section PCU Interface transport fan motor trouble (MX-FNX2)
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
remedy motor (FSM).
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan
remedy motor (FFAM/FJFM).
F1-10 Finisher staple motor abnormality

F1-31 Finisher folding sensor trouble
Trouble content Staple operation trouble (MX-FNX2)
Section PCU
Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality
overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble
Section PCU
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
remedy motor (FFSM). Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
Replace the finisher control PWB. control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor
remedy (FFPD).
F1-11 Finisher bundle process motor Replace the finisher control PWB.
abnormality
F1-32 Communication trouble between the
Trouble content Bundle process motor trouble finisher and the punch unit (MX-FN2)
Section PCU
Trouble content Finisher and punch unit communication trouble
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble (MX-
(MX-FNX2)
FNX2)
Section PCU
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle
remedy process motor (FAM). Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to noises
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check and Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
remedy
Case 2 Cause Connector/harness connection error or
F1-15 Finisher tray lift motor abnormality disconnection between the finisher and the punch
unit
Check and Check the connector and the harness in the
Trouble content Lift motor trouble remedy communication line.
Section PCU Case 3 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Check and Replace the finisher control PWB.
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble remedy
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the tray lift Case 4 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
remedy motor (FLM/FTLM).
Check and Replace the control PWB (PCU) trouble
remedy
F1-19 Finisher pre-alignment motor F1-33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble
abnormality
Trouble content Punch shift motor operation abnormality
Trouble content Pre-alignment motor trouble Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the pre- Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
remedy alignment motor (FFJM). remedy shift motor (FPSM).
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
punch control PWB.).

F1-34 Finisher punch motor trouble F1-39 Finisher punch dust sensor trouble
(MX-FNX2)
Trouble content Punch motor operation abnormality
Section PCU Trouble content Punch dust sensor detection trouble
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor Section PCU
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2) control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch control
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
remedy motor (FPNW).
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the
remedy punch dust sensor (FPDD).
Replace the finisher control PWB or the punch
control PWB.
F1-35 Finisher punch side registration sen-

sor trouble (MX-FNX2) F1-40 Saddle finisher punch power
interruption trouble (MX-FNX2)
Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality
Section PCU Trouble content When the punch unit power interruption is
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, saddle detected.
finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch Section PCU
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Case 1 Cause Harness disconnection, punch control PWB
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the punch trouble
remedy section sensor (FPSHPD/FPSD1-4).
Check and Use SIM3-3 to check the operation punch motor
remedy (FPNW).
F1-36 Finisher punch registration sensor

trouble (MX-FNX2) F1-50 Finisher incompatibility trouble
Trouble content Sensor input value abnormality Trouble content Detection of finisher incompatible with MX-3500**/
Section PCU 4500**/3501**/4501**
Case 1 Cause Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, saddle Section PCU
finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch Case 1 Cause Connection of the AR-F13, etc. which is
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2) incompatible with MX-3500**/4500**/3501**/
Check and Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the punch 4501** is detected.
remedy timing sensor (FPTD). Check and Connect the MX-FNX1/MX-FNX2.
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the remedy
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble

F1-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble
Trouble content Process thermistor open
Trouble content Backup RAM data garbled Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Process thermistor harness connection trouble
Case 1 Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, malfunction due to Check and Check the connection of the harness, connector of
electrical noises remedy the process thermistor.
Check and Replace the finisher control PWB. Case 2 Cause Process thermistor trouble
remedy Check and Check the connection of the process thermistor.
remedy
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble
F1-38 Finisher punch backup RAM trouble Check and Check the PCU PWB.
(MX-FNX2) remedy
Trouble content Punch unit backup RAM data garbled

F2-40 Toner empty sensor abnormality
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Punch control PWB trouble, malfunction due to (BLACK)
electrical noises
Check and Replace the punch control PWB. Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample
remedy level 25 or less or 231 or above.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
Check and Check the connection of the connector harness to
remedy the PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner
empty sensor.
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble
Check and Check the harness disconnection.
remedy
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble
Check and Check the cartridge connection.
remedy

F2-41 Toner empty sensor abnormality F2-44 Black exclusive image density sensor
(CYAN) trouble (Transfer belt surface
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
25 or less or 231 or above.
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image
Section PCU density sensor before starting the process control, and
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed. adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a
Check Check the connection of the connector harness to the certain level. However, the output is not within the
and PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty specified range though the senor gain is adjusted.
remedy sensor. Section PCU
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
Check Check the harness disconnection. trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
and sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
remedy cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid operation
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble trouble
Check Check the cartridge connection. Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control sensor
and and gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy remedy sensor, the harness, the calibration plate solenoid
operation for any trouble. If the adjustment is
completed, check the transfer belt surface state.
F2-42 Toner empty sensor abnormality
(MAGENTA) F2-45 Color exclusive image density sensor
trouble (Calibration plate surface
25 or less or 231 or above. reflection ratio abnormality)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed. Trouble content The calibration plate surface is scanned by the image
Check Check the connection of the connector harness to the density sensor before starting the process control, and
and PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a
remedy sensor. certain level. However, the output is not within the
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble certain level though the senor gain is adjusted.
Check Check the harness disconnection. Section PCU
and Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
remedy trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble sensor, image density sensor dirt, calibration plate
Check Check the cartridge connection. dirt, calibration plate solenoid operation trouble
and Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
remedy and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the calibration plate solenoid
F2-43 Toner empty sensor abnormality operation.
(YELLOW)
F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble
25 or less or 231 or above.
Trouble content The detection temperature is out of the range of 5C
Section PCU to 55C.
Case 1 Cause The connector is not installed.
Section PCU
Check Check the connection of the connector harness to the Case 1 Cause LSU thermistor harness connection trouble
and PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
Check Check the connection of the LSU thermistor harness
remedy sensor.
and and connector.
Case 2 Cause Connector harness trouble remedy If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSU
Check Check the harness disconnection. thermistor or the PCU PWB.
and
Case 2 Cause LSU thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
remedy
Check Check the PCU PWB.
Case 3 Cause Cartridge trouble and If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSU
Check Check the cartridge connection. remedy thermistor or the PCU PWB.
and
remedy

F2-50 K phase sensor sensing trouble F2-64 Toner supply abnormality (BLACK)
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the sensor Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
section of the projection rib on the drum drive gear to The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
control the BK drum phase. The detection signal the specified time.
cannot be acquired and phase control cannot be Section PCU
made. Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Section PCU Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor
Case 1 Cause Sensor connector connection trouble and section.
Check Check the sensor connector connection. remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
and main PWB.
remedy Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or installation Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
trouble and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
Check Check for dirt on the sensor or check the installation remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
and state. Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
remedy If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor trouble clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
Check If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
and (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_K" to check interruption or
remedy transmission of light.) F2-65 Toner supply abnormality (CYAN)
Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
F2-51 CL phase sensor sensing trouble The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
Trouble content Detection is made by interruption of light in the sensor Section PCU
section of the projection rib on the drum drive gear to Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
control the phases of all the color drums. The Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase control and section.
cannot be made. remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
Section PCU main PWB.
Case 1 Cause Sensor connector connection trouble Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Check Check the sensor connector connection. Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
and and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
remedy remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
Case 2 Cause Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or installation Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
trouble If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
Check Check for dirt on the sensor or check the installation clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
and state.
remedy
Case 3 Cause Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor trouble F2-66 Toner supply abnormality (MAGENTA)
Check If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
and (Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_CL" to check interruption or Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
remedy transmission of light.) The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
Section PCU
F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor
Trouble content Process humidity sensor open and section.
Section PCU remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
Case 1 Cause Process humidity sensor harness connection trouble main PWB.
Check Check the harness and connector connection of the Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
and process humidity sensor. Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
remedy and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
Case 2 Cause Process humidity sensor trouble remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
Check Check the process humidity sensor.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
and
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
remedy
Check Check the PCU PWB.
and
remedy

F2-67 Toner supply abnormality (YELLOW) F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Trouble content Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more. Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as Section PCU
the specified time. Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
Section PCU and the harness between the PCU and the toner
Case 1 Cause Toner motor section connector harness trouble cartridge.
Check Check the connector connection of the toner motor Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and section. and PCU and the toner cartridge.
remedy Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the remedy
main PWB. Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Case 2 Cause Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble Check Replace the toner cartridge.
Check Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1) and
and Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged remedy
remedy between the toner cartridge and the developing unit. Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary. Check Replace the PCU PWB.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not and
clear the trouble, check the developing unit. remedy
F2-70 Toner cartridge improper cartridge F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
detection (BLACK)
Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents Section PCU
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected. Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
Section PCU and the harness between the PCU and the toner
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge cartridge.
trouble Check Check the connector and the harness between the
Check Replace the toner cartridge. and PCU and the toner cartridge.
and remedy
remedy Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Check Replace the toner cartridge.
and
F2-71 Toner cartridge improper cartridge remedy
detection (CYAN) Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Check Replace the PCU PWB.
and
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents remedy
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error
trouble
(MAGENTA)
and
remedy Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
F2-72 Toner cartridge improper cartridge and the harness between the PCU and the toner
detection (MAGENTA) cartridge.
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and PCU and the toner cartridge.
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents remedy
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected. Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble
Section PCU Check Replace the toner cartridge.
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge and
trouble remedy
Check Replace the toner cartridge. Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble
and Check Replace the PCU PWB.
remedy and
remedy
F2-73 Toner cartridge improper cartridge

detection (YELLOW)
Trouble content Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents

when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble
and
remedy

F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error F2-81 Half tone process control 1st patch
(YELLOW) reference value trouble (CYAN)
Trouble content CRUM cannot be read or written. Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
Section PCU saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
Case 1 Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector calculation error in the primary approximation formula
and the harness between the PCU and the toner of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
cartridge. obtained from the first step patch print result when
Check Check the connector and the harness between the executing the half tone process control in CYAN.
and PCU and the toner cartridge. Section PCU
remedy Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
Case 2 Cause CRUM trouble trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
Check Replace the toner cartridge. sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
and cleaning trouble
remedy Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
Case 3 Cause Control PWB (PCU) trouble and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
Check Replace the PCU PWB.
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
and
surface state.
remedy
F2-78 Registration exclusive image density F2-82 Half tone process control 1st patch
sensor trouble (Transfer belt surface reference value trouble (MAGENTA)
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
Trouble content The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image calculation error in the primary approximation formula
density sensor before starting the registration, and of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a obtained from the first step patch print result when
certain level. However, the output is not within the executing the half tone process control in MAGENTA.
specified range though the senor gain is adjusted. Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt cleaning trouble
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid operation Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
trouble and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
Check Check the sensor and the harness. Check the remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
and calibration plate solenoid operation and the transfer completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
remedy belt surface state. surface state.
If the trouble is not cleared, replace the image sensor
exclusively used for registration, replace the transfer
belt, replace the calibration plate, replace the F2-83 Half tone process control 1st patch
solenoid, or replace the PCU PWB according to the
check result. reference value trouble (YELLOW)
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density

F2-80 Half tone process control 1st patch saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
reference value trouble (BLACK) calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
Trouble content The low-density rising point or the high-density executing the half tone process control in YELLOW.
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a Section PCU
calculation error in the primary approximation formula Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
obtained from the first step patch print result when sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
executing the half tone process control in BLACK. cleaning trouble
Section PCU
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
cleaning trouble surface state.
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
surface state.

F2-84 Half tone process control 2nd patch F2-87 Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (BLACK) reference value trouble (YELLOW)
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the
middle-density section output when connecting the middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula middle-density section approximation formula (formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value)
value) from the second step patch print result when from the second step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in BLACK. executing the half tone process control in YELLOW.
Section PCU Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, transfer belt cleaning trouble cleaning trouble
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state. surface state.
F2-85 Half tone process control 2nd patch F2-92 High-density process control density
reference value trouble (CYAN) correction error (CYAN)
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
middle-density section output when connecting the density correction reference density value (STD
low-density section approximation formula and the value) 30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
middle-density section approximation formula voltage when executing the high density process
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM control.
value) from the second step patch print result when Section PCU
executing the half tone process control in CYAN. Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
Section PCU trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density Check 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt and sensor gain adjustment.
cleaning trouble remedy 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain harnesses.
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
remedy sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
surface state.
F2-93 High-density process control density
correction error (MAGENTA)
F2-86 Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (MAGENTA) Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the
density correction reference density value (STD
Trouble content The low-density section output is greater than the value) 30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
middle-density section output when connecting the voltage when executing the high density process
low-density section approximation formula and the control.
middle-density section approximation formula Section PCU
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
value) from the second step patch print result when trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
executing the half tone process control in MAGENTA. on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
Section PCU Check 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection and sensor gain adjustment.
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density remedy 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt harnesses.
cleaning trouble 3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
Check Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
and adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
surface state.

F2-94 High-density process control density H2-00 Non-contact thermistor detection
correction error (YELLOW) thermistor open (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content The patch density value is not in the range of the Trouble content Thermistor open
density correction reference density value (STD Section PCU
value) 30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
voltage when executing the high density process section connector connection trouble, AC power
control. source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Section PCU Check Check the harness and the connector from the
Case 1 Cause Image density sensor trouble, harness connection and thermistor to the control PWB.
trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt remedy
on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
Check 1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
and sensor gain adjustment. H2-01 Lower thermistor open (TH_LM)
remedy 2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
harnesses.
3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the Trouble content Thermistor open
drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc. Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
F3-12 Main unit tray 1 lift-up trouble source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check Check the harness and the connector from the
and thermistor to the control PWB.
Trouble content LUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time. remedy
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause LUD1 sensor trouble, harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper H2-02 Sub thermistor open (TH_US)
feed unit.
Check Check the harness and the connector of LUD1.
and Trouble content Thermistor open
remedy Section PCU
Case 2 Cause Tray 1 lift-up motor trouble Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
Check Check the lift-up unit. section connector connection trouble, AC power
and source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
remedy Check Check the harness and the connector from the
remedy
F3-22 Main unit tray 2 lift-up trouble
H2-03 Non-contact thermistor
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section PCU
compensation thermistor open
Case 1 Cause LUD2 sensor trouble, harness connection trouble (TH_UM_AD1)
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
feed unit.
Trouble content Thermistor open
Check Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Section PCU
and
remedy
section connector connection trouble, AC power
Case 2 Cause Tray 2 lift-up motor trouble
source trouble
Check Check the lift-up unit.
Check Check the harness and the connector from the
and
remedy
remedy
F9-00 Communication trouble between the H2-04 Hang-up preventing thermistor open
controller and the printer controller (TH-US)
(EF1)
Trouble content Thermistor open
Trouble content A communication error is detected during initial Section PCU
establishment or after establishment of Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
communication with the EFI controller. section connector connection trouble, AC power
Section MFP source trouble
Case 1 Cause Printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable trouble Check Check the harness and the connector from the
Check Check the printer controller MFPcnt PWB cable. and thermistor to the control PWB.
and remedy
remedy
Case 2 Cause MFPcnt PWB cable trouble, printer controller PWB
trouble
Check Replace the MFPcnt PWB. Repair or replace the
and printer controller PWB.
remedy After completion of check, turn OFF/ON the machine
and the printer controller.

H3-00 Fusing section high temperature H3-04 Fusing section high temperature
trouble (TH_UM) trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the Trouble content The temperature of the hung-up prevention thermistor
specified level. exceeds the specified level.
Section PCU Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing Case 1 Cause Non-contact thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble,
section connector connection error, AC power source fusing section connector connection error, AC power
trouble source trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp. Check 1) Use Sim44-14 to check if the non-contact
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the and thermistor shows an abnormal temperature. If
remedy harness. remedy the display is normal, use Sim5-2 to check the
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit blinking operation of the heater lamp.
section. a) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC and the harness.
PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit. Check the control PWB thermistor input
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. circuit section.
b) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the
AC PWB and the control PWB lamp control
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature trou- circuit.
2) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
ble (TH_LM)
Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
specified level.
trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Section PCU
section connector connection error, AC power source Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
trouble within the specified time after turning on the power
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp. relay.
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the Section PCU
remedy harness. Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble,
section. interlock switch trouble
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit. and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. remedy harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
H3-02 Sub thermistor fusing section high 3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
temperature trouble (TH_US) Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
Trouble content The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the 4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
specified level.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing H4-01 Fusing section low temperature
section connector connection error, AC power source trouble (TH_LM)
trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level
remedy harness. within the specified time after turning on the power
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit relay.
section. Section PCU
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit. trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble,
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. interlock switch trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
remedy harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB

H4-02 Sub thermistor fusing section low L3-00 Mirror return trouble
temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content Mirror return is not completed within the specified
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level time.
within the specified time after turning on the power Section Scanner
relay. Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Section PCU Check Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Case 1 Cause Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB and
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble, remedy
interlock switch trouble
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp..
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the L4-02 Paper feed motor lock trouble
remedy harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit Trouble content When the paper feed motor is rotated in warming up
section. or in canceling a jam and the lock signal is not
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp detected within 1sec.
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Paper feed motor trouble, harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB and paper feed motor, control
circuit trouble
Check Use SIM6-1 to check the paper feed motor operation.
and Check the harness and the connector between the
H4-30 Thermistor differential input trouble remedy PCU PWB and the paper feed motor.
(TH_UM)
Trouble content TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not exceed the L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK)
specified level (50 count with the AD value) within
1minute after HL_UM is turned on. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Section PCU developing motor.
Case 1 Cause HL_UM does not turn on. Thermistor trouble, harness Section PCU
trouble, PCU PWB trouble Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
Check 1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp. and the developing motor.
and 2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the Check Check the harness and the connector between the
remedy harness. and PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit remedy
section.
Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
Check Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing
and motor.
remedy
L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR)

H5-01 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-
reached jam Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
developing motor.
Section PCU
Trouble content 5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
Section PCU and the developing motor.
Case 1 Cause The fusing jam is not removed completely. (Jam paper Check Check the harness and the connector between the
remains.) and PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Check Check the fusing section for jam paper. (winding, etc.) remedy
and Case 2 Cause Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
remedy Check Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing
Case 2 Cause POD1 sensor trouble or harness connection trouble and motor.
Check Check the POD1 sensor harness. Use SIM14 to remedy
and cancel the trouble.
remedy
Case 3 Cause Fusing unit installation trouble
Check Check the fusing unit installation.
and
remedy
L1-00 Mirror feed trouble
Trouble content Mirror feed is not completed within the specified time.
Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Check Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
and
remedy

L4-06 Transfer belt separation position L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan/Toner hopper
sensor trouble fan trouble
Trouble content When separating the primary transfer belt unit, Trouble content When the paper exit cooling fan/toner hopper fan
change in the separation position sensor are operated, the fan operation signal is not
characteristics is not detected within the specified detected within the specified time.
time. Section PCU
Section PCU Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
Case 1 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
PWB and the separation position sensor remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
Check and Check the harness between the PCU PWB and Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
remedy the separation position sensor. Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is rotation
Case 2 Cause The belt position sensor is not interrupted or it is remedy actually.
always interrupted. Belt separation clutch
operation trouble
Check and Use SIM6-3 to check the belt separation operation. L4-32 Power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan
remedy
Case 3 Cause The primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
trouble
Check and Install the primary transfer belt.
remedy Trouble content When the power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan is
operated, the fan operation signal is not detected
within the specified time.
L4-11 Shift motor trouble Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Power cooling fan or ozone exhaust fan connector
disconnection
Trouble content When the shift motor is initialized, no
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
characteristics change of the shifter home position
remedy PCU PWB and the fan.
sensor is not detected within the specified time.
Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble
Section PCU
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually
Case 1 Cause Shift motor trouble
remedy rotating.
Check and Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the shift
remedy motor.
Case 2 Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU
PWB and the shift motor, control circuit trouble
L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble
Check and Use SIM30-1 to check the shifter home position
remedy sensor. Check the harness and the connector Trouble content When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan
between the PCU PWB and the shift motor. operation signal is not detected within the
Case 3 Cause When the finisher is installed with the finisher specified time.
connector disconnected and when the finisher Section PCU
communication trouble occurs. Case 1 Cause Fan connector disconnection
Check and Connect the finisher connector. Check and Check the harness and the connector between the
remedy When the communication trouble occurs between remedy LSU PWB and the fan.
the PCU and the finisher, refer to the content of Case 2 Cause Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
F1-00. Check and Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is rotation
remedy actually. Replace the LSU fan. Replace the LSU
PWB.
L4-30 Controller fan/HDD fan motor trouble
Trouble content 1) The motor lock signal is detected during L6-10 Polygon motor lock detection
rotation of the controller fan motor.
2) The motor lock signal is detected during Trouble content It is judged that the LSU polygon motor lock signal
rotation of the HDD fan motor. is not outputted, and the lock signal is checked
Section MFP after 7 sec from starting rotation of the polygon
Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble motor and it is judged that the polygon motor does
Check and Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan not rotate properly.
remedy motor. Section LSU
Case 2 Cause Harness connection trouble between the mother Case 1 Cause Disconnection of the LSU connector or the LSU
PWB and the fan motor. inside harness, or breakage
Check and Check the harness and the connector between the Check and Check connection of the harness and the
remedy mother PWB and the fan motor. remedy connector.
Case 3 Cause Control circuit trouble If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the
Check and Replace the controller PWB. LSUcnt PWB or the LSU.
remedy Case 2 Cause Polygon motor trouble, LSU PWB trouble
Case 4 Cause Mother PWB trouble. Check and Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
Check and Replace the mother PWB. remedy motor.
remedy If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the
LSUcnt PWB or the LSU.

L8-01 No full wave signal U2-00 EEPROM read/write error
(MFP detection)
Trouble content No full wave signal is detected.
Section PCU Trouble content EEPROM device read/write error
Case 1 Cause Harness trouble Section MFP
Check and Check connection of the harness and the Case 1 Cause EEPROM device trouble
remedy connector.
Check and Replace the EEPROM device.
Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble remedy
Check and Replace the power unit. Case 2 Cause EEPROM device contact failure
remedy
Check and Check that EEPROM device is properly inserted.
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB trouble remedy
Check and Replace the PCU PWB. Case 3 Cause Device access error due to electrical noises
remedy
Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
remedy
L8-02 Full wave signal width abnormality

U2-05 HDD/Flash/EEPROM data discrepancy
Trouble content The full wave signal is judged as frequency
abnormality. (The detection frequency is judged as
Trouble content A HDD or Flash memory for user authentication
65Hz or above or 45Hz or less.)
different from that used before turn off the power is
Section PCU installed.
Case 1 Cause Harness trouble Section MFP
Check and Check the harness and the connector connection. Case 1 Cause HDD replacement or Flash memory replacement
remedy
Check and Initialize the authentication information with
Case 2 Cause Power unit trouble remedy SIM16, and import the backup data (exported
Check and Replace the power unit. data) if any.
remedy
Check and Replace the PCU PWB. U2-10 SRAM user authentication index
remedy
check sum error
L8-20 Power controller communication Trouble content User index information (basic data of user
authentication) check sum error on the SRAM
trouble
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble
Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/ 2) Hang-up of the control circuit due to electrical
Parity/Protocol error noises
Section MFP 3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Case 1 Cause Connector connection trouble between the mother Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. remedy
MFPcnt PWB mother board connector pin
breakage
Check and Check the connector connection between the U2-11 EEPROM check sum error
remedy mother board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Check
grounding of the machine.
(MFP detection)
Case 2 Cause Mother PWB trouble
Check and Replace the mother PWB. Trouble content Counter information check sum error on the
remedy EEPROM
Case 3 Cause Mother PWB jumper error Section MFP
Check and Set the mother PWB jumper to the Default side. Case 1 Cause 1) EEPROM device trouble
remedy 2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to electrical noises
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
PC--- Personal counter not installed remedy
Trouble content The personal counter is not installed. U2-22 SRAM memory check sum error
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Check and Install the personal counter. Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory check sum error
remedy Section MFP
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble
Check and 1) Initialize the communication management
U1-01 Battery trouble remedy table registered in SRAM and the FAX soft
switch.
2) Since the registered contents have been
Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall deleted, register them again.
Section MFP Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
2) Battery circuit abnormality remedy
Check and Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
remedy above. Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
remedy

U2-23 MFPC section SRAM memory U2-50 HDD section individual data check
individual data check sum error sum error
Trouble content MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory individual data Trouble content MFPcnt HDD individual data check sum error
check sum error (Communication management (One-touch, group, program, etc.)
table, sender registration data, etc.) Section MFP
Section MFP Case 1 Cause Write/read error to/from HDD
Case 1 Cause SRAM trouble Check and 1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
Check and 1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data remedy related to the check sum error contents.
remedy related to the check sum error automatically. 2) Since the registered contents have been
2) Since the registered contents have been deleted, register them again.
deleted, register them again. 3) If the trouble is not canceled, replace the
Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises HDD.
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. Case 2 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
remedy Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble remedy
Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB. Case 3 Cause MFPcnt PWB HDD access circuit trouble
remedy Check and Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
remedy
U2-24 SRAM memory user authentication

counter check sum error U2-80 EEPROM read/write error
(SCU detection)
Trouble content Check sum error of the user counter on SRAM
Section MFP Trouble content 1) EEPROM version error
Case 1 Cause 1) SRAM trouble 2) Write error to EEPROM
2) Control circuit hang-up due to electrical Section Scanner
noises Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble is not initialized
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble. Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set.
remedy remedy
Case 2 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check and To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment
U2-25 Flash memory user authentication remedy data, use the simulation to save the counter/
counter check sum error adjustment values. (If there is a printer option,
execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the
adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use
Trouble content Check sum error of the user authentication SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
counter on FLASH
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Flash trouble. Control circuit hang-up due to U2-81 Adjustment value check sum error
electrical noises
MFPcnt PWB FLASH access circuit trouble.
(SCU detection)
Check and Use SIM16 to recalculate the check sum of the
remedy user counter and save the normal sum value. Trouble content EEPROM (SCU) check sum error
Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
U2-30 Serial number data discrepancy Check and Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
(MFP PCU) remedy
Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble
Trouble content The serial number stored in the PCU differs from remedy data, use the simulation to save the counter/
that stored in the MFP. adjustment values. (If there is a printer option,
Section MFP execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the
Case 1 Cause EEPROM is not changed when the PCU/MFPcnt adjustment values.) Replace the SCU PWB. Use
PWB is replaced. SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Check and 1) Check that EEPROM is properly set. Case 3 Cause SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
remedy 2) Check that EEPROM on the previous PWB is Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set.
inserted to the newly installed PWB. remedy

U2-90 EEPROM read/write error U5-30 SPF lift-up trouble
(PCU detection)
Trouble content Lift-up trouble is detected 5 times continuously.
Trouble content EEPROM version error, write error to EEPROM (MX-3501N/4501N)
Section PCU Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble
is not initialized Check and Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
remedy Check the lift-up unit.
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set.
remedy
Case 2 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
U5-31 SPF tray lift-down trouble
remedy data, use the simulation to save the counter/
adjustment values. (If there is a printer option, Trouble content Lift-down trouble (STLD does not turn OFF within
execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the the specified time.) (MX-3501N/4501N)
adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB. Use Section Scanner
SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Case 1 Cause STUD/STLD trouble
Check and Check STUD/STLD and its harness and connector.
U2-91 EEPROM (PCU) check sum error
Trouble content Check sum error of adjustment value (PCU) U5-40 SPF install trouble
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises Trouble content Detected the installed (individual installed signal )
Check and Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. of RSPF/DSPF both.
remedy Section Scanner
Case 2 Cause EEPROM trouble. Case 1 Cause Circuit trouble of the installed detection signal
Check and Check that EEPROM is properly set. Check and Check installed detection circuit and harness,
remedy remedy connector.
Case 3 Cause PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
remedy data, use the simulation to save the counter/ U6-00 Desk communication trouble
adjustment values. (If there is a printer option,
execute SIM22-1 to save the counter data and the
adjustment values.) Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content Desk communication error, communication line
test error after turning on the power or canceling
the exclusive simulation
U5-00 SPF communication trouble Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection, desk control PWB trouble, control
Trouble content Communication error between the SCU and the PWB (PCU) trouble, malfunction due to electrical
DSPF, communication line test error after turning noises
on the power or canceling the exclusive simulation Check and Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON. Check the
(MX-3501N/3501FN/4501N/4501FN) remedy connector and the harness of the communication
Section Scanner line.
Case 1 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises
Check and Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON.
remedy U6-01 Tray 1 lift-up trouble
disconnection
Trouble content DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Check and Check the connector and the harness of the
remedy communication line. Section PCU
Case 3 Cause Control (SCU) PWB trouble. DSPF PWB trouble Case 1 Cause DLUD1 sensor trouble, tray 1 lift-up motor trouble,
desk PWB, lift-up unit, paper feed unit harness
Check and Replace the control (SCU) PWB. Replace the
connection trouble
remedy DSPF PWB.
Check and Check DLUD1 and its harness and connector.
U5-16 SPF fan motor trouble
U6-02 Tray 2 lift-up trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the fan.
Trouble content DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section Scanner
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Fan motor trouble,harness of the fan motor related,
circuit trouble Case 1 Cause DLUD2 sensor trouble, tray 2 lift-up motor trouble,
desk PWB, lift-up unit, paper feed unit harness
Check and Use SIM2-3 to check the operation.
connection trouble
remedy Check harness, connector and fan motor related
circuit. Check and Check DLUD2 and its harness and connector.

U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble U6-50 Desk incompatibility trouble
Trouble content The encoder input value is not changed in Trouble content Detection of desk connection incompatible with the
0.13sec (1st time)/0.5sec (2nd time and later) MX-3500/4500/3501/4501 **
after rotation of the motor. Section PCU
The motor is rotated for 18sec or more. Case 1 Cause Connection of a desk which is incompatible with
The encoder is changed after passing a certain the MX-3500/4500/3501/4501** is detected.
time from stopping the motor. (2sec, 10 count or Check and Connect the MX-DEX3/DEX4.
more) remedy
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Sensor trouble, LCC control PWB trouble, gear
breakage, lift motor trouble U6-51 LCC incompatibility trouble
Check and Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
remedy sensor and the lift motor. Use SIM15 to cancel the
trouble. Trouble content Detection of LCC connection which is incompatible
with the MX-3500/4500/3501/4501 **.
Section PCU
U6-10 Desk transport motor trouble Case 1 Cause Connection of the LCC, which is incompatible with
the MX-3500/4500/3501/4501 ** is detected.
Check and Connect the MX-LCX1.
Trouble content Desk transport motor operation trouble remedy
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, overcurent to
the motor, console finisher control PWB trouble UC-02 CPT-ASIC abnormality
Check and Use SIM 4-3 to check the operation of the desk
remedy transport motor.
Trouble content CPT-ASIC access error (When the ASIC does not
operate normally.)
U6-20 LCC communication trouble Section Scanner
Case 1 Cause CPT-ASIC abnormality, SCU PWB abnormality
Check and Turn OFF/ON the power several times. If the
Trouble content LCC communication error. Communication line remedy trouble still occurs, replace the SCU PWB or the
test error after turning ON the power or canceling CPT-ASIC.
the exclusive simulation. LCC and machine model
codes discrepancy error
Section PCU UC-20 Document control module trouble
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, control
PWB (PCU) trouble, malfunction due to electrical Trouble content Communication error between SCU and DOCC
noises Communication line test error when turning on the
Check and Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel the trouble. power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
remedy Check the connector and the harness of the Section Scanner
communication line. Case 1 Cause Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
Check and Check the connector and harness in the
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble remedy communication line.
Case 2 Cause Control PWB (SCU) trouble, DOCC PWB trouble.
Check and Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
Trouble content The encoder input value is not changed in
remedy
0.06sec after turning on the motor.
The encoder input value is changed after a Case 3 Cause Malfunction due to electrical noises.
certain time from turning OFF the motor. (After Check and Turn OFF/ON the power to electrical cancel the
5sec, count is made for 0.1sec to get 100 or remedy trouble.
more count.)
Section PCU
Case 1 Cause Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, an
overcurrent to the motor, LCC control PWB trouble
Check and Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the transport
remedy motor.
U6-22 LCC 24V power abnormality
Trouble content DC24V power is not supplied to LCC.

Section PCU
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, power
unit trouble
Check and Check the connector and the harness of the power
remedy line. Check that the power unit and the LCC control
PWB is of 24V.

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. Maintenance system table

: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate : Shift the position.
Monochrome
Remark/Refer to the
supply/ 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Parts Guide.
Mechanical When K K K K K K K K K K K K
Unit name Part name Block/Item No.
parts calling
(Only the replacement
Color 100 200 300 400 500 600
parts are described.)
supply K K K K K K
Drum Drum (BK) Monochrome
peripheral Cleaner blade supply (P/G No.: [23]-14)
(BK)
Charging unit (P/G No.: [23]-2)
(BK)
Drum (C) Color supply
Cleaner blade (P/G No.: [23]-14)
(C)
Charging unit (P/G No.: [23]-2)
(C)
Side seal F/R Mechanical
(BK) parts
Toner
reception seal
(BK)
Side seal F/
R(C)
Toner
reception seal
(C)
Waste toner
box
Developing Developer Monochrome
section (BK) supply
DV seal (BK) (P/G No.: [22]-42)
DV side seal (P/G No.: [22]-26)
F (BK)
DV side seal (P/G No.: [22]-15)
R (BK)
Toner filter (P/G No.: [21]-37)
Developer (C) Color supply
Developer
(M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C) (P/G No.: [22]-42)
DV side seal (P/G No.: [22]-26,
F/R (C) [22]-15)
Toner filter (P/G No.: [21]-37)
Toner Monochrome User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
cartridge (BK/ /Color supply
C/M/Y)
Bias pin/ Mechanical
Connector parts
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 1
5 : Jul. 15 2006
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Unit name Part name Mechanical
Block/Item No.
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
parts
LSU Dust proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Cleaning base parts (P/G No.: [2]-35)
Transfer Primary transfer belt Mechanical (P/G No.: [25]-3)
section Primary transfer parts { { { { { { (P/G No.: [26]-9)
5
roller (P/G No.: [27]-27)
Primary transfer (P/G No.: [24]-19)
blade
5 Belt drive gear (P/G No.: [26]-13)
conduction collar (P/G No.: [27]-25)
Transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
Transfer follower { { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
Tension roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
Resist backup roller
Secondary transfer (P/G No.: [29]-21)
belt
roller
Secondary belt drive { { { { { {
roller
Secondary belt { { { { { {
tension roller
Secondary belt { { { { { {
follower roller
drive idle gear
Sensors (Process { { { { { { { { { { { {
control resist
sensors)
Primary transfer CL (P/G No.: [25]-56)
roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
roller bearing (P/G No.: [27]-35)
Packing Mylar (P/G No.: [24]-25)
Fusing Upper heat roller Mechanical (P/G No.: [31]-42)

section Lower heat roller parts (P/G No.: [32]-13)
Fusing gear (P/G No.: [31]-40)
Upper heat roller (P/G No.: [31]-41)
bearing
Lower heat roller (P/G No.: [32]-11)
bearing
Sub roller
Sub roller bearing
Upper separation (P/G No.: [33]-23)
pawl
Upper thermistor (P/G No.: [31]-24)
side
Upper thermistor (P/G No.: [31]-24)
sub
Lower thermistor (P/G No.: [32]-37)
Upper thermistor C (P/G No.: [31]-15)
(Non-contact)
Gears Specified position
Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { { { {
5
6 : Oct. 15 2006
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Unit name Part name Mechanical
Block/Item No.
calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
parts
Fusing Upper Supplied Mechanical
section Web by Web parts
roller unit
Pressure
roller
Web
roller
bearings
Pressure
roller
bearing
Web
break
rubber
Web unit
Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
Discharge brush
6 Heat rollers Grease (JFE552)
(UKOG-0235FCZZ)
Filters Ozone filter PA Mechanical (P/G No.: [47]-40)
parts
Paper feed Paper pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-40,
section parts [15]-33)
Paper feed roller { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-41,
[15]-29)
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [9]-4,
[14]-37)
Torque limiter
Transport PS follower roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
section/ Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { { {
Paper exit Discharge brush
reverse Paper exit filter
section
Gears When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
(specified positions).
Drive Gears (Grease) Mechanical When checking,
section parts apply to the
necessary positions
Shaft earth sections When checking,
(Conduction grease) apply to the
necessary positions
Belts
Others Sensors Mechanical
parts
Image quality Mechanical
parts
Optical Mirror/Lens/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
section Reflector/CCD parts
Table glass/SPF { { { { { { { { { { { { {
glass
Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Rails Specified positions
Drive belt/Drive wire
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
Monochrome Remark/Refer to
supply/ 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800 the Parts Guide.
Mechanical When K K K K K K K K K K K K Block/Item No.
No. Part name
parts calling (Only the
100 200 300 400 500 600 replacement parts
Color supply
K K K K K K are described.)
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome
2 Cleaner blade (BK) supply (P/G No.: [23]-14)
3 Charging unit (BK) (P/G No.: [23]-2)
4 Drum (C) Color supply
5 Cleaner blade (C) (P/G No.: [23]-14)
6 Charging unit (C) (P/G No.: [23]-2)
7 Side seal F/R (BK) Mechanical
8 Toner reception parts
seal (BK)
9 Side seal F/R(C)
10 Toner reception
seal (C)
11 Waste toner box
7,9
8,10
1,4 2,5
7,9
3,6
11
* The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replace- "Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
ment consumable parts which are required for maintaining the entire drum life as 100%.
performance. (Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
* The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it 100(%) 550 (K rotations) / 840 (K rotations) x 100 = 040 (%)
is used as a reference value.
Drum counter Number of rotations of drum
[Reason]
B/W Full color B/W Full color
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's oper-
Drum 150K pages 100K pages 840K rotations 840K rotations
ation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle cannot be speci-
fied in a certain cycle for color output. * For 100% full color output by the user, the life of the black drum
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed is 100K similarly to the life of the color drums.
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
Life end definition of a drum
Drum Life
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end. 200
However in practice, wear cannot be specified by rotations
Drum Life (- K pages)

because racing is increased in the tandem engine by the mixing 150
ratio of black and color outputs or when black output is made in the
color mode in ACS. For the reference of product quality, wear is
specified by the drum rotations. The rotation of the MX-3500/MX- 100
4500 series drum rotation is 840K.
The drum life is affected by the print quantity of one job. This is Black Drum
50
because the actual life is determined by the rotations of the drum. Color Drum
When the print quantity of one job is 5 or less, the number of rota-
tions for one page is increased. As shown in the graph below, 0
therefore, the drum life quantity varies for each print quantity of one 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
job. Number of sheets of one print job
"Life meter" can be checked with SIM22-1 according to each drum

rotations as the drum life.
B. LSU
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800 Block/Item No.
No. Part name
Mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K (Only the
parts replacement parts
are described.)
1 Dust proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base parts (P/G No.: [2]-35)
C. Developing section
150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
supply/ the Parts Guide.
K K K K K K K K K K K K
Mechanical parts When Block/Item No.
No. Part name
calling (Only the
100 200 300 400 500 600
Color supply replacement parts
K K K K K K
are described.)
1 Developer (BK) Monochrome
2 DV seal (BK) supply (P/G No.: [22]-42)
3 DV side seal F (P/G No.: [22]-26)
(BK)
4 DV side seal R (P/G No.: [22]-15)
(BK)
5 Toner filter (P/G No.: [21]-37)
6 Developer (C) Color supply
7 Developer (M)
8 Developer (Y)
9 DV seal (C) (P/G No.: [22]-42)
10 DV side seal F/R (P/G No.: [22]-26,
(C) [22]-15)
12 Toner cartridge Monochrome/ User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
(BK/C/M/Y) Color supply
13 Bias pin/ Mechanical parts
Connector
13
4,10
13
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
3,10 13
12(C/M/Y) 12(BK)
5 : Jul. 15 2006
D. Transfer section
Remark/Refer to
Monochrome the Parts Guide.
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Primary transfer Mechanical (P/G No.: [25]-3)
belt parts
5 2 Primary transfer { { { { { { (P/G No.: [26]-9)
3 Primary transfer (P/G No.: [24]-19)
blade
5 4 Belt drive gear (P/G No.: [26]-13)
6 Transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
7 Transfer follower { { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
8 Tension roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
9 Belt CL brush
10 Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
11 Resist backup roller
12 Secondary transfer (P/G No.: [29]-21)
belt
roller
14 Secondary belt { { { { { {
drive roller
tension roller
follower roller
drive idle gear
18 Sensors (Process { { { { { { { { { { { {
control resist
sensors)
19 Primary transfer CL (P/G No.: [25]-56)
roller
20 Cleaner seal
21 Cleaner seal R
22 Transfer toner
reception seal
24 Packing Mylar (P/G No.: [24]-25)
1
18
3 20
8
7
10 4
23
17
5 21
11 12
19
9
2 14
2 6
2 13
2 15
16
22
18 8 9 11 3 21
14
15
13,17
16
4,6
7 10 2,5
5 : Jul. 15 2006, 6 : Oct. 15 2006
E. Fusing section
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
Block/Item No.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name (Only the
Mechanical calling K K K K K K K K K K K K
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Upper heat roller Mechanical (P/G No.: [31]-42)
2 Lower heat roller parts (P/G No.: [32]-13)
3 Fusing gear (P/G No.: [31]-40)
4 Upper heat roller (P/G No.: [31]-41)
bearing
5 Lower heat roller (P/G No.: [32]-11)
bearing
6 Sub roller
7 Sub roller bearing
8 Upper separation (P/G No.: [33]-23)
pawl
9 Lower separation (P/G No.: [32]-43)
pawl (Japan only)
10 Upper thermistor (P/G No.: [31]-24)
side
11 Upper thermistor sub (P/G No.: [31]-24)
12 Lower thermistor (P/G No.: [32]-37)
13 Upper thermistor C (P/G No.: [31]-15)
(Non-contact)
14 Gears Specified position
15 Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { { { {
5
17 Upper Supplied
Web by Web
roller unit
18 Pressure
roller
19 Web
roller
bearings
20 Pressure
roller
bearing
21 Web
break
rubber
22 Web unit
23 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
24 Discharge brush
6 25 Heat rollers Grease (JFE552)
(UKOG-
0235FCZZ)
6 : Oct. 15 2006
6
22 19
21
17 20
22
18 11
20 23
7 3
1 13 4
8 24
5
6
7
10
9
4 12
2
5
Apply 0.2g of grease to the
both ends (bearing sections)
of the upper and the
lower heat rollers evenly.
25 25
17
23
18
15
11 9
15
1
13 2
10
15
12
F. Optical section
Remark/Refer to
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Mirror/Lens/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Reflector/CCD parts
2 Table glass/SPF { { { { { { { { { { { { {
glass
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails Specified positions
5 Drive belt/Drive
wire
2 4
1
4
5
1
G. Filters
Remark/Refer to the
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Ozone filter PA Mechanical (P/G No.: [47]-40)
parts
H. Paper feed section
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Block/Item No.
parts
1 Paper pickup Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-40, [15]-33)
roller parts
2 Paper feed { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-41, [15]-29)
roller
3 Separation { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [9]-4, [14]-37)
roller
4 Torque limiter
4
2 1
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
I. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section
Remark/Refer to the
No. Part name
are described.)
1 PS follower roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Discharge brush
4 Paper exit filter
5 Gears When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
2
3
3
4
3 2
J. Drive section
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
parts
1 Gears (Grease) Mechanical When checking, apply
parts to the necessary
positions).
2 Shaft earth When checking, apply
sections to the necessary
(Conduction positions (specified
grease) positions).
3 Belts
1
(FLOIL G313S)
1
(HANARL FL955R)
2 : Feb. 15 2006, 3 : Apr. 15 2006
3. Other related items e. Developer cartridge system counters
A. Maintenance timing display Print job

Code Content
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when Enable/Disable
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the VK The developer print counter (K) reaches Enable
150,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
messages and the counters is shown blow.
rotations of the developer (K) reaches 840K.
(1) (Maintenance timing) (Frameless) VC The developer print counter (C) reaches Enable
a. Maintenance counters rotations of the developer (C) reaches 840K.
VM The developer print counter (M) reaches Enable
Print job
Code Content 100,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
Enable/Disable
rotations of the developer (M) reaches 840K.
TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches 90% Enable
VY The developer print counter (Y) reaches Enable
of the set value of SIM21-1, or they reaches
the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-38 is set to
rotations of the developer (Y) reaches 840K.
Print Enable.
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches Enable After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Devel-
90% of the set value of SIM21-1, or they oper counters (number of the developer print counter, accumu-
reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-
lated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
38 is set to Print Enable.
AA The maintenance counters (both of total and Enable (2) [Maintenance timing] (Framed)
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-
1, or they reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but
a. Maintenance counters
SIM26-38 is set to Print Enable.
Print job
Code Content
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte- Enable/Disable
nance counters (total, color) clear). TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches the Disable
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
b. Transfer unit system counters Print Disable.
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches the Disable
Print job set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Code Content
Enable/Disable Print Disable.
3 TK1 The primary transfer unit print counter reaches Enable AA The maintenance counters (both of total and Disable
150,000 sheets. color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and
TK2 The secondary transfer unit print counter Enable SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable.
reaches 300,000 sheets.
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary nance counters (total, color) clear).
and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit, (3) [Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
days of use of the transfer unit) clear).
Print job
c. Fusing unit counter Code Content
Enable/Disable
Waste toner full Disable
Print job
Code Content
Enable/Disable After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
3 FK1 The funsing upper and lower heat roller print Enable opening/close of the front door.
counter reaches 300,000 sheets.
3 FK2 The funsing sub heat roller print counter Enable
reaches 150,000 sheets.
3 FK3 Fusing web print counter reaches 150,000 Enable
sheets.
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing

unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear).
d. Drum cartridge system counters
Print job
Code Content
Enable/Disable
DK The drum cartridge print counter (K) reaches Enable
rotations of the drum (K) reaches 840K.
DC The drum cartridge print counter (C) reaches Enable
rotations of the drum (C) reaches 840K.
DM The drum cartridge print counter (M) reaches Enable
rotations of the drum (M) reaches 840K.
DY The drum cartridge print counter (Y) reaches Enable
rotations of the drum (Y) reaches 840K.
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum

counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated travel-
ing distance of the drum) clear).
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
MX3500N C. UpdateManual
Service procedures and kinds of firmware
There are following methods of downloading of the firmware.
1) Firmware download using USB
1. General
2) Firmware download using media
A. Cases where version-up is required 3) Firmware download using FTP
ROM version-up is required in the following cases: 4) Firmware download using Web page
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. Firmware types
2) When installing a new spare ROM to the machine for repair.
Flash ROM Contents
3) When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
Machine ALL Includes all contents shown below.
4) When there is a trouble in the programs in ROM and it must be ICU(BOOT) ANIME
repaired. BOOTSUB
B. Notes for version-up CONFIG
ESCP FONT
(1) Relationship between each ROM and version-up GRPH
Before execution of ROM version-up, check combinations with LANG
ROMs installed in the other PWBs including options. SPDL
Some combinations of versions may cause malfunctions of the XIO FONT
machine. PROFILE
ICU(MAIN) MAIN
IMG-ASIC IMG DATA ROM
SCU SCU(MAIN)
PCU PCU(MAIN)
FAX1 FAX1(MAIN)
FAX2 FAX2(MAIN)
Option 1K FINISHER FINISHER_1K(MAIN)
INNER FINISHER FINISHER_INNER(MAIN)
LCC A4 LCC_A4(MAIN)
DESK DESK(MAIN)
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.
2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using USB
Firmware.sfu
Controller
USB Cable USB Slave
First you must install a USB print driver from the setup.exe Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the
program in the MX-4500/4501 CD-ROM Disc 1 upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the imager
Create a folder on the root drive (usually C:\) of the PC. Name from booting up normally.
the folder Pastel. Download the firmware (xxxx.sfu) and the If this occurs, you can "rescue" the firmware using the follow-
file2PRN program (File2PRN.exe) and place these files into the ing procedure:
pastel folder. Rename the firmware file in the pastel folder to emup-
Click on the firmware icon and drag it onto the File2PRN icon date.sfu
The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99. Click on the emupdate.sfu icon and drag it onto the
File2PRN icon.
If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firmware
loading for a few minutes. The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue, the If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firm-
Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following: ware loading for a few minutes.
"S *** E" When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue,
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE the Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
UPDATE IN PROGESS!" "S *** E"
At the completion of the upgrade, the Imager will reboot auto- CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE
matically. UPDATE IN PROGESS!"
Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has At the completion of the upgrade, the Imager will reboot
upgraded successfully. automatically.
Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.
MX3500N ROM VERSION-UP 10 1

B. Firmware download using USB device
Media
Firmware. Adapter
Firmware. + USB Host
The machine recognizes the

Firmware. USB Memory
media and automatically executes
processing.
Firmware.sfu
(1) Firmware update from USB memory device 4) Select the button of the firmware to be updated. The button will
First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a be highlighted. (In this screen, [ICU(MAIN)] and [LANGUAGE]
USB jump drive. are selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] button appears.
If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open * Press the selected button again to release the selection.
the folder. * Press [ALL] button to select all items.
Secure Jumpdrive will not work.
Must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity to load 0
the firmware onto it. TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE
1) Insert the USB memory device into the main unit. FIRMWARE UPDATE S E
2) Enter the 49-01 screen. Press the button of the file to be ICU(MAIN) : CURRENT
NOW 01.00.00
01.00.00 NEXT TO
UPDATED 01.01.00
01.01.00
updated. The screen transfers to the update screen. ICU(BOOT) : CURRENT

NOW 01.00.00
01.00.00 NEXT TO
UPDATED 01.01.00
01.01.00
(In this screen, [FILE 1] is selected) LANGUAGE : CURRENT 01.00.00

NOW 09.00.00 UPDATED
NEXT TO 01.01.00
01.00.00
* The number of button changes depending on the number of GRAPHIC : CURRENT 01.00.00
NOW 01.01.00 UPDATED
NEXT TO 01.01.00
09.00.00
the file in the USB memory device inserted. ALL ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE
1/5
0 5) Press [EXECUTE] button. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]

TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE becomes clear. If no button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is
FIRMWARE UPDATE gray out and cannot be pressed. Press [YES] to start the
update.
FILE1 FILE2
FILE3 FILE4
0
FIRMWARE UPDATE S E
1/1
ICU(MAIN) NOW 01.00.00 NEXT 01.01.00
ICU(BOOT) NOW 01.00.00 NEXT 01.01.00

3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
will be shown for each firmware respectively. LANGUAGE NOW 09.00.00 NEXT 01.00.00
Following key-codes will be changed; GRAPHIC NOW 01.01.00 NEXT 09.00.00
NOW CURRENT ALL ARE YOU SURE? YES NO EXECUTE

1/5
NEXT UPDATED TO
6) At the completion of the upgrade, the display will change to:
0 "COMPLETE: PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH" Press OK.
SIMLATION NO. 49-01 CLOSE
The Imager will reboot at this time.
TEST
FIRMWARE UPDATE
ICU(MAIN) : CURRENT 01.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 0

CURRENT 01.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE
ICU(BOOT) :
CURRENT
E 01.00.00 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 FIRMWARE UPDATE
LANGUAGE :
CURRENT 01.00.00
0 UPDATED TO 01.01.00 PLEASE TURN
COMPLETE : PLEASE POWERMAIN POWER OFF THEN ON
OFF/ON
GRAPHIC :
ALL 1/1

7) Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully. 0
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the TEST SIMULATION NO.49-01 CLOSE
upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the FIRMWARE UPDATE
imager from booting up normally. If this occurs, you can PLEASE POWER
ERROR : PLEASE TURN MAIN POWER OFF THEN ON
OFF/ON
ICUM,PCU,SCU
"rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
Rename the firmware file on the USB device to emup-
date.sfu
Power off the imager (both switches) and insert the USB
device (Jumpdrive) into the USB port of the imager.
Power on the imager
The Imager will boot up into emergency update mode.
When finished, the display will read "update completed"
Power off the imager, and remove the USB device
Reboot the imager, and go simulation 22-05 to confirm
firmware has upgraded successfully.
C. Firmware download using FTP
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP/HTTP
Server
10.36.101.52 10.36.112.83
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension .sfu) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
D. Firmware download using the Web page

A Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update the firmware.
Update procedure
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the Update of Firmware button in the Web page. Click the Browse button and select the firmware for the update.
MX-4500N

3) After selecting the file, click the Submit button to send the firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place, Firmware Update, now processing... appears.
4) When the firmware update is finished, Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP. appears. Pressing the [Reboot] key, the
machine will restart to complete the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
Close the browser and open again to display latest information. will be displayed.
5) Update is completed with the above procedures.

[11]
DSPF UNIT
OPTION
MX3500N
SRRC SRRBC STRC STRRBC STRRC STUD STLD STMPS SPLS1 SPED1
OPTION
DSW_F PNC
SPFFAN SPOM SPFM SPUM SPFC SLUM RSPF UNIT
SPLS2 SPED2
DERIVERY UNIT OPTION
SPPD1 SOCD
WTNM 1TNFD
SPPD5 SPPD4 SPPD3 SPPD2 SGS STMPS SPLS1
POD1 SPOD SPPD1 SPRANDOM
SCOV CL
SPPD2 SCOV
DSPF DRIVER
SPFM SPPD4 SPLS2
POD2 POFM_F PWB
CCD CL INVERTER
SOCD
PWB PWB
TONER_K UNIT TONER_C UNIT T ONER_M UNIT T ONER_Y UNIT
1. Block diagram
SPPD3 SPED
1TUD_K 1TUD_CL SPRM SPPD5 SPWS
TFD2 POFM_R ROCD
DVCRUM_K DVCRUM_C DVCRUM_M DVCRUM_Y
DSPFcntPWB SPFC SRRC
A. System block diagram
RSPF
HPOS OSM PROCESS DRIVE UNIT PWB
2TC
1TURC
OPTION
FUM TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y There is a standards
POM setting model SCANNER UNIT
Only Japan FAX 1 OPTION
ADUM_L RRM
OPTION OPTION
CARD AUDITOR OPERATION UNIT
DM_K DM_CL
READER
PNC
ADMH DRIVER SUB TOUCH
PWB PANEL
DOCC CL
ELECTRICAL SECTION
LVDS
PWB PWB
BTM DHPD_K DVM_K DHPD_CL DVM_CL If DOCC PWB
FUSER UNIT is used, INVERTER
replace it with LCD
PWB
SCN IN PWB. CL INVERTER
ORS_LED
PWB
TH1_FU HL1_U SCNC
PWB
CCD OPE
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y MIM ORS_PD
REGIST SENSOR UNIT PWB PWB
TH2_FU HL2_L
PCS
DV_K UNIT DV_C UNIT DV_M UNIT DV_Y UNIT SCN IN OCSW
POWER SW
PWB PWB
TH3_FU HL3_U
TCS_K TCS_C TCS_M TCS_Y
REGS_F MHPS
OPTION
MOTHER
PS UNIT DVTYP_K DVTYP_C DVTYP_M DVTYP_Y PWB DHS1
REGS_R
PPD1
PCSS
LSU UNIT
PPD2 DSW_R MC 1TC OZFM
TH1_LSU
PCU
PWB
HDD HDDFM CPUFM
RIGHT DOOR UNIT CSS1 CSS2 PSFM
LD_K BD_K
PWB PWB
OPTION
MFPC
PAPER FEED DRIVE UNIT PWB
FAX 2 LD_C
MX3500N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 1

APPD1 POD3 OPTION PWB
EFI
LSU CNT
PAPER FEED 1 PAPER FEED 2 PWB LD_M
APPD2 TFD3
PWB
UNIT UNIT
Service Manual
CLUM1 CLUM2 LSUSS

RD I/ F
PWB OPTION LD_Y
PWB
HL
DSW_ADU CPUC1 CPUC2 CPFD1 CPFD2 COINVENDER
PWB
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT FIN 1K

CPFC CPFM CLUD1 CLUD2
DESK LCC FIN INNER PGM
MPWD MPLD1
CPED1 CPED2 DH_DESK DH_LCC
PFM DCPS
MPED MPUC
CSPD1 CSPD2
OPTION
MPFD MTOP1 MPFS DHSW USB HUB
DSW_C AC
DRIVER MAIN PWB
PWB
TH/ HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS MSW
WH
PWB
AC IN DH1
OPTION Standards : Only Japan

B. MFP controller PWB
I2C(Ch.0)
ATA
CPU
connector
RM7065C
UART
SDRAMx2
IDE bus
RM7965
SO-DIMM
SO-DIMM
for Debug
DIMM3
DIMM4
DDR
DDR bus 2 IDE
SYSAD bus
32bits width
ASIC
DDR bus 3
LVDS
64bits width
PCI bus 2
SO-DIMM
SO-DIMM
DIMM2
DIMM1
DDR bus 1
385/386/047/048
LSU IF
64bits width SYSTEM VIDEOIF ICU
ASIC SCAN OUT IF ASIC SCAN IN IF
LVDSIC
ENGINE IF
connector
I2C(Ch.0) Patch
IMG-C Bus IMG-B Bus
574 (Image process) (Image process)
X5 EFI connector ICU-IMG IF
I2C (Ch.1)
EEPROM IMG-A Bus
256Kbits 244/ IMG (Auto Color) PCU
SCN
PCI bus 1
245 ASIC FAX 1st

UART
Piano FLASH IF
LOCAL bus
SW (LSI bus) FLASH
Expansion
PCI connector
USB Control
DEV USB-D IO signals
EXPAND
USB USB-H IF
HOST ASIC
OPE IF
VBUS FAX
UART
SW I2C SDR
2nd
EEPROM SDR
2Kbits SDRAM
Ether SRAM
LAN
JACK LAN MAC
LOCAL bus RTC
MicroWire (ROM bus)
EEPROM 72pinDIMM Socket

2Kbits
72pinDIMM Socket Battery
FLASH
RIC RS232C Mem.x2
(RS232C) Transceiver
UART 72pinDIMM Socket
100pinDIMM Socket

DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK(DVM_K)/
Stepping Motor Control DV Motor CL(DVM_CL)
HV Pout Motor(POM) / ADU Motor(ADML) / Paper Feed Motor(CPFM)
Fuser unit
HL control MC / TC unit Shifter Motor(OSM)/
IC6
I2C Bus HL_UM/ LM/ US Resist Motor(RRM) / PSF Motor(PFM)
EEPROM
Drum Motor BK(DM_K)/
(64kbit)
Drum Motor CL(DM_CL)
Fuser Motor(FUM) FAN Motor Control
C. PCU PWB
IC4 BeltMotor (BTM) PS FAN (PSFM) /

RESETIC Ozone FAN(OZFM) /
AddressBus[20:0] Pout FAN
FLASH ROM (POFM_F/ POFM_R)
(16Mbit) Syncronous Motor
DATABus[15:0] Flash Write Protect Fuser Cleaning Motor
(FUCLNM)
X1 IC2
Drum Lamp
Xtal Spread
19.6608MHz Spectrum
(DL_K/C/M/Y)
3- wired serial
IC5
SRAM
(1Mbit)
IC9
PWM
PMC ASIC
CLOCK
Sensor Input
DC Power CSS11- 14 / CSS21- 24 Sensor Input
FW
Supply POD1 COIN VENDOR
APPD1 / APPD2 (Optional)
CV_CLCOPY /
CV_COPY
IC8
I/ O A SIC
To IC1 Load control Output
MFPC Load output
UART CPU Mechanical
Via MPGS / CPUC1 / CPUC2/
Mother H8S/ 2373 PCSS/ CPFC / LSUSS1 Counter
/ LSUSS2(Optional)/ (Optional)
IC7 I2C Bus CRUM
MPUC / MPFS / 1TURC
DFF CRUM_K/C/M/Y PNC_K /
LCX574 PNC_CL
To Load Control Output

LSU Coin vendor Sensor Input Sensor Input
UART CPFD1 / CPFD2/ HPOS / PPD1 /

Via (Optional) IC71 CSS1 / CPED2 / CSS2 / CPED1
Mother MPFD / MPED / CPWD11- 12 DHPD_CL/ DHPD_K /
D/ A Conv
TFD2/ 1TNFD / WENDD / WINID POD3 / POD2
(TCS/ REGS cont)
Motor Lock Detect DSW_F / DSW_R / DSW_C/
IC27/ IC30/ IC31/ IC37 FAN_LD1- 2 / DVMC_LD / DVMB_LD / CLUD1 / CLUD2 /
Optional MUX PFM_LD / FUM_LD CSPD1 / CSPD2/
HC151x5 1TUD_K /1TUD_CL
Fuser Thermistor open detect
THOPEN_UM/ LM/ US
MUX
LCC UART HC151 Sensor Input
DSW_ADU/ TFD3 / MUX Sensor Input
RD I/ F PWB MPLD/ MTOP1/ MTOP2/ MPED HC151 DVSET (K/C/M/Y)
DRDET (K/C/M/Y)
Sensor Input
PPD2
FINISHER UART
Syncronous Motor
Toner Motor
(TNM_K/C/M/Y)
Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)
Analog I nput Analog I nput

DESK UART IC73 Temp/ Hum sensor(TH_M/ HUD_M) Fuser Thermistor(TH_UM/ LM/ US)
Analog Toner Detector(TCS_K/ C/ M/ Y)
DC Motor
LSU Thermistor(TH1_LSU)
MUX Process Cont. sensor (PCS_K/ CL) Lift Up Motor
DV detector (DVTYP_C/ M/ Y/ K)
Resist sensor (REGS_F/ R) (CLUM1/CLUM2)
Multi- bypass tray width sensor(MPWD)
DSPFcnt PCB
DSPF Memory PCB
LVDS Receiver LVDS Driver

LVDS
28bit 28bit
CCD PCB
With AFE& LVDS SCNcntPWB

LVDS Receiver LVDS
4bit * 2
LVDS Driver
4bit *2
D. Scanner control PWB
SDRAM RGB8bit*3
LVDS Driver
128Mbit
30bit
LVDS Receiver
LVDS
30bit SDRAM BUS XTAL
28.795MHz
or 22.7425MHz
SCAN ASIC 24bit BUS 24bit BUS

RGB10bit*3 RGB8bit *3 SCN IN PCB
/ CS3 BUFFER BUFFER
Or
DOCC PCB
LCD LVDS Driver
RGB8bit*3 LVDS
28bit Mother PCB
SRAM FlashROM<Socket>
1Mbit 8Mbit (MFP PCB)
/ CS0
/ CS2
(/ CS0 RESERVE
)
INVERTER PCB
CPT ASIC <Engine/Controller>
/ CS4
ADDRESS/ DATA BUS
LVDS
PANEL PCB
IO ASIC
/CS5 CARD READER
XTAL
19.6608MHz
SCANNER
MOTOR EEPROM
CPU

32Kbit
H8S/ 2373 I2C
AUDITOR
LAMP UN
MHPS OCSW
RSPF FEED
STMP UN
MOTOR
RSPF RVS
MOTOR
CLUTCH
PHOTO
RSPF Unit SENSOR
RxD
DOCC
Schmit Inv.
CPU
(Optional) TxD
H8S/2320
O.C. P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
SCN Cnt
E. Serial communication
O.C Schmit Inv.

P.U.
TxD1 RxD
TRANS_DAT
P.U.
RxD TxD[2]
TxD
RxD
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN
P.U.
RxD1 TxD P.D.
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. O.C.
LSU ASIC P.U.
P.D. TxD RxD[2]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
SCK1 SCK CPU P.D.
SCK_LSU O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS[2]
Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
LSU A[4:0] Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
I/O ASIC
P.U.
PD65892GC CTS[2]
D[15:8] CTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD
TxD
P.D.
RxD
TxD_FIN O.C Schmit Inv.
CPU DTR_SCAN
O.C. Schmit Inv. DSR_SCAN
H8S/2373 P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
RxD_SCAN
TxD_SCAN
P.D.
O.C. O.C.
P.D.
CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN nTxD_PIC
P.U
P.U
O.C. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN nRxD_PIC
(Optional) PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD3 RxD CLR[PIC]
P.U.
P.U.
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD P.D. REQ[PIC]
P.D.
RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK MFPC
I/O
I/O
RxD
TxD
O.C. O.C. I/F ASIC

P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK CPU
O.C. O.C. (Optional)

H8S/2373
P.U. P.U. P.U.

TxD4 RxD
TxD_LCC
Mother MFPC
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD4 TxD
RxD_LCC DSPF Cnt (for C-Jupiter)
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687
I/O TxD[3]
DTR_LCC TxD_FAX(D)
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[3]
I/O LCC RxD_FAX(D)
DSR_LCC RxD_FAX(D)+
O.C. O.C. (Optional) RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[4]
TxD_FAX(CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- RxD[4]
RxD_FAX(CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+
New RxD_FAX(CS)-
I/O ASIC ASIC
A[4:0] P.U.
RTS[3]
PD65892GC- DTR_FAX(D)
D[15:8] TxD
103 Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
PCU CPU CTS[3]
PIC DSR_FAX(D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv.
RxD RTS[4]
DTR_FAX(CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
CTS[4]
2nd FAX DSR_FAX(CS)
(same as 1st) 1st FAX P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
(Optional)
(for FG Model)
DC POWER SUPPLY
F301
Voltage
AC PWB T5AH/250V Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
no-mounting
D101
+
A1 F102
~
~
15A/125V
-
VR1
N/F
no-mounting
A1 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
15A 250V
A2 VR3 F101
T1AH/250V
T2.0AH/250V Z101 FW Voltage

F3 Generating F103 Generation
Circuit +24V1
+24V2
no- +24V3
mounting T8AH/250V +24V4
+24V5
VR2 +12V
WH-L WH-N +5Vn
F. AC power line diagram (120V series)
+3.3V
L1
WARM HEATER SET : OPTION RY1
L2
INT24V1
HL PWB
/HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 5W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC

GND
NO TD1 TD2 TD3
G
T1 G T1 T1 G
24V2
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_LM HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
6 6 6
MAIN UNIT
10W
MAIN UNIT
drawer
DESK
10W HL E THERMOSTAT TS_E
OPTION
DESK
HL LOW THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
10W HL MAIN THERMOSTAT TS_UM
OPTION
LCC
FUSING UNIT
DC POWER SUPPLY
Reactor F301
10mH Voltage
T3.15AH/250V Generation
3A + 5Vo
AC PWB + 5VL
no-mounting D102
+
F102
A1
~
~
T8AH/250V
-
VR1
N/F
no-mounting
A1 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
T10AH/250V F101
A2 VR3 T3.15AH/250V
F2
N
T10AH/250V
Z101 FW Voltage
Generating F103 Generation
F3 F4 Circuit +24V1
+24V2
+24V3
T2.0AH/250V no- T2.0AH/250V T6.3AH/250V +24V4
mounting +24V5
+12V
VR2 +5Vn
WH-L WH-N +3.3V
G. AC power line diagram (200V series)
L1
RY1
WARM HEATER SET : OPTION
L2
INT24V1
HL PWB
WH-SW /HL_PR
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 5W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC

GND
NO TD1 TD2 TD3
T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V2
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_LM HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
6 6 6
MAIN UNIT
10W
MAIN UNIT
drawer
DESK
10W HL E THERMOSTAT TS_E
OPTION
DESK
HL LOW THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
10W HL MAIN THERMOSTAT TS_UM
OPTION
LCC
FUSING UNIT
P-GND
INT24V1 INT24V1 INT24V1 INT24V1

L
5VN 5 VN
5VNPD P-GND DM_BK DM_CL
DRIVER SUB PWB

3.3V 3.3V 24V2
D-GND D-GND OSM
5VN 5VN
D-GND D-GND INT24V1 INT24V1
F201 12V 12V
24V1 24V1 24V1 5VN
F203 FUSE
24V3 24V3 RDSW P-GND PSFM PSM FUM POM ADULM HL_PR
FUSE P-GND P-GND PCU PWB HL(MAIN) HL(LOW) HL(SUB)
P-GND P-GND 5VNPD
FW FW DRIVER MAIN PWB HL PWB
H. DC power line diagram
D-GND FDSW 5VN N_HL(MAIN)

5V_LD 5VNPD
5VN D-GND D-GND RD I/F PWB
FET N_HL(LOW)
24V2 P-GND N_HL(SUB)

INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V1 INT24V1
P-GND P-GND INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND DVM_CL DVM_BK
INT24V1 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V2 P-GND
24V2
F202 INT24V2 2ndTC PWB
24V2 24V2 P-GND
FUSE INT24V2
AC PWB
MC PWB 1stTC PWB
INT24V2
P-GND
12V 12V PFM
P-GND FAX 3.3V
5VN MAIN 5VS TEL
3.3V PWB 5V LIU
D-GND D-GND PWB
A-GND
12V INT24V1
5VN HDD 5VN
D-GND LSUSS_B 5VO KEY OP 5VN ORS PD
D-GND 3.3V PWB D-GND PWB
D-GND
5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD INT24V1
24V3 24V3 LSUSS_C 24V_EXT

3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND LD_BK LD_C LD_M LD_Y option P-GND LVDS 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 5VN 5VN LSU 3.3V_EXT PWB D-GND LCD PWB
5VN 5VN 3.3V 3.3V PWB D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND 24V3
5VO 5VO MOTHER PWB P-GND PM

D-GND D-GND A12V 24V INVERTOR
12V 12V A5V P-GND PWB
24V3 24V3 5VN 5VN A3.3V CCD PWB
P-GND P-GND 3.3V 3.3V SCAN IN PWB or D-GND D-GND D-GND
D-GND D-GND DOCUMENT CONTROL PWB
24V CL
INVERTOR
12V 24V3 24V3 P-GND CL
PWB
5VL P-GND P-GND
5VO 12V 12V
MFPC PWB 3.3V 5VN 5VN
D-GND 3.3V 3.3V 24V1 ORS LED
D-GND D-GND PWB
5VO 5VO
24V_EXT 24V_EXT
F205 P-GND P-GND
24V5 24V5 5V_EXT 5V_EXT
P-GND P-GND AVCC AVCC
FUSE 5VN 5VN FINISHER SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
D-GND D-GND PWB D-GND D-GND RSPF UN
F204
24V4 24V4 option
P-GND P-GND 5V
FUSE 5VN 5VN D-GND CARD READER
LCC
D-GND D-GND
D-GND D-GND option
PSU
24V4
P-GND
5VN
DESK
D-GND
D-GND
option
7
(AC CORD) CN1(B03P-VL) AC PWB CN2(B03P-VL-K) (MSW harness) CN6(B03B-PASK-1) (DC main harness) CN20(B4P-PH-K-S)
1 L_IN MSW-Nout 1 MSW-Nout 1 DCCNT1 1 1 NC
2 NC NC 2 PS-250(RED) NC 2 2 NC
3 N_IN MSW-Lout 3 MSW-Lout 1 DCCNT2 3 3 n DCCNT1
CN6(B2P3-VH-R) CN3(B03P-VL-R) PS-250(RED) 4 n DCCNT2
7 : Feb. 15 2007
1 N_WH MSW-Lin 1 MSW-Lin 1

2 NC NC 2 PS-250 MSW CN2(B5P-VH-B) (DC main harness) CN19(B10P-VH)
3 L_WH MSW-Nin 3 MSW-Nin 1 D-GND 1 1 D-GND
CN4(B3P4-VH-R) PS-250 CN1(B2P3-VH-B) D-GND 2 2 D-GND
CN5(B03P-VL-E) L_DC 1 3 L_DC 5VO 3 3 5VL
1 L_HL NC 2 2 NC 5VL 4 4 5VL
2 NC NC 3 1 N_DC 5VL 5 5 5VO
3 N_HL N_DC 4 6 3.3V
(AC-HL harness) CN10(B4P-PH-K-S) (AC-DC harness) 7 5VN
24V2 1 8 12V
2. Actual wiring chart
NC 2 CN3(B03P-VH-B) 9 24V3
NC 3 3.3V 1 10 P-GND
A. Power supply section (P1)
CN1
L_HL 1 D-GND 4 3.3V 2
NC 2 D-GND 3 MOTHER PWB
N_HL 3
B03P-VL
HL PWB CN4(B6P-VH-B)
5VN 1 CN3
5VN 2 1 24V1
(AC-WH harness ) 5VN 3 TO LCC(P15) 2 P-GND
5VN 4 TO INSERTOR(P16) To P2 3 24V2
PS-187 D-GND 5 4 P-GND
L_WH 1 D-GND 6 TO LCC(P15) 5 24V3
WH_SW 6 D-GND
7 12V
L_WH 1 8 D-GND
PS-187 DC PWB 9 5VN
10 NC(D-GND)
11 3.3V
CN5(B04P-VH-B) 12 FW
CN5 12V 1 B12B-XL
D-GND 1 12V 2
NC 2 NC 3 CN26 (FROM - P4)
24V2 3 NC 4 28 PSFM_V
B03B-PH-K-R (AC-WH harness ) 30 PSCF_LD
CN7(B8P-VH-B) 26 P-GND
CN1 FW 1 B32B-PHDSS-B
1 WH-L P-GND 2
2 NC P-GND 3
3 WH-N SCANNER UNIT P-GND 4 PCU PWB

B2P3-VH-R (SCN-WH harness ) NC(P-GND) 5
R EL 2PIN P P-GND 6 TO INSERTOR(P16)
WH PWB 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 P-GND 7 TO LCC(P15)
(SCN-WH harness) 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH NC(P-GND) 8

CN2 R EL 2PIN P
WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 JPN:OPTION
NC 2 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 EX100V:OPTION CN8(B7P-VH-B)
WH-L(SCAN) 3 EX120V:OPTION NC(24V1) 1 (DC main harness) NAME
B2P3VH-BL EX200V:OPTION 24V1 2 5VL MFP
24V2 3 To P2 5VO FAX
CN3 24V3 4 5VN OTHER
WH-N(DESK1) 1 R EL 2PIN P 24V3 5 24V1 ENGINE
NC 2 WH 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 24V4 6 TO LCC(P15) 24V2 ENGINE
WH-L(DESK1) 3 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH 24V5 7 TO INSERTOR(P16) 24V3 ENGINE
B2P3-VH JPN:STANDARD 24V4 LCC,DESK
EX100V:OPTION JPN:OPTION 24V5 FINISHER
CN4 EX120V:OPTION EX100V:OPTION
WH_N(LSU) 1 EX200V:OPTION EX120V:OPTION
WH_N(DESK/LCC) 2 EX200V:OPTION PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
NC 3 To P15, P15-1 1 PSFM_V 3
WH_L(DESK/LCC) 4 PSU FAN 2 PSCF_LD 2
WH_L(LSU) 5 3 P-GND 1
B4P(5-3)-VH (Paper feed main harness CJ)
7
CN1 (PRT OP FFC) CN8

/LED3 1 24 /LED3
/LED2 2 23 /LED2
/LED1 3 22 /LED1
KEY6 4 21 KEY6
KEY5 5 20 KEY5
7 : Feb. 15 2007
KEY4 6 19 KEY4
KEY3 7 18 KEY3
KEY2 8 17 KEY2
KEY1 9 16 KEY1
OP_SET 10 15 OP_SET
B. Front section (P2)
D-GND 11 14 D-GND
5VN 12 13 5VN
5VN 13 12 5VN
LCDD7 14 11 LCDD7
LCDD6 15 10 LCDD6
LCDD5 16 9 LCDD5
LCDD4 17 8 LCDD4
LCDD3 18 7 LCDD3
LCDD2 19 6 LCDD2
LCDD1 20 5 LCDD1
LCDD0 21 4 LCDD0
LCD_E 22 3 LCD_E
/OP_RW 23 2 /OP_RW
LCD_CS 24 1 LCD_CS
PRINTER OP PWB T24FAZ-SMT
(PRINTER MODEL ONLY)
DSW-R (Upper main harness CJ) CN4

24V1 1 1 24V1
DSW-F DSW_R(24V) 2 2 DSW_R(24V)
DSW_R(24V) PS-187-2V P EL2P R 3 DSW_R(24V)
PS-187 1 DSW_R(24V) 1 4 DSW_F(24V)
DSW_F(24V) 2 DSW_F(24V) 2 5 INT24V1
SPS-51T-187 To P14 6 P-GND
7 5VN
B7P-VH-B
R SM18PIN P
1 24V3 1
1TNFD To P3
(Waste toner full detection) 2 /PNC_CL 2 (Upper main harness CJ) CN9 (FROM - P3)
1TNFD 1 3 1TNFD 3 1 1TNFD
D-GND 2 4 D-GND 4 2 D-GND
6-179228-2 5 WTNM_1 5

6 WTNM_2 6
P SL2PIN R 7 24V3 7 17 WTNM_1
TNM 1 WTNM_1 1 8 /PNC 8 18 WTNM_2
(Waste toner motor) 2 WTNM_2 2 9 WEB_INL 9
10 RTH_1CS_IN 10
11 D-GND 11 16 24V3
PNC(BLACK) 12 TH_UM_IN 12 15 /PNC
24V3 1 To P3 13 TH_US_IN 13 To P3 B30B-PHDSS-B
/PNC 2 14 TH_LM_IN 14
179228-2 (HL I/F harness CJ) 15 D-GND 15
OPTION 16 TH_UMCS_IN 16 CN3 (FROM - P1)
FRONT 17 WEB-END 17 3 24V2
18 NC 18 B12B-XL
CN8 (FROM - P1) CN2

24V2 3 CN8 1 5VNPD
B7P-VH-B 24V2 6 To P14 2 P-GND
24V2 7 3 INT24V1
PSU INT24V2 1 5 INT24V2
P-GND 2 6 P-GND
INT24V1in 3 4 INT24V1in
/INT_CNT 5 7 /INT_CNT
AC PWB B7P-VH-B (DC main harness) B7P-VH-B PCU PWB
7
SPS-61T-250 SPS-51T-187
SPS-51T-187 (Fuser harness CJ)
HL MAIN THERMOSTAT P Drawer RWZ R
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
SPS-61T-250
(Harness between TS-HL MAIN) 2 N-HL(E) 2
3 N-HL(LOW) 3
7 : Feb. 15 2007
4 L-HL(MAIN) 4 (HL I/F harness CJ) CN2 HL PWB

P R 5 L-HL(E) 5 1 N-HL(MAIN) CN4
SPS-51T-187 VL
SPS-51T-187 6 L-HL(LOW) 6 2 L-HL(E) /HL_PR 1
HL E THERMOSTAT 3 L-HL(LOW) HLOUT_UM 2
B03P-VL-K HLOUT_LM 3
SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187
(Harness CJ between TS-HL SUB) HLOUT_US 4
CN3 D-GND 5
1 L-HL(MAIN) INT24V1 6
P R 2 N-HL(LOW) B6P-PH-K-S (Upper main harness CJ)
C. Fusing unit section (P3)
YL 3 N-HL(E)
SPS-51T-187
HL LOW THERMOSTAT B03P-VL-R
R P
YL SPS-51T-187
(Harness CJ between TS-HL LOW) (Fuser harness CJ)
R P
YL
CN34
PHNR-4-H + INT24V1 1
BU04P-TR-P-H (Fuser harness CJ) R SM18PIN P (Upper main harness CJ) CN13(FROM - P13) INT24V2 2 To P4
4 TH_UM_IN 1 B-1 TH_UM_IN B-9 (HL I/F harness CJ) 1 24V3 1 31 24V3 D-GND 3
RTH(MAIN) 3 TH_UMCS_IN 2 B-2 D-GND B-8 2 /PNC_CL 2 32 /PNC_CL P-GND 4 To P4
2 D-GND 3 B-3 TH_US_IN B-7 3 1TNFD 3 /HL_PR 5
1 NC 4 B-4 D-GND B-6 4 D-GND 4 /TC_CLK# 6 To P4
PHNR-2-H + B-5 TH_LM_IN B-5 5 WTNM_1 5 HLOUT_UM 7
To P2 To P2
BU02P-TR-P-H B-6 D-GND B-4 6 WTNM_2 6 PCU PWB /TC_DATA# 8 To P4
2 TH_US_IN 1 B-7 WEB-END B-3 7 24V3 7 HLOUT_US 9
RTH(EXTERNAL) 1 D-GND 2 B-8 D-GND B-2 8 /PNC 8 /TC_LD# 10
CN9 To P4
B-9 TH_UMCS_IN B-1 9 WEB_INL 9 1 1TNFD HLOUT_LM 11
To P2
10 TH_E_IN 10 2 D-GND /HV_REM# 12 To P4
PHNR-4-H + 11 D-GND 11 3 NC NC 13
BU04P-TR-P-H 12 TH_UM_IN 12 4 NC NC 14
1 D-GND 4 13 TH_US_IN 13 5 NC NC 15
RTH(LOW) 2 TH_LM_IN 3 14 TH_LM_IN 14 6 NC NC 16
3 WEB-END 2 15 D-GND 15 7 NC DRMCL_A 17
4 D-GND 1 16 TH_UMCS_IN 16 8 NC DRMCL_B 18
SRA-01T-3.2 17 WEB-END 17 9 5VLED /DRMCL_A 19
18 NC 18 10 5VLED /DRMCL_B 20
11 1TUD_CL /DRMCL_CNT 21
WEB-END To P4
12 1TUD_K /DRMBK_CNT 22

13 GND DRMBK_A 23
SRA-01T-3.2 (WEB-END harness) 14 D-GND DRMBK_B 24
PHNR-2-H + (Fuser harness CJ) 15 /PNC /DRMBK_A 25
BU02P-TR-P-H A-1 D-GND A-10 16 24V3 /DRMBK_B 26
To P2
2 TH_E_IN 1 A-2 TH_E_IN A-9 17 WTNM_1 /BK_EN 27
RTH(SUB) 1 D-GND 2 A-3 NC A-8 18 WTNM_2 /CLC_EN 28 To P14
A-4 NC A-7 19 NC /CLM_EN 29
A-5 NC A-6 20 NC /CLY_EN 30
SRA-01T-3.2 PHNR-2-H + A-6 NC A-5 21 WEB_INL BTMA 31
(WEB-INIT harness) BU02P-TR-P-H (Fuser harness CJ) A-7 NC A-4 22 WEB-END BTMB 32
2 WEB_INL 1 A-8 NC A-3 23 NC /BTMA 33
WEB-INL 1 D-GND 2 A-9 D-GND A-2 24 D-GND /BTMB 34
A-10 WEB_INL A-1 25 TH_UM_IN BTM_CNT 35
(CRU model) SRA-01T-3.2 CRU model CZHR 9PIN 26 D-GND /ADMHC 36
CZHR 10PIN 27 TH_US_IN ADMHA 37
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fuser Drawer connector pin layout RTH_1CS_IN ADMHB 38

28
Fuser unit I/F Drawer Fuser unit I/F Drawer 29 TH_LM_IN ADMHXA 39
30 TH_UMCS_IN ADMHXB 40
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
1 2 3 3 2 1
A10
(Upper main harness CJ) B30B-PHDSS-B B40B-PADSS-B
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
B9 A2
B8 A3
B7 A4
B6 A5
B5 A6
B4 A7
B3 A8
B2 A9
B1 A10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
6 5 4 4 5 6
View from Fuser unit side View from Body side DF11-6DP-SP1
7
1TUD_K (Transfer belt separation harness)

(Transfer separation sensor BK)
1TUD_K 1 3 D-GND 1 CN9 (FROM - P3)
D-GND 2 2 1TUD_K 2 (Upper main harness CJ) 9 5VLED
5VLED 3 1 5VLED 3 10 5VLED
7 : Feb. 15 2007
179228-3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H 11 1TUD_CL

1TUD_CL (Transfer belt separation harness) 12 1TUD_K
(Transfer separation sensor CL) 13 GND
1TUD_CL 1 3 D-GND 1 14 D-GND
D-GND 2 2 1TUD_CL 2 B30B-PHDSS-B
5VLED 3 1 5VLED 3
179228-3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
(Secondary transfer separation harness) CN1 (Upper main harness CJ) CN34 (FROM - P3)
2-TC 2-TC INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
PS-187(BLUE) PS-187 P-GND 2 4 P-GND
D. High voltage section (P4)
CLR /TC_CLK# 4 6 /TC_CLK#

/TC_DATA# 3 8 /TC_DATA#
2nd TC /TC_LD# 5 10 /TC_LD#
PWB /HV_REM# 6 12 /HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S B40B-PADSS-B
PCU PWB
CN26
1 APPD1
CN9 2 APPD2
1 INT24V2 3 24V3
2 NC 4 /MPFS
To P10 3 INT24V2 5 /MPGS
6 /MPUC
B3P-PH-K-S AC PWB 7 /ADUGS
(MC-BK harness) CN1 8 D-GND
MC-K MC-K INT24V2 6 9 5VN
PS-187 PS-250(RED) P-GND 5 To P12 10 SIN3
GB-K (SPRING) GB-K /HV_DATA# 4 11 MPFD
/HV_CLK# 3 12 SELIN2
BS-K (SPRING) BS-K /HV_LD1# 2 13 SELIN1
HV_REM# 1 14 POD3
GB-C (SPRING) GB-C B6P-PH-K-S (Paper feed main harness CJ) 15 SELIN3
16 MPWD
BS-C (SPRING) BS-C CN2 17 TH_M
INT24V2 1 18 P-GND
GB-M (SPRING) GB-M P-GND 2 19 HUD_M
1TC_CL 3 20 P-GND
BS-M (SPRING) BS-M 1TC_YMC 4 21 /HV_DATA#
(MC interface MC PWB 1TC_K 5 22 /HV_CLK#

harness)
MC-C GB-Y (SPRING) GB-Y MC_YMC 6 23 /HV_LD1#
PS-187 HV_REM 7 24 HV_REM#
MC-M BS-Y (SPRING) BS-Y B7P-PH-K-S To P14 25 P-GND
PS-187 (MC interface To P1 26 P-GND
harness)
MC-M To P14 27 0ZFM_V
PS-187 (High voltage interface harness) To P1 28 PSFM_V
MC-Y To P14 29 /0ZFM_CNT
PS-187 (MC harness) To P1 30 PSCF_LD
MC-Y MC-CMY To P14 31 OZFM_LD
PS-187 PS-250 To P12 32 5VNPD
(Primary transfer CN1 B32B-PHDSS-B
output harness) (Primary transfer harness PA HVR harness PT) HV_REM 1
1TC-K 1TC-K 1TC-K 1TC-K MC_YMC 2
SPS-01T-187 PS-187 VHR-2N PS-250 1st TC PWB 1TC_K 3
1TC-C 1TC-C 1TC-CMY 1TC-CMY 1TC_YMC 4
SPS-01T-187 PS-250(BLUE) FPS-187(RED) PS-187 1TC_CL 5
1TC-M 1TC-M P-GND 6
SPS-01T-187 PS-250(RED) HVR PWB INT24V2 7
1TC-Y 1TC-Y B7P-PH-K-S
SPS-01T-187 PS-250(YELLOW)
7
DVM_K (DV motor BK) (Process drive harness CJ) CN12 CN5 (Upper main harness CJ) (CRUM harness) CRUM(BLACK)
INT24V2 1 6 INT24V2 5V_CRUM 1 1 5V_CRUM 1 2 5V_CRUM
7 : Feb. 15 2007
P-GND 2 4 P-GND CRM_K_DT# 3 2 CRM_K_DT# 2 4 CRM_K_DT#

/DVM_K_CK 4 10 /DVM_K_CK CRM_K_CK# 5 3 CRM_K_CK# 3 3 CRM_K_CK#
/DVM_K_D 5 12 /DVM_K_D D-GND 7 4 D-GND 4 1 D-GND
DVM_K_LD 6 2 DVM_K_LD TSR-04V-K
5V 7
B7P-PH-K-S R SM2P P
TNM_K 1 TNM_K_1 1 15 TNM_K_1 CRUM(CYAN)
(Toner motor BK) 2 TNM_K_2 2 17 TNM_K_2 2 5V_CRUM
R SM2P P 19 TNM_C_1 CRM_C_DT# 2 5 CRM_C_DT# 5 4 CRM_C_DT#
TNM_C 1 TNM_C_1 1 21 TNM_C_2 CRM_C_CK# 4 6 CRM_C_CK# 6 3 CRM_C_CK#
(Toner motor CYAN) 2 TNM_C_2 2 22 TNM_M_1 1 D-GND
R SM2P P 24 TNM_M_2 TSR-04V-K
TNM_M 1 TNM_M_1 1 18 TNM_Y_1
(Toner motor MAGENTA) 2 TNM_M_2 2 20 TNM_Y_2
R SM2P P CRUM(MAGENTA)
E. Main drive unit section 1/2 (P5)
TNM_Y 1 TNM_Y_1 1 2 5V_CRUM

(Toner motor YELLOW) 2 TNM_Y_2 2 CRM_M_DT# 9 7 CRM_M_DT# 7 4 CRM_M_DT#
DVM_CL (DV motor CL) CRM_M_CK# 10 8 CRM_M_CK# 8 3 CRM_M_CK#
INT24V2 1 5 INT24V2 1 D-GND
P-GND 2 3 P-GND TSR-04V-K
/DVM_CL_CK 4 9 /DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D 5 11 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD 6 1 DVM_CL_LD CRUM(YELLOW)
5V 7 PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H 2 5V_CRUM
B7P-PH-K-S 1TURC 1 24V3 2 16 24V3 CRM_Y_DT# 6 9 CRM_Y_DT# 9 4 CRM_Y_DT#
(Transfer separation clutch) 2 /1TURC 1 14 /1TURC CRM_Y_CK# 8 10 CRM_Y_CK# 10 3 CRM_Y_CK#
DHPD_K 32 DHPD_K B10B-PHDSS-B P SM10P R 1 D-GND
(Phase detection BK) 30 5VLED TSR-04V-K
D-GND 1
DHPD_K 2
DHPD_CL 5VLED 3 31 DHPD_CL
(Phase detection CL) S3B-PH-K-S 29 5VLED
5
4
3
1
2
6
5
4
3
1
2
6
D-GND 1 23 D-GND
DHPD_CL 2
5VLED 3 PCU PWB
S3B-PH-K-S 7 NC
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
8 NC
13 NC DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1
25 NC
26 NC
2
3
4
1
27 NC

28 NC
B32B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-4DP-SP1 CN21 (FROM - P15)
21 PCSFM2_LD
(DC main harness) 22 PCSFM2_V#
1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 26 INT24V1
2 LOCK 2 2 /PCSFM 2 24 /PCSFM
3 /PCSFM 3 R SM2P P B26B-PHDSS-B
R SM3P P
(Upper main harness CJ) CN13 (FROM - P13)
(HL interface harness CJ) 23 LOCK
B32B-PHDSS-B
3 INT24V1 1 Toner
2 LOCK 2
1 /PCSFM 3 cooling fan
PHNR-3-H + BU03-TR-P-H
7
7 : Feb. 15 2007
BTM (Belt motor) (Process drive harness CJ) CN1

BTM_B// 1 1 BTM_A/
INT24V1 2 2 BTM_A//
BTM_B/ 3 3 BTM_B//
BTM_A/ 4 4 BTM_B/
INT24V1 5 5 INT24V1
BTM_A// 6 6 INT24V1
PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-S
F. Main drive unit section 2/2 (P6)
DMCL (Drum motor CL) (Process drive harness CJ) CN5

DMCLB// 1 1 DMCLA/
INT24V1 2 2 DMCLA//
DMCLB/ 3 3 DMCLB//
DMCLA/ 4 4 DMCLB/
INT24V1 5 5 INT24V1
DMCLA// 6 6 INT24V1
PHR-6 7 DMBKA/
8 DMBKA//
R SM6 P 9 DMBKB//
1 DMBKA// 1 10 DMBKB/
2 DMBKA/ 2 11 INT24V1
DMBK 3 DMBKB/ 3 12 INT24V1
(Drum motor BK) 4 DMBKB// 4 B12B-PH-K-S
5 INT24V1 5
6 INT24V1 6
DRIVER
SUB PWB

(Paper feed main harness CJ) CN5
INT24V1 1 1 PSMA/
PSMA/ 2 2 PSMA//
PSM PSMB/ 3 3 PSMB//
(PS motor) PSMA// 4 4 PSMB/ DRIVER MAIN PWB
PSMB// 5 5 INT24V1
INT24V1 6 6 INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-R 7 ADMLA/
8 ADMLA//
9 ADMLB//
To P11
10 ADMLB/
11 INT24V1
12 INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
7
DL_BK (Discharge lamp BK) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness) CN15
NC 2
DL_BK# 3 10 DL_BK# 1 1 DL_BK#
BLACK 53254-0310
7 : Feb. 15 2007
TCS_K (Toner concentration sensor BK) (DV harness)

24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 5 24V3
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K
DV un D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 11 D-GND
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
DV INITIAL PWB (BLACK) 51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 13 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K
DVTYP_K 3 3 DVSET_K 3 2 DVSET_K 9 17 DVSET_K
G. DL & DV section (P7)
DVSET_K 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN

5VN 1 (BIAS C QR/P8-8P P
(BIAS harness B) harness A)
S4P-PH-K-S BS-K (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_C (Discharge lamp CYAN) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
NC 2
CYAN DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#
53254-0310
TCS_C (Toner concentration sensor CYAN) (DV harness)
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 25 24V3
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 31 D-GND
TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
DV INITIAL PWB (CYAN) 51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 33 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C
DVTYP_C 3 3 DVSET_C 3 2 DVSET_C 9 37 DVSET_C
DVSET_C 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN
5VN 1 (BIAS PCU PWB
harness A) C QR/P8-8P P
(BIAS harness B)
S4P-PH-K-S BS-C (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
NC 2
MAGENTA DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#
53254-0310
TCS_M (Toner concentration sensor MAGENTA) (DV harness)
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 6 24V3
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
DV INITIAL PWB (MAGENTA) 51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 14 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M

DVTYP_M 3 3 DVSET_M 3 2 DVSET_M 9 18 DVSET_M
DVSET_M 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
(BIAS harness B) harness A)
S4P-PH-K-S BS-M (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_Y (Discharge lamp YELLOW) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
NC 2
YELLOW DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
53254-0310
TCS_Y (Toner concentration sensor YELLOW) (DV harness)
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 26 24V2
TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
DV INITIAL PWB (YELLOW) 51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 34 D-GND
D-GND 4 2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
DVTYP_Y 3 3 DVSET_Y 3 2 DVSET_Y 9 38 DVSET_Y
DVSET_Y 2 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN
(BIAS harness B) harness A) B40B-PADSS-B
S4P-PH-K-S BS-Y (SPRING) To P4
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
7
BD PWB (LSU-BD harness) CN6

D-GND 4 1 D-GND CN9 (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) CN21
n BD 3 2 n BD D-GND 1 1 D-GND
D-GND 2 3 D-GND 3.3V 2 2 3.3V
5VN 1 4 5VN D-GND 3 3 D-GND
B4P-PH-K-R LSU TH1 5 D-GND 5VN 4 4 5VN
7 : Feb. 15 2007
D-GND 4 6 LSUTH1 24V1 5 5 24V1

LSUTH1 3 7 NC P-GND 6 6 P-GND
NC 2 B7P-PH-K-S S06B-XASK-1 B6B-XA
NC 1 (LSU-LD harness) CN1
PHR-4 3 D-GND CN5 (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) CN13
H. LSU section (P8)
LD PWB(BLACK) 1 INT5V INT5V 1 1 INT5V

D-GND 10 5 /SH_K D-GND 2 2 D-GND
INT5V 9 7 /ENB_K D-GND 3 3 D-GND
/SH_K 8 6 DT_K- n SCK_LSU 4 4 n SCK_LSU
/ENB_K 7 4 DT_K+ n TRANS_DATA 5 5 n TRANS_DATA
DT_K- 6 2 D-GND D-GND 6 6 D-GND
DT_K+ 5 8 Vref_K LSUASIC_RST 7 7 LSUASIC_RST
D-GND 4 10 SK_K n RSV_DAT 8 8 n RSV_DAT
Vref_K 3 9 n LDERR_K n TRANS_RST 9 9 n TRANS_RST
SK_K 2 11 LSUTH2 JOBEND_INT 10 10 JOBEND_INT
n LDERR_K 1 12 D-GND LSUTH1 11 11 LSUTH1
PHR-10 B12B-PHDSS-B LSUTH2 12 12 LSUTH2
LD PWB(CYAN) (LSU-LD harness) CN4 VSYNC_K_N 13 13 VSYNC_K_N
D-GND 10 3 D-GND VSYNC_K_P 14 14 VSYNC_K_P
INT5V 9 1 INT5V VSYNC_C_P 15 15 VSYNC_C_P
/SH_C 8 5 /SH_C VSYNC_C_N 16 16 VSYNC_C_N
/ENB_C 7 7 /ENB_C VSYNC_M_N 17 17 VSYNC_M_N
DT_C- 6 6 DT_C- VSYNC_M_P 18 18 VSYNC_M_P
DT_C+ 5 4 DT_C+ VSYNC_Y_P 19 19 VSYNC_Y_P
D-GND 4 2 D-GND LSU VSYNC_Y_N 20 20 VSYNC_Y_N
Vref_C 3 8 Vref_C S20B-PHDSS-B B20B-PHDSS-B
LDCHK_C 2 10 LDCHK_C
PWB CN3 (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) CN14
n LDERR_C 1 9 n LDERR_C CH0_N 1 1 CH0_N
LD PWB(MAGENTA) PHR-10 CH0_P 2 2 CH0_P
D-GND 10 15 D-GND D-GND 3 3 D-GND
INT5V 9 13 INT5V D-GND 4 4 D-GND
/SH_M 8 17 /SH_M CH1_N 5 5 CH1_N
/ENB_M 7 19 /ENB_M CH1_P 6 6 CH1_P
DT_M- 6 18 DT_M- CH2_N 7 7 CH2_N
DT_M+ 5 16 DT_M+ CH2_P 8 8 CH2_P
Vref_M 3 20 Vref_M D-GND 10 10 D-GND
LDCHK_M 2 22 LDCHK_M CLCLK_N 11 11 CLCLK_N
n LDERR_M 1 21 n LDERR_M CLCLK_P 12 12 CLCLK_P
PHR-10 LD PWB(YELLOW) CH3_N 13 13 CH3_N
D-GND 10 27 D-GND CH3_P 14 14 CH3_P

INT5V 9 25 INT5V D-GND 15 15 D-GND
/SH_Y 8 29 /SH_Y D-GND 16 16 D-GND
/ENB_Y 7 31 /ENB_Y HSYNC_LSU_N 17 17 HSYNC_LSU_N MOTHER PWB
DT_Y- 6 30 DT_Y- HSYNC_LSU_P 18 18 HSYNC_LSU_P
DT_Y+ 5 28 DT_Y+ D-GND 19 19 D-GND
Vref_Y 3 32 Vref_Y ECLK_LSU_P 21 21 ECLK_LSU_P
LDCHK_Y 2 34 LDCHK_Y ECLK_LSU_N 22 22 ECLK_LSU_N
n LDERR_Y 1 33 n LDERR_Y S22B-PHDSS-B B22B-PHDSS-B
PHR-10 B34B-PHDSS-B
POLYGON MOTOR (Polygon motor harness) CN8
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK
/LOCK 3 4 /LOCK
/START 4 3 /START (Harness between MOTHER-LSU) CN10
P-GND 5 2 P-GND LSUSS_B 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
24V1 6 1 24V1 (LSU shutter solenoid BK) 2 /LSUSS_B 2 2 NC
PHR-6 B6P-PH-K-S P SM2P R 3 NC PCU PWB
CN2 4 /LSUSS_B
1 24V1 5 NC
LSU FAN 2 n FANRDY B5P-PH-K-S
3 P-GND
B3P-PH-K-S
7
PHNR-12-H + (Size detection harness CJ) P DF1B-24p S (Paper feed main harness CJ) CN6
CPFD1
(CS1 paper entry detection) (Paper feed UN harness cs1) BU12P-TR-P-H 1 CPFD1 1 1 CPFD1
D-GND 1 6 D-GND 7 3 CLUD1 3 3 CLUD1
CPFD1 2 5 CPFD1 8 5 CPED1 5 5 CPED1
7 : Feb. 15 2007
5VN 3 4 5VN 9 7 DSW_C 7 7 DSW_C

PHNR-03-H CLUD1(CS1 lift detection) 12 D-GND 1 9 CSPD1 9 9 CSPD1
D-GND 1 11 CLUD1 2 11 CPWD11 11 21 CPWD11
CS1 CLUD1 2 10 5VNPD 3 13 CPWD12 13 23 CPWD12
PAPER 5VNPD 3 9 D-GND 4 15 CSS1 15 11 CSS1
CPED1
FEED (CS1 paper empty detection) PHNR-03-H 8 CPED1 5 16 CSS2 16 10 CSS2
UN D-GND 1 7 5VNPD 6 2 CPFD2 2 2 CPFD2
CPED1 2 3 D-GND 10 4 CLUD2 4 4 CLUD2
5VNPD 3 2 DSW_C 11 6 CPED2 6 6 CPED2
PHNR-03-H DSW_C (Right lower door open/close detection) 1 5VN 12 10 CSPD2 10 8 CSPD2
PCU
D-GND 1 12 CPWD21 12 22 CPWD21
CSPD1
DSW_C 2 (CS1 paper remaining quantity detection) 14 CPWD22 14 24 CPWD22
I. Paper feed unit section (P9)
5VN 3 D-GND 1 17 CSS11 17 13 CSS11

PHNR-03-H CSPD1 2 19 CSS12 19 15 CSS12
5VNPD 3 21 CSS13 21 17 CSS13
PHR-3 23 CSS14 23 19 CSS14
CSS1
(CS1 paper size detection) 18 CSS21 18 12 CSS21
NC 1 20 CSS22 20 14 CSS22
D-GND 2 22 CSS23 22 16 CSS23
CSS11 3 24 CSS24 24 18 CSS24
CSS12 4 8 NC 8 20 NC
CSS13 5 B24B-PHDSS-B
CSS14 6
S6P-PH-K-S
CSS2
(CS2 paper size detection)
NC 1
D-GND 2 (Size detection harness CJ) CN4
CSS21 3 3 D-GND
CSS22 4 20 5VN
CSS23 5 1 D-GND
CSS24 6 18 5VNPD
S6P-PH-K-S 2 D-GND
19 5VNPD
4 D-GND
21 5VN
9 D-GND
26 5VNPD
10 D-GND
11 D-GND
27 5VNPD

28 5VNPD
29 5VNPD
30 5VNPD
12 D-GND
13 D-GND
PHNR-9-H + 14 D-GND
CPFD2
(CS2 paper entry detection) (Paper feed UN harness cs2) BU09P-TR-P-H (Size detection harness CJ) 15 D-GND
CPFD2 2 2 CPFD2 8 17 D-GND
5VN 3 1 5VN 9 7 D-GND
PHNR-03-H 9 D-GND 1 24 5VN
CS2 CLUD2(CS2 lift detection) 8 CLUD2 2 5 D-GND
PAPER D-GND 1 7 5VNPD 3 22 5VNPD
FEED CLUD2 2 6 D-GND 4 6 D-GND
UN 5VNPD 3 5 CPED2 5 23 5VNPD DRIVER
CPED2
(CS2 paper empty detection) PHNR-03-H 4 5VNPD 6 8 D-GND MAIN
D-GND 1 25 5VNPD
CSPD2
CPED2 2 (CS2 paper remaining quantity detection) B30B-PHDSS-B PWB
5VNPD 3 D-GND 1
PHNR-03-H CSPD2 2
5VNPD 3
PHR-3
7
7 : Feb. 15 2007
CN9
To P4 1 INT24V2
2 NC
3 INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
AC PWB
CN17
CPFM (Paper feed motor) (Paper feed drive harness) (Paper feed main harness CJ) 1 /CPFM_D
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1 2 CPFM_LD
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2 3 NC
FG-OUT 3 3 /CPFM_CK 3 4 /CPFM_CK
/CPFM_CK 4 4 /CPFM_D 4 5 P-GND
/CPFM_D 5 5 CPFM_LD 5 6 /CLUM1
CPFM_LD 6 6 NC 6 7 P-GND
5V 7 7 /CPFC 7 8 /CLUM2
B7P-PH-K-S 8 24V3 8 9 P-GND
J. Paper feed drive unit section (P10)
PHNR-2-H 9 /CPUC1 9 10 24V3

BU02P-TR-P-H 10 24V3 10 11 /CPFC
CPFC 1 /CPFC 2 11 /CPUC2 11 12 24V3
(Vertical transport clutch) 2 24V3 1 12 24V3 12 13 /CPUC1
13 P-GND 13 14 24V3
PHNR-2-H 14 /CLUM1 14 15 /CPUC2
BU02P-TR-P-H 15 P-GND 15 16 24V3
CPFC1 1 /CPUC1 2 16 /CLUM2 16 17 /PCSS
(CS1 paper feed clutch) 2 24V3 1 17 NC 17 18 PCS_LED#
18 NC 18 19 PCS_CL
PHNR-2-H R SM18P-BK P 20 REGS_F
BU02P-TR-P-H 21 PCS_K
CPFC2 1 /CPUC2 2 22 REGS_F_LED#
(CS2 paper feed clutch) 2 24V3 1 23 5VNPD
To P11 24 REGS_R_LED#
25 D-GND
CLUM1 (CS1 lift motor) 26 REGS_R
P-GND 1 27 D-GND
/CLUM1 2 28 D-GND
B2P-PH-K-S 29 D-GND
30 D-GND
CLUM2 (CS2 lift motor) 31 PPD1
P-GND 1 32 PPD2

/CLUM2 2 B32B-PHDSS-B
B2P-PH-K-S PCU PWB
PSFM (PS front motor) (Paper feed main harness CJ) CN1
PSFMA// 1 1 PSFMA/
INT24V1 2 2 PSFMA//
PSFMB// 3 3 PSFMB// DRIVER
PSFMA/ 4 4 PSFMB/ MAIN PWB
INT24V1 5 5 INT24V1
PSFMB/ 6 6 INT24V1
PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-S
7
CN17
1 /CPFM_D
2 CPFM_LD
3 NC
4 /CPFM_CK
7 : Feb. 15 2007
5 P-GND
6 /CLUM1
7 P-GND
RESI SENSOR F (Process control sensor UN harness) To P10 8 /CLUM2
5VNPD 4 9 P-GND
D-GND 3 10 24V3
REGS_F 2 11 /CPFC
REGS_F_LED# 1 12 24V3
PHR-4 13 /CPUC1
14 24V3
PROCON SENSOR 15 /CPUC2
5VNPD 5 16 24V3
(Paper feed
D-GND 4 main harness CJ) 17 /PCSS
PCS_K 3 1 5VNPD 1 18 PCS_LED#
PCS_CL 2 2 D-GND 2 19 PCS_CL
PROCON SENSOR UN PCS_LED# 1 3 REGS_F 3 20 REGS_F
PHR-5 4 REGS_F_LED# 4 21 PCS_K
5 5VNPD 5 22 REGS_F_LED#
RESI SENSOR R 6 D-GND 6 23 5VNPD
5VNPD 4 7 PCS_K 7 24 REGS_R_LED#
D-GND 3 8 PCS_CL 8 25 D-GND
REGS_R 2 9 PCS_LED# 9 26 REGS_R
REGS_R_LED# 1 10 5VNPD 10 27 D-GND
PHR-4 11 D-GND 11 28 D-GND
K. PS unit & process control unit section (P11)
12 REGS_R 12 29 D-GND
13 REGS_R_LED# 13 30 D-GND
PCSS 2 /PCSS 2 14 /PCSS 14 31 PPD1 PCU
(Process control 1 24V3 1 15 24V3 15 32 PPD2
shutter solenoid) PWB
R SM2P P 16 NC 16 B32B-PHDSS-B
17 NC 17
18 NC 18
R SM18P P
PROCON SENSOR UN
PPD1(PS front sensor) (PS UN harness) BU06P-TR-P-H + PHNR-6-H

D-GND 1 6 D-GND 1
PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2
5VNPD 3 4 5VNPD 3
PHR-3 3 5VNPD 4
2 PPD2 5
PS UN

1 D-GND 6
PPD2 (PS sensor)
5VNPD 1
PPD2 2
D-GND 3
6
5
4
3
2
1
179228-3
PS UN
PROCON SENSOR UN CN5
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
1 PSMA/
DF11-6DP-SP1 2 PSMA//
3 PSMB//
To P6
4 PSMB/
5 INT24V1
ADULM (ADU lower motor) (Paper feed main harness CJ) 6 INT24V1
ADMLA// 1 7 ADMLA/
INT24V1 2 8 ADMLA// DRIVER
ADMLB// 3 9 ADMLB//
ADMLA/ 4 10 ADMLB/ MAIN
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1
ADMLB/ 6 12 INT24V1
PWB
PHR-6 B12B-PH-K-S
7
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H (Right door harness CJ) (Paper feed main harness CJ)
ADU gate 2 24V3 1 9 24V3 9 CN26 (FROM - P4)
1 /ADUGS 2 25 /ADUGS 25 7 /ADUGS
solenoid (Right paper exit/
TFD3 (Right full detection) (Right paper exit UN harness) reverse PG interface harness CJ) CN2 CN1 FG 32 F-GND 32 FG
7 : Feb. 15 2007
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
TFD3 1 6 TFD3 1 1 TFD3 5VN 1 1 5VN 1 9 5VN
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 2 2 D-GND D-GND 2 17 D-GND 17 8 D-GND
5VLED1 3 4 5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 10 SIN3
POD3
(Right paper exit detection) 179228-3 3 POD3 4 4 POD3 SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 13 SELIN1
POD3 1 2 D-GND 5 5 D-GND SELIN2 5 3 SELIN2 3 12 SELIN2
D-GND 2 1 5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 15 SELIN3
5VLED4 3 PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H 7 DSW_ADU APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 1 APPD1
179228-3 8 D-GND APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 2 APPD2
9 5VLED2 APPD3 9
10 APPD1 POD3 10 21 POD3 21 14 POD3
11 D-GND MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 11 MPFD
DSW_ADU
(ADU open/close detection) 12 5VLED5 5VNPD 16 10 5VNPD 10 32 5VNPD
DSW_ADU 1 13 NC MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 16 MPWD
L. Right door unit section (P12)
D-GND 2 14 NC TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 17 TH_M

5VLED2 3 15 NC HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 19 HUD_M
179228-3 16 NC S16B-PHDSS-B 18 P-GND
S16B-PHDSS-B 15 24V3 15
APPD1
(ADU transport detection 1) 31 /MPGS 31 5 /MPGS
APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 30 /MPFS 30 4 /MPFS
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 RIGHT 14 24V3 14
5VLED5 3 1 5VLED5 3 DOOR I/F 1 24V3 2 28 /MPUC 28 6 /MPUC
(ADU transport 1 interface harness)
179228-3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H 2 /MPUC 1 13 24V3 13
APPD2 (ADU transport detection 2) (Right door harness CJ) CN3(1/2) PWB PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H 12 24V3 12 3 24V3
APPD2 1 4 APPD2 5 NC 5 B32B-PHDSS-B
6
5
3
4
2
1
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 11 NC 11
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10 16 NC 16
179228-3 22 NC 22 PCU PWB
CN3(2/2) 24 NC 24
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
(Manual feed tray harness ) (Right door harness CJ) NC 1 MPUC 26 NC 26

MPLD (Manual feed paper (Manual feed tray
length detection 1) PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H harness ) PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H NC 2 (Manual paper feed clutch) 27 NC 27
MPLD 1 1 NC 9 3 MPLD 12 16 MPLD NC 3 29 NC 29
D-GND 2 2 NC 8 1 MPLD2 14 13 MPLD2 NC 11 P QR/P4 32PIN S DF11-6DP-SP1
5VLED12 3 3 NC 7 4 5VLED12 11 18 5VLED12 NC 12
179228-3 4 MPLD 6 NC 17 MPFS
5 D-GND 5 5 5VN 10 19 5VN NC 21 P SM2P R (Manual feed
MPWD (Manual feed take-up clutch)
paper width detection) 6 5VLED12 4 6 MPWD 9 20 MPWD NC 23 (Multi upper UN 1 24V3 1
5VN 3 7 5VN 3 NC 26 (Right door PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H harness) 2 /MPFS 2
harness CJ)
MPWD 2 8 MPWD 2 NC 30 8 24V3 1
HPDET (Manual feed
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 1 NC 32 7 /MPFS 2 paper empty detection)
PHNR-03-H HPDET 7 6 HPDET 3 1 HPDET
MTOP2 (Manual feed tray

extension detection) 2 D-GND
MTOP2 1 7 MTOP2 8 22 MTOP2 D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
D-GND 2 5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5 179228-3
5VLED13 3 8 5VLED13 7 24 5VLED13 PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
MTOP1 (Manual feed tray
reduction detection) 179228-3 2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
MTOP1 1 9 MTOP1 6 25 MTOP1 3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
D-GND 2 1 5VLED7 5
5VLED9 3 10 5VLED9 5 27 5VLED9 2 D-GND 4
179228-3 TH&HUD (Temperature/humidity sensor) MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
5VN 1 11 5VN 4 28 5VN
1
3
5
2
4
6
MPFD (Manual feed

HUD_M 2 12 HUD_M 3 29 HUD_M paper entry detection)
D-GND 3 13 D-GND 2 14 D-GND MPFD 1
TH_M 4 14 TH_M 1 31 TH_M D-GND 2
ZHR-4 2 5VLED4 13 15 5VLED4 5VLED7 3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
S32B-PHDSS-B 179228-3
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
DF11-6DP-SP2
P SM2P R
MPGS 1 24V3 1
(Manual feed gate solenoid) 2 /MPGS 2
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
(Multi lower UN harness)
DF11-8DP-SP1
7
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H (Paper exit UN harness CJ) P DF1B-26p S (Upper main harness CJ) CN13
1 POFM_V 4 6 POFM_V 6 15 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 3 7 /POFM_CNT 7 17 /POFM_CNT
POFM 1 3 P-GND 2 11 P-GND 11 19 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 1 8 POFM_LD1 8 21 POFM_LD1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H 9 POFM_LD2 9 22 POFM_LD2
7 : Feb. 15 2007
1 POFM_V 4
2 /POFM_CNT 3
POFM 2 3 P-GND 2 R SM-6P P
4 POFM_LD2 1 5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 24 24V2
1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 7 /OSM_XB
OSM 2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 9 /OSM_XA
(SHIFTER MOTOR)
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 11 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 13 /OSM_A
TFD2 (Paper exit full detection) 13 TFD2 13 10 TFD2

5VNPD 3
M. Paper out unit section (P13)
TFD2 2
D-GND 1 14 POD2 14 12 POD2
PHR-3 POD2 (Paper exit detection)
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 15 HPOS 15 16 HPOS
D-GND 3
HPOS(SHIFTER HP) 179228-3
5VNPD 1 16 POD1 16 14 POD1
HPOS 2 17 D-GND 17 2 D-GND
D-GND 3 12 5VNPD 12 18 5VNPD
4
1
2
3
4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
179228-3 POD1 (Fusing after-detection)
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
5VNPD 1
POD1 2 10 NC 10
D-GND 3 20 NC 20 To P5 23 LOCK
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
179228-3 31 NC(24V3)
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
To P2
DF11-4DP-SP1 DF11-8DP-SP2 32 NC(/PNC_C)
DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1
P SL-2p R (Paper exit UN harness CJ)
WEBM 1 WEB_M1out 1 18 WEB_M1out 18 6 WEB_M1out
(WEB motor) 2 WEB_M2out 2 19 WEB_M2out 19 8 WEB_M2out
ADUHM (ADUH motor)

ADMHA// 1 21 ADMHA// 21 3 NC
ADMHA/ 4 22 ADMHA/ 22 4 NC
ADMHB/ 6 23 ADMHB/ 23 5 NC
ADMHB// 3 24 ADMHB// 24 20 NC
INT24V1 2 25 INT24V1 25 29 NC
INT24V1 5 26 INT24V1 26 30 NC

PHR-6
FUM (Fusing motor) (Paper exit UN harness CJ) R SM-12p P (Paper feed main harness CJ) R SM-5p P
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2 28 P-GND
NC 3 3 /FUMCK 3 3 /FUMCK 3 27 /FUMCK
/FUMCK 4 4 /FUMD 4 4 /FUMD 4 25 /FUMD
/FUMD 5 5 FUMLD 5 5 FUMLD 5 26 FUMLD
PCU PWB
FUMLD 6 6 NC 6 B32B-PHDSS-B
PHR-6-R 7 POMA// 7
8 INT24V1 8 CN6
POM (Paper exit motor) 9 POMB// 9 1 POMA/ CN2
POMA// 1 10 POMA/ 10 2 POMA// 1 ADMHA/
INT24V1 2 11 INT24V1 11 3 POMB// DRIVER 2 ADMHA//
POMB// 3 12 POMB/ 12 4 POMB/ MAIN 3 ADMHB// DRIVER
POMA/ 4 5 INT24V1 PWB 4 ADMHB/ SUB PWB
INT24V1 5 6 INT24V1 5 INT24V1
POMB/ 6 7 NC 6 INT24V1
PHR-6 8 NC 7 N.C
9 NC B7B-PH-K-S
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 10 NC
FG FG 11 NC
12 NC
B12B-PH-K-S
7
(Board to Board)
CN5 CN18 CN26 (FFC between PCU-MOTHER) CN7
SCANDATA0- 1 1 SCANDATA0- D-GND 1 28 D-GND
SCANDATA0+ 2 2 SCANDATA0+ FWP_PCU 2 27 FWP_PCU
D-GND 3 3 D-GND PCU_RES 3 26 PCU_RES
SCANDATA1- 4 4 SCANDATA1- /MPFC_RES 4 25 /MPFC_RES
7 : Feb. 15 2007
SCANDATA1+ 5 5 SCANDATA1+ /Reserve_out3 5 24 /Reserve_out3

D-GND 6 6 D-GND PCU_TXD 6 23 PCU_TXD
SCANDATA2- 7 7 SCANDATA2- PCU_DTR 7 22 PCU_DTR
SCANDATA2+ 8 8 SCANDATA2+ D-GND 8 21 D-GND
D-GND 9 9 D-GND PCU_RXD 9 20 PCU_RXD
OUT_SCANCLKOUT- 10 10 OUT_SCANCLKOUT- PCU_DSR 10 19 PCU_DSR
OUT_SCANCLKOUT+ 11 11 OUT_SCANCLKOUT+ /FAX_LED 11 18 /FAX_LED
D-GND 12 12 D-GND /POF 12 17 /POF
SCANDATA3+ 14 14 SCANDATA3+ LSU_RST 14 15 LSU_RST
SCAN IN D-GND 15 15 D-GND TRANS_RST 15 14 TRANS_RST
PWB D-GND 16 16 D-GND D-GND 16 13 D-GND
N. PCU PWB-other PWB (P14)
FLVPP_MFP 17 17 FLVPP_MFP SCK 17 12 SCK CN4

or 3.3V 18 18 3.3V TRANS_DAT 18 11 TRANS_DAT 24V1 1
RES_SCN 19 19 RES_SCN D-GND 19 10 D-GND DSW_R(24V) 2 To P2
DOCC 3.3V 20 20 3.3V RSV_DAT 20 9 RSV_DAT DSW_R(24V) 3
PWB D-GND 21 21 D-GND JOBEND_INT 21 8 JOBEND_INT DSW_F(24V) 4 (Upper main harness CJ) CN13
3.3V 22 22 3.3V TH1_LSU 22 7 TH1_LSU INT24V1 5 1 INT24V1
D-GND 23 23 D-GND TH2_LSU 23 6 TH2_LSU P-GND 6 2 P-GND
3.3V 24 24 3.3V D-GND 24 5 D-GND 5VN 7 3 5VN
D-GND 25 25 D-GND D-GND 25 4 D-GND B7P-VH B3P-VH
3.3V 26 26 3.3V
MOTHER INT5V 26 3 INT5V
5VN 27 27 5VN PWB INT5V 27 2 INT5V (FROM - P3) CN34 (Upper main harness CJ) CN4
D-GND 28 28 D-GND D-GND 28 1 D-GND DRMCL_A 17 1 DRMCL_A
D-GND 29 29 D-GND 28FMZ-BT 28FMZ-BT PCU PWB DRMCL_B 18 2 DRMCL_B
D-GND 30 30 D-GND /DRMCL_A 19 3 /DRMCL_A DRIVER SUB PWB
TX24-30R-12ST-H1 TX25-30P-12ST-H1E /DRMCL_B 20 4 /DRMCL_B
/DRMCL_CNT 21 5 /DRMCL_CNT
DRMBK_CNT 22 6 DRMBK_CNT
CN2 (DC main harness) CN23 DRMBK_A 23 7 DRMBK_A
POMA 1 1 POMA DRMBK_B 24 8 DRMBK_B
POMB 2 2 POMB /DRMBK_A 25 9 /DRMBK_A
CN14 /POMA 3 3 /POMA /DRMBK_B 26 10 /DRMBK_B
1 12V /POMB 4 4 /POMB /BK_EN 27 11 /BK_EN
CPU 2 PWM_CPUFAN /POMCNT 5 5 /POMCNT /CLC_EN 28 12 /CLC_EN
3 D-GND /FUM_CNT 6 6 /FUM_CNT /CLM_EN 29 13 /CLM_EN
FAN 4 LOCK_CPUFAN FUMA 7 7 FUMA /CLY_EN 30 14 /CLY_EN
B4P-PH-K-S FUMB 8 8 FUMB BTMA 31 15 BTMA
/FUMA 9 9 /FUMA BTMB 32 16 BTMB
/FUMB 10 10 /FUMB /BTMA 33 17 /BTMA
RRM_A 11 17 RRM_A /BTMB 34 18 /BTMB

RRM_B 12 18 RRM_B BTM_CNT 35 19 BTM_CNT
/RRM_A 13 19 /RRM_A /ADMHC 36 20 /ADMHC
DRIVER /RRM_B 14 20 /RRM_B ADMHA 37 21 ADMHA
MAIN PWB /RRM_CNT 15 15 /RRM_CNT ADMHB 38 22 ADMHB
/PFM_CNT 16 16 /PFM_CNT ADMHXA 39 23 ADMHXA
PFM_A 17 11 PFM_A ADMHXB 40 24 ADMHXB
PFM_B 18 12 PFM_B B40B-PADSS-B 25 NC
/PFM_A 19 13 /PFM_A 26 NC
/PFM_B 20 14 /PFM_B B26B-PHDSS-B
ADUM_L_A 21 21 ADUM_L_A
ADUM_L_B 22 22 ADUM_L_B
ADUM_L_XA 23 23 ADUM_L_XA
ADUM_L_XB 24 24 ADUM_L_XB
/ADUM_L_C 25 25 /ADUM_L_C
D-GND 26 26 D-GND
5VN 27 27 5VN
D-GND 28 28 D-GND
B28B-PHDSS-B B28B-PHDSS-B (FROM - P4) CN26 (Paper feed main harness CJ)
CN3 (DC main harness) CN2 (FROM - P2) P-GND 25 3 P-GND 3
INT24V1 1 3 INT24V1 0ZFM_V 27 1 0ZFM_V 1 OZFM
P-GND 2 2 P-GND /0ZFM_CNT 29 2 /0ZFM_CNT 2 (Ozone fan)
5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD OZFM_LD 31 4 OZFM_LD 4
B3P-VH B7P-VH B32B-PHDSS-B P SM4P R
7
CN-F
24V4 1 1 24V4 1
7 : Feb. 15 2007
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2
5VN 3 3 5VN 3
D-GND 4 4 D-GND 4 (DC main harness) CN21
TXD_DSK 6 6 TXD_DSK 6 9 TXD_DSK
O. DESK & LCC (P15)
RXD_DSK 7 7 RXD_DSK 7 3 RXD_DSK

/DTR_DSK 8 8 /DTR_DSK 8 11 /DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK 9 9 DSR_DSK 9 5 DSR_DSK
RES_DSK 10 10 RES_DSK 10 13 RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK 11 11 /TRC_DSK 11 7 /TRC_DSK
DESK CONTROL PWB NC 12 R SM 11PIN P
B12B-PHDSS-B 15 D-GND
16 TXD_INS
17 RXD_INS
To P16
1 WH_L(DESK) 1 1 WH_L(DESK) 1 18 /DTR_INS
WH 2 WH_N(DESK) 2 3 WH_N(DESK) 3 19 /DSR_INS
2 F-GND 2 20 RES_INS
F.G. P EL 3PIN R 21 PCSFM2_LD
(DESK OPTION) SRA-21T-4 22 PCSFM2_V#
F.G. 23 NC
To P5
24 /PCSFM
25 NC
CN-A 1 NC 1 26 INT24V1
NC 4 2 NC 2
TXD_LCC 7 3 TXD_LCC 3 10 TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC 8 4 RXD_LCC 4 4 RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC 9 5 /DTR_LCC 5 12 /DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC 10 6 /DSR_LCC 6 6 /DSR_LCC
RES_LCC 11 7 RES_LCC 7 14 RES_LCC
NC 3 8 F-GND 8
5VN 5 9 5VN 9
24V4 1 11 24V4 11 8 /TRC_LCC
P-GND 2 12 P-GND 12 B26B-PHDSS-B
/TRC_LCC 12 13 /TRC_LCC 13 PCU PWB
B12B-PHDSS-B P EL 15PIN R
LCC CONTROL PWB
SRA-21T-4
F.G. (DC main harness) CN8 (FROM - P1)
F.G. 6 24V4

B7P-VH
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4
WH 2 WH_N(LCC) 2 12 WH_N(LCC) 12 CN7 (FROM - P1)
5 F-GND 5 7 P-GND
F.G. P EL 12PIN R B8P-VH
(LCC OPTION) SRA-21T-4
F.G. CN4 (FROM - P1)
3 5VN
6 D-GND
B6P-VH
PSU
CN4
1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_N(LCC)
WH 2 WH_N(LSU) 2 2 NC 2 2 WH_N(DESK/LCC)
P EL 2PIN R 3 WH_N(LSU) 3 3 NC
(LSU-WH harness) R EL 3PIN P 4 WH_L(DESK/LCC)
(LSU OPTION) 5 WH_L(LCC)
(WH-DESK_LCC harness II) B4P(5-3)-VH WH PWB
7
7 : Feb. 15 2007
CN29
1 24V3
2 P-GND
3 /CV_COPY
4 /CV_COUNT
5 /CV_START
6 /CV_CA
7 /CV_CLCOPY
TO COIN VENDOR 8 /CV_COLOR1
9 /CV_STAPLE
(OPTION) 10 /CV_COLOR0
11 /CV_DUPLEX
12 5VN
P. Finisher & coin vendor (P16)
13 /CV_SIZE0
14 /CV_SIZE1
15 /CV_SIZE2
16 /CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS
CN CN (DC main harness) CN21 (FROM - P15)

1 TXD_FIN TXD_FIN 1 TXD_INS 1 16 TXD_INS
2 RXD_FIN RXD_FIN 2 RXD_INS 2 17 RXD_INS
3 /DTR_FIN /DTR_FIN 3 /DTR_INS 3 18 /DTR_INS
4 /DSR_FIN /DSR_FIN 4 /DSR_INS 4 19 /DSR_INS
5 RES_FIN RES_FIN 5 RES_INS 5 20 RES_INS
6 24V3 24V3 6 NC 6
FINISHER 7 5VN 5VN 7 5VN 7
8 D-GND D-GND 8 D-GND 8 15 D-GND
9 P-GND P-GND 9 NC 9 B26B-PHDSS-B
10 F-GND F-GND 10 F-GND 10 PCU PWB
11 24V5 24V5 11 24V5 11
12 P-GND P-GND 12 P-GND 12
P EL 12PIN R
INSERTOR

FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION) SRA-21T-4
F.G.
CN8 (FROM - P1)

7 24V5
B7P-VH-B
CN7 (FROM - P1)

6 P-GND
B8P-VH-B
CN4 (FROM - P1)
4 5VN
B6P-VH-B
PSU
(SCN-mother DATA harness)
P-GND 1 3 P-GND
24V3 2 1 24V3
OCSW
12V 3 2 12V
OCSW
5VEXT
D-GND
5VN 4 4 5VN
EHR-3
3.3V 5 5 3.3V
CN18 B6P-VH
ORS LED PWB
D-GND 6 6 D-GND
3
2
1
F-GND
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED2
/SIZE_LED1
n INFO_LED 1 1 n INFO_LED
5VO 2 2 5VO
CN25
CN138 B6P-VH-R CN144
CN_CHK_IN 3 3 CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED 4 4 WU_LED
harness)
D-GND 5 5 D-GND
(Document
SRA-21T-4
POW_LED 6 6 POW_LED
emitting side
FG
detection light
LCD_CLK+ 7 7 LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY 8 8 n WU_KEY (CCD-F harness 1)
6
5
4
3
2
1
LCD_CLK- 9 9 LCD_CLK- AGND 1 1 AGND

CN3
n PWRSW 10 10 n PWRSW AGND 2 2 AGND

CN136
CN148
D-GND 11 11 D-GND AGND 3 3 AGND

NC 12 12 NC A12V 4 4 A12V
B6P-PH-K-S
LCD_DAT2+ 13 13 LCD_DAT2+ CCD_CP- 5 5 CCD_CP-

OCSW
5VEXT
D-GND
n POF_SCN 14 14 n POF_SCN AGND 6 6 AGND

24VEXT
/SIZE_LED2
/SIZE_LED1
LCD_DAT2- 15 15 LCD_DAT2- CCD_CP+ 7 7 CCD_CP+

n RES_MPFC_SCN 16 16 n RES_MPFC_SCN A5V 8 8 A5V
RES_SCN 18 18 RES_SCN AGND 10 10 AGND
B30B-PHDSS-B
LCD_DAT1+ 19 19 LCD_DAT1+ CCD_RS+ 11 11 CCD_RS+

n RTS_SCN 20 20 n RTS_SCN A3.3V 12 12 A3.3V
MOTHER PWB
LCD_DAT1- 21 21 LCD_DAT1- CCD_RS- 13 13 CCD_RS-

TXD_SCN 22 22 TXD_SCN /LVDS_STBY 14 14 /LVDS_STBY
n CTS_SCN 24 24 n CTS_SCN /RES_CCDAD 16 16 /RES_CCDAD
LCD_DAT0+ 25 25 LCD_DAT0+ CCD_CLK2- 17 17 CCD_CLK2-
CCD PWB
RXD_SCN 26 26 RXD_SCN AD_SCLK 18 18 AD_SCLK

LCD_DAT0- 27 27 LCD_DAT0- CCD_CLK2+ 19 19 CCD_CLK2+
n FWP_SCN 28 28 n FWP_SCN AD_WRSO 20 20 AD_WRSO
CN_CHK_OUT 29 29 CN_CHK_OUT AGND 21 21 AGND
B30B-PHDSS-B
D-GND 30 30 D-GND AD_SEN 22 22 AD_SEN

CCD_CLK1+ 23 23 CCD_CLK1+
/DETECT 1 AD_RDSI 24 24 AD_RDSI
D-GND 2 CCD_CLK1- 25 25 CCD_CLK1-
CN19
/DET_ANC 3 AGND 26 26 AGND
PWB
NC 4 AGND 27 27 AGND
SCN-CNT
TXD_ANC 5 AD_CLPIN 28 28 AD_CLPIN

NC 6 AD_MCLK- 29 29 AD_MCLK-
RXD_ANC 7 AD_BLKCLP 30 30 AD_BLKCLP
NC 8 AD_MCLK+ 31 31 AD_MCLK+
D-GND 9 CCD_SH 32 32 CCD_SH
D-GND 10 AGND 33 33 AGND
AGND 34 34 AGND
SCANDATA0- 1 CLKP1_OUT+ 35 35 CLKP1_OUT+
B12B-PHDSS-B CN5
SCANDATA0+ 2 SH_OUT+ 36 36 SH_OUT+
D-GND 3 CLKP1_OUT- 37 37 CLKP1_OUT-
SCANDATA1- 4 SH_OUT- 38 38 SH_OUT-
SCANDATA1+ 5 AGND 39 39 AGND
AGND 40 40 AGND
501190-4017
501190-4017
D-GND 6
SCANDATA2- 7
SCANDATA2+ 8 (CCD-F harness 1)
CN1
SCANCLKOUT- 10 AGND 2 2 AGND

CN147
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 TC+ 3 3 TC+

D-GND 12 TE+ 4 4 TE+
SCANDATA3- 13 TC- 5 5 TC-
SCANDATA3+ 14 TE- 6 6 TE-
B15P-PH-K-S
AGND 8 8 AGND
/DETECT 1 1 /DETECT TB+ 9 9 TB+
D-GND 2 2 D-GND TD+ 10 10 TD+
/DET_ANC 3 3 /DET_ANC TB- 11 11 TB-
NC 4 4 NC TD- 12 12 TD-
TXD_ANC 5 5 TXD_ANC AGND 13 13 AGND
NC 6 6 NC AGND 14 14 AGND
RXD_ANC 7 7 RXD_ANC TA+ 15 15 TA+
NC 8 8 NC TCLK+ 16 16 TCLK+
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B
D-GND 9 9 D-GND TA- 17 17 TA-
CN146 B10B-PHDSS-B
D-GND 10 10 D-GND TCLK- 18 18 TCLK-
AGND 19 19 AGND
SCANDATA0- 1 1 SCANDATA0- AGND 20 20 AGND
501190-2017
CN3
SCANDATA0+ 2 SCANDATA0+
501190-2017
CN143
D-GND 3 3 D-GND (SCN-LAMP
SCANDATA1- 4 4 SCANDATA1- FFC)
SCANDATA1+ 5 5 SCANDATA1+ P-GND 5 1 P-GND
D-GND 6 6 D-GND P-GND 4 2 P-GND
PWB
CN130
SCANDATA2- 7 7 SCANDATA2- CL 3 3 CL
SCANDATA2+ 8 8 SCANDATA2+ 24VPD 2 4 24VPD
SCAN IN PWB
D-GND 9 9 D-GND 24VPD 1 5 24VPD
CL INVERTOR
2
1
SCANCLKOUT- 10 10 SCANCLKOUT- 5597-05APB

SCANCLKOUT+ 11 11 SCANCLKOUT+
D-GND 12 12 D-GND
B15P-PH-K-S
SCANDATA3- 13 13 SCANDATA3-
5597-05CPB7F
SCANDATA3+ 14 14 SCANDATA3+
B15P-PH-K-S
D-GND 15 15 D-GND
/DETECT 1
CL
D-GND 2
/DET_ANC 3
TXD_ANC 5
RXD_ANC 7
D-GND 9
D-GND 10 MiM_A 1
MiM_B 2
CN137
SCANDATA0- 1 MiM_/A 3
MOTOR
MIRROR
MiM_/B 4
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B CN3

SCANDATA0+ 2
D-GND 3 B4B-PH-K-S
SCANDATA1- 4
SCANDATA1+ 5 MHPS 1 3 MHPS
D-GND 6 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
MHPS
CN134
SCANDATA2- 7 5V 3 1 5V
(MHPS harness)
DOCC PWB
SCANDATA2+ 8 B3B-PH-K-S EHR-3
D-GND 9
SCANCLKOUT- 10
SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND 12
SCANDATA3- 13
SCANDATA3+ 14
B15P-PH-K-S
D-GND 15
OPTION
7
Q. Scanner section 1/2 (P17)
7 : Feb. 15 2007
7
(ORS PD harness)
P XAD 34PIN R (Body - RSPF interface harness ) CN142 CN135 CN1 CN2 ORS PD PWB
1 P-GND 1 1 P-GND D-GND 26 1 D-GND PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
2 P-GND 2 2 P-GND 3.3V 25 2 3.3V PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
3 SPPD1 3 3 SPPD1 5VN 24 3 5VN PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2
7 : Feb. 15 2007
4 SPPD2 4 4 SPPD2 D-GND 23 4 D-GND 5VN 4 4 5VN

5 24VPD 5 5 24VPD PD 22 5 PD PD 5 5 PD
6 24VPD 6 6 24VPD PDSEL0 21 6 PDSEL0 D-GND 6 6 D-GND
7 5V_EXT 7 7 5V_EXT PDSEL1 20 7 PDSEL1 B6B-PH-SM3-TB PHR-6
8 AVCC 8 8 AVCC PDSEL2 19 8 PDSEL2
9 SPFMCK 9 9 SPFMCK /KEYIN 18 9 /KEYIN CN3 CN1 POWER SW PWB
10 SPFMM1 10 10 SPFMM1 SEG0 17 10 SEG0 n PWRSW 1 3 n PWRSW
11 SPFMM2 11 11 SPFMM2 SEG1 16 11 SEG1 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
12 SPFMO1 12 12 SPFMO1 SEG2 15 12 SEG2 D-GND 3 1 D-GND
13 SPFMO2 13 13 SPFMO2 /F0 14 13 /F0 S3B-PH-K-S (PSW PHR-3
14 SPRMA 14 14 SPRMA /F1 13 14 /F1 harness)
R. Scanner section 2/2 (P18)
15 SPRMA/ 15 15 SPRMA/ /F2 12 15 /F2

MFP OPE-P
16 SPRMB 16 16 SPRMB /F3 11 16 /F3 PWB
17 SPRMB/ 17 17 SPRMB/ /BZR 10 17 /BZR
TO R-SPF 18 SPRMO1 18 18 SPRMO1 D-GND 9 18 D-GND
19 SGS 19 19 SGS n PWRSW 8 19 n PWRSW
20 STMPS 20 20 STMPS n WU_KEY 7 20 n WU_KEY
21 SRRC 21 21 SRRC n INFO_LED 6 21 n INFO_LED
22 SPFC 22 22 SPFC POW_LED 5 22 POW_LED
23 SPWS 23 23 SPWS WU_LED 4 23 WU_LED
24 SELA_ 24 24 SELA_ D-GND 3 24 D-GND
25 SELB_ 25 25 SELB_ 5VO 2 25 5VO
26 SELC_ 26 26 SELC_ D-GND 1 26 D-GND
27 SSELO 27 27 SSELO 52030-2629 (MFP OP 52610-2671
28 SPPD4 28 28 SPPD4 I/F FFC)
29 SPFFAN 29 29 SPFFAN
SCN-CNT
30 SPPD3 30 30 SPPD3 PWB CN125 CN1 CN3
31 SPPD5 31 31 SPPD5 D-GND 30 30 D-GND VO 1 15 VO
32 5VPD 32 32 5VPD CN_CHK_OUT 29 29 CN_CHK_OUT LP 2 14 LP
33 D-GND 33 33 D-GND LCD_CLK+ 28 28 LCD_CLK+ D-GND 3 13 D-GND
34 D-GND 34 34 D-GND LCD_CLK- 27 27 LCD_CLK- CP 4 12 CP
B34B-PHDSS-B D-GND 26 26 D-GND D-GND 5 11 D-GND
LCD_DAT2+ 25 25 LCD_DAT2+ M 6 10 M
LCD_DAT2- 24 24 LCD_DAT2- 3.3V_EXT 7 9 3.3V_EXT
R SM6P P PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H CN145 D-GND 23 23 D-GND D0 8 8 D0
1 /C_CARD 1 6 /C_CARD 1 1 /C_CARD LCD_DAT1+ 22 22 LCD_DAT1+ D1 9 7 D1
CARD 2 /C_SEL 2 5 /C_SEL 2 2 /C_SEL LCD_DAT1- 21 21 LCD_DAT1- D-GND 10 6 D-GND
3 /C_CLOCK 3 4 /C_CLOCK 3 3 /C_CLOCK D-GND 20 20 D-GND D2 11 5 D2
READER 4 /C_DATA 4 3 /C_DATA 4 4 /C_DATA LCD_DAT0+ 19 19 LCD_DAT0+ D3 12 4 D3
5 5V 5 2 5V 5 5 5V LCD_DAT0- 18 18 LCD_DAT0- D-GND 13 3 D-GND
(OPTION) 6 D-GND 6 1 D-GND 6 6 D-GND D-GND 17 17 D-GND DISP 14 2 DISP

(HL interface harness CJ) (SCN-mother DATA harness) B6P-PH-K-R DISP 16 16 DISP VEE 15 1 VEE
3.3V_EXT 15 15 3.3V_EXT 52746-1570 (LCD LCD UN
CN131 VEEON 14 14 VEEON FFC)
1 n A_PNC VCONT 13 13 VCONT LVDS-P PWB CN4
2 n A_COPY AVCC 12 12 AVCC /YL(Y1) 1
3 n A_CA SC_TEMP 11 11 SC_TEMP XH(X1) 2 TOUCH
4 n A_READY P-GND 10 10 P-GND YH(Y2) 3 PANEL
5 n A_AUD 24V_EXT 9 9 24V_EXT /XL(X2) 4
TO AUDITER
6 5V NC 8 8 NC 04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
7 D-GND /CCFT1 7 7 /CCFT1
8 24V CN_CHK_IN(LCD) 6 6 CN_CHK_IN(LCD) CN2 CN1
9 NC X2CN 5 5 X2CN /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
10 n A_TC Y2CN 4 4 Y2CN D-GND 2 2 D-GND
(PNC harness) 11 24V X1CN 3 3 X1CN 24V_EXT 3 1 24V_EXT
12 PNC-a Y1CN 2 2 Y1CN S3B-PH-SM4-TB (LCD S3B-PH-K-S
13 D-GND D-GND 1 1 D-GND Inverter LCD INVERTOR PWB
B13P-PH-K-S 52030-3029 (LVDS I/F 52271-3090 harness CJ)
FFC) CN2
BACK 1 CCFT+
LIGHT 4 /CCFT
53259-0417
7
7 : Feb. 15 2007
S. FAX section (P19)
CN2 CN3 (SCN-mother DATA harness) CN8

1 SP- D-GND 1 1 D-GND
SPEAKER 2 SP+ D-GND 2 2 D-GND
3 NC 3.3V 3 3 3.3V
B3P-PH-K-S 3.3V 4 4 3.3V
(BOARD TO FAX_RXD(D)- 5 5 FAX_TXD(D)_N
MJ1 CN2 BOARD) CN7 CNCT_FAX- 6 6 n CNCT_FAX
1 TP21 12V 1 1 12V FAX_RXD(D)+ 7 7 FAX_TXD(D)_P
2 TP24 AG 2 2 P-GND MSW_MON- 8 8 n MSW_MON
3 L1 12V 3 3 12V FAX_RXD(CS)+ 9 9 FAX_TXD(CS)_P
TO LINE
4 L2 AG 4 4 P-GND RES_FAX- 10 10 n RES_FAX
5 TP38 150VON 5 5 150VON FAX_RXD(CS)- 11 11 FAX_TXD(CS)_N
6 TP37 CION 6 6 CION D-GND 12 12 D-GND
MJ-62J-RD315 48VON 7 7 48VON FAX_TXD(D)- 13 13 FAX_RXD(D)_N
HS1- 8 8 HS1- RES_MPF- 14 14 n RES_MPFC_FAX
HS2- 9 9 HS2- FAX_TXD(D)+ 15 15 FAX_RXD(D)_P
MOTHER
CI- 10 10 CI- FAX_WUP- 16 16 n WU_FAX PWB
MJ2 EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- FAX_TXD(CS)+ 17 17 FAX_RXD(CS)_P
1 BT1 SON1 12 12 SON1 PLED- 18 18 n PLED
2 LT1 SON2 13 13 SON2 FAX_TXD(CS)- 19 19 FAX_RXD(CS)_N
3 TEL1 ECON 14 14 ECON D-GND 20 20 D-GND
TO EX TEL
4 TEL2 MRON 15 15 MRON FAX_RTS(D)- 21 21 n FAX_RTS(D)
5 LT2 TELID 16 16 TELID D-GND 22 22 D-GND
6 BT2 NC 17 17 NC FAX_RTS(D)- 23 23 n FAX_CTS(D)
MJ-66J-RD315 NC 18 18 NC FLVPP 24 24 FLVPP
NC 19 19 NC FAX_CTS(CS)- 25 25 n FAX_RTS(CS)
NC 20 20 NC 5VO 26 26 5VO
DG 21 21 GND FAX_RTS(CS)- 27 27 n FAX_CTS(CS)
CN1 3.3V 22 22 3.3V 12V 28 28 12V
1 TX+ DG 23 23 GND 3.3V 29 29 3.3V
2 RX+ 5VS 24 24 5VS 3.3V 30 30 3.3V
TO
3 RX- DG 25 25 GND D-GND 31 31 D-GND
HANDSET
4 TX- SI3_RES- 26 26 SI3_RES- P-GND 32 32 P-GND
(JAPAN ONLY)
5 DG SPK 27 27 SPK S32B-PHDSS-B B32B-PHDSS-B
6 RHS- MDM_ATXD 28 28 ATXD
MDM_ARXD 29 29 ARXD

MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 ABITCLK FAX MAIN PWB
MDM_ASPCLK 31 31 ASPCLK
TEL LIU PWB RGDT- 32 32 RGDT-
MDM_CLK 33 33 MDM_CLK
AFERES- 34 34 AFE_RES-
BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK
BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK
BRXD 37 37 BTXD
BTXD 38 38 BRXD
HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE-
RHS- 40 40 RHS-
TX24-40R-10ST-H1 TX25-40P-8ST-H1
BOARD TO BOARD
CN4
CN21
SCANCLKOUT+ 3 3 SCANCLKOUT+
SCANCLKOUT- 4 4 SCANCLKOUT-
SCANDATA0+ 9 9 SCANDATA0+ IDE_RST_N 1 1 IDE_RST_N
CN5

LCD_DATA0- 11 11 LCD_DATA0- IED_DD7 3 3 IED_DD7
LCD_DATA0+ 12 12 LCD_DATA0+ IED_DD8 4 4 IED_DD8
LCD_CLK- 17 17 LCD_CLK- IED_DD4 9 9 IED_DD4
LCD_CLK+ 18 18 LCD_CLK+ IED_DD11 10 10 IED_DD11
CH0_N 19 19 CH0_N IED_DD3 11 11 IED_DD3
CH0_P 20 20 CH0_P IED_DD12 12 12 IED_DD12
CLK_N 25 25 CLK_N IED_DD0 17 17 IED_DD0
CLK_P 26 26 CLK_P IED_DD15 18 18 IED_DD15
CH3_N 27 27 CH3_N D-GND 19 19 D-GND
CH3_P 28 28 CH3_P KEY 20 20 KEY
HDD
ECLK_LSU_N 29 29 ECLK_LSU_N IDE_DMARQ 21 21 IDE_DMARQ

ECLK_LSU_P 30 30 ECLK_LSU_P D-GND 22 22 D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_P 31 31 HSYNC_LSU_P IDE_DIOW_N 23 23 IDE_DIOW_N
MOTHER PWB
HSYNC_LSU_N 32 32 HSYNC_LSU_N D-GND 24 24 D-GND

VSYNC_K_N 33 33 VSYNC_K_N IDE_DIOR_N 25 25 IDE_DIOR_N
MFPC PWB
VSYNC_K_P 34 34 VSYNC_K_P D-GND 26 26 D-GND

VSYNC_C_P 35 35 VSYNC_C_P IDE_IORDY_N 27 27 IDE_IORDY_N
VSYNC_C_N 36 36 VSYNC_C_N D-GND 28 28 D-GND
VSYNC_M_N 37 37 VSYNC_M_N IDE_DMACK_N 29 29 IDE_DMACK_N
VSYNC_M_P 38 38 VSYNC_M_P D-GND 30 30 D-GND
VSYNC_Y_P 39 39 VSYNC_Y_P IDE_INTRQ 31 31 IDE_INTRQ
VSYNC_Y_N 40 40 VSYNC_Y_N ICCS10 32 32 ICCS10
5VL 41 41 5VL IDE_DA1 33 33 IDE_DA1
5VL 42 42 5VL IDE_CBLID_N 34 34 IDE_CBLID_N
5VL 45 45 5VL IDE_CS0 37 37 IDE_CS0
5VL 46 46 5VL IDE_CS1 38 38 IDE_CS1
5VL 47 47 5VL IDE_DASP_N 39 39 IDE_DASP_N
5VL 48 48 5VL D-GND 40 40 D-GND
5VL 49 49 5VL
HU5-400PNA-S53T-FA
5VL 50 50 5VL
RXD_SCN 51 51 RXD_SCN
1TC_YMC 52 52 n CTS_SCN 4 5VN
TXD_SCN 53 53 TXD_SCN 3 D-GND
n RTS_SCN 54 54 n RTS_SCN 2 D-GND
n RES_SCN 55 55 n RES_SCN 1 12V
n RES_PCU 56 56 n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU 57 57 RXD_PCU 5V 1
n CTS_PCU 58 58 n CTS_PCU D- 2
TXD_PCU 59 59 TXD_PCU D+ 3
n RTS_PCU 60 60 n RTS_PCU GND 4
(HOST)
USB2.0
CN8 USB-B
TXD_FAX(D) 61 61 TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS) 62 62 TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D) 63 63 RXD_FAX(D)
FAN
RXD_FAX(CS) 64 64 RXD_FAX(CS)
HDD
n RTS_FAX(D) 65 65 n RTS_FAX(D) 5V 1
n CTS_FAX(D) 66 66 n CTS_FAX(D) D- 2
(HDD POWER harness)
n RTS_FAX(CS) 67 67 n RTS_FAX(CS) D+ 3
n CTS_FAX(CS) 68 68 n CTS_FAX(CS) GND 4
USB1.1
CN9 USB-A
(DEVICE)
n RES_FAX 69 69 n RES_FAX
P
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
n CNCT_FAX 70 70 n CNCT_FAX
n WU_FAX2 71 71 n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2 72 72 n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC 73 73 n POF_MFPC TX+ 1
n REQ_PIC 74 74 n REQ_PIC TX- 2
NC
NC
NC
NC
CN26
12V
12V
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
n CLR_PIC 75 75 n CLR_PIC CT 3
HDDFM_LD
HDDFM_PWM
QR/P4 8P
TXD_PIC 76 76 TXD_PIC NC 4
RXD_PIC 77 77 RXD_PIC NC 5
LAN
S
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
PWM 78 78 PWM CT 6
LAN
n CNCT_FAN 79 79 n CNCT_FAN RX+ 7
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
n RES_PIC 80 80 n RES_PIC RX- 8

RES_MFP 81 81 RES_MFP
PWM2 82 82 PWM2
FLVPP 83 83 FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT 84 84 n REQ_PIC_INT
n WU_FAX1 85 85 n WU_FAX1 CD 1
3.3V 86 86 3.3V RXD 2
CN18
3.3V 87 87 3.3V TXD 3
3.3V 88 88 3.3V DTR 4
5VO 89 89 5VO GND 5
12V 90 90 12V DSR 6
D-GND 91 91 D-GND RTS 7
RS232C
D-GND 92 92 D-GND CTS 8
D-GND 93 93 D-GND RI 9
RS232C
D-GND 94 94 D-GND
D-GND 95 95 D-GND
D-GND 96 96 D-GND
D-GND 97 97 D-GND
D-GND 98 98 D-GND
D-GND 99 99 D-GND
D-GND 100 100 D-GND
TX25-100P-LT-H1E
D-GND 4
D-GND 3
CN15
(HDD POWER interface harness)
(HDD POWER interface harness)
5VN 2
B4P-VH
12V 1
NC 1
12V 2
NC 3
HDDFM_PWM 4
NC 5
D-GND 6
NC 7
HDDFM_LD 8
NC 9
CN17 B10B-PHDSS-B
NC 10 7
T. MFP board section 1/2 (P20)
7 : Feb. 15 2007
7
CN20
1 3.3V CN19
2 3.3V D-GND 1
3 3.3V D-GND 2
4 D-GND 3.3V 3
7 : Feb. 15 2007
5 SA_VIDEO_CLKI 3.3V 4
6 D-GND FAXD_TXD_N 5
7 SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_I n CNCT_FAX 6
8 D-GND FAXD_TXD_P 7
9 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_K_I n MSW_MON 8
10 D-GND FAXCS_TXD_P 9
11 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_C_I n RES_FAX 10
12 D-GND FAXCS_TXD_N 11
13 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_M_I D-GND 12
14 D-GND FAXD_RXD_N 13
15 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_Y_I n RES_MFP 14
16 D-GND FAXD_RXD_P 15
17 VIDEO_DAT_K0 n FAX_WUP 16
2nd FAX UN
U. MFP board section 2/2 (P21)
18 VIDEO_DAT_K1 FAXCS_RXD_P 17 (OPTION)

19 VIDEO_DAT_K2 n PLED 18
20 VIDEO_DAT_K3 FAXCS_RXD_N 19
21 VIDEO_DAT_K4 D-GND 20
22 VIDEO_DAT_K5 n FAXD_RTS 21
23 D-GND D-GND 22
24 VIDEO_DAT_C0 n FAXD_CTS 23
25 VIDEO_DAT_C1 FLVPP 24
26 VIDEO_DAT_C2 n FAXCS_RTS 25
EFI 27 VIDEO_DAT_C3 5VO 26
28 VIDEO_DAT_C4 MFPC PWB n FAXCS_CTS 27
(OPTION) 29 VIDEO_DAT_C5 12V 28
30 D-GND 3.3V 29
31 VIDEO_DAT_M0 3.3V 30
32 VIDEO_DAT_M1 D-GND 31
33 VIDEO_DAT_M2 D-GND 32
34 VIDEO_DAT_M3 B32B-PHDSS-B
35 VIDEO_DAT_M4
36 VIDEO_DAT_M5
37 D-GND
38 VIDEO_DAT_Y0
39 VIDEO_DAT_Y1
40 VIDEO_DAT_Y2
41 VIDEO_DAT_Y3
42 VIDEO_DAT_Y4
43 VIDEO_DAT_Y5
44 SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_O
45 D-GND

46 EF_CLK_IN
47 D-GND
48 GPI_nEF_DETECT
49 ENG_RDY(O,OC)
50 PRTC_RDY(I,OC)
51 PRT_RTS(O)
52 PRT_TXD(O)
53 PRT_CTS(I)
54 PRT_RXD(I) CN22 FX8C-60S-SV5
55 3.3V
56 PON_PRTC(I)
57 n WU_EF
5V_IN
5V_IN
5V_IN
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
58 n PD_PRTCIF(O) EXT_GNT
EXT_REQ
PCI1_EXT
PCI_STOP
PCI1_SERR
PCI1_PERR
n PCI1_RST
PCI1MAC_AD8
PCI1MAC_AD9
PCI1MAC_AD7
PCI1MAC_AD5
PCI1MAC_AD6
PCI1MAC_AD3
PCI1MAC_AD4
PCI1MAC_AD1
PCI1MAC_AD2
PCI1_INTA_PU
PCI1MAC_IRDY
PCI1MAC_IDSEL
PCI1MAC_PAR
PCI1MAC_AD30
PCI1MAC_AD31
PCI1MAC_AD28
PCI1MAC_AD29
PCI1MAC_AD26
PCI1MAC_AD27
PCI1MAC_AD24
PCI1MAC_AD25
PCI1MAC_AD23
PCI1MAC_AD21
PCI1MAC_AD22
PCI1MAC_AD19
PCI1MAC_AD20
PCI1MAC_AD17
PCI1MAC_AD18
PCI1MAC_AD16
PCI1MAC_AD14
PCI1MAC_AD15
PCI1MAC_AD12
PCI1MAC_AD13
PCI1MAC_AD10
PCI1MAC_AD11
PCI1MAC_DVSEL
PCI1MAC_FRAME
PCI1MAC_TRDY
PCI1MAC_CBE3
PCI1MAC_CBE2
PCI1MAC_CBE1
PCI1MAC_CBE0
59 D-GND
PCI1MAC_AD0
60 D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
FX8C-60S-SV5
EXTEND PCI
3. Signal list
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name Function/Operation Note
name L H No. No. name
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Detects the waste toner full.
[Mechanical switch]
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL Detects the transfer belt separation
detection CL.
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK Detects the transfer belt separation
detection BK.
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Controls the primary transfer
[Electromagnetic clutch] separation mode.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower [Stepping motor] Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream
[Transmission type] paper pass.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream
[Transmission type] paper pass.
CCFT LCD backlight Backlight for the CCD
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CLI Scanner lamp [Xenon lamp] Radiates lights onto a document for
the CCD to scan document images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift Detects tray 1 upper limit .
HP detection) [Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift Detects tray 2 upper limit.
HP detection) [Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the lift plate of the paper feed
feed tray 1) [DC brush-less motor] tray.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the lift plate of the paper feed
feed tray 2) [DC brush-less motor] tray.
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects tray 1 paper empty.
[Transmission type]
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects tray 2 paper empty.
[Transmission type]
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper feed tray
section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper Detects tray 1 paper pass.
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper Detects tray 2 paper pass.
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
CPFM Paper feed motor [Brush-less Drives the paper feed section.
motor]
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
1) [Electromagnetic clutch] paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
2) [Electromagnetic clutch] paper feed tray 2 section.
CPUFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the controller PWB.
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity Detects tray 1 paper remaining
detection quantity.
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity Detects tray 2 paper remaining
detection quantity.
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects the tray 1.
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects the tray 2.
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DHSW Dehumidifier heater switch Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the
(Japan [Seesaw switch] dehumidifier heaters provided in the
only) scanner (reading) section and the
paper feed section.
DL_C Discharge lamp C [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K [LED] Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
DM_CL Drum motor (CL) [Stepping motor] Drives the color OPC drum unit.
DM_K Drum motor (K) [Stepping motor] Drives the black OPC drum unit.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/
detection [Transmission type] close.

DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport
open/close detection cover open/close.
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front door,
[Micro switch] and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right door,
[Micro switch] and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Drives the developing section (CL).
[Brush-less motor]
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Drives the developing section/transfer
[Brush-less motor] section (K).
F1 Fuse (20A 125V) AC power
PWB
F1 Fuse (200mA 250V) LCD INV
PWB
F1 Fuse (1.25A250V) CL invertor
PWB
F2 Fuse (20A 125V) AC power
PWB
F3 Fuse (T2AH250V) AC power
PWB
F4 Fuse (T2AH250V) AC power
PWB
F101 Fuse (125V 12A) DC power
PWB
F102 Fuse (T1AH250V) DC power
PWB
PWB
F201 Fuse (T6.3AH250V) DC power
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
PWB
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit.
[Stepping motor]
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor Cools the HDD.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)
HLTS1 Thermostat (Fusing unit) Prevents against overheating of the
fusing roller.
fusing roller.
fusing roller.
HOPS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
LSUSS1 LSU shutter solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Home
[Transmission type] position
MIM Scanner motor [Stepping motor] Drives the scanner (reading) section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects the manual feed paper empty.
detection [Transmission type]
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry.
[Transmission type]
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
paper feed) [Electromagnetic feed)
solenoid]
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual
[Electromagnetic solenoid] paper feed gate solenoid.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray Manual
paper length. paper
feed unit

MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the manual paper feed tray
width detector [Volume resistor] paper width.
MSW Main SW [Seesaw switch] Turns ON/OFF the main DC power
source.
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the manual paper feed tray Manual
position detector 1 paper pull-out position (storing paper
[Transmission type] position). feed unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the manual paper feed tray Manual
position detector 1 paper pull-out position (pull-out paper
[Transmission type] position). feed unit
OCSW Original cover SW [Transmission Document size detection trigger. Close Open
type]
OSM Shifter motor [Stepping motor] Performs offset of paper.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
PCS_CL/K Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density.
[Reflection type]
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the
[Electromagnetic solenoid] process control and the registration
sensor.
PFM PS front motor [Stepping motor] Drives transport between the resist
roller and the paper feed section,
transport between the resist roller and
the right door section.
PGM Polygon motor Scans the laser beam.
[DC brushless motor]
POD1 Fusing after-detection Detects the paper exit from fusing.
[Transmission type]
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit.
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit.
(F side)
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit.
(R side)
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
[Stepping motor]
PPD1 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist
[Transmission type] roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects the paper in rear of resist
roller.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of
[Push switch] the DC power source.
REGS_F/R Resist sensor [Reflection type] Detects the resist shift.
RRM Registration motor Drives the resist roller and controls
[Stepping motor] ON/OFF.
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C).
[Magnetic sensor]
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K).
[Magnetic sensor]
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M).
[Magnetic sensor]
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y).
[Magnetic sensor]
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray
[Transmission type] full
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_M/ Temperature/humidity detection Detects the temperature/humidity.
HUD_M
TNM_C Toner motor C Transports toner from the toner
[Synchronous motor] cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Transports toner from the toner
TNM_M Toner motor M Transports toner from the toner
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Transports toner from the toner
VR201 Volume +12V output adjustment DC power
PWB
VR203 Volume +24V output adjustment DC power
PWB

VR204 Volume +5VN output adjustment DC power
PWB
VR205 Volume +3.3V output adjustment DC power
PWB
VR402 Volume +5VO, +5VL output adjustment DC power
PWB
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner.
[Synchronous motor]

[12] OTHERS
MX3500N
Service Manual
Item
Factory default setting
Page
User Type 6 -
1. System settings User Type 7 -
Auto Tray Switching Enable
A. System settings (General) Address Control
(1) When User Authentication is not Enabled Direct Address / Program
Individual
1) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
E-mail*4
2) Configure the desired system settings.
Search Number -
User authentication is initially disabled (factory default set- Name -
ting). Initial -
(2) When User Authentication is Enabled Index -
Address -
a. Login by login name and password Key Name -
1) Touch the [Login Name] key. File Format -
2) Select the user. Internet Fax*5
3) Enter a password. Search Number -
Name -
(1) Touch the [Password] key.
Initial -
(2) Enter a password on the text entry screen that will appear. Index -
4) Touch the [OK] key. Address -
b. Login by user number Key Name -
Compression -
1) Enter your user number with the numeric keys.
Internet Fax Report -
2) Touch the [OK] key. Group
(3) System Settings (General) List Search Number -
Group Name -
Factory default setting Initial -
Item
Page Index -
Total Count Address -
Job Count - Key Name -
Device Count - Program
Default Settings Program Name -
Display Contrast (Set to the centre value) Settings
Clock Address -
Date Format Varies depending on Resolution -
country and region Exposure -
Daylight Saving Time Setting Special Modes -
Keyboard Select Varies depending on Amend/Delete -
country and region Custom Index
List Print (User) User 1 -
All Custom Setting List - User 2 -
Printer Test Page User 3 -
PCL Symbol Set List*1 - User 4 -
PCL Internal Font List*1 - User 5 -
PCL Extended Font List*1 - User 6 -
PS Font List*2 - Fax Data Receive/Forward
PS Extended Font List*2 - Internet Fax Manual Reception*5 -
NIC Page - Reception Start -
Sending Address List*3 Manual Reception Key in Initial
Individual List - Enable
Screen
Group List - Internet Fax Data Forward*5 -
Program List - Printer Condition Settings*1
Memory Box List - Printer Default Settings
All Sending Address List - Copies 1
Document Filing Folder List - Orientation Portrait
Paper Tray Settings Default Paper Size A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Tray Settings Default Output Tray*6 Varies depending on the
Tray 1 Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch) machine configuration
Tray 2 Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch) Default Paper Type Plain Paper
Tray 3 Varies depending on the Line Thickness 5
machine configuration 2-Sided Print 1-Sided
Tray 4 Colour Mode B/W
Tray 5 N-Up Print 1-Up
Bypass Tray Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch) PCL Settings*1
Paper Type Registration PCL Symbol Set Setting 3. PC-8
User Type 1 - PCL Font Setting Internal Font, 0. Courier
User Type 2 - PCL Line Feed Code 0. CR=CR:LF=LF:FF=FF
User Type 3 - Wide A4 Disable
User Type 4 - Postscript Settings*2
User Type 5 - Print PS Errors Disable
MX3500N OTHERS 12 1
Factory default setting (4) System Settings (Administrator) List
Item
Page
Document Filing Control Item Factory default setting
Custom Folder Registration User Control
Folder Name - User Authentication Setting
Initial - User Authentication Disable
Password - Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User by
User Name - Login Name and
Password
Amend/Delete Custom Folder -
Device Account Mode Setting
USB-Device Check -
Device Account Mode Disable
User Control*7
User Selection -
Amend User Information -
User Registration
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be Store -
installed. Amend/Delete -
*2: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed. Delete All Users -
Pages Limit Group Registration -
*3: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or
Actions when the Limit of Pages for Job is Stopped when the
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit
Output Jobs Limit of Pages is Reached
must be installed.
Authority Group Registration -
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion Favourite Operation Group -
kit must be installed. Registration
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed. User Count Display -
*6: When a right tray is installed. User Count Reset -
User Information Print
*7: When user authentication is enabled and a user without the
All User Information Print -
authority to configure the system settings (administrator) has
User List -
logged in. (Excluding factory stored users.)
List of Number of Pages Used -
*8: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
Page Limit Group List -
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed. Authority Group List -
Favourite Operation Group List -
B. System settings (Administrator)
The Number of User Name Displayed 8
(1) When User Authentication is not Enabled Setting
1) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. A Warning when Login Fails Disable
Disable Printing by Invalid User Disable
2) Touch the [Admin Password] key.
Default Network Authentication Server -
3) Log in. Setting
(1) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator pass- Energy Save
word. Toner Save in Printer Mode*1 Disable
(2) Touch the[OK] key. Toner Save in Copy Mode*2 Disable
Auto Power Shut-Off Enable
Auto Power Shut-Off Timer 60 min.
(2) Login by login name and password (and e-mail Preheat Mode Setting 15 min.
address*) Operation Settings
1) Touch the [Login Name] key. Keys Touch Sound
Keys Touch Sound Middle
* If login name / password / e-mail address is selected for the
Keys Touch Sound at Initial Point Disable
login method, [E-mail Address] will appear under the [Login
Auto Clear Setting 60 sec.
Name] key.
Cancel Timer Disable
2) Touch the [Admin Login] key.
Message Time Setting 6 sec.
3) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator pass- Display Language Setting English
word. Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disable
4) Touch the [OK] key. Disabling of Bypass Printing Disable
5) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Key Operation Setting 0.0 sec.
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disable
* This step is not necessary if you are logging in after you
Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disable
pressed the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode*3 Disable
Customize Key Setting
(3) Login by user number Copy
1) Touch the [Admin Login] key. Customize 1 Special Modes
Customize 2 File
2) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator pass-
Customize 3 Quick File
word.
Scanner*4
3) Touch the [OK] key. Customize 1 Special Modes
4) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Customize 2 File
* This step is not necessary if you are logging in after you Customize 3 Quick File
pressed the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Internet Fax*5
5) Configure the desired system settings. Customize 1 Special Modes
Customize 2 File
Touch the items that you wish to configure and select the
Customize 3 Quick File
desired settings.
Fax*6
Customize 1 Special Modes
Customize 2 File
MX3500N OTHERS 12 2
Item Factory default setting Item Factory default setting
Customize 3 Quick File Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disable
USB Memory Scan Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Disable
Customize 1 Special Modes Copy
Customize 2 Erase Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disable
Customize 3 Suppress BG Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Disable
Data Entry Supplied the Paper
Customize 1 Special Modes Initial Colour Balance Setting Factory Default State
Customize 2 File Auto Colour Calibration -
Customize 3 Quick File B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode Disable
Device Control for Document Feeder*3
Original Size Detector Setting B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enable
Original Detection Size Varies depending on Network Settings
Combination country and region IP Address Setting DHCP
Cancel Detection at Document Disable Enable TCP/IP Enable
Glass Enable NetWare Enable
Disabling of Document Feeder*3 Disable Enable EtherTalk Enable
Original Feeding Mode*3 All Disabled Enable NetBEUI Enable
Disabling of Duplex Disable Reset the NIC -
Disabling of Large Capacity Disable Ping Command -
Cassette*7 Printer Settings
Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 Disable Default Settings
Disabling of Tray Setting Disable Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enable
Disabling of Finisher*9 Disable Prohibit Test Page Printing Disable
Disabling of Offset Disable A4/Letter Size Auto Change Varies depending on
Disabling of Stapler*9 Disable country and region.
Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*10 0.0 mm Print Density Level
Disabling of Punch*11 Disable Colour 3
Disabling of Colour Mode*12 Disable B/W 3
Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper Bypass Tray Settings
Registration Adjustment Enable Detected Paper Size in Disable
Auto Adjustment - Bypass Tray
Optimization of the Hard Disk - Enable Selected Paper Type in Enable
Tandem Connection Setting Bypass Tray
IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0 Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Disable
Paper Select
Port Number 50001
Job Spool Queuing Enable
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disable
Interface Settings
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disable
Hexadecimal Dump Mode*1 Disable
Clear All Job Log Data -
I/O Timeout 20 sec.
Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode 3
Enable USB Port Enable
Copy Settings
USB Port Emulation Switching*1 PCL (Auto*13)
Initial Status Settings
Enable Network Port Enable
Colour Mode Auto
Network Port Emulation PCL (Auto*13)
Paper Tray Varies depending on the
Switching*1
machine configuration
Port Switching Method Switch at End of Job
Exposure Type Auto
Colour Adjustments
Copy Ratio 1
Auto Colour Calibration -
2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side
Image Send Settings*14
Output -
Operation Settings
Exposure Adjustment
Default Display Setting
Colour
Mode Scanner*4 (Fax*6)
Document Glass 5
Hold settings for a while after Disable
Document Feeder 5
scanning has been completed
B/W
Switch Automatically to Copy Disable
Document Glass 5
Mode Screen
Document Feeder 5
Initial Resolution Setting
Rotation Copy Setting Enable
Apply the Resolution Set when Disable
Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios Stored
Reduction - Scanner*4 200x200dpi
Enlargement - Internet Fax*5 200x100dpi
Setting a Maximum Number of Copies 999 Fax*6 Standard
Initial Margin Shift Setting Default Exposure Settings
Side-1 10 mm (1/2") Exposure Auto
Side-2 Original Image Type Text
Erase Width Adjustment Disable
Edge 10 mm (1/2") Must Input Next Address Key at Disable
Centre Broadcast Setting
Card Shot Settings Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
Original Size X: 86 mm (3-3/8") Y: 54 The Number of File Name/Subject/ 6
mm (2-1/8") Body Keys Displayed Setting
Fit to Page Disable The Number of Direct Address 6
Automatic Saddle Stitch*10 Enable Keys Displayed Setting
Initial Tab Copy Setting 10 mm (1/2")
MX3500N OTHERS 12 3
Disable Switching of Display Order Disable Internet Fax Own Name and -
Hold Setting for Received Data Print Address Set
Received Data Hold Disable Auto Wake Up Print Enable
Password Setting - Internet Fax Speaker Volume -
Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination Settings
Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Receive Signal Middle
Group Disable Communication Error Signal Middle
E-mail Disable Original Print on Transaction Print Out Error Report
Internet Fax Disable Report Only
Fax Disable Transaction Report Print Select Setting
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15 Single Sending Print Out Error Report
Only
Group Disable
Broadcasting Print Out All Report
E-mail Disable
Receiving No Printed Report
FTP Disable
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disable
Desktop Disable
Internet Fax Send Settings
Network Folder Disable
Internet Fax Reception Report Disable
Internet Fax Disable
On/Off Setting
Fax Disable
Internet Fax Reception Report 1 Hour
Disable Registration Using Disable
Request Timeout Setting
Network Scan Tools*15
Number of Resend Times at 2
Settings to Disable Transmission
Reception Error
Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Maximum Size of E-mail Unlimited
Send Mode
Attachments
Disable Selection from the Address Book
Rotation Sending Setting All Enable
E-mail Disable
Printing Page Number at Enable
FTP Disable Receiver
Desktop Disable Internet Fax Receive Settings
Network Folder Disable Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enable
Internet Fax Disable Duplex Reception Setting Disable
Fax Disable Set Address for Data -
Disable Direct Entry Forwarding
E-mail Disable Letter Size RX Reduce Print Disable
Internet Fax Disable POP3 Communication Timeout 60 sec.
Fax Disable Setting
Disable PC-Internet Fax Disable Reception Check Interval 5 min.
Transmission*5 Setting
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name All Invalid
Scan Settings*4 Setting
Default Sender Set - Internet Fax Output Setting*16 Varies depending on the
Default Colour Mode Settings machine configuration
Colour Mode Auto, Greyscale Document Filing Settings
B/W Mode Mono 2 Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode
Disable Change of B/W Setting Disable Sort Method Setting Date
in Auto Mode Document Output Options
Initial File Format Setting Print
B/W Copy Enable
File Type PDF Printer Enable
Compression Mode MMR (G4) Scan Send Disable
Specified Pages per File Disable Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Disable
Colour/Grey Internet Fax)
File Type PDF Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disable
Compression Ratio Medium Scan to HDD Enable
Specified Pages per File Disable Scan Send*4
Compression Mode at Broadcasting Copy Disable
Black & White MMR (G4) Scan Send Enable
Colour/Greyscale Medium Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Disable
Maximum Size of E-mail Unlimited Internet Fax)
Attachments Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disable
Maximum Size of E-mail Disable Scan to HDD Enable
Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Internet Fax Send*5
Folder) Copy Disable
Default Address Setting Disable Scan Send Disable
Bcc Setting Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Enable
Enable Bcc Disable Internet Fax)
Display Bcc Address on the Job Disable Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disable
Status Screen Scan to HDD Disable
Disable Scan Function Fax Send*6
PC Scan Disable Copy Disable
USB Memory Scan Disable Scan Send Disable
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disable Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC- Disable
Internet Fax Settings*5 Internet Fax)
Internet Fax Default Settings Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Enable
MX3500N OTHERS 12 4
Scan to HDD Disable Disabling of Offset Disable
Administrator Authority Setting Disabling of Stapler*9 Disable
Delete File Disable Disabling of Punch*11 Disable
Delete Folder Disable Disabling of Colour Mode*12 Disable
Default Colour Mode Settings Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disable
Colour Auto Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disable
B/W Mono 2 Copy Settings
Default Exposure Settings Disable Copy in Different Size/ Disable
Exposure Auto Direction
Original Image Type Text Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disable
Disable Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Disable
Initial Resolution Setting 600x600dpi Copy
Colour Data Compression Ratio Medium Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disable
Setting Printer settings
Default Output Tray*16 Varies depending on the Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enable
machine configuration Prohibit Test Page Printing Disable
Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Disable
Delete All Quick Files Paper Select
Delete - Image Send Settings
Delete quick files at power up. Enable Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
(Protected file excluded) Disable Scan Function
Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disable PC Scan Disable
Batch Print Settings USB Memory Scan Disable
Selection of [All Users] is not Enable Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
allowed. Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enable Group Disable
allowed. E-mail Disable
List Print (Administrator) Internet Fax Disable
Administrator Settings List Fax Disable
Copy - Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
Print - Group Disable
Image Send*14 - E-mail Disable
Document Filing - FTP Disable
Security - Desktop Disable
Common - Network Folder Disable
All Administrator Settings List - Internet Fax Disable
Image Sending Activity Report*14 Fax Disable
Image Sending Activity Report - Disable Registration Using Disable
(Scanner) Network Scan Tools*15
Image Sending Activity Report - Settings to Disable Transmission
(Internet Fax) Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Image Sending Activity Report - Send Mode
(Fax) Disable selection from the
Anti Junk Fax Number List*6 - Address Book
Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name List*5 - E-mail Disable
Inbound Routing List*14 - FTP Disable
Document Admin List*14 - Desktop Disable
Web Setting List*15 - Network Folder Disable
Metadata Set List*17 Internet Fax Disable
Security Settings Fax Disable
SSL Settings Disable Direct Entry
HTTPS Disable E-mail Disable
IPP-SSL Disable Internet Fax Disable
Enable/Disable Settings Fax Disable
User Control Disable PC-Internet Fax Disable
Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disable Transmission*5
Operation Settings Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disable Document Filing Settings
Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disable Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disable
Disabling of Bypass Printing Disable Batch Print Settings
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disable Selection of [All Users] is not Enable
Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disable allowed.
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disable Selection of [User Unknown] is Enable
Device Control not allowed.
Disabling of Document Feeder*3 Disable Change Administrator Password See "TO THE
Disabling of Duplex Disable ADMINISTRATOR OF
Disabling of Large Capacity Disable THE MACHINE" in the
Cassette*7 Safety Guide.
Disabling of Optional Paper Disable Product Key*18
Drawer*8 Network Scanner Expansion Kit -
Disabling of Tray Setting Disable Printer Expansion Kit -
Disabling of Finisher*9 Disable PS3 Expansion Kit -
MX3500N OTHERS 12 5
Item Factory default setting Code Code content
Internet Fax Expansion Kit - PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
E-mail Alert and Status - PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Application Integration Module - PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual 2 feed paper)
Serial Number - PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Storing/calling of System Settings PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
Restore Factory Defaults - PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
Store Current Configuration - PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Restore Configuration - PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
installed. paper)
*2: This function is not available in some countries and regions. PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
*3: When an automatic document feeder is installed. PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
kit must be installed. PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
*6: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed. PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
*7: When a large capacity tray is installed. PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
*8: When a paper drawer is installed. PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed. PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
*10: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
*11: When a punch module is installed. POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM
*12: When a colour-related problem has occurred. POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM
*13: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed. POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM
*14: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
must be installed. APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
*15: When network connection is enabled.
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
*16: When a right tray is installed. TRAY3 Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
*17: When the application integration module is installed. DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
*18: Depending on the peripheral devices installed, it may not be DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
possible to use some settings. DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
2. Paper JAM code DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-
A. JAM cause code list reached)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
(1) PCU JAM cause LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Code Code content
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
FJPID_N Interface transport inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
FJPID_S Interface transport inlet port sensor remaining JAM
TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM (CPFD1 not-reached
FJPOD_N Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM
JAM)
FJPOD_S Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
FED_N Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
FED_S Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
FFPD_N Finisher saddle not-reached JAM
FFPD_S Finisher saddle remaining JAM
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
FEXIT_S Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM
FSTPL Staple JAM
FPNCH Punch JAM
TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM (CPFD2 not-reached
FDOP Finisher door open
JAM)
FIN_TIME Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM
CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
MX3500N OTHERS 12 6
(2) SCU JAM cause
Code Code content

NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
SPRDMD_S SPRDMD remaining JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification wait timeout
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
MX3500N OTHERS 12 7
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
MX3500N (2) Rear cabinet
Service Manual
1) Remove the screws, and remove the rear cabinet.
1. Disassembly and assembly

A. Cabinet
(4) 1
(18)
(15)
(12)
(16)
(1)
(17)
(13) (14)
(3) Paper exit cover

(6)
(11) 1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper exit cover.
(10) (5)
(3)
(2)
(7) (9)
(8)
Parts
(1) Front cabinet
(2) Rear cabinet (4) Upper cabinet right
(3) Paper exit cover
(4) Upper cabinet right (5) Upper cabinet left
(5) Upper cabinet left. 1) Remove the paper exit cover.
(6) Paper exit tray cabinet 2) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
(7) Left cabinet rear the table glass (C).
(8) Left cabinet rear lower
(9) Left cabinet
2 3
(10) Upper cabinet rear cover
C B
(11) Upper cabinet rear
(12) Front cabinet upper
1
(13) Frame cover
(14) Right cabinet front
(15) Right connection cabinet A
(16) Right cabinet rear cover
(17) Right cabinet rear
(18) Operation panel base plate
(1) Front cabinet

1) Remove the front cabinet band and the front cabinet hinge,
and remove the front cabinet.
3) Remove the screws, and remove the upper cabinet right (A)
and the upper cabinet left (B).
B
A
MX3500N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A 1

(6) Paper exit tray cabinet (10) Upper cabinet rear cover
(7) Left cabinet rear 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screws, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
1) Remove the paper exit cover.
2) Open the front cabinet and remove the screws.
A
Remove the screws, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet
(A).
1
Remove the screws, and remove the left cabinet rear (B).
Y M C BK
2 B
2 2
B 4
(11) Upper cabinet rear

3 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
1
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove
the grounding wire. Remove the screws, and remove the
upper cabinet rear.
(8) Left cabinet rear lower

(9) Left cabinet
1) Remove the paper exit tray cabinet.
2) Remove the left cabinet rear.
3) Pull out the paper feed tray units 1 and 2.
(12) Front cabinet upper

1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
4) Pull out the knob (A). Remove the desk connection cover (B).
Remove the screws, then remove the left cabinet rear lower
(C) and the left cabinet (D).
3
1
A
5
B 2
D

(13) Frame cover 4) Pull out the knob (A). Remove the screws, and remove the
1) Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning right cabinet front (B). Remove the screws, and remove the
unit. (Refer to Process Drum Unit in Image Process Section.) right connection cabinet (C). Remove the ozone filter cover
(D). Remove the screws, and remove the right cabinet rear
2) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to Front Cabinet)
cover (E). Remove the desk connection cover (F). Remove the
3) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet screws, and remove the right cabinet rear (G).
Upper.)
4) Pull out the paper feed tray units 1 and 2. C 3
5) Remove the screws, and remove the frame cover.
E
1
1 5
B
A 4
A 2 7
D
G
6
F
(18) Operation panel base plate

1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
Upper.)
2) Remove the screws, and remove the operation panel base
(14) Right cabinet front plate.
(15) Right connection cabinet

(16) Right cabinet rear cover
(17) Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
Upper.)
2) Remove the frame cover.
3) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.

CN125 CN1 CN4
D-GND 30 30 D-GND /YL(Y1) 1
CN_CHK_OUT 29 29 CN_CHK_OUT XH(X1) 2
LCD_CLK+ 28 28 LCD_CLK+ YH(Y2) 3
MX3500N
LCD_CLK- 27 27 LCD_CLK- /XL(X2) 4

D-GND 26 26 D-GND 04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
LCD_DAT2+ 25 25 LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2- 24 24 LCD_DAT2- CN3
D-GND 23 23 D-GND VO 1 15 VO
LCD_DAT1+ 22 22 LCD_DAT1+ LP 2 14 LP
LCD_DAT1- 21 21 LCD_DAT1- D-GND 3 13 D-GND
LCD
D-GND 20 20 D-GND CP 4 12 CP
2
LCD_DAT0+ 19 19 LCD_DAT0+ D-GND 5 11 D-GND
LCD_DAT0- 18 18 LCD_DAT0- M 6 10 M
D-GND 17 17 D-GND 3.3V_EXT 7 9 3.3V_EXT
TOUCH PANEL
DISP 16 16 DISP D0 8 8 D0
3.3V_EXT 15 15 3.3V_EXT D1 9 7 D1
VEEON 14 14 VEEON D-GND 10 6 D-GND
VCONT 13 13 VCONT D2 11 5 D2
AVCC 12 12 AVCC D3 12 4 D3
LVDS-P PWB
SC_TEMP 11 11 SC_TEMP D-GND 13 3 D-GND
P-GND 10 10 P-GND DISP 14 2 DISP
24V_EXT 9 9 24V_EXT VEE 15 1 VEE
[B] OPERATION PANEL
NC 8 8 NC 52746-1570
/CCFT1 7 7 /CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD) 6 6 CN_CHK_IN(LCD) CN2 CN1
X2CN 5 5 X2CN /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
Y2CN 4 4 Y2CN D-GND 2 2 D-GND
X1CN 3 3 X1CN 24V_EXT 3 1 24V_EXT
Y1CN 2 2 Y1CN S3B-PH-SM4-TB S3B-PH-K-S
D-GND 1 1 D-GND
52030-3029 52271-3090
CN2
CCFT+ 1
BACK LIGHT
/CCFT 2
PWB
S02(8.0)B-BHS
LCD INVERTOR
CN135 CN1
SCN-CNT PWB
D-GND 26 1 D-GND
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
3.3V 25 2 3.3V
5VN 24 3 5VN
D-GND 23 4 D-GND
PWRSW
PD 22 5 PD
PDSEL0 21 6 PDSEL0
PWB
PDSEL1 20 7 PDSEL1
PDSEL2 19 8 PDSEL2
MFP OPE-P
/KEYIN 18 9 /KEYIN
MX3500N OPERATION PANEL B 1

SEG0 17 10 SEG0
SEG1 16 11 SEG1
SEG2 15 12 SEG2 CN2
/F0 14 13 /F0 PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
OCSW
/F1 13 14 /F1 PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1

Service Manual
/F2 12 15 /F2 PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2

/F3 11 16 /F3 5VN 4 4 5VN
/BZR 10 17 /BZR PD 5 5 PD
n PWRSW 8 19 n PWRSW B6B-PH-SM3-TB
n WU_KEY 7 20 n WU_KEY
n INFO_LED 6 21 n INFO_LED CN3 CN1
POW_LED 5 22 POW_LED n PWRSW 1 3 n PWRSW
WU_LED 4 23 WU_LED D-GND 2 2 D-GND
5VO 2 25 5VO S3B-PH-K-S
D-GND 1 26 D-GND
52030-2629 52610-2671
CN136
5VEXT 1 1 5VEXT
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
OCSW 3 3 OCSW
24VEXT 4
/SIZE_LED1 5 24VEXT
/SIZE_LED2 6 /SIZE_LED1
B6P-PH-K-S /SIZE_LED2
F-GND
FG
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Timing switch for document size detection
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Outputs the DC power supply ON/OFF control signal.
No. Name Function/Operation

1 MFP OPE-P PWB Detects the key pressed on the operation panel.
2 LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB Drives LCD and the backlight, and controls the touch-panel.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives the light from the document detection light emitting PWB, and detects the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for document size detection.
2. Operational descriptions (1) Operation panel unit

1) Remove the paper exit cover and the upper cabinet left.
A. Outline 2) Remove the front cabinet upper and the operation panel base
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-P PWB, the plate.
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys,
3) Remove each cables and the grounding sheet.
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
The MFP OPE-P PWB is connected to the document detection light
receiving PWB for detecting the document size. It receives light
from the document detection light emitting PWB attached to the
rear frame, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel supplies the ON/OFF con-
trol signal of the DC power source.

A. Operation panel section
Unit Parts
(1) Operation panel unit a LCD INV PWB 4) Remove the operation panel unit.
b LVDS PWB
c LCD module
d Touch panel
e POWER SW PWB
f MFP OPE-P PWB
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-a
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-c
(1)-e
a. LCD INV PWB
b. LVDS PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD INV PWB (A). Remove the LVDS PWB (B).

c. LCD module e. POWER SW PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD holder. 2) Remove the POWER SW PWB.
3) Remove the LCD module. f. MFP OPE-P PWB

2) Remove the POWER SW PWB.
d. Touch panel
2) Remove the LCD unit. Remove the flat cable.
3) Remove the grounding sheet, and remove the MFP OPE-P
PWB.
3) Remove the touch panel.

[C] SCANNER SECTION
MX3500N
Service Manual
MHPS
6 9
3
7
MIM
CLI
3
1
2
8
CL CCD PWB
D-GND
MHPS
1
2
CN3 501190-4017 CN1 501190-2017

5V
INVERTOR
CLKP1_OUT+
CCD_CLK1+
CCD_CLK2+
AD_BLKCLP
/RES_CCDAD
AD_MCLK-
AD_MCLK+
/LVDS_STBY
AD_WRSO
CCD_CLK2-
AD_CLPIN
CCD_CLK1-
CLKP1_OUT-
CCD_CP+
CCD_RS+
SH_OUT+
AD_SCLK
CCD_CP-
CCD_RS-
SH_OUT-
AD_RDSI
CCD_SH
AD_SEN
PWB
TCLK+
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
TCLK-
AGND
AGND
A3.3V
A12V
TC+
TD+
A5V
TE+
TB+
TA+
TC-
TD-
TE-
TB-
TA-
3
2
1
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
CL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
4
3
2
1
CCD_CLK2+
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK1+
/LVDS_STBY
AD_MCLK-
AD_BLKCLP
CLKP1_OUT+
AD_MCLK+
AD_WRSO
CCD_CLK2-
AD_CLPIN
CCD_CLK1-
CCD_CP+
CCD_RS+
SH_OUT+
AD_SCLK
CLKP1_OUT-
CCD_CP-
CCD_RS-
SH_OUT-
AD_RDSI
CCD_SH
AD_SEN
D-GND
TCLK+
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
TCLK-
AGND
AGND
MiM_A
MiM_B
MHPS
A3.3V
A12V
TC+
TD+
A5V
TE+
TB+
TA+
TC-
TD-
TE-
TB-
TA-
CL
5V
CN134 CN130 CN148 501190-4017 CN147 501190-2017 CN137

SCN-CNT PWB
Signal Name Function/Operation

CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp light.
5 No. 2 mirror Inducts the document image into the No.3 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Inducts the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Reduces the document image (light), and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt.
MX3500N SCANNER SECTION C 1

2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline B
This section functions and operates as follows: G
1) The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the R
reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element
and then converted into image signals (analog).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description
R
(1) Optical section drive
G
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) through the belt, the drive pulley, and the wire to drive B
the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by the
drive wires. (Image data per 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2) Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
R G B
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal Red component of Green component of Blue component of
image data image data image data
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3) Image scan/color separation
(4) Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to a document by the scanner lamp, and the
1) Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit dig-
brightness of the reflected light is received by the three line (RGB)
ital signal by the A/D converter.
CCD element and converted into (analog) image signals.
Each color pixel has 10bit information (256 gradations).
Each color component of RGB is separately extracted from the
document image by the three lines (RGB) of the CCD elements. 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of RGB is sent to the image
process section.
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation. CCD PWB
The CCD element, appeared as one unit, but has three separate
rows of CCD elements drive each for (RGB). R IC R ADC
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is per-
formed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position 3 G IC G ADC
with the scanner motor.
CCD
Document images are optically reduced by the lens and projected
to the CCD elements.
Scanning resolution is 600 dpi.
B IC B ADC
R
Transfer IC G
B
R G B
(5) Zooming operation

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically
but by the image process technology (software).

3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Scanner unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
A. Optical system rear.
2) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
(1)-o
3) Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the snap band.
(1)-n
(1)-b
(1)-o
(1)-m (1)
(1)-a
(1)-k
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-h (1)-l
5) Remove the mylar. Remove the screws, and the ground sheet.
(1)-p
Remove the screw, and the I/F cable holder unit. Remove the
screws, and remove the scanner unit.
(1)-j
(1)-q
(1)-g 1
(1)-f
(1)-p
(1)-c (1)-d
(1)-i 4
1 2
Unit Parts Maintenance
(1) Scanner unit a Table glass {
b SPF glass { 5
c Lens {
d CCD {
e Reflector {
f Mirrors { 4
g Lamp {
h CL inverter PWB
i CCD unit
j Scanner motor
k Scanner home position 3
sensor 4
l Original cover SW 4
m Document detection light
receiving PWB
n Document detection light a. Table glass
emitting PWB
o Rails b. SPF glass
p Drive wire 1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
q Drive belt the table glass (C).
2 3
C B

c. Lens 4) Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screws and
remove the wire.
d. CCD
1) Remove the glass holder and the table glass.
2
2) Remove the dark box cover (A) and the lens cover (B). 3
5) While rotating the lamp unit, lift the lamp unit. Remove the har-
ness holder and the flat cable. Remove the lamp unit.
3) Clean the lens (A) and CCD (B).
B 3
e. Reflector
f. Mirrors
1) Remove the glass holder and the table glass. 6) Clean the mirrors.
2) Shift the lamp unit and the mirror unit.
3) Clean the reflector and No. 2 and 3 mirrors.
g. Lamp
h. CL inverter PWB
1) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
2) Remove the lamp unit.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp.

4) Remove the CL inverter PWB. k. Scanner home position sensor
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner home posi-
tion sensor.
i. CCD unit
1) Remove the dark box. Disconnect the connector and remove
the CCD unit.
l. Original cover SW
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document cover
SW.
j. Scanner motor
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner motor.
m. Document detection light receiving PWB

1) Remove the operation panel base plate.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the document detection
light receiving PWB.

n. Document detection light emitting PWB p. Drive wire
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear. q. Drive belt
2) Remove the screws, and remove the light emitting unit. * Install the drive wire in the sequence shown in the figure below.
Wind the drive wire 10 turns around the winding pulley.
The 9th turn must be fixed with a screw.
7
6
2
4 5
1
3
3) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB 10 9 8 1

4 6
5 1 8 9 10
2
1
3
o. Rails

4. Maintenance
A. Optical Section
When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the main
power source (the power switch inside the front cover) and confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.
If the copy lamp unit is manually moved with the main power ON, the trouble code "F6-30" may occur.
If the trouble code "F6-30" is not canceled by turning OFF/ON the main power, refer to the Service Manual (FAX self diagnostics and the trou-
ble codes).
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
parts
1 Mirror/Lens/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { {
Reflector/CCD parts
2 Table glass/ { { { { { { { { { { { { {
SPF glass
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails Specified positions
5 Drive belt/
Drive wire
2 4
1
4
5
1

[D] MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
MX3500N
Service Manual
CN1
PSFMA// 2 1 PSFMA//
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
DRIVER PSFMB// 3 3 PSFMB//
MAIN PWB PSFMA/
INT24V1
1
6
4
5
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/ 4 6 PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
CN9
INT24V2 3
AC PWB B3P-PH-K-S
CN17 P SM18P R
/CLUM2 8 16 /CLUM2 16
P-GND 9 15 P-GND 15
/CLUM1 6 14 /CLUM1 14
P-GND 7 13 P-GND 13
24V3 14 12 24V3 12
PCU PWB /CPUC2 15 11 /CPUC2 11
24V3 12 10 24V3 10
/CPUC1 13 9 /CPUC1 9
24V3 10 8 24V3 8
15 24V3 15 CN26 /CPFC 11 7 /CPFC 7
31 /MPGS 31 5 /MPGS
30 /MPFS 30 4 /MPFS
3 FG-OUT
14 24V3 14 7
CPFM_LD 2 5 CPFM_LD 5 5V
28 /MPUC 28 6 /MPUC 4 6
/CPFM_D 1 4 /CPFM_D CPFM_LD
13 24V3 13 5
/CPFM_CK 4 3 /CPFM_CK 3 /CPFM_D
P QR/P4 32PIN S 3 24V3 2 4 /CPFM_CK
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B B32B-PHDSS-B 1 INT24V2 1 2 P-GND
6
5
3
4
2
1
1 INT24V2
B7P-PH-K-S
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
DF11-6DP-SP1 1 24V3 2
2 /MPUC 1
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha P SM2P R
8 24V3 1 1 24V3 1
CN3(2/2) 7 /MPFS 2 2 /MPFS 2
HPDET 7 6 HPDET 3 1
2
HPDET
D-GND
PFM
D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5
2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
3 24V3 6 5 24V3 1
1 5VLED7 5
2 D-GND 4
MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
R
2
1
MPUC
SM2P
3
2
1
/MPGS
24V3
1
3
5
2
4
6
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
MPFD
P
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP2
1 4 CPFM
5 MPFS
RIGHT MPFD
DOOR I/F 3
PWB 2 TH_D/HUD_M
MPED
MTOP1
MPGS MPWD MTOP2
MPLD
CN3(1/2) PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H

MPLD 16 12 MPLD 3 6 MPLD 4 1 MPLD
MPLD2 13 14 MPLD2 1 5 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 4 5VLED12 6 3 5VLED12
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 3 5VN 7 3 5VN

MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND
MTOP2 22 8 MTOP2 7 1 MTOP2

2 D-GND
5VLED13 24 7 5VLED13 8 3 5VLED13
MTOP1 25 6 MTOP1 9 1 MTOP1

2 D-GND
5VLED9 27 5 5VLED9 10 3 5VLED9
5VN 28 4 5VN 11 1 5VN

HUD_M 29 3 HUD_M 12 2 HUD_M
TH_M 31 1 TH_M 14 4 TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX3500N MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D 1

Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Paper feed section drive
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
MPDS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
PFM Transport motor Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive
between the resist roller and the right door section.
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature/humidity.

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
5 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8.
Transports paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8.
2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and A. Manual paper feed section
separates the top paper, which is fed to the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed.. ON/OFF control of (2)
the pickup roller and the paper feed roller is made by the manual (2)-i
paper feed clutch. Paper is transported to the resist roller by the (2)-e
(2)-g
manual paper transport roller. (2)-b
(2)-a
(2)-h (2)-c
(2)-d (2)-f
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1)

(1) Manual a Temperature/humidity sensors
paper feed b Manual paper feed tray pull-out
tray unit position detector 1
c Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2
d Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
e Manual feed paper length
detector
(2) Manual a Paper pickup roller {
paper feed b Paper feed roller {
unit c Separation roller {
d Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
e Transport roller 12 (Drive)
f Manual feed paper entry
detection
g Torque limiter
h Manual feed paper empty
detection
i Paper pickup solenoid

(1) Manual paper feed tray unit 4) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
1) Open the right door unit.
5) Remove the MF harness cover and disconnect the connector.

2) Remove the screws, and remove the connector cover.
1
Remove the screws, then remove the ADU inner cover.
6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual

paper feed tray unit.
3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl.
Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever.
3
1
2
a. Temperature/humidity sensors
b. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1
c. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2
3 d. Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
4
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
5
2) Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.

3) Disengage the pawl. Lift the MF tray upper and the MF tray 2, 4) Manual feed paper length detector
and disconnect the connector.
(2) Manual paper feed unit

4) Temperature/humidity sensor (A), manual paper feed tray pull-
out position detector 1 (B), manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2 (C) 2) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
unit.
A
5) Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
a. Paper pickup roller

b. Paper feed roller
1) Remove the MF pickup cover.
e. Manual feed paper length detector

1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the MF tray 2.
3) Remove the MF tray 2 lower.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).

c. Separation roller e. Transport roller 12 (Drive)
1) Remove the MF pickup cover. 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller. 2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3) Open the MF lower maintenance cover, remove the separation 3) Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
roller.
1
2
f. Manual feed paper entry detection

d. Manual paper feed gate solenoid 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit. 2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring. 3) Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
Remove the transport roller 7 (Idle) unit.
3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl. Remove 1

the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor mounting

plate.

g. Torque limiter i. Paper pickup solenoid
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit. 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring. 2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3) Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive). 3) Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
4) Remove the parts, and remove the MF drive plate. 4) Remove the MF drive plate.
5) Remove the MF front plate.
6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.
2
5) Remove the E-ring. Remove the shaft and remove the torque
limiter.
7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.

1
3
2
h. Manual feed paper empty detection

1) Remove the manual paper feed unit. 8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
2) Remove the MF pickup cover and the MFADU paper guide.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor mounting

plate.

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
parts
1 Paper pickup Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-40, [15]-33)
roller parts
2 Paper feed { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-41, [15]-29)
roller
3 Separation { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [9]-4, [14]-37)
roller
4 Torque limiter
5 Transport { { { { { { { { { { { {
rollers
4
2 1
3

MX3500N
CN6 S DF1B-24p P PHNR-12-H+

CPFD1 1 1 CPFD1 1 BU12P-TR-P-H
CLUD1 3 3 CLUD1 3 7 D-GND 6 1 D-GND
CPED1 5 5 CPED1 5 8 CPFD1 5 2 CPFD1
DSW_R 7 7 DSW_R 7 9 5VN 4 3 5VN
CSPD1 9 9 CSPD1 9 1 D-GND 12
1 D-GND
CPWD11 21 11 CPWD11 11 2 CLUD1 11
2 CLUD1
CPWD12 23 13 CPWD12 13 3 5VNPD 10
3 5VNPD
CSS1 11 15 CSS1 15 4 D-GND 9
CSS2 10 16 CSS2 16 5 CPED1 8 1 D-GND
CSS11 13 17 CSS11 17 6 5VNPD 7 2 CPED1
CSS12 15 19 CSS12 19 10 D-GND 3 3 5VNPD
CSS13 17 21 CSS13 21 11 DSW_R 2
1 D-GND
PCU
CSS14 19 23 CSS14 23 12 5VN 1
2 DSW_R
CSS21 12 18 CSS21 18
3 5VN
CSS22 14 20 CSS22 20
CSS23 16 22 CSS23 22 1 D-GND
CSS24 18 24 CSS24 24 2 CSPD1
CPFD2 2 2 CPFD2 2 3 5VNPD
CLUD2 4 4 CLUD2 4
CPED2 6 6 CPED2 6
CSPD2 8 10 CSPD2 10
CPWD21 22 12 CPWD21 12
CPWD22 24 14 CPWD22 14
B24B-PHDSS-B
2 D-GND
CN4 3 CSS11
D-GND 3 4 CSS12
5VN 20 5 CSS13
D-GND 1 6 CSS14
5VNPD 18 S6P-PH-K-S
D-GND 2
AC PWB
5VNPD 19
PCU PWB
D-GND 4
5VN 21
2 D-GND
CN9
D-GND 9
CN17
3 CSS21
5VNPD 26
24V3
24V3
24V3
4 CSS22
/CPFC
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/CPUC1
/CPUC2
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
INT24V2
D-GND 10
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
B3P-PH-K-S
/CPFM_CK
D-GND 11 5 CSS23
B32B-PHDSS-B
5VNPD 27 6 CSS24
5
4
1
2
7
6
9
8
3
11
10
13
12
15
14
5VNPD 28 S6P-PH-K-S
5VNPD 29
5VNPD 30
D-GND 12
D-GND 13
D-GND 14
[E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
SM18P
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/CPUC1
/CPUC2
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
11
R
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11
2
CPED1
6
CPED2
3
1
7
5
10
9
CLUD1
CLUD2
2
1
8
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
24V3
24V3
24V3
/CPFC
CSS21
/CPUC2
CSS23
CSS11
/CPUC1
CSS13
1
2
1
2
1
2
P-GND
P-GND
/CLUM1
/CLUM2
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H
4
B2P-PH-K-S
B2P-PH-K-S
CSS2
CSS1
MX3500N TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E 1

1
2
4
5
6
7
3
CPFD1
DRIVER MAIN PWB

CSS24
CSS22
CPFD2
CSS12
CSS14
Service Manual
5V
DSW_R
P-GND
FG-OUT
INT24V2
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CK
B7P-PH-K-S
CSPD1
CSPD2
CPUC2
CPFM CPUC1
PHNR-9-H+
BU09P-TR-P-H 1 D-GND
7 D-GND 3 2 CPFD2
8 CPFD2 2 3 5VN
D-GND 7 9 5VN 1
5VN 24 1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND
CPFC
D-GND 5 2 CLUD2 8 2 CLUD2

5VNPD 22 3 5VNPD 7 3 5VNPD
D-GND 6 4 D-GND 6
5VNPD 23 5 CPED2 5 1 D-GND
D-GND 8 6 5VNPD 4 2 CPED2
5VNPD 25 3 5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS-B
CLUM2
1 D-GND
2 CSPD2
3 5VNPD
CLUM1
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 1 upper limit detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 2 upper limit detection
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Drives the paper tray lift plate.
CPED 1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 1 paper empty detection
CPED 2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls the paper feed tray section paper transport roller ON/OFF.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Tray 1 paper pass detection
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Tray2 paper pass detection
CPFM Paper feed motor Paper feed section drive
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS1 Tray 1 install detection Detects the install of the tray 1
CSS2 Tray 2 install detection Detects the install of the tray 2
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transfer cover open/close detection Detects opening of the tray 1, 2 transport cover.

1 Paper feed roller (No.1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation
roller to prevent double feed.
7 Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller
(No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
9 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports the paper fed from the paper tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
10 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports the paper fed from the paper feed tray 1, 2 or 3, 4 to the transport
roller 8.
11 Rotation plate Lifts up the paper to keep the paper feed position.

A. Preliminary operation before paper feed
When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
ON.
The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
the specified position.
B. Paper feed operation

When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON and the pickup roller is rotated in the paper pickup
timing to feed paper.
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to
prevent against double feed of paper.
C. Remaining paper detection

Remaining paper detection is performed according to four
stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper,
and the result is displayed.
D. Remaining paper detection method

The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the
number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the
time the paper feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the
upper detection sensor comes ON.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection
Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

3. Disassembly and assembly (1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1 and 2.
1) Remove the right cabinet front.
A. Tray paper feed section
2) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
(1)-e (1)-k
2
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-c (1)-j 1
(1)-f
3) Remove the right lower door unit.
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-c (1)-j
(1)
(2)-b
(2)-a
4) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.

(1) Tray paper a Paper pickup roller {
feed unit 1, 2 b Paper feed roller {
c Separation roller {
d Tray 1 transport cover
detection
e Transport roller 7 (Drive) {
f Transport roller 4 (Drive) { 5) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
g Torque limiter
h Tray 1, 2 paper presence
detection
i Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection
j Tray 1, 2 transport detection
k Transport roller 5 (Drive) {
(2) Others a Tray 1, 2 paper remaining
quantity detection
b Tray 1, 2 install detection

a. Paper pickup roller d. Tray 1 transport cover opening detection
b. Paper feed roller 1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
2) Remove the paper guide.
e. Transport roller 7 (Drive)

1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
3) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b). 2) Remove the screws.
3) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit, and remove the belt.
1
c. Separation roller
2) Remove the paper guide.
3) Remove the separation roller.
4) Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts. Remove the

transport roller 7 (drive).
3
2

f. Transport roller 4 (Drive) 4) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the sep-
1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 2. aration shift. Remove the torque limiter.
2) Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts. Remove the
transport roller 4 (drive). 3 2
1 4
3 1
2
h. Tray 1, 2 paper presence detection

i. Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection sensor
g. Torque limiter 1) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
1) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2. 2) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
2) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit. 3) Remove the paper feed vertical transport PG unit, then remove
the belt. (Tray paper feed unit 2 only)
2
2
1
4) Remove the paper feed upper PG supporting plate.
3) Remove the pressure release spring, and remove the paper
feed lower PG supporting plate. Remove the separation pres-
sure spring, and the separation pressure release plate.
1
2
5) Remove the tray 1, 2 paper presence detector (a) and the tray
1, 2 upper limit detector (b).

j. Tray 1, 2 transport detection 2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1) Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2. 1, 2 paper remaining quantity detector.
2) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3) Remove the paper feed vertical transport PG unit. (Tray paper
feed unit 2 only)
5) Remove the tray 1, 2 transport detector.
b. Tray 1, 2 presence detection

2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1, 2 presence detector.
k. Transport roller 5 (Drive)
2) Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit.
4) Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 5 (Drive).
Remove the E-ring and the bearing holder from the transport
roller 5 (Drive).
4
3
3) Release the pawl, and remove the tray 1, 2 detection unit.

Remove the spring from the tray 1, 2 presence detector.
1
2
(2) Others
a. Tray 1, 2 paper remaining quantity detection

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to the
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Paper pickup Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-40,
roller parts [15]-33)
2 Paper feed roller { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [10]-41,
[15]-29)
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { { (P/G No.: [9]-4,
[14]-37)
4 Torque limiter
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3

[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX3500N
Service Manual
RRM
CN1
PSFMA// 1 2 PSFMA//
INT24V1 2 5 INT24V1
PFM PSFMB// 3 3 PSFMB// DRIVER
PSFMA/ 4 1 PSFMA/
1 INT24V1 5 6 INT24V1
MAIN PWB
PSFMB/ 6 4 PSFMB/
2 B6B-PH-K-S
PPD2
3
PHNR-6-H
BU06P-TR-P-H CN17
PPD1 D-GND
PPD1
1
2
6
5
D-GND
PPD1
1
2
29
31
D-GND
PPD1
5VNPD 3 4 5VNPD 3
5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 4
PPD2 2 2 PPD2 5 32 PPD2
23 5VNPD
4 27 D-GND
3
2
6
5
1
26 REGS_R
24 REGS_R_LED#
PCU
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
17 /PCSS
16 24V3 PWB
B32B-PHDSS-B
DF11-6DP-SP1

PFM Transport motor Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive between the resist
roller and the right door section.
PPD1 Resist front detection Detects paper before the resist roller.
PPD2 Resist detection Detects paper after the resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Controls the drive and ON/OFF of the resist roller.

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transport paper to the transfer section./ Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relationship
between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to supply transport power of the transport roller to paper.
3 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transport the paper to the resist roller.
MX3500N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 1

2. Operational descriptions 7) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the resist
roller unit.
A. Paper transport section
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each trans-
port roller is made by the paper transport clutch. The resist roller
controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer
image. The resist roller is driven by the transport motor. The rela-
tive positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by
the ON timing of the transport motor.

A. Paper transport section
(1)-e (1)-c
(1) a. Resist front detection

1) Remove the resist roller unit.
(1)-d
2) Remove the sensor holder.
(1)-b
(1)-a
Unit Parts Maintenance b. Transport roller 8 (Drive)

(1) Resist roller a Resist front detection 1) Remove the resist roller unit.
unit b Transport roller 8 (Drive) { 2) Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts, and remove
c Resist roller (Drive) { the transport roller 8 (Drive).
d Resist detection
e Resist roller (Idle) {
(1) Resist roller unit

2
1) Remove the developing unit (K).
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
3) Remove the primary transfer unit. 1 3
5) Remove the rear cabinet.
6) Remove the ADU connection drive.
3
4

c. Resist roller (Drive) e. Resist roller (Idle)
1) Remove the resist roller unit. 1) Remove the resist roller unit.
2) Remove the spring and the E-ring. Remove the JAM release 2) Remove the PS stay.
handle. 3) Clean the resist roller (idle).
3) Remove the parts. Slide the resist roller (Drive) to the front
side. Remove the parallel pin, the PS gear, and the E-ring from
the resist roller (Drive).
5
2
d. Resist detection
2) Remove the PS stay, then remove the resist detector.
1
2

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
No. Part name
are described.)
1 PS follower roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { { {

[G] DUPLEX SECTION
MX3500N
Service Manual
CN2
S DF1B-26p P
ADMHA// 2
21 ADMHA// 21 1 ADMHA//
ADMHA/ 1
DRIVER ADMHB/ 4
22 ADMHA/ 22 4 ADMHA/
23 ADMHB/ 23 6 ADMHB/
SUB ADMHB// 3
24 ADMHB// 24 3 ADMHB//
INT24V1 5
PWB INT24V1 6
25 INT24V1 25 2 INT24V1
26 INT24V1 26 5 INT24V1
N.C 7
B7B-PH-K-S
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H ADUHM
2 24V3 1
1 /ADUGS 2
CN2
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3
5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 4 3 5VLED1
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
4
D-GND 5 5 D-GND 2 1 POD3
5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 1 2 D-GND
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H 3 5VLED4 5
POD3
TFD3
ADUGS
DSW_ADU 7 3 DSW_ADU 2 1 DSW_ADU
ADULM
5VLED2 9 4 5VLED2 1 3 5VLED2 3
APPD1 10 1 APPD1 3 1 APPD1

D-GND 11 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND APPD1
5VLED5 12 3 5VLED5 1 3 5VLED5 DSW_ADU
S16B-PHDSS-B PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
CN3(1/2)
APPD2 4 1 APPD2
D-GND 5 2 D-GND
5VLED10 6 3 5VLED10 1
S32B-PHDSS-B
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB 9 24V3 9 CN26 2
25 /ADUGS 25 7 /ADUGS
CN1 FG 32 F-GND 32 FG
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 9 5VN
SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 10 SIN3
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 13 SELIN1
APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 1 APPD1
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 2 APPD2 APPD2
APPD3 9
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 14 POD3
MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 11 MPFD
5VNPD 16 10 5VNPD 10 32 5VNPD
MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 16 MPWD CN5
TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 17 TH_M ADMLA// 8 1 ADMLA//
HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 19 HUD_M INT24V1 11 2 INT24V1
S16B-PHDSS-B 18 P-GND DRIVER ADMLB// 9 3 ADMLB//
15 24V3 15 ADMLA/ 7 4 ADMLA/
31 /MPGS 31 5 /MPGS MAIN PWB INT24V1 12 5 INT24V1
30 /MPFS 30 4 /MPFS ADMLB/ 10 6 ADMLB/
14 24V3 14 B12B-PH-K-S
28 /MPUC 28 6 /MPUC
13 24V3 13
P QR/P4 32PINS 3 24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
6 5 3 4 2 1
PCU PWB
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
DF11-6DP-SP1
MX3500N DUPLEX SECTION G 1

ADULM ADU motor lower Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
TFD3 Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the right tray paper exit full.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUHM ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 13.

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Used to discharge paper.
4 ADU gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to
the right tray.
5 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. Transports paper to the
duplex (ADU) section.

A. Duplex section A. Duplex section
Paper is transported from the fusing section and sent to the
transport roller 13 driven by the ADU motor upper and to the
(1)-e (2)-b
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper passes under the gate guide. (1)-d
After the specified time from detection of paper lead edge by (1)-c (1)-n
POD1, the paper exit drive motor is rotated forward, and after the (1)-f
specified time, it is rotated reversely. (1)-l
(1)-a
At that time, paper passes the right side of the ADU gate guide
by its own weight. (1)-m
(1)-g
The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor (1)-h
lower, and paper is transported to the duplex paper feed position. (2)-a
(1)-i
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and trans- (1)-b
ported to the inside of the machine again. (1)
(1)-j
(1)-k

(1) Right door a RD I/F PWB
unit b Manual paper feed clutch
c Discharge brush
d Detects the right tray paper exit
full.
e Right tray paper exit detection
f ADU transport open/close
detection
g ADU transport path detection 1
h Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) {
i Transport roller 10 (Drive) {
j Transport roller 11 (Drive) {
k ADU transport path detection 2
l Transport roller 13 (Drive) {
m ADU gate
n ADU gate solenoid
(2) Others a ADU motor lower

(1) Right door unit b. Manual paper feed clutch
1) Open the right door unit. 1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
2) Remove the right door unit.
4) Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the con-

nector, then remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.
a. RD I/F PWB
2) Remove the connector cover, and remove the ADU inner
cover.
5) Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
c. Discharge brush
d. Detects the right tray paper exit full.
e. Right tray paper exit detection
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB. 1) Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the connector cover.

3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl. 7) Remove each sensor mounting plate. Right tray paper exit full
detection (A), right tray paper exit detection (B)
3
1
3
4
f. ADU transport open/close detection
5
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the reverse PG unit.
4) Remove the right paper exit upper cabinet unit, and disconnect
the connector.
g. ADU transport path detection 1

5) Remove the right paper exit PG upper.
2) Remove the ADU inner cover.
3) Remove the reverse PG unit.
6) Check the discharge brush.

4) ADU transport path detection. i. Transport roller 10 (Drive)
j. Transport roller 11 (Drive)
4) Remove the ADU cabinet F.
5) Open the ADU open/close door.
h. Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)

3) Remove the ADU cabinet F. Remove the ADU cabinet R.
6) Remove each parts, and remove the trasnport roller 10 (drive)

(A) and the trasnport roller 11 (drive) (B).
1
A
2
1
4) Remove the right paper exit upper cabinet unit. B

5) Remove each parts, then remove the transport roller 2 (drive).
k. ADU transport path detection 2
2) Remove the right door transport PG, the follower pressure
plate, and the ADU waste toner cover.
2

3) Remove the ADU trasnsport path detector 2. n. ADU gate solenoid
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU gate solenoid
unit.
Remove the ADU gate solenoid unit.
3
l. Transport roller 13 (Drive)
3) Remove the ADU cabinet R. 1
5) Remove the right paper exit upper cabinet unit.
6) Remove the reverse PG unit. (2) Others
7) Remove each parts, and remove the trasnport roller 13 (drive).
a. ADU motor lower
2) Open the control box.
m. ADU gate
5) Remove the E-ring, and the ADU gate.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.
1

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to the
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Transport rollers Mechanism { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Discharge brush parts
3 Gears When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions).

CN10
1 24V3 1 1 24V3
2 /LSUSS_B 2 4 /LSUSS_B PCU PWB
P SM2P R B5P-PH-K-S
10
11 9
12
10
CN9 CN21
10
CN6 B7B-PH-K-S D-GND 1 1 D-GND

5VN 1 4 5VN 3.3V 2 2 3.3V
n BD 3
9
2 n BD
13
5VN 4 4 5VN
D-GND 4 1 D-GND 24V1 5 5 24V1
B4P-PH-K-R 6 LSUTH1 P-GND 6 6 P-GND
5 D-GND S6B-XA B6B-XA
LSUTH1 3
Service Manual
10
CN5 CN13
D-GND 4
INT5V 1 1 INT5V
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
LSUSS
D-GND 3 3 D-GND
n SCK_LSU 4 4 n SCK_LSU
n TRANS_DATA 5 5 n TRANS_DATA
CN4 B34B-PHDSS-B
D-GND 6 6 D-GND
D-GND 10 27 D-GND
LSUASIC_RST 7 7 LSUASIC_RST
INT5V 9 25 INT5V
n RSV_DAT 8 8 n RSV_DAT
MX3500N LSU SECTION H 1

/SH_Y 8 29 /SH_Y
MOTHER PWB
n TRANS_RST 9 9 n TRANS_RST
/ENB_Y 7 31 /ENB_Y
JOBEND_INT 10 10 JOBEND_INT
DT_Y- 6 30 DT_Y-
LSUTH1 11 11 LSUTH1
DT_Y+ 5 28 DT_Y+
LSUTH2 12 12 LSUTH2
8
D-GND 4 26 D-GND
VSYNC_K_N 13 13 VSYNC_K_N
Vref_Y 3 32 Vref_Y
VSYNC_K_P 14 14 VSYNC_K_P
LDCHK_Y 2 34 LDCHK_Y
VSYNC_C_P 15 15 VSYNC_C_P
n LDERR_Y 1 33 n LDERR_Y
VSYNC_C_N 16 16 VSYNC_C_N
6 7
VSYNC_M_N 17 17 VSYNC_M_N
14
D-GND 10 15 D-GND
VSYNC_M_P 18 18 VSYNC_M_P
INT5V 9 13 INT5V
VSYNC_Y_P 19 19 VSYNC_Y_P
/SH_M 8 17 /SH_M
VSYNC_Y_N 20 20 VSYNC_Y_N
/ENB_M 7 19 /ENB_M
S20B-PHDSS-B B20B-PHDSS-B
PGM
DT_M- 6 18 DT_M-
DT_M+ 5 16 DT_M+ CN3 CN14
CH0_N 1 1 CH0_N
4
D-GND 4 14 D-GND
CH0_P 2 2 CH0_P
Vref_M 3 20 Vref_M
D-GND 3 3 D-GND
5
LDCHK_M 2 22 LDCHK_M
D-GND 4 4 D-GND
n LDERR_M 1 21 n LDERR_M
CH1_N 5 5 CH1_N
CH1_P 6 6 CH1_P
LSU PWB
D-GND 10 3 D-GND
CH2_N 7 7 CH2_N
3
INT5V 9 1 INT5V
CH2_P 8 8 CH2_P
/SH_C 8 5 /SH_C
D-GND 9 9 D-GND
/ENB_C 7 7 /ENB_C
LSU FAN
D-GND 10 10 D-GND
DT_C- 6 6 DT_C-
CLCLK_N 11 11 CLCLK_N
DT_C+ 5 4 DT_C+
CLCLK_P 12 12 CLCLK_P
D-GND 4 2 D-GND
2
CH3_N 13 13 CH3_N
Vref_C 3 8 Vref_C
CH3_P 14 14 CH3_P
LDCHK_C 2 10 LDCHK_C
D-GND 15 15 D-GND
n LDERR_C 1 9 n LDERR_C
D-GND 16 16 D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_N 22 17 HSYNC_LSU_N
CN1 B12B-PHDSS-B
HSYNC_LSU_P 21 18 HSYNC_LSU_P
D-GND 10 3 D-GND
D-GND 19 19 D-GND
1
INT5V 9 1 INT5V
D-GND 20 20 D-GND
/SH_K 8 5 /SH_K
ECLK_LSU_P 18 21 ECLK_LSU_P
/ENB_K 7 7 /ENB_K
ECLK_LSU_N 17 22 ECLK_LSU_N
DT_K- 6 6 DT_K-
DT_K+ 5 S22B-PHDSS-B B22B-PHDSS-B
4 DT_K+
D-GND 4 2 D-GND
Vref_K 3 8 Vref_K
SK_K 2 10 SK_K
[H] LSU SECTION
n LDERR_K 1 9 n LDERR_K
11 LSUTH2
12 D-GND
CN4 B3P-PH-K-S
1 24V1
2 n FANRDY
3 P-GND
CN8 B6P-PH-K-S
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK
/LOCK 3 4 /LOCK
/START 4 3 /START
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
24V1 6 1 24V1
MX3500N
PGM Polygon motor Laser beam is reflected at the constant speed rotation.
LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid Opens or closes the LSU shutter.
LSUFAN LSU cooling fan motor Cools the polygon motor.

1 LD PWB (K) Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
2 LD PWB (C)
3 LD PWB (M)
4 LD PWB (Y)
5 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams and focus.
6 f lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scan speed on the OPC drum is even in both ends and at the center.
7 f lens 2
8 Reflection mirror Secures the path for laser beams.
9 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams, and focus on the OPC drum.
10 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images according to laser beams.
11 Convergence lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
12 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
13 LSU CNT PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and image data.
14 LSU therminstor Measures the temperature in LSU.
2. Operational descriptions (Scan system)
A. LSU section
(1) Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the mother
are converted into laser beams to be radiated onto the OPC drum
surface. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system including
optical elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mir-
ror which assures the optical path and the scan system which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path.
(2) Composition
(Primary system)
(On the polygon mirror)
Model Number of
mirror Rotating speed Bearing Remark
surfaces
MX-3500N 7 surfaces 33813 rpm AIR
MX-3501N (color/35 sheets)
MX-4500N 45556 rpm
MX-4501N (Monochorome/
45 sheets)
(3) Outline of LSU specifications
Effective scan width: 307mm

Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 65m, Sub scan = 60 to 75m
Laser power: Max. 0.302mW
LD wavelength: 770 to 795nm

3. Disassembly and assembly 4) Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen
the screw (B).
A. LSU section Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screws.
(2)-a
(1)
(1)-c
(1)-b
(1)-a
B
A
(2)-b
5) Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.
2
(1) LSU a Dust-proof glass {
b LSU cooling fan motor
c Polygon motor
(2) Others a LSU shutter solenoid
b Cleaning base
(1) LSU 3 A
1) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. (Refer
to Left Cabinet Rear Lower and Left Cabinet in External Outfit 1
Section.) B
2) Remove the waste toner box.
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU.
3) Remove the LSU left plate PA.

a. Dust-proof glass
1) Remove the waste toner box.
1
2) Remove the LSU cleaning stick from the front cover.

3) Insert the LSU cleaning rod and slide it back and forth a few 4) Remove the screws, then lift up the LSU CNT PWB cover F
times to clean the dust-proof glass. (A).
Remove the screws, and lift up the polygon motor unit (B).
1
A
2
b. LSU cooling fan motor
1) Remove the LSU.
2) Remove the screws, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R. 5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the poly-
gon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the moving section of the poly-
gon mirror and the mirror surface.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the LSU
cooling fan motor.
(2) Others
a. LSU shutter solenoid 1
1) Remove the LSU.
2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the LSU
shutter solenoid unit.
* When installing, the shutter U-groove is engaged with the
shutter lever arm shaft section (A).
c. Polygon motor
1) Remove the LSU.
2) Remove the screws, and the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the fan
cover.

3) Remove the screws, and remove the LSU shutter solenoid 1. b. Cleaning base
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin with the shutter 1) Remove the waste toner box.
lever arm. 2) Remove the LSU cleaning stick from the front cover.
3) Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod.
4. Maintenance
A. LSU section
Remark/Refer to
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Dust proof glass Mechanical parts { { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base (P/G No.: [2]-35)

[i]
MC
CN1
MX3500N
INT24V2 7
P-GND 6
1TC_YMC 4
GB
1TC_K 3
MC_YMC 2
1
HV_REM 1
MC
1TC_CL 5
1st TC PWB
MC-CMY B7P-PH-K-S
GB
CN2
1TC_CL 3
PCU PWB
1
HV_REM 7
MC
MC_YMC 6
1TC_K 5
1TC_YMC 4
P-GND 2
GB
INT24V2 1
GB-Y
2
B7P-PH-K-S
1
GB-M CN1 CN26
MC PWB
INT24V2 6 20 P-GND
MC
GB-C P-GND 5 21 /HV_DATA#
/HV_DATA# 4 22 /HV_CLK#
GB-K /HV_CLK# 3 23 /HV_LD1#
/HV_LD1# 2 24 HV_REM#
GB
MC-K HV_REM# 1 B32B-PHDSS-B
B6P-PH-K-S
B3P-PH-K-S
1 INT24V2
AC
PWB
CN9
DL_Y PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H CN15

DL_Y# 3 10 DL_Y# 1 22 DL_Y#
53254-0310
2
DL_M PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
DL_M# 3 10 DL_M# 1 2 DL_M#

53254-0310
DL_Y
DL_C PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
DL_C# 3 10 DL_C# 1 21 DL_C#
53254-0310
DL_BK PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H

DL_BK# 3 10 DL_BK# 1 1 DL_BK#
53254-0310 B40B-PADSS-B
DL_M
DL_C
MX3500N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i 1

Service Manual
DL_BK
CN1
DMCL
DMCLB// 1 3 DMCLB//
INT24V1 2 6 INT24V1
DMCLB/ 3 4 DMCLB/
DMCLA/ 4 1 DMCLA/
INT24V1 5 5 INT24V1
DMCLA// 6 2 DMCLA//

R SM6 P
DMBK
6 INT24V1 6 8 DMBKA//
5 INT24V1 5 7 DMBKA/
DRIVER
SUB PWB
4 DMBKB// 4 10 DMBKB/
3 DMBKB/ 3 9 DMBKB//
2 DMBKA/ 2 11 INT24V1
1 DMBKA// 1 12 INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
DMCL Drum motor (Color) Color photoconductor drive
DMBK Drum motor (Black) Black photoconductor drive
DL Discharge lamp (Y, M, C, BK) Light is passed to the discharge lens to drive the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charge (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.

1 OPC drum (Y, M, C, K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface.
A. OPC drum section As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. drum surface.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. cleaning blade.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
charger. the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid High voltage unit
Main corona unit
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt-
age applied to the screen grid.
2) LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
Aluminum
OPC drum layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
LED lights
When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where LED lights are not
radiated.

4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged. 3. Disassembly and assembly
Aluminum Aluminum A. Process drum unit
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL (1)-c
(1)-d
Lens (1)-a (1)-e
(1)-c (1)
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface. (1)-b
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
(2)-b
(2)-a

(1) Drum unit a Drum
b Charging unit
c Side seal F, R
d Toner reception seal
e Cleaner blade
(2) Others a Waste toner drive motor
b Waste toner full detection switch
(1) Each color drum unit

1) Open the front cover.

2) Remove the waste toner bottle unit. 6) Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with both hands to
remove.
a. OPC drum
3) Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that lock is released,
1) Remove each drum unit from the machine.
and open the drum positioning unit.
2) Remove the screws and remove the DR fixing shaft AS.
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer 3) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear
unit is released manually, turn on the power again after com- side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front sec-
pletion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes tion.
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
4) Loosen the fixing screw of the developing unit on the left side
of each color drum unit.
b. MC charger unit
2) Remove the OPC drum.
5) Remove the developing unit with both hands. 3) Remove the screws, and remove the MC cover.

4) Disengage the lock pawl with a screwdriver, and remove the e. Cleaner blade
MC cleaner shaft. 1) Remove each drum unit from the machine.
3) Remove the MC charger unit.
4) Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
2 5) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.
1
3 6) Remove the toner mixing sheet from the cleaner blade.
5) Release the pawl, and remove the process cover. Remove the
MC charger unit.
* Tighten the screws according to the marks 1, 2, and 3.
c. Side seal F, R
d. Toner reception seal
3
3) Remove the MC charger unit.
1
4) Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
(2) Others
a. Waste toner drive motor
1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External
Outfit Section.)
* When attaching the side seal F/R and the toner reception
seal, arrange so that they are in the ranges specified in the 2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
figure below. toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
A A from the waste toner drive unit.
Reference line Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm A
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm

b. Waste toner full detection switch 3) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External box empty lever.
Outfit Section.) Disengage the connector and the pawl, and remove the waste
2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste toner full detection switch.
toner drive unit.
4. Maintenance
supply/ 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800 the Parts Guide.
Mechanical When K K K K K K K K K K K K Block/Item No.
No. Part name
parts calling (Only the
100 200 300 400 500 600 replacement parts
Color supply
K K K K K K are described.)
1 Drum (BK) Monochrome
2 Cleaner blade (BK) supply (P/G No.: [23]-14)
3 Charging unit (BK) (P/G No.: [23]-2)
4 Drum (C) Color supply
5 Cleaner blade (C) (P/G No.: [23]-14)
6 Charging unit (C) (P/G No.: [23]-2)
7 Side seal F/R (BK) Mechanical
8 Toner reception parts
seal (BK)
9 Side seal F/R(C)
10 Toner reception
seal (C)
11 Waste toner box

7,9
8,10
1,4 2,5
7,9
3,6
11

7 : Feb. 15 2007
[J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION

MX3500N
Service Manual

A. Toner supply section
TNM_Y
CRUM(Y)
TNM_M
CRUM(M) TNM_C
CRUM(C)
CRUM(K)
1
TNM_K
1
PCSFM
1 INT24V1 1 3 INT24V1 1
2 LOCK 2 2 LOCK 2
3 /PCSFM 3 1 /PCSFM 3
CN12 CN5 CRUM(BLACK)

6 INT24V2 5V_CRUM 1 1 5V_CRUM 1 2 5V_CRUM
4 P-GND CRM_K_DT# 3 2 CRM_K_DT# 2 4 CRM_K_DT#
10 /DVM_K_CK CRM_K_CK# 5 3 CRM_K_CK# 3 3 CRM_K_CK#
12 /DVM_K_D D-GND 7 4 D-GND 4 1 D-GND
R SM2P P 2 DVM_K_LD
CRUM(CYAN)
1 TNM_K_1 1 15 TNM_K_1 2 5V_CRUM
2 TNM_K_2 2 17 TNM_K_2 CRM_C_DT# 2 5 CRM_C_DT# 5 4 CRM_C_DT#
R SM2P P 19 TNM_C_1 CRM_C_CK# 4 6 CRM_C_CK# 6 3 CRM_C_CK#
1 TNM_C_1 1 21 TNM_C_2 1 D-GND
2 TNM_C_2 2 22 TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2 CRUM(MAGENTA)
R SM2P P 24
2 5V_CRUM
1 TNM_M_1 1 18 TNM_Y_1
CRM_M_DT# 9 7 CRM_M_DT# 7 4 CRM_M_DT#
2 TNM_M_2 2 20 TNM_Y_2
CRM_M_CK# 10 8 CRM_M_CK# 8 3 CRM_M_CK#
R SM2P P 5 INT24V2
1 D-GND
1 TNM_Y_1 1 3 P-GND
2 TNM_Y_2 2 9 /DVM_CL_CK CRUM(YELLOW)
11 /DVM_CL_D 2 5V_CRUM
1 DVM_CL_LD CRM_Y_DT# 6 9 CRM_Y_DT# 9 4 CRM_Y_DT#
16 24V3 CRM_Y_CK# 8 10 CRM_Y_CK# 10 3 CRM_Y_CK#
14 /1TURC B10B-PHDSS-B P SM10P R 1 D-GND
32 DHPD_K
30 5VLED
5
4
3
1
2
6
5
4
3
1
2
6
31 DHPD_CL
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
29 5VLED
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
23 D-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN21
1 INT24V1 1 26 INT24V1 DF11-6DP-SP1 DF11-6DP-SP1
2 /PCSFM 2 24 /PCSFM
B26B-PHDSS-B
CN13
23 LOCK
B32B-PHDSS-B PCU PWB
MX3500N TONER SUPPLY SECTION J 1

TNM Toner motor (Y, M, C, K) Toner supply motor to the develping unit
CRUM CRUM (Y,M,C,K) Data memory for the toner cartridge

1 Toner transport pipe Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
When the toner cartridge is inserted to the machine, the lock pawl
is disengaged and the supply shutter is opened.
The transport pipe shutter is opened and closed by the shaft which
is linked with the developing lever.
The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and

closed when the open/close lever on the unit hits the block on the
machine.

3. Maintenance
150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name
calling (Only the
100 200 300 400 500 600
K K K K K K
are described.)
1 Toner cartridge Monochrome/ User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
(BK/C/M/Y) Color supply
1(C/M/Y) 1(BK)

CN12
INT24V2 1 6 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
/DVM_K_CK 4 10 /DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D 5 12 /DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD 6 2 DVM_K_LD
5V 7
B7P-PH-K-S
INT24V2 1 5 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK 4 9 /DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D 5 11 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_K
DVM_CL_LD 6 1 DVM_CL_LD
5V 7
B7P-PH-K-S
CN1 CN9
INT24V2 6 1 INT24V2 CN26
BS-K (SPRING) BS-K
P-GND 5 B3P-PH-K-S AC PWB 20 P-GND
BS-C (SPRING) BS-C /HV_DATA# 4 21 /HV_DATA#
DVM_CL
Service Manual
/HV_CLK# 3 22 /HV_CLK#
BS-M (SPRING) BS-M MC PWB /HV_LD1# 2 23 /HV_LD1#
BS-Y (SPRING) BS-Y HV_REM# 1 24 HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S B32B-PHDSS-B
BS_K
MX3500N DEVELOPING SECTION K 1

DVTYP_K
BS_C
PCU PWB
DVTYP_C
BS_M
2
TCS_K
DVTYP_M
BS_Y
2
TCS_C
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H CN15
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 5 24V3
DVTYP_Y
BLACK TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K
1
2
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
DEVELOPING SECTION

DVTYP_K 3 2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K
TCS_M
DVSET_K 2 3 DVSET_K 3 2 DVSET_K 9 17 DVSET_K
3
5VN 1 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN
S4P-PH-K-S C QR/P8-8P P
1
2
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 25 24V3
CYAN TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C
TCS_Y
TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
DVTYP_C 3 2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C
1
DVSET_C 2 3 DVSET_C 3 2 DVSET_C 9 37 DVSET_C
5VN 1 44 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 6 24V3
MAGENTA TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
DVTYP_M 3 2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M
1
DVSET_M 2 3 DVSET_M 3 2 DVSET_M 9 18 DVSET_M
5VN 1 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
24V3 2 5 24V3 5 8 24V3 3 26 24V2
YELLOW TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
MX3500N

DVTYP_Y 3 2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y 2 3 DVSET_Y 3 2 DVSET_Y 9 38 DVSET_Y
5VN 1 4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN
[K]
S4P-PH-K-S C QR/P8-8P P B40B-PADSS-B
DVM_CL Developer motor (color) Color developing unit drive
DVM_K Developer motor (black) Black developing unit drive
BS Developer bias (Y, M, C, K) Developer bias
TCS Toner density sensor (Y, M, C, K) Controls the toner density in the developing unit.
DVTYP DV initial detection PWB (Y, M, C, K) Detection of a new developing unit (machine exclusive for CRU)

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Stirring roller Stirring developer
3 Toner filter (Y, M, C, K) Prevents dispersing of toner.

Electrostatic latent images generated on the OPC drum by the A. Developing section
laser (writing) units (laser image ray) are converted into visible
images by toner.
(1) (1)-d
(1)-b
(1)-e
(1)-g (1)-f
(1)-c
(1)-a

(1) Developing a Developer
unit b DV seal
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and trans- c DV side seal F
ported by the mixing roller. d DV side seal R
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively e DV initial PWB
charged due to mechanical friction. f Density sensor
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC g Toner filter
component) is applied to the developing roller.
(1) Developing unit
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing 1) Open the front cabinet.
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
2) Remove the waste toner bottle unit.

3) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). a. Developer
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. 1) Remove the developing unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the 2) Remove two fixing screws of the DV cover.
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. (1 posi-
tion for each color)
3) Hold the sections A, and remove the DV cover in the arrow

1
direction (B).
B A
5) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.

A
4) Take out the old developer, and insert the new developer.

b. DV seal
c. DV side seal F
d. DV side seal R
1) Remove the old DV seal (A), DV side seal F (B), R (C).
2) Attach the new DV seal, DV side seal F (B), DV side seal R (C)
* When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop
to the reference position.
developer on the drive section (marked with {).
* (Note for cleaning the developing unit) 0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air
blower with much developer in the developing unit, static
electricity may be accumulated in the unit. In order to pre-
A
vent against this, note the following items.
* If metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
face when transporting developer or removing foreign material
from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet 0 0.3mm
roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling the mag- 0 0.5mm
net roller.
* Remove developer in the developer unit as well as developer
attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
* (When cleaning the developing unit with an air blower [duct]) B 0 0.3mm C 0 0.3mm
Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from the unit
as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller rear side cored
bar as shown in the figure below and clean the unit with an air
e. DV initial PWB
blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire with a crocodile clip
connector in order to prevent against damage on the cored bar.) f. Density sensor
1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide. Disconnect the
Magnet roller
connector, and remove the DV initial PWB (A).
rear side cored bar Remove the screw, and diisconnect the connector, and
remove the density sensor (B).
* When supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.

g. Toner filter
1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Remove the toner filter cover and the toner filter.
4. Maintenance
150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name
calling (Only the
100 200 300 400 500 600
K K K K K K
are described.)
1 Developer (BK) Monochrome
2 DV seal (BK) supply (P/G No.: [22]-42)
3 DV side seal F (P/G No.: [22]-26)
(BK)
4 DV side seal R (P/G No.: [22]-15)
(BK)
6 Developer (C) Color supply
7 Developer (M)
8 Developer (Y)
9 DV seal (C) (P/G No.: [22]-42)
10 DV side seal F/R (P/G No.: [22]-26,
(C) [22]-15)
12 Bias terminal/ Mechanical parts
connector
12
4,10
12
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
3,10 12

[L] TRANSFER SECTION
MX3500N
Service Manual
CN1
INT24V2 7
1st TC PWB P-GND 6
1TC_YMC 4
1TC-CMY 1TC_K 3
MC_YMC 2
1TC-K HV_REM 1
1TC_CL 5
B7P-PH-K-S
CN2
1TC_CL 3
HV_REM 7
MC_YMC 6
1TC_K 5
1TC_YMC 4
P-GND 2
INT24V2 1
MC PWB B7P-PH-K-S
CN1
INT24V2 6 CN26
P-GND 5 20 P-GND
/HV_DATA# 4 21 /HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK# 3 22 /HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1# 2 23 /HV_LD1#
HV_REM# 1 24 HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S B32B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1TUD_CL 1 2 1TUD_CL 2 11 1TUD_CL
D-GND 2 3 D-GND 1 13 GND
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H B30B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1TUD_K 1 2 1TUD_K 2 12 1TUD_K
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H B30B-PHDSS-B
CN12
5 6 1TURC
1
2
24V3
/1TURC
2
1
16
14
24V3
/1TURC
8 PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H B32B-PHDSS-B
14
DVMK PCU PWB
CN34
2 INT24V2
4 P-GND
1TUD_CL BTM 6 /TC_CLK#
1TC_CMY 8
10
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
12 /HV_REM#
1TC_K B40B-PADSS-B
3 1TUD_K CN9
1 1TNFD
2 D-GND
17 WTNM_1
2 1 18 WTNM_2
9 B30B-PHDSS-B
7
CN1
BTM_B// 1
3 10 2TC INT24V1 2
3
6
BTM_B//
INT24V1
BTM_B/ 3 4 BTM_B/
BTM_A/ 4 1 BTM_A/
4 INT24V1
BTM_A//
5
6
5
2
INT24V1
BTM_A//
B6B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
12 SUB PWB
CN1
2-TC INT24V2 1
P-GND 2
1TNFD 11 CLR /TC_CLK# 4

/TC_DATA# 3
13 2nd TC PWB
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
5
6
B6P-PH-K-S
1TNFD 1 R SM18PIN P
D-GND 2 3 1TNFD 3
WTNM P
1
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
R
1
4
5
D-GND
WTNM_1
4
5
2 WTNM_2 2 6 WTNM_2 6
Signal name Name Functions and operations

1TC_CMY Color trasnfer high voltage signal
1TC_K B/W transfer high voltage signal
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Waste toner full detection
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Color transfer roller position detection signal
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK detection B/W transfer roller position detection signal
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Transfer roller separation control clutch
2TC Secondary transfer high voltage signal
DVMK Developer drive motor (K) Drives the primary transfer belt separation operations. (Used together with the B/W developing drive
roller)
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner.
BTM Belt motor Drives the transfer belt.
MX3500N TRANSFER SECTION L 1

No. Name Functions and operations
1 Primary transfer blade Cleans residual toner on the primary transfer belt.
2 Primary transfer belt Transfers toner on the OPC drum to form toner images on the belt.
3 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
4 Transfer drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
5 Transfer follower roller Transfer belt follower drive
6 Tension roller Applies a tension to the transfer belt.
7 Belt CL brush Cleans the back surface of the transfer belt.
8 Y auxiliary roller Retaining the belt position by separation of the Y transfer roller
9 Registration backup roller Retaining the belt position in the process control and the registration section.
10 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
11 Secondary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
12 Secondary belt transfer roller Drives the transfer belt.
13 Secondary belt tension roller Applies a proper tension to the transfer belt.
14 Primary transfer CL roller Cleans the primary transfer belt.
2. Operational descriptions B. Primary transfer roller separation mechanism

and content
A. Outline The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all sepa-
In this section, a high voltage is applied to transfer images to the ration, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
primary transfer belt and toner images on the primary transfer belt When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) is turned ON, the trans-
are transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt. fer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.
All pressure contact
All separation
Only black pressure contact
The arm performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only
black contact.
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
All pressure contact ON OFF
All separation OFF ON
Only black contact OFF OFF
The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.

3. Disassembly and assembly 2) Open the right door unit.
A. Primary transfer
(2)-a
(1)-a
(1)-c (2)-b
(1)-p
(1)-b
(1)-i
(1)-d
(1) (1)-q
(1)-p
3) Loosen the blue screw.
(1)-l (1)-e
(1)-k
(1)-h (1)-m
(1)-f
(1)-n
(1)-g (1)-r
(1)-j
4) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

(1)-e the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
tioning unit.
* Failure to complete this step may damage the primary trans-
(1) Primary a Primary transfer belt
fer belt.
transfer unit b Primary transfer CL roller
c Primary transfer blade
d Packing Mylar B
e Primary transfer roller A
f Primary transfer conduction
collar
g Primary transfer roller
bearing
h Y auxiliary roller {
i Belt drive gear
j Transfer drive roller {
k Transfer follower roller {
l Tension roller {
m Belt CL brush
n Registration backup roller
o Cleaner seal
p Cleaner seal R
q Transfer toner reception seal
5) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer
r Waste toner screw
unit.
(2) Others a Transfer belt separation CL
detection
b Transfer belt separation BK
detection
(1) Primary transfer unit

1) Open the front cover.
(NOTE)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the trans-
fer roller to return it to the home position.

a. Primary transfer belt 5) Turn the belt twice (in the direction described in step 3).
* Do not replace the belt, blade, and primary transfer CL roller sep- * There may be some traces of strontium titanate left on the
arately. When any of the three parts needs to be replaced, surface of the belt.
replace the other two parts as well. 6) Turn the primary transfer unit over.
* When replacing the belt, be sure to apply stearic acid (UKOG- * Turn the unit over by lifting the cleaner unit side.
0312FCZZ) and strontium titanate according to the instructions. * Keep the primary transfer unit in a horizontal position (not to
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit. lower the cleaner unit side) until it is installed on the
2) Remove the cleaner unit. machine.
3) Remove the transfer guide plate left unit. * Be sure not to allow strontium titanate to spread inside the
4) Remove the parts. cleaner unit.
[Bottom surface]
Cleaner unit
CL roller side side
[Figure 1]
5) Fold the CL section of the transfer frame and remove the pri- [Figure 3]
mary transfer belt.
Apply strontium titanate all the way

beyond the boss.
[Figure 2]
2
12
34
5A
B
-6
[Number of times of application]

7
Apply uniformly.
* When installing, set the lot number inside the belt to the front
side.
[Precautions for installation]
Turn the unit over by lifting the
When replacing the belt, make sure not to scratch or fold it. cleaner unit side.
Do not touch the surface of the belt with bare hands.
(Applying the start powder)
1) Install the primary transfer unit, laying it on the top surface.
* Make sure that the pressure on the CL roller has been
released.
2) Apply the side seal powder (stearic acid) uniformly on the sur- Cleaner
CL roller side
face of the belt (Figure 1). unit side
* Apply the side seal powder uniformly on half of the surfaces
on both sides of the belt. [Never lower the cleaner unit side.]
* Rub the belt with a cloth bag containing the side seal powder
so that the powder will be applied onto the belt.
3) Turn the belt a 1/4 turn. (For the direction of the turn, see Fig-
ure 3.)
4) Apply strontium titanate uniformly on the surface of the belt.
* Apply strontium titanate evenly on the surface of the belt.
* Apply 20 times (5 times transversally x 4 times longitudinally,
see Figure 2).

b. Primary transfer CL roller 3) Remove the TC blade supporting plate and the transfer guide
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. plate, and remove the primary transfer blade.
2) Remove the transfer guide plate left unit. * When installing, apply stearic acid onto the primary transfer
blade (A).
* Check the cleaner seal (B) and cleaner seal R (C). If any of
them is laid on the primary blade, replace it. (See step o.
Cleaner seal and step p. Cleaner seal R respectively.)
A
3) Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer CL roller
installation plate unit.
Remove the waste toner drive motor from the waste toner
C
drive unit.
4) Remove the packing Mylar.

* When attaching the packing Mylar, fit the edge of the blade
plate section and the bottom of the triangle hole in the pack-
ing Mylar, and arrange so that attachment is within the stan-
dard shown in the figure below.
R
* After assembling, check to confirm that it is not set at the
pressure release position.
0 0.2mm
0 0.5mm
* After attachment, apply side seal powder to the specified

range. At that time, check to insure that the powder is
applied securely to the edge section (A) of the primary trans-
c. Primary transfer blade fer blade.
d. Packing Mylar
A
1) Remove the primary transfer unit, and put it upside down.
2) Remove the cleaner unit.

e. Primary transfer roller k. Transfer follower roller
f. Primary transfer conduction collar l. Tension roller
g. Primary transfer roller bearing 1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
h. Y auxiliary roller 2) Remove the cleaner unit.
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit. 3) Remove the primary transfer belt.
2) Remove the cleaner unit. 4) Clean the trasnfer follower roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
3) Remove the primary transfer belt.
4) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
primary transfer roller bearing (A) and the primary transfer B
roller (B) and the primary transfer conduction collar (C).
Remove the Y auxiliary roller (D).
A
A B
A 1 B
A B
B
B
3 A
D
2
C
C m. Roller cleaning brush
C 1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
D C 2) Remove the cleaner unit.
4) Check the roller CL brush.
i. Belt drive gear

1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
3) Remove the screws, and remove the belt drive gear.
n. Registration backup roller

j. Transfer drive roller 4) Check the registration backup roller.
2) Remove the cleaner unit. A
1
3) Remove the primary transfer belt. A
4) Clean the transfer drive roller. A
A
3
C
2
B
B
B
B

o. Cleaner seal r. Waste toner screw
p. Cleaner seal R 1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
1) Remove the primary trasnfer unit. 2) Remove the cleaner unit.
2) Remove the cleaner unit. 3) Remove the screw, the cleaner cover, and the waste toner
shutter.
3) Remove the cleaner seal (A) and the cleaner seal R (B).
4) Remove the gear on the rear side. Remove the resin ring, the
bearing, and the transfer waste toner pipe. Remove the waste
toner screw.
* When attaching the seals, position the seals within the spec-
ified ranges, referring to the reference lines as indicated
below.
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm 0 - 0.3mm

* Attach the C-J mixing sheet to the attachment reference.
q. Transfer toner reception seal
3) Remove the transfer toner reception seal.
0 0.5mm
(2) Others
a. Transfer belt separation CL detection
b. Transfer belt separation BK detection
* When attaching the transfer toner reception seal, position 2) Remove the developing unit.
the seal within the specified ranges, referring to the refer- 3) Remove the drum unit.
ence lines as indicated below.
4) Check the transfer belt separation CL detection (A) and the
Reference line
transfer belt separation BK detection (B).
0 - 0.3mm
B
Reference line A
0 - 0.3mm

B. Secondary transfer a. Secondary trasnfer drive idle gear
b. Secondary belt follower roller
(1)-f
c. Secondary transfer belt
(1)-c
1) Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary drive plate.
(1)-a Remove each parts, and remove the secondary transfer drive
(1)-e and the idle gear (A).
(1)-g 3
(1)-d (1)
2
(1)-b

(1) Secondary a Secondary transfer drive idle 1
transfer unit gear
b Secondary belt follower roller { A
c Secondary transfer belt
d Secondary transfer roller
e Secondary trasnfer belt drive { 3) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame.
roller
f Belt CL brush
g Secondary belt tension roller {
(1) Secondary transfer unit

4) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary follower roller.

2
2) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
3 2
5) Remove the secondary transfer belt.

1

d. Secondary transfer roller
3) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the second-
ary transfer roller.
e. Secondary belt drive roller

3) Remove each parts, then remove the secondary belt drive
roller.
f. Belt CL brush
3) Remove the secondary belt drive roller.
4) Remove the roller CL brush.
g. Secondary belt tension roller

2) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary belt tension
roller.
1
2

5 : Jul. 15 2006
4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Primary transfer belt Mechanical (P/G No.: [25]-3)
2 Primary transfer parts { { { { { { (P/G No.: [26]-9)
5
blade
5 4 Belt drive gear (P/G No.: [26]-13)
6 Transfer drive roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
7 Transfer follower { { { { { { { { { { { {
roller
8 Tension roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
9 Belt CL brush
10 Y auxiliary roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
11 Resist backup roller
belt
roller
drive roller
tension roller
follower roller
drive idle gear
18 Primary transfer CL (P/G No.: [25]-56)
roller
19 Cleaner seal
20 Cleaner seal R
21 Transfer toner
reception seal
23 Packing Mylar (P/G No.: [24]-25)
1
18
3 20
8
7
10 4
23
17
5 21
11 12
19
9
2 14
2 6
2 13
2 15
16
22
18 8 9 11 3 21
14
15
13,17
16
4,6
7 10 2,5

[M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
MX3500N
Service ManualSENSOR SECTION
DF11-6DP-SP1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
1
5
6
2
3
4
CN17
24V3 16 15 24V3 15 2 /PCSS 2
/PCSS 17 14 /PCSS 14 1 24V3 1
R SM2P P
REGS_R_LED# 24 13 REGS_R_LED# 13 4 5VNPD

REGS_R 26 12 REGS_R 12 3 D-GND
REGS_R
D-GND 27 11 D-GND 11 2 REGS_R
PCU PWB
5VNPD 23 10 5VNPD 10 1 REGS_R_LED#

RESI SENSOR R PCSS
PCS_LED# 18 9 PCS_LED# 9 5 5VNPD
PCS_CL 19 8 PCS_CL 8 4 D-GND PCS_CL/K
PCS_K 21 7 PCS_K 7 3 PCS_K
D-GND 28 6 D-GND 6 2 PCS_CL
5 5VNPD 5 1 PCS_LED#
PROCON SENSOR
REGS_F_LED# 22 4 REGS_F_LED# 4 4 5VNPD REGS_F

REGS_F 20 3 REGS_F 3 3 D-GND
D-GND 25 2 D-GND 2 2 REGS_F
B32B-PHDSS-B 1 5VNPD 1 1 REGS_F_LED#
R SM18P P RESI SENSOR F

PCS_CL/K Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
REGS_F/R Registration sensor Detects the registration shift.
A. Process control sensor control
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color
(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
passed to the PCU.
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself.
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter
solenoid (PCSS).
B. Registration sensor control

The registration sensor is attached to the F side (REGS_F) and the
R side (REGS_R). When the shutter is opened, the registration
image formed on the transfer belt is scanned by the sensor and the
information is passed to the PCU.
MX3500N PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION M 1

3. Disassembly and assembly a. Registration sensor
A. Process control sensor, registration sensor b. Process control sensor

section 1) Remove the process control sensor unit.
2) Push up the shutter operation plate, and clean the registration
sensor (A) and the process control sensor (B).
(1)-c
A
(1)-a
B
(1)-b A
(1)
(1)-a

c. Process control shutter solenoid
(1) Process a Registration sensor {
control b Process control sensor {
1) Remove the process control sensor unit.
sensor unit c Process control shutter 2) Remove the screw, slide the sensor mounting stay, and
solenoid remove the sensor mounting stay.
(1) Process control sensor unit

1) Remove the developing unit (K).
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
4) Remove the paper feed tray 1.
6) Remove the ADU connection drive.
8) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws. Release the
pawl, then remove the process control sensor.
3) Remove the screws. Disconnect the connector, and remove

the process control shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove in the shutter mounting plate (A).

4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
No. Part name
are described.)
18 Sensors (Process Mechanism { { { { { { { { { { { {
control resist parts
sensors)
18

DF11-6DP-SP1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CN13
MX3500N
6
5
1
2
3
4
FUMLD 26
1 D-GND 2 C-9 D-GND C-2 CN9 /FUMD 25
2 WEB_INL 1 C-10 WEB_INL C-1 9 WEB_INL 9 21 WEB_INL /FUMCK 27
P-GND 28
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H + INT24V1 1
WEB_M2out 8
1 D-GND 2 C-1 D-GND C-10 11 D-GND 11 24 D-GND WEB_M1out 6
2 TH_US_IN 1 C-2 TH_US_IN C-9 10 TH_US_IN 10 28 TH_US_IN B28B-PHDSS-B
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H +
PCU PWB
4 D-GND 1 B-8 D-GND B-2 CN34
3 WEB-END 2 B-7 WEB-END B-3 17 WEB-END 17 22 WEB-END INT24V1 1
1 D-GND 4 B-6 D-GND B-4 15 D-GND 15 26 D-GND D-GND 3
2 TH_LM_IN 3 B-5 TH_LM_IN B-5 14 TH_LM_IN 14 29 TH_LM_IN HLOUT_LM 11

BU04P-TR-P-H HLOUT_US 9
PHNR-4-H + 13 13 27 TH_E_IN 7
TH_E_IN HLOUT_UM
16 TH_UMCS_IN 16 30 TH_UMCS_IN /HL_PR 5
12 TH_UM_IN 12 25 TH_UM_IN B40B-PADSS-B
1 D-GND 2 B-4 D-GND B-6 R SM18PIN P B30B-PHDSS-B
2 TH_E_IN 1 B-3 TH_E_IN B-7
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H +
[N] FUSING SECTION
3 TH_UMCS_IN 2 B-9 TH_UMCS_IN B-1

2 D-GND 3 B-2 D-GND B-8
4 TH_UM_IN 1 B-1 TH_UM_IN B-9
BU04P-TR-P-H
PHNR-4-H +
CN3
CN4
A-3 N-HL(LOW) A-3 2 N-HL(LOW)
/HL_PR 1
A-6 L-HL(COM) A-6 3 N-HL(SUB)
HLOUT_UM 2
1 L-HL(COM)
HLOUT_US 4
B03P-VL-R
HLOUT_LM 3
CN2 D-GND 5
3 L-HL(COM) INT24V1 6
A-2 N-HL(SUB) A-2 2 L-HL(COM) B6P-PH-K-S
A-5 L-HL(COM) A-5 1 N-HL(MAIN)
B03P-VL-K HL PWB
A-1 L-HL(MAIN) A-1
A-4 L-HL(COM) A-4
1
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
26
25
24
23
22
21
HL_UM
HL_US
/FUMD
P-GND
FUMLD
/FUMCK
INT24V1
ADMHB/
ADMHA/
INT24V1
INT24V1
ADMHB//
ADMHA//
WEB_M2out
WEB_M1out
HL_LM
WEBM
1
2
3
4
5
19
18
26
25
24
23
22
21
MX3500N FUSING SECTION N 1

TH_US
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_US
5
4
3
2
1
P
2
1
5
Service Manual
/FUMD
P-GND
SM-12p
FUMLD
/FUMCK
INT24V1
WEB-END
TH _LM
WEB_M2out
WEB_M1out
5
4
3
2
1
R
2
1
TH_UM
6
6
5
4
2
1
2
/FUMD
P-GND
FUMLD
/FUMCK
INT24V1
TH_E
WEB-INL
HLOUT_LM
6
4
2
FUM
3
TH_UM Upper thermistor C (Non-contact) Controls the surface temperature of the upper heat roller.
TH_LM Lower thermistor Controls the surface temperature of the lower heat roller.
HLOUT_UM Upper thermostat main Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the upper heat roller]
HLOUT_LM Lower thermostat Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the lower heat roller]
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the upper heat roller.
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the sub roller.
TH_E Upper thermistor sub Controls the surface temperature of the sub roller.
HLOUT_US Upper thermostat sub Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the sub roller]
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the lower heat roller.
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit.
WEB-END Web roller end detection Detects presence of cleaning paper.
WEB-INL Web roller initial detection Detects installation of the web unit.
TH_US Upper thermistor sub Controls the surface temperature of the upper heat roller. (For supplementary use)
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.

1 Upper heat roller Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Upper separation pawl Paper which was not separated naturally from the upper heat roller is mechanically separated.
3 Lower heat roller Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
4 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the heat roller to the paper exit roller 1.
5 Web roller Cleans the upper heat roller.
6 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the lower heat roller.
7 Sub roller Helps temperature control of the upper heat roller.
2. Operational descriptions C. Fusing operation

Color toner of YMCK on paper is heated and pressed by the heat
A. Fusing unit drive rollers to be fused on paper.
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the At that time, color toner of YMCK is mixed to reproduce nearly
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat actual colors of document images.
roller gear.
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control
signal sent from the PCU.
PCU FUM
B. Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU
to the heater lamp drive circuit in the sub power PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the The heater lamp is provided in the upper and lower heat rollers and
heater lamp is cut off. the sub roller. It heats paper up and down.
This is because it is necessary to heat four layers of toner from
above and below and right and left to fuse it on paper.
The upper and lower heat rollers are of silicon rubber.
This is because of the following reasons:
1) To provide a greater nip quantity and a higher heating capacity
for paper.
2) The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without defor-
mation to fuse on paper.
3) An even pressure is applied to an uneven surface of multi-
layer toner.
The sub roller has the following functions.
1) Helps fusing and keeps the fusing temperature under special
conditions.
2) Remove and clean paper dust and toner from the upper heat
roller.

D. Fusing temperature control Unit Parts Maintenance
The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edges (1) Fusing unit k Sub roller
of the upper heat roller, and at the center of the lower heat roller. l Heater lamp lower main
m Upper heat roller
The heat roller temperature is detected by the temperature sensors
n Fusing gear
to control the heater lamp so that the temperature is maintained at
o Upper heat roller bearing
the specified level.
p Lower heat roller
The fusing temperature is switched according to the machine con-
q Lower heat roller bearing
dition and paper type selected.
r Upper separation pawl
* For the fusing temperature set value, refer to SIM43-1 in [7] SIM- s Lower separation pawl
ULATIONS. t Transport roller 9 (Drive) {
u Discharge brush
3. Disassembly and assembly (2) Web unit a Web roller bearing
b Pressure bearing
A. Fusing section c Pressure roller
d Upper web roller
e Web break rubber
(2)-a
(1) Fusing unit
(2)-b
(2)
(1)-j
2
(1)-n
(2)-b
(1)-o 1
(1)-r (1)-q
(1)-k (1)-p
(1)-j (1)
(1)-o
(1)-m 2) Remove the screws. Release the lock lever, and remove the
(1)-s fusing unit.
(1)-q
(2)-e
1
(2)-d 1
(2)
(2)-c
(1)-d
(1)-t
(1)-h
2
(1)-e (1)-u
(1)-b (1)-l
(1)-a 2
(1)
(1)-i
(1)-c (1)-f 3
* When installing, be sure to insert the fusing unit into the rail
(1)-g
on the main unit side securely.
(1) Fusing unit a Upper thermostat main
b Upper thermostat sub
c Upper thermistor side
d Upper thermistor sub
e Upper thermistor C (Non-
contact)
f Lower thermostat
g Lower thermistor
h Heater lamp upper main
i Heater lamp upper sub
j Sub roller bearing

a. Upper thermostat main e. Upper thermistor C (Non-contact)
1) Remove the fusing unit. 1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the screws and remove the fusing cover. Disconnect 2) Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
the connector, and remove the screws, the washer, and then connector, and remove the screws, then remove the upper
remove the upper thermostat main. thermistor C (Non-contact).
b. Upper thermostat sub f. Lower thermostat

2) Remove the web unit. 2) Remove the screw. Pull the fusing lower cover to the front side
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, the washer, and the rear side to remove the lower cover as shown in the
and then remove the upper thermostat sub. figure below.
3 1
2 2
* When installing, engage the pawl of the fusing lower cover

first, then assemble the fusing lower cover.
c. Upper thermistor side

d. Upper thermistor sub
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and
remove the upper thermistor side (A), and the upper thermistor
sub (B).
3) Remove the connector, the screw, and the washer. Remove

the lower thermostat.
A
B

g. Lower thermistor i. Heater lamp upper sub
2) Remove the fusing lower cover. 2) Remove the fusing cover F.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lower thermistor. 3) Remove the web unit.
4) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the spring.
h. Heater lamp upper main

1) Remove the fusing unit. 5) Remove the sub roller unit.
2) Release the pressure release lever. Remove the screws and
remove the fusing cover F.
2
1
3) Disconnect the connector.

2
6) Remove the screws, and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
heater lamp upper sub.
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.
2
R
1
4) Remove the lamp holder, and remove the heater lamp upper
main.
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that F
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side. 1

j. Sub roller bearing m. Upper heat roller
k. Sub roller n. Fusing gear
1) Remove the fusing unit. o. Upper heat roller bearing
2) Remove the fusing cover F. 1) Remove the fusing unit.
3) Remove the web unit. 2) Remove the web unit.
4) Remove the sub roller unit. 3) Remove the fusing cover F.
5) Remove the heater lamp upper sub. 4) Remove the fusing cover R.
6) Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller bearing, and 5) Remove the heater lamp upper main.
the sub roller. 6) Remove the screws, and remove the rear upper PG unit.
l. Heater lamp lower main

1) Remove the fusing unit. 1
2) Remove the fusing lower cover. 1
3) Remove the fusing upper cover F.
4) Release the pressure release lever. Remove the screws and
remove the fusing cover R.
7) Remove the screws, and open the fusing unit.

1
2
5) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove

the lamp holder.
8) Remove the upper heat roller unit.

* Hold the gear and the bearing section. Never touch the heat
roller surface.
6) Remove the lower heater lamp lower main.

* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.

9) Remove the roller stopper (A). Remove the fusing gear (C), r. Upper separation pawl
and the upper heat roller bearing (D) from the upper heat roller 1) Remove the fusing unit.
(B).
2) Remove the web unit.
3) Remove the screw. Remove the upper separation pawl mount-
ing plate, and remove the upper separation pawl.
A
D C
D
A
p. Lower heat roller

q. Lower heat roller bearing
3) Remove the fusing cover F.
4) Remove the fusing cover R.
5) Remove the heater lamp lower main.
6) Remove the rear upper PG unit.
7) Open the fusing unit.
8) Open the fusing rear lower PG. Remove the lower heat roller s. Lower separation pawl
unit.
* Hold the bearing section, and never touch the heat roller
surface.
3) Remove the fusing lower cover.
4) Open the fusing rear PG completely, and slide it to the front
side to remove.
1 2
9) Remove the roller stopper (A). Remove the upper heat roller
5) Remove the lower separation pawl.
bearing (C) from the upper heat roller (B).
A
C
C
A

t. Transport roller 9 (Drive) (2) Web roller
2) Remove the fusing upper cover F. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the web unit.
3) Remove the fusing upper cover R. * When installing, engage the web unit with the pawl (A) of the
4) Remove the web unit. fusing paper entry cover.
5) Remove the rear upper PG unit.
6) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing. Remove the
screw, and remove the fusing rear roller earth plate. Remove
the E-ring, and remove the bearing. Remove the transport
roller 9 (drive).
1 a. Web roller bearing

3
b. Pressure bearing
c. Pressure roller
2 d. Upper web roller
e. Web break rubber
u. Discharge brush
3) Remove the screw, and remove the web roller bearing (A).
Remove the winding side (B) of the web roller. Remove the
3) Remove the fusing lower cover. web brake collar (C).
4) Open the fusing rear PG completely, and slide it to the front * When installing, arrange so that the one-notch side (D) of
side to remove. Remove the discharge brush. the upper web roller is on the front side.
C
1
B
* When attaching the discharge brush, fit the press edge of D

the lower frame supporting plate and the contract edge.
0 + 0.5mm
0 + 0.5mm 2mm + 1mm

5 : Jul. 15 2006, 6 : Oct. 15 2006
4) Remove the web spring and the pressure roller bearing (A). 5) Remove the upper web roller (A). Remove the web brake col-
Remove the pressure roller (B). Remove the web tension shaft lar (B), and the web break rubber (C) from the upper web
(C). roller.
* When installing, arrange so that the one-notch side (D) of
the upper web roller is on the front side.
C
F
C
A
B
* When installing, place the upper web roller (C) between the
R
pressure roller (A) and the web shaft (B) as shown below.
B A
C
C
A
A
B B
4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Monochrome
Block/Item No.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name (Only the
replacement
parts
parts are
described.)
1 Upper heat roller Mechanical (P/G No.: [31]-42)
2 Lower heat roller parts (P/G No.: [32]-13)
3 Fusing gear (P/G No.: [31]-40)
4 Upper heat roller (P/G No.: [31]-41)
bearing
5 Lower heat roller (P/G No.: [32]-11)
bearing
6 Sub roller
7 Sub roller bearing
8 Upper separation (P/G No.: [33]-23)
pawl
9 Lower separation (P/G No.: [32]-43)
pawl (Japan only)
10 Upper thermistor side (P/G No.: [31]-24)
11 Upper thermistor sub (P/G No.: [31]-24)
12 Lower thermistor (P/G No.: [32]-37)
13 Upper thermistor C (P/G No.: [31]-15)
(Non-contact)
14 Gears Specified position
15 Paper guides { { { { { { { { { { { { {
5
17 Upper Supplied
Web roller by Web
18 Pressure unit
roller
19 Web roller
bearings
20 Pressure
roller
bearing
21 Web
break
rubber
22 Web unit
24 Discharge brush
6 25 Heat rollers Grease (JFE552)
(UKOG-
0235FCZZ)

6 : Oct. 15 2006
6
22 19
21
17 20
22
18 11
20 23
7 3
1 13 4
8 24
5
6
7
10
9
4 12
2
5
Apply 0.2g of grease to the
both ends (bearing sections)
of the upper and the
lower heat rollers evenly.
25 25
17
23
18
15
11 9
15
1
13 2
10
15
12

[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION
MX3500N
Service Manual
4
1
2
3
4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H P DF1B-26p S CN13
1 POFM_V 4 6 POFM_V 6 15 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 3 7 /POFM_CNT 7 17 /POFM_CNT
3 P-GND 2 11 P-GND 11 19 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 1 8 POFM_LD1 8 21 POFM_LD1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H 9 POFM_LD2 9 22 POFM_LD2
1 POFM_V 4
2 /POFM_CNT 3
3 P-GND 2
4 POFM_LD2 1
R SM6P P
5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 24 24V2
1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 7 /OSM_XB
2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 9 /OSM_XA
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 11 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 13 /OSM_A
5VNPD 3
TFD2 2 13 TFD2 13 10 TFD2
D-GND 1
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 14 POD2 14 12 POD2
TFD2 HPOS D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
HOPS 2 15 HOPS 15 16 HOPS
D-GND 3
5VNPD 1
POD1 2 16 POD1 16 14 POD1
12 5VNPD 12 18 5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
OSM
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POFM_R
1 POMB/ 6
R
12
SM-12p
POMB/
P
12
CN6
4 POMB/
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 6 INT24V1
POD2 POM POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 1 POMA/

POMB// 3 9 POMB// 9 3 POMB//
INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8 5 INT24V1 DRIVER
POMA// 1 7 POMA// 7 2 POMA// MAIN
6 FUMA/ 6 7 FUMA/ PWB
5 FUMB/ 5 10 FUMB/
4 INT24V1 4 12 INT24V1
3 INT24V1 3 11 INT24V1
POFM_F 2 FUMA// 2 8 FUMA//
1 FUMB// 1 9 FUMB//
B12B-PH-K-S
POD1

HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Offsets the paper.
POD1 Fusing after detection After fusing, paper exit from fusing section is detected.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray. / Paper is transported to the
duplex (ADU) section.
MX3500N PAPER EXIT SECTION O 1

2. Operational descriptions a. Exit paper full detection sensor
b. Shifter home position detection sensor
A. Paper exit section
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the trans-
port roller 13 which is driven by the paper exit drive motor and to
the paper exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
When paper is discharged to the right tray, it is passed to the
paper exit roller 1 and the paper exit drive motor is reversely
rotated, and paper is passed over the ADU reverse gate and dis-
charged to the right tray.

(1)-a (1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-g
(1)-e c. Paper exit detection sensor
(1) (1)-k
(1)-f d. After-fusing sensor
(1)-e
(1)-l 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Paper exit sensor (A), after-fusing sensor (B)
(1)-j
(1)-i
(1)-m
(1)-c
B
(1)-m
(1)-h
A
(1) Paper exit a Exit paper full detection sensor
unit b Shifter home position detection
sensor
c Paper exit detection sensor
d After-fusing sensor e. Paper exit cooling fan motor
e Paper exit cooling fan motor 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
f Discharge brush 2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
g Shifter motor
h Fusing web cleaning motor
i Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) {
j Fusing drive motor
k Paper exit drive motor
l ADU motor upper
m Paper exit filter
(1) Paper exit unit

1) Remove the screw, the upper cabinet right, and the right con-
necting cabinet.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and dis-
connect the connector.

3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit cooling g. Shifter motor
fan motor. 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
* When installing, be sure to note the fan direction. 2) Remove the harness from the saddle (A) and the saddle (B).
Remove the screw, and remove the earth terminal. Disconnect
the connectors and remove the snap band.
f. Discharge brush
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire, the shifter
earth plate. Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire, the
discharge earth plate. Remove the discharge brush.
1 2
3) Remove the shifter motor unit. Remove the gear.
* When installing, place the shifter earth plate is over the dis-
charge earth plate.
* Discharge brush attachment reference
When attaching the discharge brush, attach it along the
shifter PG.
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear.
4) Remove the screws, and remove the shifter motor.

h. Fusing web cleaning motor j. Fusing drive motor
1) Remove the paper exit unit. 1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct. 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then remove the fusing drive motor.
remove the fusing web cleaning motor.
k. Paper exit drive motor

l. ADU motor upper
i. Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and
1) Remove the paper exit unit. remove the paper exit drive motor (A), and the ADU motor
upper (B).
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3) Remove the slide motor unit.
4) Remove the parts. Remove the paper exit full detection sen-
sor. Slide the bearing, and remove the shifter unit.
A
3
4
5
2 B
1 B A
5) Remove the parts, and remove the paper exit roller 1 (drive).
* Be careful to the motor installing direction.

* When installing, attach the belt as shown below.

m. Paper exit filter
2) Open the filter holding sheet, and remove the paper exit filter.
1
1
2
2
4. Maintenance
Remark/Refer to the
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Transport rollers Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Discharge brush parts
3 Paper exit filter
1
2

[P] DRIVE SECTION
MX3500N 4) Remove Manual
Service the connectors.

A. Main drive section
(1)
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-h
(1)-a (1)-c
(1)-b (1)-e
(1)-g
(1)-i
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-g
Unit Parts
(1) Main drive unit a Toner motor
b Developer drive motor (K)
c Developing drive motor (CL)
d Drum motor (K)
e Drum motor (CL)
f Resist motor
g Phase detection PWB
5) Remove the screws, and remove the main drive unit.
h Separation clutch * Hold section A and remove.
i Belt motor
(1) Main drive unit

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the screws, and open the control box. A
3) Remove the flywheel. a. Toner motor

* Installing sequence: (1) C (2) KM (3) KM (Each color is 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
marked.) Outfit Section.)
* After installation, check to confirm that it is not in contact 2) Open the control box.
with the harness, etc.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the toner
motor.
M Y
BK C
KM
KM
MX3500N DRIVE SECTION P 1

b. Developer drive motor (K) f. Resist motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.) Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel. 3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the screw, and disconnect the harness holder con- 4) Remove the connctor and the screws, then remove the resist
nector. Remove the screws, and remove the developer drive motor.
motor (K).
c. Developing drive motor (CL) g. Phase detection PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.) Outfit Section.)
2) Open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel. 3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the devel- 4) Remove the screws, and remove the phase detection PWB.
oper drive motor (CL). Disconnect the connector.
* When installing, tighten the screws in section (A).
h. Separation clutch
Outfit Section.)
d. Drum motor (K) 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
e. Drum motor (CL)
4) Remove the gear, and remove the separation clutch. Then dis-
connect the connector.
Outfit Section.)
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
projection is engaged with the sub frame projection.
4) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the drum
motor (K) and the drum motor (CL).

i. Belt motor 4) Remove the connector and the screws. Release the pawl, then
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External remove the filter box unit.
Outfit Section.)
4) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the belt
motor.
5) Remove the connector and remove the paper feed drive unit.
B. Paper feed drive section
(1)
(1)-a
(1)-d
(1)-f (1)-b
(1)-c
(1)-e
a. Transport motor
(1)-c 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the trans-
Unit Parts port motor.
(1) Paper feed drive unit a Transport motor
b Paper feed motor
c Paper tray lift-up motor
d Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
f Tray vertical transport clutch
(1) Paper feed drive unit

Outfit Section.)
3) Remove the connector, the screws and the grounding terminal,
then remove the driver main PWB unit.

b. Paper feed motor d. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External 1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
Outfit Section.) 2) Remove the paper feed motor.
2) Open the control box. 3) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
3) Remove the driver main PWB unit. 4) Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to
4) Remove the filter box unit. detach the drive frame upper unit.
5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
feed motor.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch

unit.
c. Paper tray lift-up motor

Outfit Section.)
3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4) Remove the filter box unit.
5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
tray lift-up motor unit.
6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.

e. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) f. Tray vertical transport clutch
1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit. 1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2) Remove the paper feed motor. 2) Remove the paper feed motor.
3) Remove the paper feed drive unit. 3) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
4) Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to 4) Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to
detach the drive frame upper unit. detach the drive frame upper unit.
5) Remove the belt.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch

unit.
6) Remove the connector, then remove the tray vertical transfer

clutch unit.
6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
7) Remove the E-ring, then remove the tray vertical transfer

clutch.

2. Maintenance
A. Drive Section
Remark/Refer to the
Monochrome
Parts Guide.
supply/ When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
parts
1 Gears (Grease) Mechanical When checking, apply
parts to the necessary
positions).
2 Shaft earth When checking, apply
sections to the necessary
(Conduction positions (specified
grease) positions).
3 Belts
1
(FLOIL G313S)
1
(HANARL FL955R)

[Q] PWB SECTION
MX3500N (1) ControlManual
Service Box
a. BOOT ROM PWB
1. Disassembly and assembly b. PROGRAM ROM PWB
1) Remove the right rear cabinet.
A. PWB
2) Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
(3)-b
(3)-a
(3)-c (3)-d
(3)-f
(3)-e
(3)-j
(3)-h
(3)-i
(2)-a
(2)-c
* When placing the unit with the HDD upside, remove the
DIMM memory or insert a spacer in order to protect the
(3)-g DIMM memory from pressure.
* Insertion position and insertion procedure when removing
(1)-g
the DIMM memory.
(1)-e
(1)-f
(1)-d (1)-h
DIMM3
(1)-c
(1)-a DIMM2
(1)-b DIMM4
DIMM1
Unit Parts
(1) Control Box a BOOT ROM PWB
b PROGRAM ROM PWB
c MFP cht PWB
d HDD
e PCU Flash ROM PWB
f PCU PWB MX-3500N/4500N
g SCAN IN PWB DIMM1
h Mother PWB DIMM2 512MB
(2) Power supply unit a AC Power PWB DIMM3 512MB
b DC Power PWB DIMM4 256MB
(3) Others a SCN Flash ROM PWB
b DSPF memory PWB
c Scanner Control PWB
d HL PWB
e Driver Sub PWB
f Secondary transfer PWB
g Driver Main PWB
h Primary transfer PWB
i High Voltage MC PWB
j HVR PWB
MX3500N PWB SECTION Q 1

a) Press the section ( ) of the memory PWB with both c. MFP cnt PWB
hands. 1) Remove the right rear cabinet.
* When handling the memory PWB, do not touch the 2) Remove the BOOT ROM PWB and the PROGRAM ROM
pins. PWB.
* Insert temporally and straightly until it is in contact with 3) Remove the screws and then remove the MFP cnt PWB.
the contact.
* When inserting, be careful not to insert the memory

PWB obliquely to the connector. Do not press the d. HDD
memory PWB pins with one hand. 1) Remove the right rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
3) Remove the connector and screws then remove the HDD unit.
b) Press the section ( ) of the memory PWB with both

hands simultaneously until the right and the left buttons
are locked.
4) Remove the screws, and remove the angle from HDD.

* Since the HDD is weak in shock, avoid hitting the corner,
dropping, or other shocks.
3) Release the lock, and remove the BOOT ROM PWB (A) and
the PROGRAM ROM PWB (B).
2 A 1

e. PCU Flash ROM PWB g. SCAN IN PWB
1) Remove the screws, and remove the rear cabinet cover. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the
SCAN IN PWB.
1
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
h. Mother PWB
2) Remove the SCAN IN PWB.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the
mother PWB.
1
2
2
f. PCU PWB
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the PCU
PWB.
(2) Power supply unit

a. AC Power PWB
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
grounding wire. Remove the screw, and remove the AC cord
install plate.

3) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the AC 5) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the filter
power PWB. box unit.
6) Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the DC

power PWB.
b. DC Power PWB
2) Remove the AC cord install plate.
(3) Others
a. SCN Flash ROM PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
4) Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the AC

power PWB unit.
2
1

b. DSPF memory PWB d. HL PWB
c. Scanner Control PWB 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. 2) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the HL
PWB.
2) Remove the snap band. Remove the screws, and pull out the
scanner control PWB unit. Then remove the connector.
e. Driver Sub PWB

3) Remove the screw, and remove the DSPF memory PWB. 2) Remove the screws, and remove the driver sub PWB.
4) Remove the parts. Remove the screws, and remove the scan- f. Secondary transfer PWB
ner control PWB.
2) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the sec-
ondary transfer PWB.

g. Driver Main PWB 4) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire. Remove
1) Remove the rear cabinet. the screws and the connector, then remove the primary trans-
fer PWB unit.
2) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the driver
main PWB.
5) Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the MC

PWB.
h. Primary transfer PWB

3) Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the pri-
mary transfer PWB.
j. HVR PWB
3) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the HVR
PWB.
i. MC PWB
3) Remove the screws, then remove the fly wheel.
* Installing sequence: (1) C (2) KM (3) KM (Each color is
marked.)
* After installation, check to confirm that it is not in contact
with the harness, etc.
KM
KM

[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. Disassembly and assembly B. Fans

A. Filters
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(1)
Parts
(1) Controller cooling fan motor
(2) HDD cooling fan motor
Parts Maintenance
(3) Ozone fan motor
(1) Ozone filter PA
(4) Power supply cooling fan motor
(1) Ozone Filter
(1) Controller cooling fan motor
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, then remove the ozone filter
PA.
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the connector. Remove the screws, and remove the
MFP PWB shield upper. Remove the screws, and remove the
controller cooling fan motor.
* When installing, fit the arrow mark on the MFP PWB shield
and the arrow mark of the controller cooling fan motor.
3
1
MX3500N FAN AND FILTER SECTION R 1

(2) HDD cooling fan motor 4) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the ozone
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External fan motor from the filter box unit.
Outfit Section.)
(4) Power supply cooling fan

Outfit Section.)
3) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the HDD
cooling fan motor.
4) Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the power
supply cooling fan.
(3) Ozone fan motor

Outfit Section.)

2. Maintenance
A. Filters
Remark/Refer to
No. Part name
are described.)
1 Ozone filter PA Mechanical parts (P/G No.: [47]-40)

[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
MX3500N 3) Remove Manual
Service the screws, then remove the main switch unit.

A. Sensors, Switches
4) Remove the connector and the pawl, then remove the main
(4) switch.
* Take care of connecting the connectors when installing.
(2)
(1)
(3) 3
2
R
1
Parts
(1) Main Switch
F
(2) Dehumidifier Heater Switch
(3) Front Door Open/Close Switch
(4) Right Door Open/Close Switch
(1) Main Switch

1) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to Front Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the screws, and remove the frame cover.
MX3500N SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION S 1

(2) Dehumidifier Heater Switch (4) Right Door Open/Close Switch
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
Outfit Section.) 2) Open the control box.
2) Disconnect the connector. Release the pawl, and remove the 3) Open the right door unit.
dehumidifier heater switch.
5) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the right
2
3 door open/close switch cover unit.
* When installing, connect the connector as shown in the fig-

6) Remove the right door open/close switch.
ure.
(3) Front Door Open/Close Switch

1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External
Outfit Section.)
2) Remove the screws and then remove the front door open/
close switch unit.
Remove the connector and the screws and then remove the
front door open/close switch.
2
3
MX3500N SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION S 2

Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT XXXX
solder is about 220C, which BYSHARP
is about 40C higherCORPORATION
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black stored in a retrieval
during soldering work,system, orfile
clean and transmitted
the tip within
steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT 2007 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2007 February Printed in Japan

Service Manual: Digital Full Color Multifunctional System

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Service Manual: Digital Full Color Multifunctional System

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

TopPage

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION

[9] MAINTENANCE [K] DEVELOPING SECTION

2. Warning for servicing

MX3500N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX3500N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5) The open systems architecture (Sharp OSA) is supported

MX3500N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

4 10. Staple cartridge

4-hole (broad space)

19. Sharpdesk 21. Sharpdesk 22. Application

23. Facsimile expansion kit

FAX memory (8MB)

MX3500N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

STD: Standard provision, OP: Option

C. Combination of options list

MX3500N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 3

Void area Top: 4 mm or less

Form Standard: Double feeder tray + multi manual (4) Double-sided

Scan Copy mode

Model name MX-4500N/MX-4501N MX-3500N/MX-3501N

Model name MX-4500N/MX-4501N MX-3500N/MX-3501N

Multi max. number 999 sheets

Scan resolution 600 x 600dpi

Document Max. A3 (11 x 17)

Scanner Internet Fax Scanner Internet Fax

Function Content PCL6/5c PS (Option)

Function PCL5-c/6 PS PPD

B. Ambient conditions for transporting (Main

C. Operating environmental conditions (Supply)

D. Ambient conditions for transporting

E. Ambient storage conditions (Supply) (packed

F. Effective use period (Supply) (packed

1. Supply system table

B. European Subsidiary/Australia/New Zealand

MX3500N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

2. Maintenance parts list

MX3500N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 2

MX3500N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 3

MX3500N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 4

1. Identification of each section and functions

When a finisher (peripheral

MX3500N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1

When using the MX-3500/4500 Series

MX3500N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 2

No. Name Function/ Operation Note

MX3500N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 3

No. Name Function/ Operation Note

MX3500N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 4

No. Name Function/ Operation Note

MX3500N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 5

JOB QUEUE SETS / PROGRESS STATUS SPOOL SPOOL

COPY 020 / 001 COPYING  JOB QUEUE JOB QUEUE

0312345678 002 / 000 WAITING STOP/DELETE CALL

MX3500N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 6

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type NOTE

COPY 020 / 001 COPYING JOB QUEUE JOB QUEUE